PART A FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER

A.1 REQUIREMENTS

A.1.1 Offices for the Engineer 1. Provide and maintain field offices, including all the necessary electricity, water, drainage and telephone services for the use of the Engineer and his staff. All facilities provided shall be near the job site, where necessary and shall conform to the best standard for the required types. Be responsible for the maintenance and protection of all facilities to be provided during the duration of the Contract, including providing adequate stock of all expendable items, such as light bulbs, light tubes, laboratory equipment and supplies at all times to ensure proper and continuous functioning of all the Engineers facilities. Provide suitable utilities and services, electricity, sewerage and security on a 24-hour basis. such as potable water,

5. Any portable shall be dismantled, moved and erected from time to time as directed by the Engineer. A.1.2 Vehicles for the Engineer All vehicles shall comply in all respects with all relevant Philippine national or local laws statutes and regulations. All vehicles shall carry or be fitted with the accessories as may be prescribed by laws and have comprehensive insurance. The vehicles on delivery shall be new and shall be driven by a competent qualified and experienced driver who shall be under the direct order of the Engineer.

Maintain the vehicle in first class condition and shall be supplied with appropriate fuel and lubricants al all times Provide equivalent substitute vehicles during any period when the specified vehicles are taken out of service for maintenance, repair or any other reason. Unless otherwise specified, the vehicle shall at the end of the Contract become the property of the Government. A.1.4 Photographs Provide record photographs taken as, when and where directed by the Engineer at intervals of not more than one month. The photographs shall be sufficient in number and location to record the exact progress of the Works.

PART B OTHER GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

B.1 OFFICES, SHOPS, STORES AND WORKMENS ACCOMMODATION FOR CONTRACTOR The contractor shall provide and maintain such offices, stores, workshops latrines, housing and messing accommodations as are necessary. These should be located in the Contractors compound, distinct and separate from the Engineers compound. The location, dimensions and layout of such buildings and places shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall not be permitted to erect temporary buildings or structures on the site without the specific permission in writing of the Engineer including approval of the dimensions of such buildings or structures. Before the commencement of the period of Warranty, the Contractor shall fence of the Contractors store area from the rest of the Site. By the end of the Period of Warranty, the Contractor shall remove this fence and all buildings shall be cleared and the area shall be graded as required by the Engineer. B.2 MEDICAL ROOM AND FIRST AID FACILITIES 1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain throughout the duration of the Contract, a medical room together with all necessary supplies to be sited in the Contractors main area. The medical room shall be waterproof; it could be a building or room designated and used exclusively for the purpose and have a floor area of at least 15 square meters and a glazed window area of at least 2 square meters. 2. The Contractor shall employ permanently on the site a fully trained Medical Aide who shall be engaged solely from medical duties. 3. The location of the medical room and any other arrangements shall be made known to all employees by posting on prominent locations suitable notices in the Site. 4. The Contractors arrangement to comply with this Section shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and also to the approval of any qualified Medical Officer designated by the Government to supervise medical arrangements on the Site.

PART C EARTHWORK Item 105 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 105.1 Description This Item shall consist of the preparation of the subgrade for the support of overlying structural layers. It shall extend to full width of the roadway. Unless authorized by the Engineer, subgrade preparation shall not be done unless the Contractor is able to start immediately the construction of the pavement structure. 105.2 Material Requirements Unless otherwise stated in the Contract and except when the subgrade is in rock cut, all materials below subgrade level to a depth 150 mm or to such greater depth as may be specified shall meet the requirements of Selected Borrow for Topping. 105.3 Construction Requirements 105.3.1 Prior Works Prior to commencing preparation of the subgrade, all culverts, cross drains, ducts and the like (including their fully compacted backfill), ditches, drains and drainage outlets shall be completed. 105.3.2 Subgrade Level Tolerances The finished compacted surface of the subgrade shall conform to the allowable tolerances as specified hereunder: Permitted variation from design LEVEL OF SURFACE Permitted SURFACE IRREGULARITY MEASURED BY 3-m STRAIGHT EDGE Permitted variation from design CROSSFALL OR CAMBER Permitted variation from design LONGITUDINAL GRADE over 25 m length + 20 mm 30 mm 30 mm + 0.5 % 0.1 %

105.3.3 Subgrade in Common Excavation Unless otherwise specified, all materials below subgrade level in earth cuts to a depth 150 mm or other depth shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer shall be excavated. Where material has been removed from below subgrade level, the resulting surface shall be compacted to a depth of 150mm. All materials immediately below subgrade level in earth cuts to a depth of 150 mm, or to such greater depth as may be specified, shall be compacted. 105.3.4 Subgrade in Rock Excavation Surface irregularities under the subgrade level remaining after trimming of the rock excavation shall be leveled by placing specified material and compacted. 105.3.5 Subgrade on Embankment After the embankment has been completed, the full width shall be conditioned by removing any soft or other unstable material that will not compacted properly. The resulting areas and all other low sections, holes, or depressions shall be brought to grade with suitable material. The entire roadbed shall be shaped and compacted. Scarifying, blading, dragging, rolling, or other methods of work shall be performed or used as necessary to provide a thoroughly compacted roadbed shaped to the cross-sections shown on the Plans.

105.3.6 Subgrade on Existing Pavement Where the new pavement is to be constructed immediately over an existing Portland Cement concrete pavement and if so specified in the Contract the slab be broken into pieces with greatest dimension of not more than 500 mm and the existing pavement material compacted as specified as directed by the Engineer. The resulting subgrade level shall, as part pavement construction be shaped to conform to the allowable by placing and compacting where necessary a leveling course comprising the material of the pavement course to be placed immediately above. Where the new pavement is to be constructed immediately over an existing asphalt concrete pavement or gravel surface pavement and if so specified in the Contract the pavement shall be scarified, thoroughly loosened, reshaped and recompacted. 105.3.7 Protection of Completed Work Protect and maintain the entire work within the limits condition satisfactory to the Engineer from the time he first work shall have been completed. Maintenance shall recompacting ruts, ridges, soft spots and deteriorated sections of his Contract in good started work until all include repairing and of the subgrade caused

by the traffic vehicle/equipment or that of the public. PART D SUBBASE AND BASE COURSE ITEM 201 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 201.1 Description This Item shall consist of furnishing, placing and compacting an aggregate base course on a prepared subgrade/subbase in accordance with this Specificaton and the lines, grades, thickness and typical cross-sections shown on the Plans, or as established by the Engineer. 201.2 Material Requirements Aggregate for base course shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of crushed stone, crushed slag or crushed or natural gravel and filler of natural or crushed sand or other finely divided mineral matter. The composite material shall be free from vegetable matter and lumps or balls of clay, and shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily to form a firm, stable base.

201.3 Construction Requirements 201.3.1 Preparation of Existing Surface

The existing surface shall be graded and finished as provided under Item 105, Subgrade Preparation, before placing the base material. 201.3.2 Placing It shall be in accordance with all the requirements of Subsection 200.3.2, Placing.

201.3.3 Spreading and Compacting It shall be in accordance with all the requirements of Subsection 200.3.3, Spreading and Compacting. PART E SURFACE COURSES ITEM 311 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 311.1 Description This Item shall consist of pavement of Portland Cement Concrete, with or without reinforcement, constructed on the prepared base in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with lines, grades, thickness and typical crosssection shown on the Plans. 311.2 Material Requirements 311.2.1 Portland Cement

Only Type I Portland Cement shall be used unless otherwise provided for in the Special Provisions. Different brands or the same brands from different mills shall not be mixed nor shall they be used alternately unless the mix is approved by the Engineer

Cement which for any reason, has become partially set or which contains lumps of caked cement will be rejected. Cement salvaged from discarded or used bags shall not be used. Samples of Cement shall be obtained. 311.2.2 Fine Aggregate

It shall consist of natural sand, stone screenings or other inert materials with similar characteristics, or combinations thereof, having hard, strong and durable particles. Fine aggregate from different sources of supply shall not be mixed or stored in the same pile nor used alternately in the same class of concrete without the approval of the Engineer. 311.2.3 Coarse Aggregate

It shall consist of crushed stone, gravel, blast furnace slag, or other approved inert materials of similar characteristics, or combinations thereof, having hard, strong, durable pieces and free from any adherent coatings. 311.2.4 Water Water used in mixing, curing or other designated application shall be reasonably clean and free of oil, salt, acid, alkali, grass or other substances injurious to the finished product. Water will be tested in accordance with and shall meet the requirements of Item 714, Water. Water which is drinkable may be used without test. Where the source of water is shallow, the intake shall be so enclosed as to exclude silt, mud, grass or other foreign materials. 311.2.5 Reinforcing Steel

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 404, Reinforcing Steel. Dowels and tie bars shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 31 or M 42, except that rail steel shall not be used for tie bars that are to be bent and restraightened during construction. Tie bars shall be deformed bars. Dowels shall be plain round bars. Before delivery to the site of work, one-half of the length of each dowel shall be painted with one coat of approved lead or tar paint.

The sleeves for dowel bars shall be metal of approved design to cover 50 mm ( 2 inches), plus or minus 5 mm (1/4 inch) of the dowel, with a closed end, and with a suitable stop to hold the end of the sleeve at least 25 mm (1 inch) from the end of the dowel. Sleeves shall be of such design that they do not collapse during construction. 311.2.6 Joint Fillers

Poured joint fillers shall be mixed asphalt and mineral or rubber filler conforming to the applicable requirements of Item 705, Joint Materials. Preformed joint filler shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 705. It shall be punched to admit the dowels where called for in the Plans. The filler for each joint shall be furnished in a single piece for the full depth and width required for the joint. 311.2.10 Storage of Cement and Aggregate All cement shall be stored, immediately upon delivery at the Site, in weatherproof building which will protect the cement from dampness. The floor shall be raised from the ground. The buildings shall be placed in locations approved by the Engineer. Provisions for storage shall be ample, and the shipments of cement as received shall be separately stored in such a manner as to allow the earliest deliveries to be used first and to provide easy access for identification and inspection of each shipment. Storage buildings shall have capacity for storage of a sufficient quantity of cement to allow sampling at least twelve (12) days before the cement is to be used. Bulk cement, if used, shall be transferred to elevated air tight and weatherproof bins. Stored cement shall meet the test requirements at any time after storage when retest is ordered by the Engineer. At the time of use, all cement shall be free-flowing and free of lumps. The handling and storing of concrete aggregates shall be such as to prevent segregation or the inclusion of foreign materials. The Engineer may require that aggregates be stored on separate platforms at satisfactory locations. In order to secure greater uniformity of concrete mix, the Engineer may require that the coarse aggregate be separated into two or more sizes. Different sizes of aggregate shall be stored in separate bins or in separate stockpiles sufficiently removed from each other to prevent the material at the edges of the piles from becoming intermixed. 311.2.11 Proportioning, Consistency and Strength of Concrete

The Contractor shall prepare the design mix based on the absolute volume method as outlined in the American Concrete Institute (ACI) Standard 211.1, Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal and Heavyweight Concrete. It is the intent of this Specification to require at least 364 kg of cement per cubic meter of concrete to meet the minimum strength requirements. The Engineer shall determine from laboratory tests of the materials to be used, the cement content and the proportions of aggregate and water that will produce workable concrete having a slump of between 40 and 75 mm (1-1/2 and 3 inches)

if not vibrated or between 10 and 40 mm (1/2 and 1-1/2 inches) if vibrated, and a flexural strength of not less than 3.8 MPa (550 psi) when tested by the third-point method or 4.5 MPa (650 psi) when tested by the mid-point method at fourteen (14) days in accordance with AASHTO T97 and T177, respectively; or a compressive strength of 24.1 MPa (3500 psi) for cores taken at fourteen (14) days and tested in accordance with AASHTO T24. Slump shall be determined using AASHTO T 119. The designer shall consider the use of lean concrete (econocrete) mixtures using local materials or specifically modified conventional concrete mixes in base course and in the lower course composite, monolithic concrete pavements using a minimum of 75 mm (3 inches) of conventional concrete as the surface course.

The mix design shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall be accompanied with certified test data from an approved laboratory demonstrating the adequacy of the mix design. A change in the source of materials during the progress of work may necessitate a new design mix. 311.3 Construction Requirements 311.3.1 1. Quality Control of Concrete General The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality control of all materials during the handling, blending, and mixing and placement operations. 2. Quality Control Plan The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a Quality Control Plan detailing his production control procedures and the type and frequency of sampling and testing to insure that the concrete produces complies with the Specifications. The Engineer shall be provided free access to recent plant production records, and if requested, informational copies of mix design, materials certifications and sampling and testing reports. 3. Qualification of Workmen Experienced and qualified personnel shall perform all batching or mixing operation for the concrete mix, and shall be present at the plant and job site to control the concrete productions whenever the plant is in operation. They shall be identified and duties defined as follows: a. Concrete Batcher. The person performing the batching or mixing operation shall be capable of accurately conducting aggregate surface moisture determination and establishing correct scale weights for concrete materials. He shall be capable of assuring that the proportioned batch weights of materials are in accordance with the mix design. Concrete Technician. The person responsible for concrete production control and sampling and testing for quality control shall be proficient in concrete technology and shall have a sound knowledge of the Specifications as they relate to concrete production. He shall be capable of conducting tests on concrete and concrete materials in accordance with these Specifications. He shall be capable of adjusting concrete mix designs for improving workability and Specification compliance and preparing trial mix designs. He shall be qualified to act as the concrete batcher in the batchers absence.

b.

4.

Quality Control Testing The Contractor shall perform all sampling, testing and inspection necessary to assure quality control of the component materials and the concrete. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the gradation of fine and coarse aggregates and for testing the concrete mixture for slump, air content, water-cement ratio and temperature. He shall conduct his operations so as to produce a mix conforming to the approved mix design.

5.

Documentation The Contractor shall maintain adequate records of all inspections and tests. The records shall indicate the nature and number of observations made, the number and type of deficiencies found, the quantities approved and rejected, and nature of any corrective action taken. The Engineer may take independent assurance samples at random location for acceptance purposes as he deems necessary.

311.3.2

Equipment

Equipment and tools necessary for handling materials and performing all parts of the work shall be approved by the Engineer as to design, capacity and mechanical condition. The equipment shall be at the jobsite sufficiently ahead of the start of construction operations to be examined thoroughly and approved. 1. Batching Plant and Equipment a. General. The batching shall include bins, weighing hoppers, and scales for the fine aggregate and for each size of coarse aggregate. If cement is used in bulk, a bin, a hopper, and separate scale for cement shall be included. The weighing hopper shall be properly sealed and vented to preclude dusting operation. The batch plant shall be equipped with a suitable non-resettable batch counter which will correctly indicate the number of batches proportioned. Bins and Hoppers. Bins with adequate separate compartments for fine aggregate and for each size of coarse aggregate shall be provided in the batching plant. Scales. Scales for weighing aggregates and cement shall be of either the beam type or the springless-dial type. They shall be accurate within one-half percent (0.5%) throughout the range of

b.

c.

use. Poises shall be designed to be locked in any position and to prevent unauthorized change. Scales shall be inspected and sealed as often as the Engineer may deem necessary to assure their continued accuracy. d. Automatic Weighing Devices. Unless otherwise allowed on the Contract, batching plants shall be equipped with automatic weighing devices of an approved type to proportion aggregates and bulk cement. 2. Mixers. a. General. Concrete may be mixed at the Site of construction or at a central plant, or wholly or in part in truck mixers. Each mixer shall have a manufacturers plate attached in a prominent place showing the capacity of the drum in terms of volume of mixed concrete and the speed of rotation of the mixing drum or blades. Mixers at Site of Construction. Mixing shall be done in an approved mixer capable of combining the aggregates, cement and water into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the specified mixing period and discharging and distributing the mixture without segregation on the prepared grade. The mixer shall be equipped with an approved timing device which will automatically lock the discharge lever when the drum has been charged and released it at the end of the mixing period. In case of failure of the timing device, the mixer may be used for the balance of the day while it is being repaired, provided that each batch is mixed 90 seconds. The mixer shall be equipped with a suitable nonresettable batch counter which shall correctly indicate the number of the batches mixed. Truck Mixer and Truck Agitators. Truck mixers used for mixing and hauling concrete, and truck agitators used for hauling central-mixed concrete, shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 157. Non-Agitator Truck. Bodies of non-agitating hauling equipment for concrete shall be smooth, mortar-tight metal containers and shall be capable of discharging the concrete at a satisfactory controlled rate without segregation.

b.

c.

d.

3.

Paving and Finishing Equipment The concrete shall be placed with an approved paver designed to spread, consolidate, screed and float finish the freshly placed concrete in one complete pass of the machine in such a manner that a minimum of hand finishing will be necessary to provide a dense and

homogeneous pavement Specifications.

in

conformance

with

the Plans

and

The finishing machine shall be equipped with at least two (2) oscillating type transverse screed. Vibrators shall operate at a frequency of 8,300 to 9,600 impulses per minute under load at a maximum spacing of 60 cm. 4. Concrete Saw The Contractor shall provide sawing equipment in adequate number of units and power to complete the sawing with a watercooled diamond edge saw blade or an abrasive wheel to the required dimensions and at the required rate. He shall provide at least one (1) stand-by saw in good working condition and with an ample supply of saw blades. 5. Forms Forms shall be of steel, of an approved section, and of depth equal to the thickness of the pavement at the edge. The base of the forms shall be of sufficient width to provide necessary stability in all directions. The flange braces must extend outward on the base to not less than 2/3 the height of the form. All forms shall be rigidly supported on bed of thoroughly compacted material during the entire operation of placing and finishing the concrete. Forms shall be provided with adequate devices for secure setting so that when in place, they will withstand, without visible spring or settlement, the impact and vibration of the consolidation and finishing or paving equipment. 311.3.3 Preparation of Grade

After the subgrade of base has been placed and compacted to the required density, the areas which will support the paving machine and the grade on which the pavement is to be constructed shall be trimmed to the proper elevation by means of a properly designed machine extending the prepared work areas compacted at least 60 cm beyond each edge of the proposed concrete pavement. If loss of density results from the trimming operations, it shall be restored by additional compaction before concrete is placed. If any traffic is allowed to use the prepared subgrade or base, the surface shall be checked and corrected immediately ahead of the placing concrete. The subgrade or base shall be uniformly moist when the concrete is placed.

311.3.4 1.

Setting Forms Base Support. The foundation under the forms shall be hard and true to grade so that the form when set will be firmly in contact for its whole length and at the specified grade. (Any roadbed, which at the form line is found below established grade, shall be filled with approved granular materials to grade in lifts of three (3) cm or less, and thoroughly rerolled or tamped.) Imperfections or variations above grade shall be corrected by tamping or by cutting as necessary.

2.

Form Setting Forms shall be set sufficiently in advance of the point where concrete is being placed. After the forms have been set to correct grade, the grade shall be thoroughly tamped, mechanically or by hand, at both the inside and outside edges of the base of the forms. The forms shall not deviate from true line bv more than one (1) cm at any point.

3.

Grade and Alignment The alignment and grade elevations of the forms shall be checked and corrections made by the Contractor immediately before placing the concrete. Testing as to crown and elevation, prior to placing of concrete can be made by means of holding an approved template in a vertical position and moved backward and forward on the forms. When any form has been disturbed or any grade has become unstable, the form shall be reset and rechecked.

311.3.5

Conditioning of Subgrade or Base Course

When side forms have been securely set to grade, the subgrade or base course shall be brought to proper cross-section. High areas shall be trimmed to proper elevation. Low areas shall be filled and compacted to a condition similar to that of surrounding grade. The finished grade shall be maintained in a smooth and compacted condition until the pavement is placed. Unless waterproof subgrade or base course cover material is specified, the subgrade or base course shall be uniformly moist when the concrete is placed. If it subsequently becomes too dry, the subgrade or base course shall be sprinkled, but the method of sprinkling shall not be such as to form mud or pools of water. 311.3.6 Handling, Measuring and Batching Materials

The batch plant site, layout, equipment and provisions for transporting material shall be such as to assure a continuous supply of material to the work.

Stockpiles shall be built up in layers of not more than one (1) meter in thickness. Each layer shall be completely in place before beginning the next which shall not be allowed to cone down over the next lower layer. Aggregates from different sources and of different grading shall not be stockpiled together. All washed aggregates and aggregates produced or handled by hydraulic methods, shall be stockpiled or binned for draining at least twelve (12) hours before being batched. When mixing is done at the side of the work. aggregates shall be transported from the batching plant to the mixer in batch boxes, vehicle bodies, or other containers of adequate capacity and construction to properly carry the volume required. Partitions separating batches shall be adequate and effective to prevent spilling from one compartment to another while in transit or being dumped. When bulk cement is used, the Contractor shall use a suitable method of handling the cement from weighing hopper to transporting container or into the batch itself for transportation to the mixer, with chute, boot or other approved device, to prevent loss of cement, and to provide positive assurance of the actual presence in each batch of the entire cement content specified. Bulk cement shall be transported to the mixer in tight compartments carrying the full amount of cement required for the batch. However, if allowed in the Special Provisions, it may be transported between the fine and coarse aggregate. When cement is placed in contact with the aggregates, batches may be rejected unless mixed within 1-1/2 hours of such contact. Cement in original shipping packages may be transported on top of the aggregates, each batch containing the number of sacks required by the job mix. The mixer shall be charged without loss of cement. Batching shall be so conducted as to result in the weight to each material required within a tolerance of one (1) percent for the cement and two (2) percent for aggregates. Water may be measured either by volume or by weight. The accuracy of measuring the water shall be within a range of error of not over than one (1) percent. Unless the water is to be weighed, the water-measuring equipment shall include an auxiliary tank from which the measuring tank shall be equipped with an outside tap and valve to provide checking the setting, unless other means are provided for readily and accurately determining the amount of water in the tank. The volume of the auxiliary tank shall be at least equal to that of the measuring tank. 311.3.7 Mixing Concrete

The concrete may be mixed at the site of the work in a central-mix plant, or in truck mixers. The mixer shall be of an approved type and capacity. Mixing time will be measured from the time all materials, except water, are in the drum. Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with requirements of AASHTO M 157, except that the minimum required revolutions at the mixing speed for transit-mixed concrete may be reduced to not less than that recommended by the mixer manufacturer. The number of revolutions

recommended by the mixer manufacturer shall be indicated on the manufacturers serial plate attached to the mixer. The Contractor shall furnish test data acceptable to the Engineer verifying that the make and model of the mixer will produce uniform concrete conforming to the provision of AASHTO M 157 at the reduced number of revolutions shown on the serial plate. When mixed at the site or in a central mixing plant, the mixing time shall not be less than fifty (50) seconds nor more than ninety (90) seconds, unless mixer performance tests prove adequate mixing of the concrete is a shorter time period. Four (4) seconds shall be added to the specified mixing time if timing starts at the instant the skip reaches its maximum raised positions. Mixing time ends when the discharge chute opens. Transfer time in multiple drum mixers is included in mixing time. The contents of an individual mixer drum shall be removed before a succeeding batch is emptied therein. The mixer shall be operated at the drum speed as shown on the manufacturers name plate attached on the mixer. Any concrete mixed less than the specified time shall be discarded and disposed off by the Contractor at his expense. The volume of concrete mixed per batch shall not exceed the mixers nominal capacity in cubic metre, as shown on the manufacturers standard rating plate on the mixer, except that an overload up to ten (10) percent above the mixers nominal capacity may be permitted provided concrete test data for strength, segregation, and uniform consistency are satisfactory, and provided no spillage of concrete takes place. The batches shall be so charged into the drum that a portion of the mixing water shall be entered in advance of the cement and aggregates. The flow of water shall be uniform and all water shall be in the drum by the end of the first fifteen (15) seconds of the mixing period. The throat of the drum shall be kept free of such accumulations as may restrict the free flow of materials into the drum. Mixed concrete from the central mixing plant shall be transported in truck mixers, truck agitators or non-agitating truck specified in Subsection 311.3.2, Equipment. The time elapsed from the time water is added to the mix until the concrete is deposited in place at the Site shall not exceed forty five (45) minutes when the concrete is hauled in non-agitating trucks, nor ninety (90) minutes when hauled in truck mixers or truck agitators, except that in hot weather or under other conditions contributing to quick hardening of the concrete, the maximum allowable time may be reduced by the Engineer. In exceptional cases and when volumetric measurements are authorized for small project requiring less than 75 cu.m. of concrete per day of pouring, the weight proportions shall be converted to equivalent volumetric proportions. In such cases, suitable allowance shall be made for variations in the moisture condition of the aggregates, including the bulking effect in the fine aggregate. Batching and mixing shall be in accordance with ASTM C 685, Section 6 through 9. Concrete mixing by chute is allowed provided that a weighing scales for determining the batch weight will be used.

Retempering concrete by adding water or by other means shall not be permitted, except that when concrete is delivered in truck mixers, additional water may be added to the batch materials and additional mixing performed to increase the slump to meet the specified requirements, if permitted by the Engineer, provided all these operations are performed within forty-five (45) minutes after the initial mixing operation and the water-cement ratio is not exceeded. Concrete that is not within the specified slump limits at the time of placement shall not be used. Admixtures for increasing the workability or for accelerating the setting of the concrete will be permitted only when specifically approved by the Engineer. 311.3.8 Limitation of Mixing

No concrete shall be mixed, placed or finished when natural light is insufficient, unless an adequate and approved artificial lighting system is operated. During hot weather, the Engineer shall require that steps be taken to prevent the temperature of mixed concrete from exceeding a maximum temperature of 900F ( 320C) Concrete not in place within ninety (90) minutes ingredients were charged into the mixing drum or that has shall not be used. Retempering of concrete or mortar hardened, that is remixing with or without additional cement, shall not be permitted. from the time the developed initial set which has partially aggregate, or water,

In order that the concrete may be properly protected against the effects of rain before the concrete is sufficiently hardened, the Contractor will be required to have available at all times materials for the protection of the edges and surface of the unhardened concrete. 311.3.9 Placing Concrete

Concrete shall be deposited in such a manner to require minimal rehandling. Unless truck mixers or non-agitating hauling equipment are equipped with means to discharge concrete without segregation of the materials, the concrete shall be unloaded into an approved spreading device and mechanically spread on the grade in such a manner as to prevent segregation. Placing shall be continuous between transverse joints without the use of intermediate bulkheads. Necessary hand spreading shall be done with shovels, not rakes. Workmen shall not be allowed to walk in the freshly mixed concrete with boots or shoes coated with earth or foreign substances. When concrete is to be placed adjoining a previously constructed lane and mechanical equipment will be operated upon the existing lane, that previously constructed lane shall have attained the strength for fourteen (14) day concrete. If only finishing equipment is carried on the existing lane, paving in adjoining lanes may be permitted after three (3) days.

Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated against and along the faces of all forms and along the full length and on both sides of all joint assemblies, by means of vibrators inserted in the concrete. Vibrators shall not be permitted to come in contact with a joint assembly, the grade, or a side form. In no case shall the vibrator be operated longer than fifteen (15) seconds in any one location. Concrete shall be deposited as near as possible to the expansion and contraction joints without disturbing them, but shall not be dumped from the discharge bucket or hopper into a joint assembly unless the hopper is well centered on the joint assembly. Should any concrete material fall on or be worked into the surface of a complete slab, it shall be removed immediately. 311.3.10 Test Specimens As work progresses, at least one (1) set consisting of three (3) concrete beam test specimens, 150 mm x 150 mm x 525 mm or 900 mm shall be taken from each 330 m2 of pavement, 230 mm depth, or fraction thereof placed each day. Test specimens shall be made under the supervision of the Engineer, and the Contractor shall provide all concrete and other facilities necessary in making the test specimens and shall protect them from damage by construction operations. Cylinder samples shall not be used as substitute for determining the adequacy of the strength of concrete. The beams shall be made, cured, and tested in accordance with AASHTO T 23 and T 97. 311.3.11 Strike-off of Concrete and Placement of Reinforcement Following the placing of the concrete, it shall be struck off to conform to the cross-section shown on the Plans and to an elevation such that when the concrete is properly consolidated and finished, the surface of the pavement will be at the elevation shown on the Plans. When reinforced concrete pavement is placed in two (2) layers, the bottom layer shall be struck off and consolidated to such length and depth that the sheet of fabric or bar mat may be laid full length on the concrete in its final position without further manipulation. The reinforcement shall then be placed directly upon the concrete, after which the top layer of the concrete shall be placed, struck off and screeded. Any portion of the bottom layer of concrete which has been placed more then 30 minutes without being covered with the top layer shall be removed and replaced with freshly mixed concrete at the Contractors expense. When reinforced concrete is placed in one layer, the reinforcement may be firmly positioned in advance of concrete placement or it may be placed at the depth shown on the Plans in plastic concrete, after spreading by mechanical or vibratory means. Reinforcing steel shall be free from dirt, oil, paint, grease, mill scale and loose or thick rust which could impair bond of the steel with the concrete.

311.3.12 Joints Joints shall be constructed of the type and dimensions, and at the locations required by the Plans or Special Provisions. All joints shall be protected from the intrusion of injurious foreign material until sealed. 1. Longitudinal Joint Deformed steel tie bars of specified length, size, spacing and materials shall be placed perpendicular to the longitudinal joints, they shall be placed by approved mechanical equipment or rigidly secured by chair or other approved supports to prevent displacement. Tie bars shall not be painted or coated with asphalt or other materials or enclosed in tubes or sleeves. When shown on the Plans and when adjacent lanes of pavement are constructed separately, steel side forms shall be used which will form a keyway along the construction joint. Tie bars, except those made of rail steel, may be bent at right angles against the form of the first lane constructed and straightened into final position before the concrete of the adjacent lane is placed, or in lieu of bent tie bars, approved two-piece connectors may be used. Longitudinal formed joints shall consist of a groove or cleft, extending downward from and normal to, the surface of the pavement. These joints shall be effected or formed by an approved mechanically or manually operated device to the dimensions and line indicated on the Plans and while the concrete is in a plastic state. The groove or cleft shall be filled with either a premolded strip or poured material as required. The longitudinal joints shall be continuous, there shall be no gaps in either transverse or longitudinal joints at the intersection of the joints. Longitudinal sawed joints shall be cut by means of approved concrete saws to the depth, width and line shown on the Plans. Suitable guide lines or devices shall be used to assure cutting the longitudinal joint on the true line. The longitudinal joint shall be sawed before the end of the curing period or shortly thereafter and before any equipment or vehicles are allowed on the pavement. The sawed area shall be thoroughly cleaned and, if required, the joint shall immediately be filled with sealer. Longitudinal pavement insert type joints shall be formed by placing a continuous strip of plastic materials which will not react adversely with the chemical constituent of the concrete. 2. Transverse Expansion Joint The expansion joint filler shall be continuous from form to form, shaped to subgrade and to the keyway along the form. Preformed

joint filler shall be furnished in lengths equal to the pavement width or equal to the width of one lane. Damaged or repaired joint filler shall not be used. The expansion joint filler shall be held in a vertical position. An approved installing bar, or other device, shall be used if required to secure preformed expansion joint filler at the proper grade and alignment during placing and finishing of the concrete. Finished joint shall not deviate more than 6 mm from a straight line. If joint fillers are assembled in sections, there shall be no offsets between adjacent units. No plugs of concrete shall be permitted anywhere within the expansion space. 3. Transverse Contraction Joint/Weakened Joint When shown on the Plans, it shall consist of planes of weakness created by forming or cutting grooves in the surface of the pavement and shall include load transfer assemblies. The depth of the weakened plane joint should at all times not be less than 50 mm, while the width should not be more than 6 mm. a. Transverse Strip Contraction Joint. It shall be formed by installing a parting strip to be left in place as shown on the Plans. Formed Groove. It shall be made by depressing an approved tool or device into the plastic concrete. The tool or device shall remain in place at least until the concrete has attained its initial set and shall then be removed without disturbing the adjacent concrete, unless the device is designed to remain in the joint. Sawed Contraction Joint. It shall be created by sawing grooves in the surface of the pavement of the width not more than 6 mm, depth should at all times not be less than 50 mm, and at the spacing and lines shown on the Plans, with an approved concrete saw. After each joint is sawed, it shall be thoroughly cleaned including the adjacent concrete surface. Sawing of the joint shall commence as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit sawing without excessive ravelling, usually 4 to 24 hours. All joints shall be sawed before uncontrolled shrinkage cracking takes place. If necessary, the sawing operations shall be carried on during the day or night, regardless of weather conditions. The sawing of any joint shall be omitted if crack occurs at or near the joint location prior to the time of sawing. Sawing shall be discounted when a crack develops ahead of the saw. In general, all joints should be sawed in sequence. If extreme condition exist which make it impractical to prevent erratic cracking by early sawing, the contraction joint groove shall be formed prior to initial set of concrete as provided above.

b.

c.

4.

Transverse Construction Joint It shall be constructed when there is an interruption of more than 30 minutes in the concreting operations. No transverse joint shall be constructed within 1.50 m of an expansion joint, contraction joint, or plane of weakness. If sufficient concrete has been mixed at the time of interruption to form a slab of at least 1.5 m long, the excess concrete from the last preceding joint shall be removed and disposed off as directed.

5.

Load Transfer Device Dowel, when used, shall be held in position parallel to the surface and center line of the slab by a metal device that is left in the pavement. The portion of each dowel painted with one coat of lead or tar, in conformance with the requirements of Item 404, Reinforcing Steel, shall be thoroughly coated with approved bituminous materials, e.g., MC-70, or an approved lubricant, to prevent the concrete from binding to that portion of the dowel. The sleeves for dowels shall be metal designed to cover 50 mm plus or minus 5 mm (1/4 inch), of the dowel, with a watertight closed end and with a suitable stop to hold the end of the sleeves at least 25 mm (1 inch) from the end of the dowel. In lieu of using dowel assemblies at contraction joints, dowel may be placed in the full thickness of pavement by a mechanical device approved by the Engineer.

311.3.13 Final Strike-off (Consolidation and Finishing) 1. Sequence The sequence of operations shall be the strike-off and consolidation, floating and removal of laitance, straight-edging and final surface finish. Work bridges or other devices necessary to provide access to the pavement surface for the purpose of finishing straight-edging, and make corrections as hereinafter specified, shall be provided by the Contractor. In general, the addition of water to the surface of the concrete to assist in finishing operations will not be permitted. If the application of water to the surface is permitted, it shall be applied as fog spray by means of an approved spray equipment. 2. Finishing Joints The concrete adjacent to joints shall be compacted or firmly placed without voids or segregation against the joint material assembly, also

under and around all load transfer devices, joint assembly units, and other features designed to extend into the pavement. Concrete adjacent to joints shall be mechanically vibrated as required in Subsection 311.3.9, Placing Concrete. After the concrete has been placed and vibrated adjacent to the joints as required in Subsection 311.3.9, the finishing machine shall be brought forward, operating in a manner to avoid damage or misalignment of joints. If uninterrupted operation of the finishing machine, to over and beyond the joints causes segregation of concrete, damage to, or misalignment of the joints, the finishing machine shall be stopped when the front screed is approximately 20 cm (8 inches) from the joint. Segregated concrete shall be removed from in front of and off the joint. The front screed shall be lifted and set directly on top of the joint and the forward motion of the finishing machine resumed. When the second screed is close enough to permit the excess mortar in front of it to flow over the joint, it shall be lifted and carried over the joint. Thereafter, the finishing machine may be run over the joint without lifting the screeds, provided there is no segregated concrete immediately between the joint and the screed or on top of the joint. 3. Machine Finishing a. Non-vibratory Method. The concrete shall be distributed or spread as soon as placed. As soon as the concrete has been placed, it shall be struck off and screeded by an approved finishing machine. The machine shall go over each area of pavement as many times and at such intervals as necessary to give the proper compaction and leave a surface of uniform texture. Excessive operation over a given area shall be avoided. The tops of the forms shall be kept clean by an effective device attached to the machine and the travel of the machine on the forms shall be maintained true without wobbling or other variation tending to affect the precision finish. During the first pass of the finishing machine, a uniform ridge of concrete shall be maintained ahead of the front screed in its entire length. b. Vibratory Method. When vibration is specified, vibrators for full width vibration of concrete paving slabs, shall meet the requirements in Subsection 311.3.2, Equipment. If uniform and satisfactory density of the concrete is not obtained by the vibratory method at joints, along forms, at structures, and throughout the pavement, the Contractor will be required to furnish equipment and method which will produce pavement conforming to the Specifications. All provisions in item (a) above not in conflict with the provisions for the vibratory method shall govern.

4.

Hand Finishing Hand finishing methods may only be used under the following conditions: a. In the event of breakdown of the mechanical equipment, hand methods may be used to finish the concrete already deposited on the grade. In narrow widths or areas of irregular dimensions where operations of the mechanical equipment is impractical, hand methods may be used.

b.

Concrete, as soon as placed, shall be struck off and screeded. An approved portable screed shall be used. A second screed shall be provided for striking off the bottom layer of concrete if reinforcement is used. The screed for the surface shall be at least 60 cm (2 feet) longer than the maximum width of the slab to be struck off. It shall be of approved design, sufficiently rigid to retain its shape, and constructed either of metal or other suitable material shod with metal. Consolidation shall be attained by the use of suitable vibrator or other approved equipment. In operation, the screed shall be moved forward on the forms with a combined longitudinal and transverse shearing motion, moving always in the direction in which the work is progressing and so manipulated that neither end is raised from the side forms during the striking off process. If necessary, this shall be repeated until the surface is of uniform texture, true to grade and cross-section, and free from porous areas. 5. Floating After the concrete has been struck off and consolidated, it shall be further smoothed, trued, and consolidated by means of a longitudinal float, either by hand or mechanical method. a. Hand Method. The hand-operated longitudinal float shall be not less than 365 cm (12 feet) in length and 15 cm (6 inches) in width, properly stiffened to prevent flexibility and warping. The longitudinal float, operated from foot bridges resting on the side forms and spanning but not touching the concrete, shall be worked with a sawing motion while held in a floating position parallel to the road center line, and moving gradually from one side of the pavement to the other. Movement ahead along the center line of the pavement shall be in successive advances of

not more than one-half the length of the float. Any excess water or soupy material shall be wasted over the side forms on each pass. b. Mechanical Method. The mechanical longitudinal float shall be of a design approved by the Engineer, and shall be in good working condition. The tracks from which the float operates shall be accurately adjusted to the required crown. The float shall be accurately adjusted and coordinated with the adjustment of the transverse finishing machine so that a small amount of mortar is carried ahead of the float at all times. The forward screed shall be adjusted so that the float will lap the distance specified by the Engineer on each transverse trip. The float shall pass over each areas of pavement at least two times, but excessive operation over a given area will not be permitted. Any excess water or soupy material shall be wasted over the side forms on each pass. Alternative Mechanical Method. As an alternative, the Contractor may use a machine composed of a cutting and smoothing float or floats suspended from and guided by a rigid frame. The frame shall be carried by four or more visible wheels riding on, and constantly in contact with the side forms. If necessary, following one of the preceding method of floating, long handled floats having blades not less than 150 cm (5 feet) in length and 15 cm (6 inches) in width may be used to smooth and fill in opentextured areas in the pavement. Long-handled floats shall not be used to float the entire surface of the pavement in lieu of, or supplementing, one of the preceding methods of floating. When strike off and consolidation are done by the hand method and the crown of the pavement will not permit the use of the longitudinal float, the surface shall be floated transversely by means of the long-handled float. Care shall be taken not to work the crown out of the pavement during the operation. After floating, any excess water and laitance shall be removed from the surface of the pavement by a 3-m straight-edge or more in length. Successive drags shall be lapped one-half the length of the blade.

c.

6.

Straight-edge Testing and Surface Correction After the floating has been completed and the excess water removed, but while the concrete is still plastic, the surface of the concrete shall be tested for trueness with a 300 cm long straight-edge. For this purpose, the Contractor shall furnish and use an accurate 300-cm straight-edge swung from handles 100 cm (3 feet) longer than one-half the width of the slab. The straight-edge shall be held in contact with the surface in successive positions parallel to the road center line and the whole area gone over from one side of the slab to the other as necessary. Advances along the road shall be in

successive stages of not more than one-half the length of the straightedge. Any depressions found shall be immediately filled with freshly mixed concrete, struck off, consolidated and refinished. High areas shall be cut down and refinished. Special attention shall be given to assure that the surface across joints meets the requirements for smoothness. Straight-edge testing and surface corrections shall continue until the entire surface is found to be free from observable departures from the straight-edge and the slab conforms to the required grade and cross-section. 7. Final Finish If the surface texture is broom finished, it shall applied when the water sheen has practically disappeared. The broom shall be drawn from the center to the edge of the pavement with adjacent strokes slightly overlapping. The brooming operation should be so executed that the corrugations produced in the surface shall be uniform in appearance and not more than 1.5 mm in depth. Brooming shall be completed before the concrete is in such condition that the surface will be unduly roughened by the operation. The surface thus finished shall be free from rough and porous areas, irregularities, and depressions resulting from improper handling of the broom. Brooms shall be of the quality size and construction and be operated so as to produce a surface finish meeting the approval of the Engineer. Subject to satisfactory results being obtained and approval of the Engineer, the Contractor will be permitted to substitute mechanical brooming in lieu of the manual brooming herein described. If the surface texture is belt finished, when straight-edging is complete and water sheen has practically disappeared and just before the concrete becomes non-plastic, the surface shall be belted with 2ply canvass belt not less than 20 cm wide and at least 100 cm longer than the pavement width. Hand belts shall have suitable handles to permit controlled, uniform manipulation. The belt shall be operated with short strokes transverse to the center line and with a rapid advances parallel to the center line. If the surface texture is drag finished, a drag shall be used which consists of a seamless strip of damp burlap or cotton fabric, which shall produce a uniform of gritty texture after dragging it longitudinally along the full width of pavement. For pavement 5 m or more in width, the drag shall be mounted on a bridge which travels on the forms. The dimensions of the drag shall be such that a strip of burlap or fabric at least 100 cm wide is in contact with the full width of pavement surface while the drag is used. The drag shall consist of not less than 2 layers of burlap with the bottom layer approximately 15 cm wider than the layer. The drag shall be maintained in such condition that the resultant surface is of uniform appearance and reasonably free from grooves over 1.5 mm in depth. Drag shall be maintained clean and free from

encrusted mortar. Drags that cannot be cleaned shall be discarded and new drags be substituted. Regardless of the method used for final finish, the hardened surface of pavement shall have a coefficient of friction of 0.25 or more. Completed pavement that is found to have a coefficient of friction less than 0.25 shall be grounded or scored by the Contractor at his expense to provide the required coefficient of friction. 8. Edging at Forms and Joints After the final finish, but before the concrete has taken its initial set, the edges of the pavement along each side of each slab, and on each side of transverse expansion joints, formed joints, transverse construction joints, and emergency construction joints, shall be worked with an approved tool and rounded to the radius required by the Plans. A well defined and continuous radius shall be produced and a smooth, dense mortar finish obtained. The surface of the slab shall not be unduly disturbed by tilting the tool during the use. At all joints, any tool marks appearing on the slab adjacent to the joints shall be eliminated by brooming the surface. In doing this, the rounding of the corner of the slab shall not be disturbed. All concrete on top of the joint filler shall be completely removed. All joints shall be tested with a straight-edge before the concrete has set and correction made if one edge of the joint is higher than the other. 311.3.14 Surface Test As soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the pavement surface shall be tested with a 3-m straight-edge or other specified device. Areas showing high spots of more than 3 mm but not exceeding 12 mm in 3 m shall be marked and immediately ground down with an approved grinding tool to an elevation where the area or spot will not show surface deviations in excess of 3 mm when tested with 3 m straight-edge. Where the departure from correct cross-section exceeds 12 mm, the pavement shall be removed and replaced by and at the expense of the Contractor. Any area or section so removed shall be not less than 1.5 m in length and not less than the full width of the lane involved. When it is necessary to remove and replace a section of pavement, any remaining portion of the slab adjacent to the joints that is less than 1.5 m in length, shall also be removed and replaced. 311.3.15 Curing Immediately after the finishing operations have been completed and the concrete has sufficiently set, the entire surface of the newly placed concrete shall be cured in accordance with either one of the methods described herein. Failure

to provide sufficient cover material of whatever kind the Contractor may elect to use, or the lack of water to adequately take care of both curing and other requirements, shall be a cause for immediate suspension of concreting operations. The concrete shall not be left exposed for more than hour between stages of curing or during the curing period. In all congested places, concrete works should be designed so that the designed strength is attained. 1. Cotton of Burlap Mats The surface of the pavement shall be entirely covered with mats. The mats used shall be of such length (or width) that as laid they will extend at least twice the thickness of the pavement beyond the edges of the slab. The mat shall be placed so that the entire surface and the edges of the slab are completely covered. Prior to being placed, the mats shall be saturated thoroughly with water. The mat shall be so placed and weighted down so as to cause them to remain in intimate contact with the covered surface. The mat shall be maintained fully wetted and in position for 72 hours after the concrete has been placed unless otherwise specified. 2. Waterproof Paper The top surface and sides of the pavement shall be entirely covered with waterproof paper, the units shall be lapped at least 45 cm. The paper shall be so placed and weighted down so as to cause it to remain in intimate contact with the surface covered. The paper shall have such dimension but each unit as laid will extend beyond the edges of the slab at least twice the thickness of the pavement, or at pavement width and 60 cm strips of paper for the edges. If laid longitudinally, paper not manufactured in sizes which will provide this width shall be securely sewed or cemented together, the joints being securely sealed in such a manner that they do not open up or separate during the curing period. Unless otherwise specified, the covering shall be maintained in place for 72 hours after the concrete has been placed. The surface of the pavement shall be thoroughly wetted prior to the placing of the paper. 3. Straw Curing When this type of curing is used, the pavement shall be cured initially with burlap or cotton mats, until after final set of the concrete or, in any case, for 12 hours after placing the concrete. As soon as the mats are removed, the surface and sides of the pavement shall be thoroughly wetted and covered with at least 20 cm of straw or hay, thickness of which is to be measured after wetting. If the straw or hay covering becomes displaced during the curing period, it shall be replaced to the original depth and saturated. It shall be kept thoroughly saturated with water for 72 hours and thoroughly wetted

down during the morning of the fourth day, and the cover shall remain in place until the concrete has attained the required strength. 4. Impervious Membrane Method The entire surface of the pavement shall be sprayed uniformly with white pigmented curing compound immediately after the finishing of the surface and before the set of the concrete has taken place, or if the pavement is cured initially with jute or cotton mats, it may be applied upon removal of the mass. The curing compound shall not be applied during rain. Curing compound shall be applied under pressure at the rate 4 L to not more than 14 m2 by mechanical sprayers. The spraying equipment shall be equipped with a wind guard. At the time of use, the compound shall be in a thoroughly mixed condition with the pigment uniformly dispersed throughout the vehicle. During application, the compound shall be stirred continuously by effective mechanical means. Hand spraying of odd widths or shapes and concrete surface exposed by the removal of forms will be permitted. Curing compound shall not be applied to the inside faces of joints to be sealed, but approved means shall be used to insure proper curing at least 72 hours and to prevent the intrusion of foreign material into the joint before sealing has been completed. The curing compound shall be of such character that the film will harden within 30 minutes after application. Should the film be damaged from any cause within the 72 hour curing period, the damaged portions shall be repaired immediately with additional compound. 5. White Polyethylene Sheet The top surface and sides of the pavement shall be entirely covered with polyethylene sheeting. The units used shall be lapped at least 45 cm. The sheeting shall be so placed and weighted down so as to cause it to remain intimate contact with the surface covered. The sheeting as prepared for use shall have such dimension that each unit as laid will extend beyond the edges of the slab at least twice the thickness of the pavement. Unless otherwise specified, the covering shall be maintained in place for 72 hours after the concrete has been placed. 311.3.16 Removal of Forms After forms for concrete shall remain in place undisturbed for not less than twenty four (24) hours after concrete pouring. In the removal of forms, crowbars should be used in pulling out nails and pins. Care should be taken so as not to break the edges of the pavement. In case portions of the concrete are spalled, they shall be immediately repaired with fresh mortar mixed in the proportion of one part of Portland Cement and two parts fine aggregates. Major honeycomb areas will be considered as defective work and shall be removed and replaced at the

expense of the Contractor. Any area or section so removed shall not be less than the distance between weakened plane joint nor less than the full width of the lane involved. 311.3.17 Sealing Joints Joints shall be sealed with asphalt sealant soon after completion of the curing period and before the pavement is opened to traffic, including the Contractors equipment. Just prior to sealing, each joint shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign materials including membrane curing compound and the joint faces shall be clean and surface dry when the seal is applied. The sealing material shall be applied to each joint opening to conform to the details shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. Material for seal applied hot shall be stirred during heating so that localized overheating does not occur. The pouring shall be done in such a manner that the material will not be spilled on the exposed surfaces of the concrete. The use of sand or similar material as a cover for the seal will not be permitted. Preformed elastomeric gaskets for sealing joints shall be of the crosssectional dimensions shown on the Plans. Seals shall be installed by suitable tools, without elongation and secured in placed with an approved lubricant adhesive which shall cover both sides of the concrete joints. The seals shall be installed in a compressive condition and shall at time of placement be below the level of the pavement surface by approximately 6 mm. The seals shall be in one piece for the full width of each transverse joint. 311.3.18 Protection of Pavement The Contractor shall protect the pavement and its appurtenances against both public traffic and traffic caused by his own employees and agents. This shall include watchmen to direct traffic and the erection of and maintenance of warning signs, lights, pavement bridges or cross-overs, etc. The Plans or Special Provisions will indicate the location and type of device or facility required to protect the work and provide adequately for traffic. All boreholes after thickness and/or strength determinations of newly constructed asphalt and concrete pavements shall be immediately filled/restored with the prescribed concrete/asphalt mix after completion of the drilling works. Any damage to the pavement, occurring prior to final acceptance, shall be repaired or the pavement be replaced. 311.3.19 Concrete Pavement Slip Form Method If the Contract calls for the construction of pavement without the use of fixed forms, the following provisions shall apply:

1.

Grade After the grade or base has been placed and compacted to the required density, the areas which will support the paving machine shall be cut to the proper elevation by means of a properly designed machine. The grade on which the pavement is to be constructed shall then be brought to the proper profile by means of properly designed machine. If the density of the base is disturbed by the grading operation, it shall be corrected by additional compaction before concrete is placed. The grade should be constructed sufficiently in advance of the placing of the concrete. If any traffic is allowed to use the prepared grade, the grade shall be checked and corrected immediately before the placing of concrete.

2.

Placing Concrete The concrete shall be placed with an approved slip-form paver designed to spread, consolidate, screed and float-finish the freshly placed concrete in one complete pass of the machine in such a manner that a minimum of hand finish will be necessary to provide a dense and homogenous pavement in conformance with the Plans and Specifications. The machine shall vibrate the concrete for the full width and depth of the strip of pavement being placed. Such vibration shall be accompanied with vibrating tubes or arms working in the concrete or with a vibrating screed or pan operating on the surface of the concrete. The sliding forms shall be rigidly held together laterally to prevent spreading of the forms. The forms shall trail behind the paver for such a distance that no appreciable slumping of the concrete will occur, and that necessary final finishing can be accomplished while the concrete is still within the forms. Any edge slump of the pavement, exclusive of edge rounding, in excess of 6 mm shall be corrected before the concrete has hardened. The concrete shall be held at a uniform consistency, having a slump of not more than 40 mm (1-12/ inches). The slip form paver shall be operated with as nearly as possible a continuous forward movement and that all operations of mixing, delivering and spreading concrete shall be coordinated so as to provide uniform progress with stopping and starting of the paver held to a minimum. If, for any reason, it is necessary to stop the forward movement of the paver the vibratory and tamping elements shall also be stopped immediately. No tractive force shall be applied to the machine, except that which is controlled from the machine.

3.

Finishing The surface smoothness and texture shall meet the requirements of Subsections 311.3.13 and 311.3.14.

4.

Curing Unless otherwise specified, curing shall be done in accordance with one of the methods included in Subsection 311.3.15. The curing media shall be applied at the appropriate time and shall be applied uniformly and completely to all surfaces and edges of the pavement.

5.

Joints All joints shall be constructed in accordance with Subsection 311.3.12.

6.

Protection Against Rain In order that the concrete may be properly protected against rain before the concrete is sufficiently hardened, the Contractor will be required to have available at all times, materials for the protection of the edges and surface of the unhardened concrete. Such protective materials shall consist of standard metal forms or wood planks having a nominal thickness of not less than 50 mm (2 inches) and a nominal width of not less than the thickness of the pavement at its edge for the protection of the pavement edges, and covering material such as burlap or cotton mats, curing paper or plastic sheeting materials for the protection of the surface of the pavement. When rain appears imminent, all paving operations shall stop and all available personnel shall begin placing forms against the sides of the pavement and covering the surface of the unhardened concrete with the protective covering.

311.3.22 Acceptance of Concrete The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three (3) consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength, fc and no individual strength test result is deficient by more than 15% of the specified strength, fc. Concrete deemed to be not acceptable using the above criteria may be rejected unless the Contractor can provide evidence, by means of core tests, that the quality of concrete represented by failed test results is acceptable in place. At least three (3) representative cores shall be taken from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered deficient. The location of cores shall be determined by the Engineer so that there will be at least impairment of strength of the structure. The obtaining and testing of drilled cores shall be in accordance with AASHTO T 24. Concrete in the area represented by the cores will be considered adequate if the average strength of the cores is equal to at least 85% of, and if no single core is less than 75% of, the specified strength, fc.

If the strength of control specimens does not meet the requirements of this Subsection, and it is not feasible or not advisable to obtain cores from the structure due to structural considerations, payment of the concrete will be made at an adjusted price due to strength deficiency of concrete specimens as specified hereunder: Deficiency in Strength of Concrete Specimens, Percent (%) Less than 5 5 to less than 10 10 to less than 15 15 to less than 20 20 to less than 25 25 or more 311.3.23 Opening to Traffic The Engineer will decide when the pavement may be opened to traffic. The road will not be opened to traffic until test specimens molded and cured in accordance with AASHTO T 23 have attained the minimum strength requirements in Subsection 311.2.11. If such tests are not conducted prior to the specified age the pavement shall not be operated to traffic until 14 days after the concrete was placed. Before opening to traffic, the pavement shall be cleaned and joint sealing completed. 311.3.24 Tolerance and Pavement thickness 1. General The thickness of the pavement will be determined by measurement of cores from the completed pavement in accordance with AASHTO T 148. The completed pavement shall be accepted on a lot basis. A lot shall be considered as 1000 linear meters of pavement when a single traffic lane is poured or 500 linear meters when two lanes are poured concurrently. The last unit in each slab constitutes a lot in itself when its length is at least of the normal lot length. If the length of the last unit is shorter than of the normal lot length, it shall be included in the previous lot. Other areas such as intersections, entrances, crossovers, ramp, etc., will be grouped together to form a lot. Small irregular areas may be included with other unit areas to form a lot. Each lot will be divided into five (5) equal segments and one core will be obtained from each segment in accordance with AASHTO T 24. Percent (%) of Contract Price Allowed

100 80 70 60 50 0

2.

Pavement Thickness It is the intent of this Specification that the pavement has a uniform thickness as called for on the Plans for the average of each lot as defined. After the pavement has met all surface smoothness requirements, cores for thickness measurements will be taken. In calculating the average thickness of the pavement, individual measurements which are in excess of the specified thickness by more than 5 mm will be considered as the specified thickness plus 5 mm and measurement which are less than the specified thickness by more than 25 mm shall not be included in the average. When the average thickness for the lot is deficient, the contract unit price will be adjusted for thickness in accordance with paragraph (3 below). Individual areas within a segment found deficient in thickness by more than 25 mm shall be evaluated by the Engineer, and if in his judgment, the deficient areas warrant removal, they shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor with pavement of the specified thickness at his entire expense. However, if the evaluation of the Engineer is that the deficient area should not be removed and replaced, such area will not be paid. When the measurement of any core is less than the specified thickness by more than 25 mm, the actual thickness of the pavement in this area will be determined by taking additional cores at no less than 5 m intervals parallel to the center line in each direction from the affected location until a core is found in each direction, which is not deficient in thickness by more than 25 mm. The area of slab for which no payment will be made shall be the product of the paving width multiplied by the distance along the center line of the road between transverse sections found not deficient in thickness by more than 25 mm. The thickness of the remainder of the segment to be used to get the average thickness of each lot shall be determined by taking the average thickness of additional cores which are not deficient by more than 25 mm.

3.

Adjustment for Thickness When the average thickness of the pavement per lot is deficient, payment for the lot shall be adjusted as follows: Deficiency in the Average Thickness per lot (mm) 05 6 10 11 15 16 20 21 25 More than 25 Percent (%) of Contract Price Per Lot 100% payment 95% payment 85% payment 70% payment 50% payment Remove and replace/ No payment

No acceptance and final payment shall be made on completed pavement unless core test for thickness determination is conducted, except for Barangay Roads where the implementing office is allowed to waive such test. 311.4 Method of Measurement The area to be paid for under this Item shall be the number of square meters (m2) of concrete pavement placed and accepted in the completed pavement. The width for measurements will be the width from outside edge to outside edge of completed pavement as placed in accordance with the Plans or as otherwise required by the Engineer in writing. The length will be measured horizontally along the center line of each roadway or ramp. Any curb and gutter placed shall not be included in the area of concrete pavement measured. 311.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 311.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Portland Cement Concrete Pavement, which price and payment shall be full compensation for preparation of roadbed and finishing of shoulders, unless otherwise provided by the Special Provisions, furnishing all materials, for mixing, placing, finishing and curing all concrete, for furnishing and placing all joint materials, for sawing weakened plane joints, for fitting the prefabricated center metal joint, for facilitating and controlling traffic, and for furnishing all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number 311 (1) 311 (2)

Description PCC Pavement (Plain) PCC Pavement (Reinforced)

Unit of Measurement Square meter Square meter

PART F BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION ITEM 400 PILING 400.1 Description 400.1.1 Scope This Item shall consist of piling, furnished, driven or placed, cut and spliced in accordance with this Specification and in reasonably close conformity with the Plans. The Contractor shall furnish the piles in accordance with an itemized list, which will be provided by the Engineer, showing the number and lengths of all piles. When cast-in-place concrete piles are specified on the Plans, the Engineer will not furnish the Contractor an itemized list showing the number and length of piles. When test piles and load tests are required in conformance with Subsection 400.1.2 and 400.1.3, respectively, the data obtained from driving test piles and making test loads will be used in conjunction with other available sub-soil information to determine the number and lengths of piles to be furnished. The Engineer will not prepare the itemized list of piles for any portion of the foundation area until all specified loading tests in the Contract representative of the portion have been completed. In determining lengths of piles for ordering and to be included for payment, the lengths given in the order list will be based on the lengths which are assumed to remain in the completed structure. The Contractor, shall, without added compensation, increase the lengths to provide for the fresh heading and for such additional length as maybe necessary to suit the Contractors method of operation. 400.1.2 Test Piles For his own information, the Contractor may drive at the location of the regular piles indicated on the Plans such test piles as he may consider necessary in addition to the test piles specified in the Contract and shall be considered as regular piles. When called for in the Bill of Quantities, a pile if required to be subjected to load test shall conform to the provision as provided in Subsection 400.1.3, Load Tests. The Contractor shall furnish and drive test piles of the dimensions and at the locations designated by the Engineer. They shall be of the material shown in the Bill of Quantities and shall be driven to refusal or to such tip elevation or approximate bearing value as the Engineer may request. Test piles shall be driven with the same hammer that is used for driving foundation piles. When the Engineer requests a load test to determine a bearing value, the first load test pile shall be driven to the specified bearing value as determined by the applicable formula in Subsection 400.1.4 for Timber Pile Bearing Value by Formula. Subsequent test piles to be load-tested shall be driven to the specified bearing value as determined by the applicable formula modified by the results of

prior test loads and foundation data. The ground at each test pile shall be excavated to the elevation of the bottom of the footing before the pile is driven. 400.1.3 Load Tests Load tests for files shall be either Static or Pile Testing by Low-Strain Dynamic Method, High-Strain Dynamic Method and Cross-Hole Sonic Logging. When load tests are specified, the number and location of piles to be tested will be designated by the Engineer. Load tests shall be done by methods approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval detailed plans of the loading apparatus he intends to use. The apparatus shall be so constructed as to allow the various increments of the load to be placed gradually without causing vibration to the test piles. If the approved method requires the use of tension (anchor) piles, such tension piles shall be of the same type and diameter as the permanent piles and shall be driven in the location of permanent piles when feasible. Piling not a part of the structure shall be removed or cut off at least 300mm below the bottom of the footing or finished elevation of the ground upon completion of the test load. Permanent piling used as anchor piling which is raised during the test load shall be redriven to original grade and bearing. 400.1.3.1 Static Testing

Suitable approved apparatus for determining accurately the load on pile and the settlement of the pile under increment of load shall be supplied by the Contractor. Test loading shall consist of the application of incremental static loads to a pile and measuring the resultant settlement. The loads shall be applied by a hydraulic jack acting against suitable anchorage, transmitting the load directly to the pile, or other methods designated by the Plans or approved by the Engineer. The load shall be applied in increments of 5 or 10 tonnes as directed by the Engineer. Gross settlement readings, loads and other data shall be recorded by the Engineer immediately before and after the applications of each load increment. Each load increment shall be held for an interval of two and one-half minutes. Each succeeding increment shall be as directed by the Engineer or as shown on the Plans and shall be applied immediately after the two and one-half minute interval readings have been made. When a load-settlement curve obtained from these data shows that the pile has failed; i.e., the load can be held only by the constant pumping and the pile or shaft is being driven into the ground, pumping shall cease. Gross settlement readings, loads and other data shall be recorded immediately after pumping has ceased and again after an interval of two and one-half minutes for a total period of five (5) minutes. All loads shall then be removed and the member allowed to recover. Gross settlement readings shall be made immediately after all loads

have been removed and at each interval of two and one-half minutes for a total period of five (5) minutes. All load tests shall be carried to failure or to the capacity of the equipment, unless otherwise noted on the Plans. After the completion of loading tests, the load used shall be removed and the piles including tension piles, shall be utilized in the structure if found by the Engineer to be satisfactory for such use. Test piles not loaded shall be utilized similarly. If any pile, after serving its purpose as a test or tension pile, is found unsatisfactory for utilization in the structure, it shall be removed if so ordered by the Engineer or shall be cut off below the ground line of footings, whichever is applicable. When diesel or other types of hammers requiring calibration are to be used, the Contractor shall make load tests even though no load tests are called for in the Bill of Quantities, except that load tests will not be required when the hammer is to be used only for driving piles to refusal, rock or a fixed tip elevation or the hammer is of a type and model that has been previously calibrated for similar type, size and length of pile, and foundation material. Calibration data must have been obtained from sources acceptable to the Engineer. 400.1.3.2 Pile Testing Pile testing shall be done by Low-Strain Dynamic Method, High-Strain Dynamic Method or Cross-Hole Sonic Logging Method as required in the plans or as directed by the Engineer. 400.1.3.2.1 Low-Strain dynamic Method Pile integrity testing by Low-Strain Dynamic Method shall conform to ASTM D-5882-96. It is a so-called Low Strain Method, since it requires the impact of only a small hand-held hammer, and also referred to as a Non-Destructive Method. 400.1.3.2.2 High-Strain Dynamic Testing Pile Integrity testing by High-Strain Dynamic Method shall conform to ASTM D4945-97. High-Strain Dynamic Method shall be applied to confirm the design parameters and capacities assumed for the piles as well as to confirm the normal integrity of testing of the piles. It is considered supplemental to the lowstrain and sonic-type integrity testing of the cast-in-place piles. It is a nondestructive relatively quick test and it is intended that the test shaft be left in a condition suitable for use in production. The shaft used for the test will be instrumented and tested by the testing specialist, as approved by the Engineer, meeting requirements in accordance to ASTM D4945-97. 400.1.3.2.3 Cross-Hole Sonic Logging of Bored Holes By sending ultrasonic pulses through concrete from one probe to another (probes located in parallel tubes), the Cross-hole Sonic Logging (CSL) procedure

inspects the drilled shaft structural integrity, and extent and location of defects, if any. At the receiver probe, pulse arrival time and signal the concrete affects strength. For equidistant tubes, uniform concrete yields consistent arrival times with reasonable pulse wave speed and signal strengths. Non uniformities such as contamination, soft concrete, honeycombing, voids, or intrusions of foreign objects exhibit delayed arrival time with reduced signal strength. 400.1.4 Timber Pile Bearing Value by Formula ` When load tests are called for in the Bill of Quantities and when diesel or other hammers to be calibrated are used, the minimum number of hammer blows per unit of pile penetration needed to obtain the specified bearing value of piles shall be determined by load tests, as provided in Subsections 400.1.2 and 400.1.3. In the absence of load tests, the safe bearing value of each timber pile shall be determined by whichever of the following approximate formulas is applicable: 1000 WH For gravity hammer, P = ------------- x --------------6 S+25.4 For single-action steam or air hammers, and for diesel hammers having unrestricted rebound of ram, 1000 WH P = ----------- x ----------------6 S+2.54 For double-action steam or air hammers, and diesel hammers having enclosed ram, 1000 E P = ------------ x ----------------6 S+2.54 For diesel or steam hammers on very heavy piles, 1000 E P = ---------- x -----------------------6 S+2.54 (Wp/W) Where: P W = Safe load per pile in Newton or kg = Weight of the striking part of the hammer in Newton or kg H = Height of fall of ram in metres S = Average penetration per blow in mm for the last 5 to 10 blows for gravity hammers and the last 10 to 20 blows for steam hammers E = Hammer energy, N.m or kg.m Wp = Weight of pile

The above formula are applicable only when: 1. The hammer has a free fall. 2. The head of the pile is free from broomed or crushed wood fiber or other serious impairment. 3. The penetration is reasonably quick and uniform. 4. There is no measurable bounce after the blow. 5. A follower is not used. If there is a measurable bounce, twice the height of bounce shall be deducted from H to determine its value in the formula. The bearing power as determined by the appropriate formula listed in this Subsection, will be considered effective only when it is less than the crushing strength of the pile. Other recognized formulas may be used if fully detailed in the Special Provisions. When bearing power is determined by a formula, timber piles shall be driven until a computed safe bearing power of each is not less than 18 tonnes. 400.1.5 Concrete and Steel Pile Bearing Values The bearing values for concrete and steel pile will be determined by the Engineer using the following formulas: a. Modified Hileys Formula or any formula from brochures of the equipment used, shall be used when the ratio of weight of ram or hammer to weight of pile is greater than one fourth (1/4). 2WH (W) Ru = ---------------------------(S+K) (W+Wp) Ru Ra = --------------FS Where: Ru = Ra = W = H = Wp = S = K = FS ultimate capacity of piles (KN) capacity of pile (KN)shall be greater than the required weight of ram or hammer (KN) height of fall of ram (mm) weight of pile (KN) average penetration for the last ten blows (mm) 10 mm (unless otherwise observed/computed during driving) = factor of safety (min. = 3)

b. Hileys Formula shall be used when the ratio of the weight of ram or hammer to weight of pile is less than one fourth (1/4). efWH (W) (W + n2 Wp) Ru = ------------------------------ x --------------------------S+1/2 (C1+C2+C3) (W + Wp) Ru Ra = -------------FS where: Ru = Ra = ef = W = Wp = H = S = C1 = C2 C3 = = ultimate capacity of pile (KN) capacity of pile (KN) efficiency of hammer (refer to table) weight of ram (KN) weight of pile (KN) height of fall of ram (mm) average penetration for last ten blows (mm) temporary compression allowance for pile head and cap (refer to table) RuL/AEp range from 2.54mm to 5.08mm (0.1 to 0.2) for resilient soil to 0 for hard pan (rock, very dense sand and gravel) length of pile cross-sectional area of pile modulus of elasticity of pile coefficient of restitution (refer to table) factor of safety (min. = 3)

L A Ep n FS

= = = = =

Required minimum penetration of all piles shall be six (6) meters. However, for exposed piles, the embedded length shall be equal or greater than the exposed length but not less than 6.0m.

Note: Formula for other pile hammers with suggested factor of safety should be as provided/recommended by their respective manufacturer.

Values of C1 for Hiley Formula Temporary Compression Allowance C1 for Pile Head and Cap
Materials to which blow is applied Easy Driving: P1 = 3.45 MPa (500 psi) on Pile Butt If no cushion, mm (in.) 1.27 (0.05) Medium Driving: P1 = 6.90 MPa (1000 psi) on Head or Cap. mm (in.) Hard Driving: P1 = 10.34 MPa (1500 psi) on Head or Cap. mm (in.) Very Hard Driving: P1 = 13.88 MPa (2000 psi) on Head or Cap. mm (in.) 5.08 (0.20)

Head of timber pile 76100mm (3-4 in.) packing inside cap on head of precast concrete piles Concrete Pile Steel-covered cap. containing wood packing but steel piling at pipe 4.76mm (3/16 in.) red electrical tuber disk between two 10mm (3/8) steel plates, for use with severe driving on Monotube pile Head of steel piling of pipe

2.54 (0.10)

3.81 (0.15)

1.27 + 1.778 (0.05 + 0.07)b 0.635 (0.025)

2.54 + 3.81 (0.10 + 0.15)b 1.27 (0.05)

3.81 + 5.588 (0.015 + 0.22)b 1.905 (0.075)

5.08 + 7.62 (0.20 + 0.30)b 2.54 (0.10)

1.016 (0.04)

2.032 (0.08)

3.048 (0.12)

4.064 (0.16)

0.508 (0.02) 0

1.016 (0.04) 0

1.524 (0.06) 0

2.032 (0.08) 0

The first figure represent the compression of the cap and wood dolly or packing above the cap, whereas the second figure represent the compression of the wood packing between the cap and the pile head. P1 = Ru/A Values of Efficiency of Hammer, ef Hammer Type Drop Hammer released by trigger Drop Hammer actuated by rope and friction winch McKiernan-Terry Single-acting hammers Warrington-Vulcan Single acting hammers Differential-acting hammers McKiernan-Terry, Industrial B. Ownhoist, National and Union double-acting hammers Diesel Hammers ef 1.00 0.75 0.85 0.75 0.75 0.85 1.00

Pile Type

Reinforced Concrete

Values of Coefficient of Restitution, n Drop, Single Head Condition Acting or Diesel Hammer Helmet with composite plastic or green heart dolly on top of pile 0.40 Helmet with Timber dolly, and packing on top of pile Hammer direct on pile with pad only Driving cap with Standard plastic or greenheart dolly Driving cap with Timber dolly Hammer direct on pile Hammer direct on pile

Double Acting Hammers

0.50

0.25 -

0.40 0.50

Steel

0.50 0.30 0.25

0.50 0.30 0.50 0.40

Timber

The formulas specified in the preceding Subsection for timber piling may be used in determining a rough approximation for the bearing power of precast and cast-in-place concrete piles and of steel piles. In all cases when the bearing power of concrete and steel piles is determined by formula, the piles shall be driven until the safe bearing power of each is computed to be not less than 27 tonnes. 400.1.6 Safe Loads When the safe bearing power of any pile is found by test or computation to be less than the design load, longer piles or additional piles shall be driven as ordered in writing by the Engineer. 400.1.7 Jetted Piles The safe bearing power of jetted piles shall be determined by actual tests or by the appropriate methods and formulas given in the preceding Subsections. No jet shall be used during the test blows. 400.2 Material Requirements

The kind and type of piles shall be as specified on the Plans and Bill of Quantities. No alternative type or kind of piling shall be used. 400.2.1 Untreated Timber Piles Timber shall conform to the requirements of Item 713, Treated and Untreated Timber. The specie shall be specified on the Plans. Unless otherwise

noted on the Plans or Special Provisions, only the best grade shall be used. It shall be free from loose knots, splits, wormholes, decay, warp, ring separation or any defect which will impair its strength or render it unfit for its intended use. Any specie specified on the Plans may be used for untreated timber and if the specie is not available, a specie of equivalent strength and durability may be used if authorized by the Engineer. Round piles shall be cut above the ground swell and shall taper from butt to tip. A line drawn from the center of the tip to the center of the butt shall not fall outside of the cross-section of the pile at any point more than one percent of the length of the pile. In short bends, the distance from the center of the pile to a line stretched from the center of the pile above the bend to the center of the pile below the bend shall not exceed four percent of the length of the bend or a maximum of 65mm. Unless otherwise specified, all piles shall be peeled removing all rough bark and at least 80 percent of the inner bark. Not less than 80 percent of the surface on any circumference shall be clean wood. No strip of inner bark remaining on the pile shall be more than 20mm wide and 200mm long. All knots shall be trimmed close to the body of the pile. The pile sizes shall conform to the dimensions shown in Table 400.1. Table 400.1 Dimension of Piles Length of Pile Diameter (1 metre from the Butt) Minimum mm 300 320 350 Maximum mm 450 450 500 Minimum Tip Diameter, mm

Less than 12 metres 12 to 18 metres More than 18 metres

200 180 150

The diameter of the piles shall be measured in their peeled condition. When the pile is not exactly round, the average of three measurements may be used. For any structure, the butt diameters for the same lengths of pile shall be as uniform as possible. Square piles shall have the dimensions shown on the Plans. 400.2.2 Treated Timber Piles Timber shall conform to the requirements of Item 713, Treated and Untreated Timber. Treatment shall consist of the forcing of either creosote oil or creosote petroleum oil mixture into the outer fibers of the timber by a heat and pressure process. The process shall be in accordance with ASTM D-1760 Standard Specification for Pressure Treatment of Timber Products, but with such changes as temperatures, pressures, duration of treatment and other factors affecting the final treatment that experience has shown to be necessary in the

treatment of structural timbers sawn from woods native to the Philippines. The treatment shall be so regulated that the curing process will not induce excessive checking. The minimum penetration of the preservative into the surface of the timber shall be 20 mm. All piles shall retain the minimum amount of preservative specified in Table 400.2. Table 400.2 Minimum Preservative Per Cubic Metre of Wood Type of Processing Empty Cell Process Full Cell Process 195 kg 320 kg

Use General Use Marine Use

The Engineer shall inspect the timber prior to the treatment to determine conformance with the Specifications and suitability of conditions for treatment. He shall be permitted free access to the plant in order that temperatures, pressures and quantities and type of treatment materials used may be observed. Samples of the creosote or creosote petroleum mixtures shall be furnished as required for test. The timber shall be checked to determine penetration of treatment, quantity of free preservative remaining on the timber and any visual evidence that the treatment has been performed in a satisfactory manner. The penetration of treatment shall be determined by boring a sufficient number of well-distributed holes to determine the average penetration. All such holes shall be plugged with plugs approximately 2 mm larger in diameter than the bit used in boring the holes. If the penetration of preservative is less than the required amount, the entire charge, or such parts thereof shall be retreated. If after treatment the penetration is still insufficient, the treated pieces shall be rejected. 400.2.3 Concrete Piles Concrete shall conform to the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete. Concrete shall be Class C unless otherwise specified in the Plans. Concrete shall be proportioned to achieve a range of 6-8 (150 mm to 200 mm) slump, self-compacting mix. The use of appropriate plasticizer/additives to assure mix fluidity and consistency shall be allowed and with the Engineers approval. A retardant of proven adequacy and approved by the Engineer may be used to ensure that early hardening of concrete during operation will not occur. Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of Item 404, Reinforcing Steel. Prestressing reinforcing steel shall be high-tensile steel wire conforming to AASHTO M 204 or other high-tensile metals conforming to AASHTO Standards.

400.2.4 Steel Shells 1. Shells Driven Without a Mandrel Unless otherwise called for on the Plans or Special Provisions, shells for cast-in-place concrete piles shall have a minimum 305mm diameter at cut off and a minimum 203mm diameter at tip: made from not less than 4.55mm in thickness plate stock conforming to AASHTO M 183. Shells may either be spirally welded or longitudinally welded and may either be tapered or constant in section. Tips shall be sealed as shown on the Plans. 2. Shells Driven With a Mandrel The shell shall be of sufficient strength and thickness to withstand driving without injury and to resist harmful distortion and/or buckling due to soil pressure after driven and the mandrel removed. Butt and tip dimension shall be as called for on the Plans or Special Provisions. 400.2.5 Steel Pipes Filled Steel Pipes (filled with concrete) shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 252, Grade 2, Welded and Seamless Pipe Piles. Closure Plates for closed piles shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 183. Unfilled Tubular Steel Piles shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 252, Grade 2, with chemical requirements meeting ASTM Designation A 53, Grade B. The wall thickness shall not be less than 4.76mm. 400.2.6 Steel H-Piles Steel H-Piles shall be rolled steel sections of the weight and shape called for on the Plans. They shall be structural steel meeting the requirements of AASHTO M 183 provided that, where the Special Provisions called for copperbearing structural steel, the steel shall not contain less than one-fifth percent nor more than zero point thirty five percent (0.35%) of copper, except that steel manufactured by the acid-bessemer process shall not be used. 400.2.7 Sheet Piles Steel sheet piles shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 202 (ASTM A 328), or AASHTO M 223. All other sheet piles shall meet the requirements prescribed above the particular material specified. The joints shall be practically water-tight when the piles are in place. 400.2.8 Pile Shoes Pile shoes shall be as called for on the Plans.

400.2.9 Splices Material for pile splices, when splicing is allowed, shall be of the same quality as the material used for the pile itself and shall follow the requirements given on the Plans. 400.2.10 Paint It shall conform to Item 709, Paints. 400.3 Construction Requirements

400.3.1 Location and Site Preparation Piles shall be driven where indicated on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. All excavations for the foundation on which the piles are to be driven shall be completed before the pile driving, unless otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer. After driving is completed, all loose and displaced materials shall be removed from around the piles by hand excavation, leaving clean solid surface to receive the concrete of the foundation. Any requirement for granular fill and lean concrete shall be indicated on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. 400.3.2 Determination of Pile Length Pile length and bearing capacity shall be determined by the Engineer from the results of the test piling and load tests. The criterion for pile length may be one of the following: 1. Piles in sand and gravel shall be driven to a bearing power determined by the use of the pile driving formula or as decided by the Engineer. 2. Piles in clay shall be driven to the depth ordered by the Engineer. However, the bearing power shall be controlled by the pile driving formula if called for by the Engineer. 3. Piles shall be driven to refusal on rock or hard layer when so ordered by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the correct pile length and bearing capacity according to the criteria given by the Engineer. 400.3.3 Pile Driving All piles shall be driven as shown on the Plans or as ordered in writing by the Engineer. They shall be driven within an allowed variation of 20mm per metre of pile length from the vertical or batter as shown on the Plans. The maximum allowable variation at the butt end of the pile shall be 75mm in any direction from the location shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. Each pile shall, after driving, be within 150mm from the theoretical location underneath the pile

cap or underneath the superstructure in case of pile bents. All piles pushed up by the driving of adjacent piles or any other cause shall be redriven. Piles shall be used only in places where the minimum penetration of 3m in firm materials, or 5m in soft materials can be obtained. Whereas soft upper stratum overlies a hard stratum, the piles shall penetrate the hard materials at sufficient depths to fix the ends rigidly. All pile driving equipment is subject to the Engineers approval. The Contractor is responsible for sufficient weight and efficiency of the hammers to drive the piles down to the required depth and bearing capacity. Hammers shall be gravity hammers, single and double acting steam or pneumatic hammers or diesel hammers. Gravity hammers shall not weigh less than 60 percent of the combined weight of the pile and driving head but not less than 2,000 kg. The fall shall be regulated so as to avoid injury to the pile and shall in no case exceed 4.50m for timber and steel piles and 2.50m for concrete piles unless otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer. The plant and equipment furnished for steam hammers shall have sufficient capacity to maintain, under working condition, the pressure at the hammer specified by the manufacturer. The boiler or pressure tank shall be equipped with an accurate pressure gauge and another gauge shall be supplied at the hammer intake to determine the drop in pressure between the gauges. When diesel hammers or any other types requiring calibration are used, they shall be calibrated with test piling and/or test loads in accordance with Subsection 400.1.2, Test Piles. Water jets shall be used only when permitted in writing by the Engineer. When water jets are used, the number of jets and the nozzle volume and pressure shall be sufficient to erode freely the material adjacent to the pile. The plant shall have sufficient capacity to deliver at all time a pressure equivalent to at least 690 KPa at two 19 mm (3/4 inch) jet nozzles. The jets shall be shut off before the required penetration is reached and the piles shall be driven solely by hammers to final penetration as required by the Engineer. Piles shall be supported in line and position with leads while being driven. Pile driving leads shall be constructed in such a manner as to afford freedom of movement of the hammer, and shall be held in position by guys or steel braces to insure rigid lateral support to the pile during driving. The leads shall be of sufficient length to make the use of a follower unnecessary and shall be so designed as to permit proper placing of batter piles. The driving of the piles with followers shall be avoided if practicable and shall be done only under written permission from the Engineer. The method used in driving piles shall not subject them to excessive and undue abuse producing crushing and spalling of the concrete, injurious splitting, splintering and brooming of the wood or deformation of the steel. Manipulation of piles to force them into proper position if considered by the Engineer too excessive will not be permitted.

The pile tops shall be protected by driving heads, caps or cushions in accordance with the recommendation of the manufacturer of the pile hammer and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The driving head shall be provided to maintain the axis of the pile with the axis of the hammer and provide a driving surface normal to the pile. Full length piles shall be used where practicable. Splicing of piles when permitted, shall be in accordance with the provisions of Subsection 400.3.7 and 400.3.8. All piles shall be continuously driven unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer. Piles shall not be driven within 7 m of concrete less than 7 days old. 400.3.4 Timber Piles Piles shall be strapped with three metal straps: one about 450mm from the butt, one about 600mm from the butt, and the third, about 300mm from the tip. Additional straps shall be provided at about 4.5m on centers between tip and butt. Strapping should encircle the pile once and be tensioned as tightly as possible. Straps shall be 38mm wide, 0.8mm thick, cold rolled, fully heat treated, high tensile strapping, painted and waxed. Treated piles shall be strapped after treatment. Point protection shall be considered for all timber piles. Where timber piles must penetrate dump fill, or may encounter obstructions or be driven to hard strata, point protection shall be used. A boot that encompasses and utilizes the entire end area of the pile is preferred. 400.3.5 Timber Pile Bents Piles for any one bent shall be carefully selected as to size, to avoid undue bending or distortion of the sway bracing. Care shall be exercised in the distribution of piles of various sizes to obtain uniform strength and rigidity in the bents of any given structure. Cut offs shall be made accurately to insure full being between caps and piles of bents. 400.3.6 Precast Concrete Piles Precast concrete piles shall be of the design shown on the Plans. Prestressed concrete piles shall be prestressed as prescribed in Item 406, Prestressed Concrete Structures. The piles shall be cast separately and concrete in each pile shall be place continuously. The completed piles shall be free from stone pockets, honeycombs, or other defects, and shall be straight and true to the form specified. The forms shall be true to line and built of metal, plywood or dressed lumber. A 25mm chamfer strip shall be used in all corners. Form shall be water-tight and shall not be removed until at least twenty-four (24) hours after the concrete is placed.

Piles shall be cured and finished in accordance with Items 405, Structural Concrete and 406, Prestressed Concrete Structures. Cylinder specimens shall be made and tested in accordance with Item 405. Piles shall not be moved until the tests indicate that the concrete has attained a compressive strength of at least 80 percent (80%) of the design 28-day compressive strength and they shall not be transported or driven until the design 28-day compressive strength has been attained. If testing equipment is not available, as in isolated areas, piles shall not be moved until after fourteen (14) days after casting and shall not be transported or driven prior to 28 days after casting. If high early strength cement is used, piles shall not be moved, transported or driven prior to 7 days after casting. When concrete piles are lifted or moved, they shall be supported at the points shown on the Plans; if not shown, they shall be supported at the quarter points. 400.3.7 Cast-in-place Concrete Piles 1. Drilled Holes All holes for concrete piles cast in drilled holes shall be drilled dry to tip elevation shown on the Plans. All holes will be examined for straightness and any hole which on visual inspection from the top shows less than one-half the diameter of the hole at the bottom of the hole will be rejected. Suitable casings shall be furnished and placed when required to prevent caving of the hole before concrete is placed. All loose material existing at the bottom of the hole after drilling operations have been completed shall be removed before placing concrete. The use of water for drilling operations or for any other purpose where it may enter the hole will not be permitted. All necessary action shall be taken to prevent surface water from entering the hole and all water which may have infiltrated into the hole shall be removed before placing concrete. Concrete shall be placed by means of suitable tubes. Prior to the initial concrete set, the top 3m of the concrete filled pile or the depth of any reinforcing cage, whichever is greater, shall be consolidated by acceptable vibratory equipment, Casing, if used in drilling operations, may be left in place or removed from the hole as concrete is placed. The bottom of the casing shall be maintained not more than 1.5m nor less than 0.3m below the top of the concrete during withdrawal and placing operations unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Separation of the concrete during withdrawal operations shall be avoided by vibrating the casing.

2. Steel Shells and Pipes The inside of shells and pipes shall be cleaned and all loose materials removed before concrete is placed. The concrete shall be placed in one continuous operation from tip to cut-off elevation and shall be carried on in such a manner as to avoid segregation. The top 3m of concrete filled shells, or to the depth of any reinforcing cage, whichever is greater, shall be consolidated by acceptable vibratory equipment. Pipes shall be of the diameter shown on the Plans. The pipe wall thickness shall not be less than that shown on the Plans but in no case less than 5mm. The pipe, including end closures, shall be of sufficient strength to be driven by the specified methods without distortion. Closure plates and connecting welds shall not project more than 12.5mm beyond the perimeter of the pile tips. No shell or pipe shall be filled with concrete until all adjacent shells, pipes, or piles within a radius of 1.5m or 4 times the average pile diameter, whichever is greater, have been driven to the required resistance. After a shell or pipe has been filled with concrete, no shell, pipe or pile shall be driven within 6m thereof until at least 7 days have elapsed. 3. Drilled Shafts Drilled shafts are deep foundations formed by boring a cylindrical hole into soil and/or rock and filling the hole with concrete. Drilled shafts are also commonly referred to as caissons, bored piles or drilled piers. Drilled shafts, like driven piles, transfer structural loads to bearing stratum well below the base of the structure by passing soils having insufficient strength to carry the design loads. Drilled shafts are classified according to their primary mechanism for deriving load resistance either as floating shafts (i.e., shafts transferring load primarily by side resistance), or end-bearing shafts (i.e., shafts transferring load primarily by tip resistance). Occasionally, the bases of shafts are enlarged (i.e., belled or underreamed) to improved the load capacity of end bearing shafts on less than desirable soils, or to increase the uplift resistance of floating shafts. Effects of ground and ground water conditions on shaft construction operations should be considered and delineated, when necessary, the general method of construction to be followed to ensure the expected performance. Because shafts derive their capacity from side and tip resistance which are a function of the condition of the materials in direct contact with the shaft, it is important that the construction procedures be consistent with the material conditions assumed in the design. Softening, loosening or other changes in soil and rock conditions caused by the construction method could result in a reduction

in shaft capacity and an increase in shaft displacement. Therefore, evaluation of the effects of shaft construction procedure on load capacity must be considered an inherent aspect of the design. Drilled shafts are normally sized in 15.24cm (6-inch diameter increments with a minimum diameter of 45.72cm (18). The diameter of a shaft socketed into rock should be a minimum of 15.24cm (6) larger than the socket diameter. If a shaft must be inspected by the entry of a person, the shaft diameter shall not be less than 76.20cm (30). Drilled shafts constructed in dry, noncaving soils can usually be excavated without lateral support of the hole. Other ground conditions where caving, squeezing or sloughing soils are present require installation of a steel casing or use of a slurry for support of the hole. Such conditions and techniques may result in loosening of soil around the shaft, or altering of frictional resistance between the concrete shaft and surrounding soil. The center-to-center spacing between shafts is normally restricted to a minimum of 3B to minimize the effects of interaction between adjacent shafts during construction or in service. However, larger spacings may be required where drilling operations are difficult or where construction must be completed in very short time frames. Particular attention should be given to the potential for deposition of loose or wet material in the bottom of the hole, or the buildup of a cake of soft material around the shaft perimeter prior to concrete placement. Adequate cleaning and inspection of rock sockets should always be performed to assure good contact between the rock and shaft concrete. If good contact along the shaft cannot be confirmed, it may be necessary to assume that all load is transferred to the tip. If the deposition of soft or loose material in the bottom of the hole is expected, the shaft may have to be designed to carry the entire design load through side resistance. A number of methods can be used to prevent caving during the drilling of holes and the placement of concrete. It is preferred that drilled shafts be constructed in stable non-sloughing soil without excessive ground water. If impossible, consider the following three different construction methods: a. The construction of the pile or shaft in a wet condition while the walls of the excavation are stabilized by hydrostatic pressure of water or a mineral slurry until the concrete is placed by tremie methods for the full length of the pile. Mineral slurry used in the drilling process shall have both a mineral grain size that will remain in suspension and sufficient viscosity and gel characteristics to transport excavated material to a suitable screening system. The percentage and specific gravity of the material used to make the suspension shall be sufficient to maintain the stability of the excavation and to allow proper concrete placement. The level of the slurry shall be maintained at a height sufficient to prevent caving of the hole.

The mineral slurry shall be premixed thoroughly with clean fresh water and adequate time allotted for hydration prior to introduction into the shaft excavation. Adequate slurry tanks will be required when specified. No excavated slurry pits will be allowed when slurry tanks are required on the project without written permission of the Engineer. Adequate desanding equipment will be required when specified. Steps shall be taken as necessary to prevent the slurry from setting up in the shaft excavation, such as agitation, circulation, and adjusting the properties of the slurry. Control tests using suitable apparatus shall be carried out by the Contractor on the mineral slurry to determine density, viscosity, and pH. An acceptable range of values for those physical properties is shown in the following table. Range of Values (At 20o [68oF]) Property (Units) Density (KN/m3) (pcf) Viscosity (sec. per quart) pH Time of Slurry Introduction 10.10 to 10.86 64.3 to 69.1 Time of Concreting (In Hole) 10.10 to 11.79 64.3 to 75.0 Test Method Density Balance

28 to 45

28 to 45

Marsh Cone pH Paper or Meter

8 to 11

8 to 11

Note: a) Increase density values by 0.314 KN/m3 (2 pcf) in salt water. b) If desanding is required; sand content shall not exceed 4 percent (by volume) at any point in the shaft excavation as determined by the American Petroleum Institute sand content test. Tests to determine density, viscosity and pH values shall be done during the shaft excavation to establish a consistent working pattern. Prior to placing shaft concrete, slurry samples shall be taken from the bottom and at intervals not exceeding 3.05m (10 feet) for the full height of slurry. Any heavily contaminated slurry that has accumulated at the bottom of the shaft shall be eliminated. The mineral slurry shall be within specification requirements immediately before shaft concrete placement. Excavation Inspection The Contractor shall provide equipment for checking the dimensions and alignment of each shaft excavation. The Contractor under the direction of the Engineer shall determine the dimensions and alignment of the drilled shaft. Final shaft depth shall be measured after final cleaning.

The base of the shaft excavation may be cleaned using a cleaning bucket followed by airlifting. Reverse circulation techniques may also be used to clean the base of the shaft. The shaft excavation shall be cleaned so that a minimum of 50 percent of the base will have less than 12.5mm of sediment and at no place on the base more than 37.5mm of sediment. The Engineer will determine shaft cleanliness. b. The use of steel casing which is installed during drilling operations to hold the hole open and usually withdrawn during concrete placement. Casing, if used in operation, shall be metal, smooth, clean, watertight, and of ample strength to withstand both handling and driving stresses and the pressure of both concrete and the surrounding earth materials. The outside diameter of casing shall not be less than the specified size of the shaft. It shall conform to AASHTO M 270 (ASTM A 709) Grade 36 unless otherwise specified. Temporary casings shall be removed while the concrete remains workable. Generally the removal of temporary casing shall not be started until concrete placement in the shaft is at or above ground surface. Movement of casing by rotating, exerting downward pressure and tapping to facilitate extraction or extraction with a vibratory hammer will be permitted. Casing extraction shall be at a slow, uniform rate with the pull in line with the shaft axis. A sufficient head of concrete shall be maintained above the bottom of the casing to overcome the hydrostatic pressure of water or drilling fluid outside of the casing. c. The use of a permanent casing which is left in place within the portion of the pile which is in unstable material. A permanent casing is applied as protection from the presence of surface water during drilling and as support later for the installation of the rebar cage and as a concrete form in drilling under water. Reinforcing Steel Cage Construction and Placement The reinforcing steel cage consisting of the steel shown on the Plans plus cage stiffener bars, spacers, centralizers and any other necessary appurtenances shall be completely assembled and placed as a unit immediately after the shaft excavation is inspected and accepted and prior to shaft concrete placement. Where the reinforcing cage length is too long for placement as a single unit the cage may be placed in separate units such that appropriate means of splicing the longitudinal steel is provided for. The Contractor shall submit his plans for such splices to the Engineer for approval. The reinforcing steel in the hole shall be tied and supported so that the reinforcing steel will remain within allowable tolerances until the concrete will

support the reinforcing steel. When concrete is placed by suitable tubes, temporary hold-down devices shall be used to prevent uplifting of the steel cage during concrete placement. Concrete spacers or other approved noncorrosive spacing devices shall be used at sufficient intervals not exceeding 1.50 meters along the shaft to insure concentric location of the cage within the shaft excavation. When the size of the longitudinal reinforcing steel exceeds 25mm, such spacing shall not exceed 3.0 meters. Concrete Placement, Curing and Protection Concrete shall be placed as placement. Concrete placement elevation of the shaft. Placement quality concrete is evident at the through a suitable tube. soon as possible after reinforcing steel cage shall be continuous in the shaft to the top shall continue after the shaft is full until good top of the shaft. Concrete shall be placed

For piles less than 2.5 meters in diameter, the elapsed time from the beginning of concrete placement in the shaft to the completion of placement shall not exceed 2 hours. For piles 2.50 meters and greater in diameter, the concrete placing rate shall not be less than 9.0 meters of pile height per each 2-hour period. The concrete mix shall be of such design that the concrete remains in a workable plastic state throughout the 2-hour placement limit. When the top of pile elevation is above ground, the portion of the pile above ground shall be formed with a removable form or permanent casing when specified. The upper 1.5 meters of concrete shall be vibrated or rodded to a depth of 1.5 meter below the ground surface except where soft uncased soil or slurry remaining in the excavation will possibly mix with the concrete. After placement, the temporarily exposed surfaces of the shaft concrete shall be cured in accordance with the provision in Sub-section 407.3.8 Curing Concrete. For at least 48 hours after pile concrete has been placed, no construction operations that would cause soil movement adjacent to the shaft, other than mild vibration, shall be conducted. Construction Tolerances: The following tolerances shall be maintained in constructing drilled shaft. a. The drilled shaft shall be within 7.62cm (6) of the plan position in the horizontal plane at the plan elevation for the top of the shaft. b. The vertical alignment of the shaft excavation shall not vary from the plan alignment by more than 20.83 mm/m (1/4 inch per foot) of depth.

c.

After all the shaft concrete is placed, the top of the reinforcing steel cage shall be no more than 15.24 cm (6) above and no more than 7.62 cm (3) below plan position.

d. When casing is used, its outside diameter shall not be less than the shaft diameter shown on the plans. When casing is not used, the minimum diameter of the drilled shaft shall be the diameter shown on the plans for diameters 60.96 cm (24) or less, and not more than 2.54 cm (1 inch) less than the diameter shown on the plans for diameters greater than 60.96 cm (24). e. The bearing area of bells shall be excavated to the plan bearing area as a minimum. All other plan dimensions shown for the bells may be varied, when approved, to accommodate the equipment used. f. The top elevation of the shaft shall be within 2.54 cm (1 inch) of the plan top of shaft elevation. g. The bottom of the shaft excavation shall be normal to the axis of the shaft within 62.5 mm/m (3/4 inch per foot) of shaft diameter. Drilled shaft excavations constructed in such a manner that the concrete shaft cannot be completed within the required tolerances are unacceptable. 400.3.8 Steel H-Pile Steel H-Pile shall consist of structural steel shapes of the sections indicated on the Plans. When placed in the leads, the pile shall not exceed the camber and sweep permitted by allowable mill tolerance. Piles bent or otherwise damaged will be rejected. The loading, transporting, unloading, storing and handling of steel H-pile shall be conducted so that the metal will be kept clean and free from damage. 400.3.9 Unfilled Tubular Steel Piles The tubular steel piles should be or as specified by the Engineer. The minimum wall thickness shall be as indicated in the following table:

Outside Diameter Minimum wall thickness

Less than 355 mm 6.5 mm

355 mm and over 9.5 mm

Cutting shoes for piles driven open end may be inside or outside of the pipe. They may be high carbon structural steel with a machined ledged for pile bearing or cast steel with a ledge, designed for attachment with a simple weld.

400.3.10 Splicing Splicing when permitted shall be made as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Subsection. 1. Precast Concrete Piles a. By using prefabricated joints mounted in the forms and cast together with the piles sections and joined together as specified by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. The joints shall be of the design and type as specified or shown on the Plans. b. By cutting away the concrete at the end of the pile, leaving the reinforcing steel exposed for a length of 40 bar diameters for corrugated or deformed bars and 60 bar diameters for plain bars. The final cut of the concrete shall be perpendicular to the axis of the pile. Reinforcement of the same size as that used in the pile shall be spliced to the projecting steel in accordance with Item 404, Reinforcing Steel, and the necessary formwork shall be placed, care being taken to prevent leakage along the pile. The concrete shall be of the same quality as that used in the pile. Just prior to placing concrete, the top of the pile shall be wetted thoroughly and covered with a thin coating of neat cement, retempered mortar, or other suitable bonding material to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The forms shall remain in place not less than seven (7) days. The pile shall not be driven until the safe design has been reached. c. By any other method shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer. Curing and finishing of extensions shall be the same as in the original pile. 2. Prestressed Piles Splicing of prestressed precast piles will generally not be permitted, but when permitted, it shall be made in accordance with (1) above, but only after driving has been completed. Reinforcement bars shall be included in the pile head for splicing to the extension bars. No additional driving will be permitted. The Contractor, at his option, may submit alternative plans of splicing for consideration by the Engineer. 3. Steel Piles, Shells or Pipes If the length of the steel pile, shell or pipe driven is insufficient to obtain the specified bearing power, an extension of the same cross-section shall be spliced to it. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, splices shall be made by butt-welding the entire cross-sections to form an integral pile using the electric arc method. The sections connected shall be properly aligned so that the axis of the pile shall be straight. Bent and/or damaged piles shall be rejected.

400.3.11 Cutting Off and Capping Piles The top of foundation piles shall be embedded in the concrete footing as shown on the Plans. Concrete piles shall, when approved by the Engineer, be cut off at such a level that at least 300mm of undamaged pile can be embedded in the structure above. If a pile is damaged below this level, the Contractor shall repair the pile to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The longitudinal reinforcement of the piles shall be embedded in the structure above to a length equal to at least 40 times the diameter of the main reinforcing corrugated bars (60 diameters for plain bars). The distance from the side of any pile to the nearest edge of the cap shall not be less than 200mm. When the cut off elevation for a precast pile or for the steel shell or pile for a cast in place concrete pile is below the elevation of the bottom of the pile cap, the pile may be built-up from the butt of the pile to the elevation of the bottom of the cap by means of reinforced concrete extension constructed in accordance with Subsection 400.3.10 or as approved by the Engineer. Cut-offs of structural steel piles shall be made at right angles to the axis of the pile. The cuts shall be made in clear, straight lines and any irregularity due to cutting or burning shall be leveled-off with deposits of weld metal prior to placing bearing caps. 400.3.12 Defective Piles Any pile delivered with defects, or damaged in driving due to internal defects or by improper driving, or driven out of its proper location, or driven below the elevation fixed by the Plans or by the Engineer, shall be corrected at the Contractors expense by one of the following methods approved by the Engineer for the pile in question: 1. Any pile delivered with defects shall be replaced by a new pile. 2. Additional pile shall be driven/casted at the location as directed by the Engineer. 3. The pile shall be spliced or built-up as otherwise provided herein on the underside of the footing lowered to properly embed the pile. A precast concrete pile shall be considered defective if it has a visible crack, extending around the four sides of the pile, or any defect which, in the opinion of the Engineer, affects the strength or life of the pile. When a new pile is driven or cast to replace a rejected one, the Contractor at his own expense, shall enlarge the footing as deemed necessary by the Engineer.

400.3.13 Protecting Untreated Timber Trestle Piles The heads of untreated piles shall be treated as follows: The sawed surface shall be thoroughly brush-coated with two (2) applications of hot creosote oil or other approved preservative. 400.3.14 Protecting Treated Timber Trestle Piles All cuts and abrasions in treated timber piles shall be protected by a preservative approved by the Engineer. 400.3.15 Painting Steel Piles Unless otherwise provided, when required steel piles extend above the ground surface or water surface, they shall be protected by paint as specified for cleaning and painting metal surfaces in accordance with Item 403, Metal Structures. This protection shall extend from the elevation shown on the Plans to the top of the exposed steel. 400.3.16 Pile Records The Contractor shall keep records of all piles driven or installed. A copy of the record shall be given to the Engineer within two (2) days after each pile is driven. The record form to be used shall be approved by the Engineer. The pile records shall give full information on the following:

Driven Piles 1. Pile type and dimension

Cast-in-Place Piles 1. Date of boring or driving (For steel shell) & casting 2. Pile type and nominal dimension 3. Length of finished pile and tip elevation 4. Details of penetration during boring or driving of steel shell (driving records as for driven piles) 5. Concrete quality and consistency 6. Time interval between boring or driving and concreting

2. Date of casting and concrete quality (for concrete piles) 3. Date of driving

4. Driving equipment: type, weight & efficiency of hammer, etc.

5. Description of cushion on pile head 6. Depth driven and tip elevation

7. Final set for the last 20 blows (for every 10 piles and when the Engineer so requires the penetration along the whole depth driven shall be recorded) 8. For gravity and single-acting hammers: the height of drop 9. For double acting-hammers --the frequency of blows 10. Details of any interruption in driving 11. Level of pile top immediately after driving and the level when all piles in the group are driven 12. Details of re-driving 400.4 Method of Measurement

7. Volume of concrete placed in concrete

400.4.1 Timber, Steel and Precast Concrete Piles 1. Piles Furnished The quantity to be paid for will be the sum of the lengths in metres of the piles of the several types and lengths ordered in writing by the Engineer, furnished in compliance with these Specifications and stockpiles in good condition at the project site by the Contractor and accepted by the Engineer. The length to be paid for will include test and tension piles ordered by the Engineer, but not those furnished by the Contractor at his option. No allowance will be made for piles, including test piles, furnished by the Contractor to replace piles previously accepted by the Engineer that are subsequently lost or damaged while in stockpile, or during handling or driving, and are ordered by the Engineer to be removed from the site of work. In case extensions of piles are necessary, the extension length will be included in the length of pile furnished, except for cut off lengths used for extensions and already measured for payment. 2. Piles Driven The quantity to be paid for will be the sum of the lengths in metres of the piles driven in the completed work measured from the pile tip elevation to the bottom of pile caps, footings or bottom of concrete superstructure in the case of pile bents. Measurement will not include additional piles or test

piles driven that may be necessary to suit the Contractors method of construction and were driven at his option. Unless otherwise provided for, preboring, jetting or other methods used for facilitating pile driving operations will not be measured directly but will be considered subsidiary to pay items. 400.4.2 Cast-In-Place Concrete Piles The quantity to be paid for will be the sum of actual lengths in meters of the piles cast and left in-place in the completed and accepted work. Measurements will be from the pile tip to the bottom of cap or footing. Portions of piles cast deeper than the required length through over-drilling will not be measured for payment. 400.4.3 Pile Shoes The quantity to be paid for, including test pile shoes, will be the number of pile shoes driven shown on the Plans or ordered in writing by the Engineer, furnished by the Contractor in accordance with these Specifications and accepted by the Engineer. Pile shoes furnished by the Contractor at his option or to replace those that are lost or damaged in stockpile or handling will not be measured for payment. 400.4.4 Load Tests The quantity of the load tests to be paid for will be the number of tests completed and accepted except that load tests made to calibrate different types of hammers, if not included in the Bill of Quantities, will not be measured for payment. Anchor and test piling which are not part of the completed structure, will be included in the unit bid price for each Load Test. Anchor and test piling or anchor and test shafts which are a part of the permanent structure will be paid for under the appropriate Item. 400.4.5 Splices The quantity to be paid for will be the number of splices which may be required to drive the pile in excess of the estimated length shown on the Plans for cast-in-place steel pipes or shells or in excess of the order length furnished by the Engineer for all other types of piling. Splices made for the convenience of the Contractor or to fabricate piles cut offs will not be paid for. 400.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 400.4 shall be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the particular item listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment tools

and incidentals as well as temporary works, staging areas or craneway necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item. Payment will be made under: Pay Item Number 400 (1) 400 (2) 400 (3) 400 (4) 400 (5) 400 (6) 400 (7) 400 (8) 400 (9) 400 (10) 400 (11) 400 (12) 400 (13) 400 (14) 400 (15) 400 (16) 400 (17) 400 (18) 400 (19) 400 (20) 400 (21) 400 (22) 400 (23) 400 (24) Description Unit of Measurement Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Each Each Each Meter Meter

Untreated Timber Piles, furnished Treated Timber Piles, preservative, furnished Steel H-Piles, furnished Precast Concrete Piles, furnished Precast, Prestresssed Concrete Piles, furnished Structural Steel Sheet Piles, furnished Precast Concrete Sheet Piles, furnished Untreated Timber Piles, driven Treated Timber Piles, driven Steel H-Piles, driven Steel Pipes Piles Structural Steel Sheet Piles, driven Precast Concrete Sheet Piles, driven Precast Concrete Piles, driven Precast, Prestresssed Concrete Piles, driven Test Piles, furnished and driven Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes Concrete Piles cast in Steel Shells Concrete Piles cast in Steel Pipes Pile Shoes Splices Load Tests Bored Piles (dia. m) Permanent Casing (dia. m)

ITEM 401 RAILINGS 401.1 Description This Item shall consist of furnishing or fabricating and/or placing railings, for bridges and other structures of the material or combination of materials shown on the Plans, constructed in reasonably close conformity with this Specification and to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the Plans. Railings shall be classified as concrete, steel, aluminum or timber in accordance with the predominating material contained in each.

401.2 Material Requirements 401.2.1 Concrete It shall conform to the applicable requirements prescribed in Item 405, Structural Concrete. 401.2.2 Reinforcing Steel It shall conform to the requirements of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope. 401.2.3 Steel Structural steel consisting of steel and iron plates, shapes, pipes, fittings and castings shall conform to the requirements of Item 403, Metal Structures. 401.2.4 Aluminum It shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 193, ASTM B 221 or ASTM B 308 or as called for on the Plans. 401.2.5 Timber It shall conform to the requirements of Item 713, Treated and Untreated Timber. 401.2.6 Stones and Bricks These shall conform to the requirements of Item 505, Stone Masonry and Item 704, Masonry Units. 401.2.7 Paint It shall conform to the requirements of Item 709, Paints. 401.3 Construction Requirements

401.3.1 General Railings shall be constructed to the lines and grades shown on the Plans and shall not reflect any unevenness in the structure. All railing posts shall be set plumb in hand or mechanically dug holes, unless driving is permitted. In the latter case, the manner of driving shall be such as to avoid battering or distorting of post. Post holes shall be backfilled with acceptable material placed in layers and thoroughly compacted. When it is necessary to cut post holes in existing pavement, all loose materials shall be removed and the paving replaced in kind. Bridge railings shall not be placed on a span until centering or falsework has been removed, rendering the span self-supporting.

Rail elements shall be erected according to Plans and in a manner resulting in a smooth, continuous installation with laps in the direction of traffic flow. All bolts except adjustment bolts shall be drawn tight. Bolts shall be of sufficient length to extend beyond the nuts by more than 25 mm. Where painting of railing component is specified, any damage to the shop coat of paint shall be corrected by an application of an approved rust-inhibitive primer prior to painting. Ungalvanized surfaces inaccessible to painting after erection shall be field painted before erection. The railing components shall be given the specified number of coats of paint uniformly applied by thorough brushing or by approved pressure spray. Galvanized surfaces which have been abraded so that the base metal is exposed, threaded portions of all fittings and fasteners and cut ends of bolts shall be painted with two (2) coats of zinc-dust and zinc oxide paint. 401.3.2 Metal Railing Fabrication and erection shall be done in accordance with the requirements of Item 403, Metal Structures. In the case of welded railings, all exposed joints shall be finished by grinding or filing after welding to give a neat appearance. Metal railing shall be carefully adjusted prior to fixing in-place to insure proper matching of abutting joints, correct alignment and camber throughout their length. Holes for field connection shall be drilled with the railing in-place in the structure at proper grade and alignment. Welding may be substituted for rivets or bolts in field connections with the approval of the Engineer. 401.3.3 Concrete Railing 1. Railing Cast-In-Place The portion of the railing or parapet which is to be cast-in-place shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete. Special care shall be exercised to secure smooth and tight fitting forms which can be rigidly held in line and grade and removed without injury to the concrete. Forms shall either be of single width boards or shall be lined with suitable material to have a smooth surface which shall meet the approval of the Engineer or as shown on the Plans. All moldings, panel work and bevel strips shall be constructed according to the detailed Plans with metered joints, and all corners in the finished work shall be true, sharp and clean-cut and shall be free from cracks, spalls and other defects.

2. Precast Railings Moist tamped mortar precast members shall be removed from the molds as soon as practicable and shall be kept damp for a period of at least ten (10) days. Any member that shows checking of soft corners of surfaces shall be rejected. Expansion joints shall be constructed as to permit freedom of movement. After all work is completed, all loose or thin shells of mortar likely to spall under movement shall be carefully removed from all expansion joints by means of a sharp chisel. 401.3.4 Wooden Railing Wooden railing shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of Item 402, Timber Structures. 401.3.5 Stone and Brick Railing The materials used in masonry brick railing and parapet and the work to be done shall conform to the requirements of this Specification. The workmanship shall be first class and the finished construction shall be neat in appearance and true to line and grade. 401.4 Method of Measurement

The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of linear meters of specified railing actually completed and accepted measured from center to center of end posts. 401.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quality, measured as prescribed in Section 401.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Railing, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this Item. Payment will be made under:

Pay

Item Number 401

Description Railing

Unit of Measurement Meter

ITEM 402 TIMBER STRUCTURES

402.1 Description This Item shall consist of dimensions, lines and grades as Engineer in accordance with these untreated as called for on the Plans 402.2 Material Requirements 402.2.1 Timber It shall conform to the requirements of Item 713, Treated and Untreated Timber. 402.2.2 Hardware All hardware shall be of the kind and size specified on the Plans. All bolts, including drift bolts, shall be either wrought iron or medium steel. Washers shall be either ogee gray iron casting or malleable cast iron unless cut washers are specified on the Plans. Bolts shall have square heads and nuts, unless otherwise specified. Nails shall be cut or round wire of standard form. Spikes shall be cut wire or spikes, or boat spikes, as specified. All hardware shall be galvanized in conformity with AASHTO M 232 or cadmium plated per ASTM M 165 Type OS, unless otherwise specified on the Plans or Special Provisions. 402.2.3 Paint It shall conform to the requirements of Item 709, Paints or Item 411, Paint. 402.2.4 Structural Steel It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 712, Structural Metal. 402.2.5 Preservatives The preservative shall be creosote oil or creosote petroleum oil blend as called for on the Plans or by the Special Provisions, and shall conform to the Specifications for timber preservatives of the AASHTO M 133. When timber is intended for marine use, creosote petroleum oil blend shall not be used. the construction of timber structures to the shown on the Plans or as ordered by the Specifications. The timber shall be treated or or Special Provisions.

402.3

Construction Requirements

402.3.1 Storage of Materials All timber which is to be stored on the job for any length of time prior to its use in the structure shall be neatly stacked in piles to prevent warping or distortion. Untreated timber shall be open-stacked at least 300mm above the ground and the stack shall be sloped so as to shed water. Creosote-treated timber shall be close-stacked and piled to prevent warping. The ground underneath and in the vicinity of all material piles shall be cleared of all weeds and rubbish. 402.3.2 Treated Timber All treated timber shall be framed prior to treating. Care shall be exercised in handling all treated timber so as not to break or penetrate the treatment with any tool or handling equipment. Any piece of timber that has been damaged by the Contractor shall be replaced by him without extra compensation. Any cut made or hole bored in treated timber that shall expose untreated wood shall be given three coats of hot creosote or carbolineum before the exposed part is assembled. 402.3.3 Timber Treatment Treatment shall consist of the forcing of either creosote oil or a creosotepetroleum oil mixture into the outer fibers of the timber by a heat and pressure process. The treatment shall be so regulated that the curing process will not induce excessive checking. The minimum penetration of the preservative with the surface of the timber shall be 20mm. The minimum retention of preservative per cubic metre of timber shall be as follows: For general use, 195 kg by empty cell process For marine use, 320 kg by full cell process The Engineer shall be notified at least ten (10) days in advance of the date that the treating process will be performed in order that the untreated timber, the treatment process, and the finished treated timber may all be inspected. The Engineer will inspect the timber prior to treatment to determine conformance with the Specifications and suitability of conditions for treatment. He shall be permitted free access to the plant in order that temperatures, pressures and quantities and types of treatment materials used may be observed. Samples of the creosote or creosote-petroleum mixture shall be furnished as required for tests. After completion of the treatment, the timber shall be checked to determine penetration of treatment, amount of checking, quantity of free preservative remaining of the timber and any other visual evidence that the treatment has been

performed in a satisfactory manner. The penetration of treatment shall be determined by boring a sufficient number of well-distributed holes to determine the average penetration. All such holes shall be plugged with plugs approximately 2mm larger in diameter than the bit used in boring the holes. If the penetration of preservative is less than the required amount, the entire charge, or such parts thereof as are determined by the Engineer or his authorized representative to be unsatisfactory, may be retreated. If after retreatment, the penetration is still insufficient, the retreatment pieces shall be rejected. Any excessive checking caused by the treating process shall be cause for rejection of the pieces in which the excessive checking occurs. The treating plant shall be equipped with adequate thermometers and pressure gages so that the process can be accurately controlled and a continuous record made of stages of the treating process. If requested by the Engineer, records shall be furnished showing the duration, maximum and minimum temperatures and pressures used during all stages of the process. 402.3.4 Untreated Timber In structures of untreated timber, all of the following surfaces shall be coated thoroughly with two (2) coats of hot creosote oil or carbolineum before the timber are assembled: ends, tops and all contact surfaces of posts, sills, caps, floor beams and stringers, all ends, joints and contact surfaces of bracing. The back surface of all bulkheads and any other timber in direct contact with earth shall be similarly treated. 402.3.5 Bolts and Washers Washers of the size and type specified shall be used under all bolt heads and nuts that would otherwise be in contact with wood. Cast iron washers shall have a thickness equal to one fourth the diameter of the bolt and the diameter of the washer shall be four times its thickness. For malleable or plate washers, the diameter or side size of the square shall be equal to four times the diameter of the bolt. Cap washers shall be used when the timber is in contact with earth. All nuts shall be checked effectively after being finally tightened. 402.3.6 Pile Bents The pile shall be driven as indicated on the Plans, with a variation of the portion above the ground of not more than 6mm per 300mm from the vertical or batter indicated, or so that the cap may be placed in its proper location without inducing excessive stresses on the piles. Excessive manipulation of piles will not be permitted and the Contractor will be required to redrive or use other satisfactory methods to avoid such manipulations. No shimming on tops of piles will be permitted.

The piles for any one bent shall be carefully selected as to size and quality to avoid undue bending or distortion of the sway bracing. However, care shall be exercised in the distribution of piles of various sizes to secure uniform strength and rigidity in the bents of any given structure. Cut offs shall be accurately made to insure perfect hearing between caps and piles. 402.3.7 Frame Bents Concrete pedestal for the support of framed bents shall be finished carefully so that sills or posts will take even bearing on them. Dowels for anchoring sills or posts shall be set the concrete is cast and shall project at least 150mm above the tops of the pedestals. Sills shall have true and even bearing on piles or pedestals. They shall be drift-bolted with bolts extending into the piles or pedestals at least 150mm. When possible, all earth shall be removed from contact with sills so that there will be free circulation of air around the sills. 402.3.8 Caps Timber caps shall be placed to obtain even and uniform bearing over the tops of the supporting posts or piles with their ends in alignment. All caps shall be secured by driftbolts, set approximately at the center extending at least 230mm into the post or piles. 402.3.9 Bracing Bracing shall be bolted through at intersections to the pile, posts, caps or sills. 402.3.10 Stringers Stringers shall be sized at bearings and shall be placed in position so that knots near the edges will be in the top portions of the stringers. Outside stringers may have butt joints but interior stringers shall be lapped to take bearing over the full width of the floor beam or cap at each end. The lapped ends of untreated stringers shall be securely fastened to caps by driftbolts. When stringers are two panels in length, the joints shall be staggered. Cross-bridging between stringers shall be neatly and accurately framed and securely toe-nailed with at least two nails at each end. All cross-bridging members shall have full bearing at each end against the sides of stringers. Unless otherwise specified, cross bridging shall be placed at the center of each span. 402.3.11 Plank Floors Roadway and sidewalk floor planks, unless otherwise stipulated, shall be surfaced one side and one edge (SISIE). The planks shall be laid heartside down, with 7mm openings between them for seasoned materials and with tight joints for unseasoned material. Each plank shall be spiked securely to each joint or

supporting member. The planks shall be graded carefully as to thickness, and so laid that no two adjacent planks shall vary in thickness by more than 1.6mm. 402.3.12 Laminated or Strip Floors Planks for laminated or strip floors shall have a nominal thickness of 50mm and shall be surfaced to a uniform width (SIE), and when so specified, to a uniform thickness (SIS). Unless otherwise stipulated, no splicing of planks will be allowed. Planks shall be laid with the surfaced edge down and each plank shall be toe-nailed to each alternative stringer. The nailing of successive planks shall be staggered so that the spacing of nails along each stringer shall not be less than 100mm. In addition, each piece shall be nailed horizontally to adjacent pieces at 450mm centers, and staggered both horizontally and vertically with nails in adjacent pieces. All floors shall be cut to a straight line along the sides of the roadway. 402.3.13 Railing and Rail Posts Railing and rail posts shall be built as shown on the Plans and shall be constructed in a workmanlike and substantial manner. All railing and rail post materials shall be surfaced on four sides (S4S). All rails shall be continuous and squarely butt-joined at the post. 402.3.14 Wheel Guards Wheel guards shall be accurately constructed true to line and grade in accordance with the Plans. Unless otherwise specified, wheel guards shall be surfaced on one side and one edge (SISIE). Wheel guards shall be laid in sections not less than 3.60mm long. 402.4 Method of Measurement Timber structures shall be measured by the completed span and shall include all materials, equipment and labor used to finish the structure as called for in the Bid, Plans and Specifications. 402.5 Basis of Payment Payment for the timber structure measured in Section 402.4, Method of Measurement, shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, preservative treatment, if called for in the Contract, equipment, hardware and other metal parts, tools and labor necessary for the completion of the structure and painting, if required in a satisfactory manner and all incidentals necessary to complete the Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number 402 (1)

Description Timber Structure

Unit of Measurement Span

ITEM 403 METAL STRUCTURES 403.1 Description This work shall consist of steel structures and the steel structure portions of composite structures, constructed in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the Plans or established by the Engineer. The work will include the furnishing, fabricating, hauling, erecting, welding and painting of structural metals called for in the Special Provision or shown on the Plans. Structural metals will include structural steel, rivet, welding, special and alloy steels, steel forgings and castings and iron castings. This work will also include any incidental metal construction not otherwise provided for, all in accordance with these Specifications, Plans and Special Provisions. 403.2 Material Requirements Materials shall meet the requirements of Item 712, Structural Metal; Item 409, Welded Structural Steel, and Item 409, Welded Structural Steel; and Item 709, Paints. 403.3 Construction Requirements 403.3.1 Inspection

The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least fifteen (15) days notice prior to the beginning of work at the mill or shop, so that the required inspection may be made. The term mill means any rolling mill, shop or foundry where material for the work is to be manufactured or fabricated. No material shall be rolled or fabricated until said inspection has been provided. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with copies of the certified mill reports of the structural steel, preferably before but not later than the delivery of the steel to the job site. The Contractor shall furnish all facilities for inspection and the Engineer shall be allowed free access to the mill or shop and premises at all times. The Contractor shall furnish, without charge, all labor, machinery, material and tools necessary to prepare test specimens.

Inspection at the mill or shop is intended as a means of facilitating the work and avoiding errors and it is expressly understood that it will not relieve the Contractor from any responsibility for imperfect material or workmanship and the necessity for replacing same. The acceptance of any material or finished member at the mill or shop by the Engineer shall not preclude their subsequent rejection if found defective before final acceptance of the work. Inspection of welding will be in accordance with the provision of Section 5 of the Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction of the American Welding Society. 403.3.2 Stock Material Control

When so specified in the Contract, stock material shall be segregated into classes designated as identified or unidentified. Identified material is material which can be positively identified as having been rolled from a given heat for which certified mill test can be produced. Unidentified material shall include all other general stock materials. When it is proposed to use unidentified material, the Engineer shall be notified of such intention at least fifteen (15) days in advance of commencing fabrication to permit sampling and testing. When so indicated or directed, the Contractor shall select such material as he wishes to use from stock, and place it in such position that it will be accessible for inspection and sampling. The Contractor shall select identified material from as few heat numbers as possible, and furnish the certified mill test reports on each of such heat numbers. Two samples shall be taken from each heat number as directed, one for a tension test and one for a bend test. In the case of unidentified stock, the Engineer may, at his discretion, select any number of random test specimens. Each bin from which rivets or bolts are taken shall subject to random test. Five rivets or bolts may be selected by the Engineer from each bin for test purposes. Structural material, either plain or fabricated, shall be stored above the ground upon platforms, skids, or other supports. It shall be kept free from dirt, grease, or other foreign matter, and shall be protected as far as practicable from corrosion. 403.3.3 Fabrication

These Specifications apply to riveted, bolted and welded construction. The Contractor may, however, with approval of the Engineer, substitute high tensile strength steel bolts equivalent to the rivets in any connection. Workmanship and finish shall be in accordance with the best general practice in modern bridge shops. Portions of the work exposed to view shall be finished neatly. Shearing, flame cutting, and chipping shall be done carefully and accurately.

Structural material, either plain or fabricated, shall be stored above the ground upon platforms, skids or other supports. It shall be kept free from dirt, grease or other foreign matter, and shall be protected as far as practicable from corrosion. Rolled material before being laid off or worked must be straight. If straightening is necessary, it shall be done by methods that will not injure the metal. Sharp kinks and bends will be cause for rejection of the material. Preparation of material shall be in accordance with AWS (American Welding Society) D 1.1, paragraph 3.2 as modified by AASHTO Standard Specification for Welding of Structural Steel Highway Bridges. 403.3.4 Finishing and Shaping be true to line and free from twists, bends and

Finished members shall open joints. 1. Edge Planing

Sheared edges of plates more than 15.9 mm in thickness and carrying calculated stresses shall be planed to a depth of 6.3 mm. Re-entrant cuts shall be filleted before cutting. 2. Facing of Bearing Surfaces The surface finish of bearing and based plates and other bearing surfaces that are to come in contact with each other or with concrete shall meet the American National Standards Institute surface roughness requirements as defined in ANSI B-46.1-47, Surface Roughness Waviness and Lay, Part I: Steel slabs Heavy plates in contact in shoes to Be welded Milled ends of compression members, stiffeners and fillers Bridge rollers and rockers Pins and pin holes Sliding bearings 3. Abutting Joints Abutting joints in compression members and girders flanges, and in tension members where so specified on the drawings, shall be faced and brought to an even bearing. Where joints are not faced, the opening shall not exceed 6.3 mm. ANSI 2,000 ANSI 1,000 ANSI 500 ANSI 250 ANSI 125 ANSI 125

4.

End Connection Angles Floor beams, stringers and girders having end connection angles shall be built to plan length back to back of connection angles with a permissible tolerance of 0 mm to minus 1.6 mm. If end connections are faced, the finished thickness of the angles shall not be less than that shown on the detail drawings, but in no case less than 9.5 mm.

5.

Lacing Bars The ends of lacing bars shall be neatly rounded unless another form is required.

6.

Fabrication of Members Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, steel plates for main members and splice plates for flanges and main tension members, not secondary members, shall be cut and fabricated so that the primary direction of rolling is parallel to the direction of the main tensile and/or compressive stresses. Fabricated members shall be true to line and free from twists, bends and open joints.

7.

Web Plates (Riveted or Bolted) In girders having no cover plates and not to be encased in concrete, the top edges of the web shall not extend above the backs of the flange angles and shall not be more than 3.2 mm below at any point. Any portion of the plate projection beyond the angles shall be chipped flush with the backs of the angles. Web plates of girders having cover plates may not be more than 12.7 mm less in width than the distance back to back of flange angles. Splices in webs of girders without cover plates shall be sealed on top with red lead paste prior to painting. At web splices, the clearance between the ends of the plates shall not exceed 9.5 mm. The clearance at the top and bottom ends of the web slice plates shall not exceed 6.3 mm.

8.

Bent Plates Cold-bent load-carrying rolled-steel plates shall conform to the following: a. They shall be so taken from the stock plates that the bendline will be at right angles to the direction of rolling, except that cold-bent ribs for orthotropic deck bridges may be bent in the direction of rolling if permitted by the Engineer.

b. The radius of bends shall be such that no cracking of the plate occurs. Minimum bend radii, measured to the concave face of the metal, are shown in the following table: ASTM DESIGATION A36 A242 A440 A441 A529 Gr.42 Gr.45 Gr.50 Gr.55 Gr.60 Gr.65 A572 A588 A514b 2t 3t 2t 5t 2t a--3t a--3t THICKNESS, t in mm Over 25.4 Over 38.1 Over 12.7 To 25.4 to 38.1 to 50.08 2t 3t 4t 5t a--a--6t a--a--5t a--a-----------3t 4t 5t 3t 4t 5t 6t ---4t a--a------------------------

Up to 6.3 1.5t 2t 2.5t 2t 2t 2t 2t 2.5t 3t 3.5t 4t

Over 6.3 To 12.7 1.5t 3t 3.5t 3t 2t 2t 2t 2.5t 3t 3.5t 4t

It is recommended that steel in this thickness range be bent hot. Hot bending however, may result in a slight decrease in the as-rolled mechanical properties. The mechanical properties of ASTM A 514 steel results from a quench-andtemper-operation. Hot bending may adversely affect these mechanical properties. If necessary to hotbend, fabricator should discuss procedure with steel supplier. c. Before bending, the corners of the plate be rounded to a radius of 1.6 mm throughout that portion of the plate where the bending is to occur. 9. Fit of Stiffeners End stiffeners of girders and stiffeners intended as supports for concentrated loads shall have full bearing (either milled, ground or on weldable steel in compression areas of flanges, welded as shown on the Plans or specified) on the flanges to which they transmit load or from which they receive load. Stiffeners not intended to support concentrated loads shall, unless shown or specified otherwise, fit sufficiently tight to exclude water after being painted, except that for welded flexural members, the ends of stiffeners adjacent to the

tension flanges shall be cut back as shown on the Plans. under stiffeners shall fit within 6.3 mm at each end.

Fillers

Welding will be permitted in lieu of milling or grinding if noted on the Plans or in the Special Provisions. Brackets, clips, gussets, stiffeners, and other detail material shall not be welded to members or parts subjected to tensile stress unless approved by the Engineer. 10. Eyebars Pin holes may be flame cut at least 50.8 mm smaller in diameter than the finished pin diameter. All eyebars that are to be placed side by side in the structure shall be securely fastened together in the order that they will be placed on the pin and bored at both ends while so clamped. Eyebars shall be packed and matchmarked for shipment and erection. All identifying marks shall be stamped with steel stencils on the edge of one head of each member after fabrication is completed so as to be visible when the bars are nested in place on the structure. The eyebars shall be straight and free from twists and the pin holes shall be accurately located on the centerline of the bar. The inclination of any bar to the plane of the truss shall not exceed 1.6 mm to 305 mm. The edges of eyebars that lie between the transverse centerline of their pin holes shall be cut simultaneously with two mechanically operated torches abreast of each other, guided by a substantial template, in such a manner as to prevent distortion of the plates. 11. Annealing and Stress Relieving Structural members which are indicated in the Contract to be annealed or normalized shall have finished machining, boring and straightening done subsequent to heat treatment. Normalizing and annealing (full annealing) shall be in accordance with ASTM E 44. The temperatures shall be maintained uniformly throughout the furnace during heating and cooling so that the temperature at no two points on the member will differ by more than 37.80C at any one time. Members of A514/A517 steels shall not be annealed or normalized and shall be stress relieved only with the approval of the Engineer. A record of each furnace charge shall identify the pieces in the charge and show the temperatures and schedule actually used. Proper instruments including recording pyrometers, shall be provided for determining at any time the temperatures of members in the furnace. The records of the treatment operation shall be available to and meet the approval of the Engineer. Members, such as bridge shoes, pedestals, or others which are built up by welding sections of plate together shall be stress relieved

in accordance with the provisions of Subsection 403.3.11 when required by the Plans, Specifications or Special Provisions governing the Contract. 12. Tests When full size tests of fabricated structural members or eyebars are required by the Contract, the Plans or Specifications will state the number and nature of the tests, the results to be attained and the measurements of strength, deformation or other performances that are to be made. The Contractor will provide suitable facilities, material, supervision and labor necessary for making and recording the tests. The members tested in accordance with the Contract will be paid for in accordance with Subsection 403.3.5.1. The cost of testing, including equipment handling, supervision labor and incidentals for making the test shall be included in the contract price for the fabrication or fabrication and erection of structural steel, whichever is the applicable item in the Contract, unless otherwise specified. 403.3.5 Pins and Rollers

Pins and rollers shall be accurately turned to the dimensions shown on the Plans and shall be straight, smooth, and free from flaws. Pins and rollers more 228.6 mm or less in diameter may either be forged and annealed. Pins and rollers 228.6 mm or less in diameter may either be forged and annealed or coldfinished carbon-steel shafting. In pins larger than 228.6 mm in diameter, a hole not less than 50.8 mm in diameter shall be bored full length along the axis after the forging has been allowed to cool to a temperature below the critical range under suitable conditions to prevent injury by too rapid cooling and before being annealed. Pin holes shall be bored true to the specified diameter, smooth and straight, at right angles with the axis of the member and parallel with each other unless otherwise specified. The final surface shall be produced by a finishing cut. The distance outside to outside of holes in tension members and inside to inside of holes in compression members shall not vary from that specified more than 0.8 mm. Boring of holes in built-up members shall be done after the riveting is completed. The diameter of the pin hole shall not exceed that of the pin by more than 0.51 mm for pins 127 mm or less in diameter, or 0.8 mm for larger pins. The pilot and two driving nuts for each size of pin shall be furnished, unless otherwise specified.

403.3.6

Fastener Holes (Rivets and Bolts)

All holes for rivets or bolts shall be either punched or drilled. Material forming parts or a member composed of not more than five thickness of metal may be punched 1.6 mm larger than the nominal diameter of the rivets or bolts whenever the thickness of the material is not greater than 19 mm for structural steel, 15.9 mm for high-strength steel or 12.7 mm for quenched and tempered alloy steel, unless subpunching and reaming is required for field connections. When there are more than five thicknesses or when any of the main material is thicker than 19 mm for structural steel, 15.9 mm for high-strength steel, or 12.7 mm for quenched and tempered alloy steel, all holes shall either be subdrilled or drilled full size. When required for field connections, all holes shall either be subpunched or subdrilled (subdrilled if thickness limitation governs) 4.8 mm smaller and, after assembling, reamed 1.6 mm larger or drilled full size 1.6 mm larger than the nominal diameter of the rivets or bolts. When permitted by design criteria, enlarged or slotted holes are allowed with high-strength bolts. For punched holes, the diameter of the die shall not exceed the diameter of the punch by more than 1.6 mm. If any holes must be enlarged to admit the fasteners, they shall be reamed. Holes shall be clean cut, without torn or ragged edges. Poor matching of holes will be cause for rejection. Reamed holes shall be cylindrical, perpendicular to the member, and not more than 1.6 mm larger than the nominal diameter of the fasteners. Where practicable, reamers shall be directed by mechanical means. Drilled holes shall be 1.6 mm larger than the nominal diameter of the fasteners. Burrs on the outside surfaces shall be removed. Poor matching of holes will be cause for rejection. Reaming and drilling shall be done with twist drills. If required by the Engineer, assembled parts shall be taken apart for removal of burrs caused by drilling. Connecting parts requiring reamed or drilled holes shall be assembled and securely held while being reamed or drilled and shall be matchmarked before disassembling. Unless otherwise specified, holes for all field connections and field splices of main truss or arch members, continuous beams, towers (each face), bents, plate girders and rigid frames shall be subpunched (or subdrilled if subdrilling is required) and subsequently reamed while assembled in the shop in accordance with Subsection 403.3.7. All holes for floor-beam and stringer field end connections shall be subpunched and reamed to a steel template reamed while being assembled. Reaming or drilling full size of field connection through templates shall be done after templates have been located with the utmost care as to position and angle and firmly bolted in place. Templates used for the reaming of matching members, or of the opposite faces of one member, shall be exact duplicated.

Templates for connections which duplicate shall be so accurately located that like members are duplicates and require no matchmarking. If additional subpunching and reaming is required, it will be specified in the Special Provisions or on the Plans. Alternately, for any field connection or splice designated above in lieu of sub-sized holes and reaming while assembled, or drilling holes full-size while assembled, the Contractor shall have the option to drill bolt holes full-size in unassembled pieces and/or connections including templates for use with matching sub-sized and reamed holes means of suitable numerically-controlled (N/C) drilling equipment subject to the specific provisions contained in this Subsection. If N/C drilling equipment is used, the Engineer, unless otherwise stated in the Special Provisions or on the Plans, may require the Contractor, by means if check assemblies to demonstrate that this drilling procedure consistently produces holes and connections meeting the requirements of conventional procedures. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a detailed outline of the procedures that he proposes to follow in accomplishing the work from initial drilling through check assembly, if required, to include the specific members of the structure that may be N/C drilled, the sizes of the holes, the location of common index and other reference points, composition of check assemblies and all other pertinent information. Holes drilled by N/C drilling equipment shall be drilled to appropriate size either through individual pieces, or any combination of pieces held tightly together. All holes punched full size, subpunched or subdrilled shall be so accurately punched that after assembling (before any reaming is done), a cylindrical pin 3.2 mm smaller in diameter than the nominal size of the punched hole may be entered perpendicular to the face of the member, without drifting, in at least 75 percent of the contiguous holes in the same plane. If the requirement is not fulfilled, the badly punched pieces will be rejected. If any hole will not pass a pin 4.8 mm smaller in diameter than the nominal size of the punched holes, this will cause for rejection. When holes are reamed or drilled, 85 percent of the holes in any continuous group shall, after reaming or drilling, show no offset greater than 0.8 mm between adjacent thickness of metal. All steel templates shall have hardened steel bushings in holes accurately dimensioned from the center lines if the connections as inscribed on the template. The center lines shall be used in locating accurately the template from the milled or scribed ends of the members.

403.3.7

Shop Assembly 1. Fitting for Riveting and Bolting Surfaces of metal in contact shall be cleaned before assembling. The parts of a member shall be assembled, well pinned and firmly drawn together with bolts before reaming or riveting is commenced. Assembled pieces shall be taken apart, if necessary, for the removal of burrs and shavings produced by the reaming operation. The member shall be free from twists, bends and other deformation. Preparatory to the shop riveting of full-sized punched material, the rivet holes, if necessary, shall be spear-reamed for the admission of the rivets. The reamed holes shall not be more than 1.6 mm larger than the nominal diameter of the rivets. End connection angles, and similar parts shall be carefully adjusted to correct positions and bolted, clamped, or otherwise firmly in place until riveted. Parts not completely riveted in the shop shall be secured by bolts, in so far as practicable, to prevent damage in shipment and handling. 2. Shop Assembling The field connections of main members of trusses, arches, continuous beam spans, bents, towers (each face), plate girders and rigid frames shall be assembled in the shop with milled ends of compression members in full bearing, and then shall have their subsize holes reamed to specified size while the connections are assembled. Assembly shall be Full Truss or Girders Assembly unless Progressive Chord Assembly or Special Complete Structure Assembly is specified in the Special Provisions or on the Plans. Check assemblies with Numerically-Controlled Drilled Fields Connections shall be in accordance with the provision of 2 (f) of this Subsection. Each assembly, including camber, alignment, accuracy of holes and fit of milled joints, shall be approved by the Engineer before reaming is commenced or before an N/C drilled check assembly is dismantled. The fabricator shall furnished the Engineer a camber diagram showing the camber at each panel point in the cases of trusses or arch ribs and at the location of field splices and fractions of span length (0.25 points minimum, 0.10 points maximum) in case of continuous beam and girders or rigid frames. When the shop assembly is Full Truss or Girder Assembly or Special Complete Structure Assembly, the camber diagram shall show the camber

measured in assembly. When any of the other methods of shop assembly is used, the camber diagram shall show calculated camber. Methods of assembly shall be described below: a. Full of Truss or Girders Assembly shall consist of assembling all members of each truss, arch rib, bent, tower face, continuous beam line, plate girder or rigid frame at one time. b. Progressive Truss or Girder Assembly shall consist of assembling initially for each truss, arch rib, bent, tower face, continuous beam line, plate girder, or rigid frame all members in at least three continuous shop sections or panels but not less than the number of panels associated with three continuous chord lengths (i.e., length between field splices) and not less than 45.72 m in case of structures longer than 45.72 m. At least one shop section or panel or as many panels as are associated with a chord length shall be added at the advancing end of the assembly before any member is removed from the rearward end so that the assembled portion of the structure is never less than that specified above. c. Full Chord Assembly shall consist of assembling with geometric angles at the joints, the full length of each chord or each truss or open spandrel arch, or each leg of each bent or tower, than reaming their field connection holes while the members are assembled; and reaming the web member connections to steel templates set at geometric (not cambered) angular relation to the chord lines. Field connection holes in web members shall be reamed to steel templates. At least one end of each web member shall be milled or shall be scribed normal to the longitudinal axis of the member and the templates of both ends of the member shall be accurately located from one of the milled ends or scribed line. d. Progressive Chord Assembly shall consist of assembling contiguous chord members in the manner specified for Full Chord Assembly, and in the number and length specified for Progressive Truss or Girder Assembly. e. Special Complete Structure Assembly shall consist of assembling the entire structure, including the floor system. (This procedure is ordinarily needed only for complicated structures such as those having curbed girders, or extreme skew in combination with severe grade or camber). The assembly including camber, alignment, accuracy of holes and fit of milled joints shall be approved by the Engineer before reaming is commenced.

A Contractor shall furnished the Engineer a camber diagram showing the camber at each panel point of each truss, arch rib, continuous beam line, plate girder or rigid frame. When shop assembly is Full Truss or Girder Assembly or Special Complete Structure Assembly, the camber diagram shall show the camber measured in assembly. When any of the other methods of shop assembly is used, the camber diagram shall show calculated camber. f. Check Assemblies with Numerically-Controlled Drilled Field Connections. A check assembly shall be required for each major structural type of each project, unless otherwise designated on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, and shall consist of at least three contiguous shop sections or, in a truss, all members in at least three contiguous panels but not less than the number of panels associated with three contiguous chord lengths (i.e., length between field splices). Check assemblies should be based on the proposed order erection, joints in bearings, special complex points, and similar considerations. Such special points could be the portals of skewed trusses, etc. Use of either geometric angles (giving theoretically zero secondary stresses under deadload conditions after erection) or cambered angles (giving theoretically zero secondary stresses under no-load conditions) should be designated on the Plans or in the Special Provisions. The check assemblies shall be preferably be the first such sections of each major structural type to be fabricated. No matchmaking and no shop assemblies other than the check assemblies shall be required. If the check assembly fails in some specific manner to demonstrate that the required accuracy is being obtained, further check assemblies may be required by the Engineer for which there shall be no additional cost to the contracting authority. 403.3.8 Rivets and Riveting

The size of rivets called for on the Plans shall be the size before heating. Rivet heads shall be of standard shape, unless otherwise specified, and of uniform size for the same diameter of rivet. They shall be full, neatly made, concentric with the rivets holes, and in full contact with the surface of the member. Sufficient rivets for field connections shall be furnished to rivet the entire structure with an ample surplus to replace all rivets burned, lost or cut out. Rivets shall be heated uniformly to a light cherry red color and shall be driven while hot. Any rivet whose point is heated more than the remainder shall

not be driven. When a rivet is ready for driving, it shall be free from slag, scale and other adhering matter. Any rivet which is sealed excessively, will be rejected. All rivets that are loose, burned, badly formed, or otherwise defective shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory rivets. Any rivet whose head is defective in size or whose head is driven off center will be considered defective and shall be removed. Stitch rivets that are loosened by driving of adjacent rivets shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory rivets. Caulking, recapping, or double gunning of rivets heads will not be permitted. Shop rivets shall be driven by direct-acting rivet machines when practicable. Approved bevelled rivet sets shall be used for forming rivet heads on sloping surfaces. When the use of a direct-acting rivet machine is not practicable, pneumatic hammers of approved size shall be used. Pneumatic bucking tools will be required when the size and length of the rivets warrant their use. Rivets may be driven cold provided their diameter is not over 9.5 mm. 403.3.9 Bolted Connections, Unfurnished, Turned and Ribbed Bolts 1. General Bolts under this Subsection shall conform to Specifications for Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners, ASTM A 307. Specifications for high strength bolts are covered under Subsection 403.3.10. Bolts shall be unfinished, turned or an approved form of ribbed bolts with hexagonal nuts and heads except that ribbed bolts shall have button heads. Bolted connections shall be used only as indicated by the Plans or Special Provisions. Bolts not tightened to the proof loads shall have single self locking nuts or double nuts. Bevel washers shall be used where bearing faces have a slope or more than 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis. Bolts shall be of such length that will extend entirely through their nuts but not more than 6.3 mm beyond them. Bolts shall be driven accurately into the holes without damage to the threads. A snap shall be used to prevent damage to the heads. The heads and nuts shall be drawn tight against the work with the full effort of a man using a suitable wrench, not less than 381 mm long for bolts of nominal diameter 19 mm and over. Heads of bolts shall be tapped with a hammer while the nuts are being tightened.

2. Unfinished Bolts Unfinished bolts shall be furnished unless other types are specified. The number of bolts furnished shall be 5 percent more than the actual number shown on the Plans for each size and length. 3. Turned Bolts The surface of the body of turned bolts shall meet the ANSI roughness rating value of 125. Heads and nuts shall be hexagonal with standard dimensions for bolts of the nominal size specified or the next larger nominal size. Diameter of threads shall be equal to the body of the bolt or the nominal diameter of the bolt specified. Holes for turned bolts shall be carefully reamed with bolts furnished to provide for a light driving fit. Threads shall be entirely outside of the holes. A washer shall be provided under the nut. 4. Ribbed Bolts The body of ribbed shall be of an approved form with continuous longitudinal ribs. The diameter of the body measured on a circle through the points of the ribs shall be 1.98 mm greater than the nominal diameter specified for the bolts. Ribbed bolts shall be furnished with round heads conforming to ANSI B 18.5 unless otherwise specified. Nuts shall be hexagonal, either recessed or with a washer of suitable thickness. Ribbed bolts shall make a driving fit with the holes. The hardness of the ribs shall be such that the ribs do not mash down enough to permit the bolts to turn in the holes during tightening. If for any reason the bolt twists before drawing tight, the holes shall be carefully reamed and an oversized bolt used as a replacement. The Contractor shall provide and supply himself with oversize bolts and nuts for this replacement in an amount not less than ten percent (10%) of the number of ribbed bolts specified. 403.3.10 Bolted Connections (High Tensile-Strength Bolts) 1. Bolts Bolts shall be AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325 or AASHTO M 253) tensioned to a high tension. Other fasteners which meet the chemical requirements of AASHTO M 164 or M 253 and which meet the mechanical requirements of the same specification in full size tests and which have body diameter and bearing areas under the head and nut, or their equivalents, not less than those provided by a bolt and nut of the same nominal dimensions prescribed above, may be used subject to the approval of the Engineer.

Bolts lengths shall be determined by adding the grip-length values given in Table 403.1 to the total thickness of connected material. The values of Table 403.1 compensate for manufacturers tolerance, the use of heavy semi-finished hexagon nut and a positive stick-through at the end of the bolt. For each hardened flat washer that is used and 4 mm to the tabular value and for each bevelled washer add 7.9 mm. The length determined shall be adjusted to the next longer 6.3 mm. Table 403.1 Grip-Length Values Bolts Size (mm) To determine required bolt length, add grip (mm) * 17.5 22.2 25.4 28.6 31.7 38.1 41.3 44.4 47.6

9.5 12.7 19.0 22.2 25.4 28.6 31.7 34.9 38.1

* Does not include allowance for washer thickness 2. Bolted Parts The slope of surface of bolted parts in contact with the bolt head and nut shall not exceed 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis. Bolted parts shall fit solidly together when assembled and shall not be separated by gaskets or any other interposed compressible material. When assembled, all joint surfaces, including those adjacent to the bolt head, nuts or washers, shall be free of scale, except tight mill scale, and shall also be free of burrs, dirt and other foreign material that would prevent solid seating of the parts. Paint is permitted unconditionally in bearing-type connections. In friction-type connections, the Class, as defined below, indicating the condition of the contact surfaces shall be specified on the Plans. Where no Class is specified, all joint surfaces shall be free of scale, except tight mill scale and shall not have a vinyl wash. a. Classes A, B and C (uncoated). Contact surfaces shall be free of oil, paint, lacquer or other coatings. b. Class D (hot-dip galvanized and roughened). Contact surfaces shall be tightly scored by wire brushing or blasting after galvanizing and prior to assembly. The wire brushing treatment

shall be a light application of manual or power brushing that marks or scores the surface but remove relatively little of the zinc coating. The blasting treatment shall be a light brush-off treatment which will produce a dull gray appearance. However, neither treatment should be severed enough to produce any break or discontinuity in the zinc surface. c. Classes E and F (blast-cleaned, zinc rich paint). Contact surfaces shall be coated with organic or inorganic zinc rich paint as defined in the Steel Structures Painting Council Specification SSPC 12.00. d. Classes G and H (blast-cleaned, metallized zinc or aluminum). Contact surfaces shall be coated in accordance with AWS C2.2, Recommended Practice for Metallizing with Aluminum and Zinc for Protection of Iron and Steel, except that subsequent sealing treatments, described in Section IV therein shall not be used. e. Class I (vinyl wash). Contact surfaces shall be coated in accordance with the provisions of the Steel Structure Painting Council Pretreatment Specifications SSPC PT3. AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) Type 2 and AASHTO M 253 bolts shall not be galvanized nor shall they be used to connect galvanized material. 3. Installation a. Bolt Tension. Each fastener shall be tightened to provide, when all fasteners in the joints are tight at least the minimum bolt tension shown in Table 403.2 for the size of fastener used. Threaded bolts shall be tightened with properly calibrated wrenches or by the turn-of-nut method. If required, because of bolt entering and wrench operation clearances, tightening by either procedure may be done by turning the bolt while the nut is prevented from rotating. Impact wrenches, if used, shall be of adequate capacity and sufficiently supplied with air to perform the required tightening of each bolt in approximately ten seconds. AASHTO M 253 and galvanized AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) bolts shall not be reused. Other AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) bolts may be reused, but not more than once, if approved by the Engineer. Retightening previously tightened bolts which may have been loosened by the tightening of adjacent bolts shall not be considered as a reuse. b. Washers. All fasteners shall have a hardened washer under the element (nut or bolt head) turned in tightening except that AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) bolts installed by the turn of the

nut method in holes which are not oversized or slotted may have the washer omitted. Hardened washers shall be used under both the head and nut regardless of the element turned in the case of AASHTO M 253 bolts if the material against which it bears has a specified yield strength less than 275.76 MPa. Table 403.2 Bolt Tension Minimum Bolt Tension1, kg. AASHTO M AASHTO M 253 164 (ASTM A (ASTM A 420) 325) Bolts Bolts 5 466 6 758 8 709 10 569 12 882 15 821 13 268 21 999 23 360 24 312 25 605 36 786 32 522 45 858 38 760 55 111 47 174 66 905

Bolt Size, mm

12.7 15.9 19.0 22.2 25.4 28.6 31.7 34.9 38.1

1

Equals to 70 percent of specified minimum tensile strength bolts. Where an outer face of the bolted parts has a slope of more than 1:20 with respect to a Plane normal to the bolt axis, a smooth bevelled washer shall be used to compensate for the lack of parallel line.

c. Calibrated Wrench Tightening. When Calibrated wrenches are used to provide the bolt tension as specified above, their setting shall be such as to induce a bolt tension 5 to 10 percent in excess of this value. These wrenches shall be calibrated at least once each working day by tightening, in a device capable of indicating actual bolt tension, not less than three typical bolts of each diameter from the bolts to be installed. Power wrenches shall be adjusted to installed or cut-out at the selected tension. If manual torque wrenches are used, the torque indication corresponding to the calibrating tension shall be noted and used in the installation of all the tested lot. Nuts shall be turned in the tightening direction when torque is measured. When using calibrated wrenches to install several bolts in a single joint, the wrench shall be returned to touch-up bolts previously tightened which may have been loosened by the tightening of adjacent bolts, until all are tightened to the prescribed amount. d. Turn-of-Nut Tightening. When the turn-of-nut method is used to provide the bolt tension specified in (a) above, there shall first be enough bolts brought to a snug tight condition to insure that the parts of the joint are brought into full contact with each other.

Snug tight is defined as the tightness attained by a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a man using an ordinary spud wrench. Following this initial operation, bolts shall be placed in any remaining holes in the connection and brought to snug tightness. All bolts in the joints shall then be tightened additionally, by the applicable amount of nut rotation specified in Table 403.3 with tightening progressing systematically from the most rigid part of the joint to its free edges. During this operation, there shall be no rotation of the part not turned by the wrench. e. Lock Pin and Collar Fasteners. The installation of lock pin and collar fasteners shall be by methods approved by the Engineer. Table 403.3 Nut Rotation From Snug Tight Condition1 Disposition of Outer Faces of Bolted Parts Both faces One face Both faces normal to normal to bolt sloped not faces normal to axis and other more than 1:20 bolt axis face sloped from normal to not more 1:20 bolt axis (bevel (bevel washer washers not not used) used) 0.33 turn 0.5 turn 0.66 turn

Bolt Length measured from underside of head to extreme end of point Up to and including 4 diameters Over 4 diameters but not exceeding 8 diameters Over 8 diameters but not exceeding 12 diameters2
1

0.5 turn

0.66 turn

0.625 turn

0.66 turn

0.83 turn

1 turn

Nut rotation is relative to bolt, regardless of the element (nut or bolt) being turned. For bolts installed by turn and less the tolerance should be plus or minus 300, for bolts installed by 2/3 turn and more, the tolerance should be plus or minus 450. No research work has been performed by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural joints to establish the turn-of-nut procedure when bolt lengths exceed 12 diameters. Therefore, the required rotation must be determined by actual tests in a suitable tension device simulating the actual conditions.

4. Inspection The Engineer will determine that the requirements of these Specifications are not in the work. When the calibrated wrench method of tightening is used, the Engineer shall have full opportunity to witness the calibration tests. The Engineer will observe the installation and tightening of the bolts to determine that the selected tightening procedure is properly used and will determine that all bolts are tightened. The following inspection shall be used unless a more extensive or different procedure is specified: a. The Contractor shall use an inspecting wrench which may either be a torque wrench or a power wrench that can be accurately adjusted in accordance with the requirements of Subsection 403.3.10(3) (c) above, in the presence of the Engineer. b. Three bolts of the same grade, size and condition as those under inspection shall be placed individually in a calibration device capable of indicating bolt tension. Length may be any length representative of bolts used in the structure. There shall be a washer under the part turned in tightening each bolt. c. When the inspecting wrench is a torque wrench, each of the three bolts specified above shall be tightened in the calibration device by any convenient means to the minimum tension specified for its size in Table 403.2. The inspecting wrench shall then be applied to the tightened bolt and the torque necessary to run the nut or head 5 degrees (approximately 25.4 mm at 304.8 mm radius) in the tightening direction shall be determined. The average torque measured in the tests of three bolts shall be taken as the job inspection torque to be used in the manner specified below. d. When the inspecting wrench is a power wrench, it shall be adjusted so that it will tighten each of the three bolts specified to a tension at least 5 but not more than 10 percent greater than the minimum tension specified for its size in Table 403.2. This setting of wrench shall be taken as the job inspecting torque to be used in the manner specified below. e. Bolts, represented by the three samples bolts prescribed above, which have been tightening in the structure shall be inspected by applying, in the tightening direction, the inspecting wrench and its job inspecting torque to 10 percent of the bolts, but not less than two bolts selected at random in each connection. If no nut or bolt head is turned by this application of the job inspecting torque, the connection shall be accepted as properly tightened.

If any nut or bolt head is turned by the application of the job inspecting torque, this torque shall be applied to all bolts in the connection, and all bolts whose nut or head is turned by the job inspecting torque shall be tightened and re-inspected, or alternatively, the fabricator or erector, at his option may re-tighten all the bolts in the connection and then resubmit the connection for the specified inspection. 403.3.11 Welding Welding shall be done in accordance with the best modern practice and the applicable requirements at AWS D1.1 except as modified by AASHTO Standard Specifications for Welding of Structural Steel Highway Bridges. 403.3.12 Erection 1. General The Contractor shall provide the falsework and all tools, machinery and appliances, including driftpins and fitting-up bolts, necessary for the expeditious handling of the work and shall erect the metal work, remove the temporary construction, and do all work necessary to complete the structure as required by the Contract and in accordance with the Plans and these Specifications. If shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, the Contractor shall dismantle the old structure on the bridge site in accordance with Item 101, Removal of Structures and Obstructions. 403.3.13 Handling and Storing Materials Materials to be stored shall be placed on skids above the ground. It shall be kept clean and properly drained. Girders and beams shall be placed upright and shored. Long members, such as columns and chords, shall be supported on skids placed near enough together to prevent injury from deflection. If the Contract is for erection only, the Contractor shall check the material turned over to him against the shipping lists and report promptly in writing any shortage or damage discovered. He shall be responsible for the loss of any material while in his care, or for any damage caused to it after being received by him. 403.3.14 Falsework The false work shall be properly designed and substantially constructed and maintained for the loads which will come upon it. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer working drawings for falsework and working drawings for changes in any existing structure for maintaining traffic, in accordance with Clause 45 of Part G, Div. II, Vol. I.

403.3.15 Method and Equipment Before starting the work of erection, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully as to the method of erection he proposes to follow, and the amount and character of equipment he proposes to use, which shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The approval of the Engineer shall not be considered as relieving the Contractor of the responsibility for the safety of his method or equipment or from carrying out the work in full accordance with the Plans and Specifications. No work shall be done until such approval by the Engineer has been obtained. 403.3.16 Straightening Bent Materials The strengthening of plates, angles, other shapes and built-up members, when permitted by the Engineer, shall be done by methods that will not produce fracture or other injury. Distorted members shall be straightened by mechanical means or, if approved by the Engineer, by the carefully planned and supervised application of a limited amount of localized heat, except that heat straightening of AASHTO M 244 (ASTM A 514) or ASTM A 517 steel members shall be done only under rigidly controlled procedures, each application subject to the approval of the Engineer. In no case shall the maximum temperature of the AASHTO M 244 (ASTM A 514) or ASTM A 517 steels exceed 607.20C, nor shall the temperature exceed 5100C at the weld metal or within 152.4 mm of weld metal. Heat shall not be applied directly on weld metal. In all other steels, the temperature of the heated area shall not exceed 648.90C (a dull red) as controlled by temperature indicating crayons, liquids or bimetal thermometers. Parts to be heat-straightened shall be substantially free of stress and from external forces, except stresses resulting from mechanical means used in conjunction with the application of heat. Following the straightening of a bend or buckle, the surface of the metal shall be carefully inspected for evidence of fracture. 403.3.17 Assembling Steel The parts shall be accurately assembled as shown on the working drawings and any matchmarks shall be followed. The material shall be carefully handled so that no parts will be bent, broken or otherwise damaged. Hammering which will injure or distort the members shall not be done. Bearing surfaces and surfaces to be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before the members are assembled. Unless erected by the cantilever methods, truss spans shall be erected on blocking so placed as to give the trusses proper camber. The blocking shall be left in place until the tension chord splices are fully connected with permanent fasteners and all other truss connections pinned and erection bolted. Splices of butt joints of compression members, that are milled to bear and of railing shall not be permanently fastened until the spans have been swung, except that such permanent fastening may be accomplished for the truss members at any time that joint holes are fair. Splices and field connections shall

have one-half of the holes filled with erection bolts and cylindrical erection pins (half bolts and half pins) before placing permanent fasteners. Splices and connections carrying traffic during erection shall have three-fourths of the holes so filled, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Fitting-up bolts shall be of the same nominal diameter as the permanent fasteners and cylindrical erection pins will be 1.6 mm larger. 403.3.18 Riveting Pneumatic hammers shall be used for field riveting except when the use of hand tools is permitted by the Engineer. Rivets larger than 15.9 mm in diameter shall not be driven by hand. Cup-faced dollies, fitting the head closely to insure good bearing, shall be used. Connections shall be accurately and securely fitted up before the rivets are driven. Drifting shall be only such as to draw the parts into position and not sufficient to enlarge the holes or distort the metal. Unfair holes shall be reamed or drilled. Rivets shall be heated uniformly to a light cherry red color and shall be driven while hot. They shall not be overheated or burned. Rivet heads shall be full and symmetrical, concentric with the shank, and shall have full bearing all around. They shall not be smaller than the heads of the shop rivets. Rivets shall be tight and shall grip the connected parts securely together. Caulking or recupping will not be permitted. In removing rivets, the surrounding metal shall not be injured. If necessary, they shall be drilled out. 403.3.19 Pin Connections Pilot and driving nuts shall be used in driving pins. They shall be furnished by the Contractor without charge. Pins shall be so driven that the members will take full bearing on them. Pin nuts shall be screwed up tight and the threads burred at the face of the nut with a pointed tool. 403.3.20 Setting Shoes and Bearings Shoes and bearing shall not be placed on bridge seat bearing areas that are improperly finished, deformed, or irregular. They shall be set level in exact position and shall have full and even bearing. The shoes and bearing plates may be set by either of the following methods: 1. Method 1 The bridge seat bearing area shall be heavily coated with red lead paint and then covered with three layers of 405 to 472 g/m2 duck, each layer being coated thoroughly on its top surface with red lead paint. The shoes and bearing plates shall be placed in position while the paint is plastic.

As alternatives to canvas and red lead, and when so noted on the Plans or upon written permission by the Engineer, the following may be used: a. Sheet lead of the designated thickness b. Preformed fabric pad composed of multiple layers of 270 g/m2 duck impregnated and bound with high quality natural rubber or of equivalent and equally suitable materials compressed into resilient pads of uniform thickness. The number of plies shall be such as to produce the specified thickness, after compression and vulcanizing. The finished pads shall withstand compression loads perpendicular to the plane of the laminations of not less than 7 kg/mm2 without detrimental reduction in thickness or extension. c. Elastomeric bearing pads 2. Method 2 The shoes and bearing plates shall be properly supported and fixed with grout. No load shall be placed on them until the grout has set for at least 96 hours, adequate provision being made to keep the grout well moistened during this period. The grout shall consist of one part Portland Cement to one part of fine-grained sand. The location of the anchor bolts in relation to the slotted holes in expansion shoes shall correspond with the temperature at the time of erection. The nuts on anchor bolts at the expansion ends shall be adjusted to permit the free movement of the span. 403.3.21 Preparing Metal Surfaces for Painting All surfaces of new structural steel which are to be painted shall be blast cleaned unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or approved in writing by the Engineer. In repainting existing structures where partial cleaning is required, the method of cleaning will be specified in the Special Provision. The steel surfaces to be painted shall be prepared as outlined in the Steel Structures Painting Council Specifications (SSPC) meeting one of the following classes of surface preparation. a. b. c. d. SSPC SP 5 SSPC SP 6 SSPC SP 8 SSPC SP 10 White Metal Blast Cleaning Commercial Blast Cleaning Pickling Near White Blast Cleaning

Blast cleaning shall leave all surfaces with a dense and uniform anchor pattern of not less than one and one-half mills as measured with an approved surface profile comparator. Blast cleaned surfaces shall be primed or treated the same day blast cleaning is done. If cleaned surface rust or are contaminated with foreign material before painting is accomplished, they shall be recleaned by the Contractor at his expense. When paint systems No. 1 or 3 are specified, the steel surfaces shall be blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 10. When paint systems No. 2, 4 or 5 are specified, the steel surface shall be blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 6. 403.3.22 System of Paint The paint system to be applied shall consist of one as set forth in Table 403.4 and as modified in the Special Provisions. 403.3.23 Painting Metal Surfaces 1. Time of Application The prime coat of paint or pretreatment when specified, shall be applied as soon as possible after the surface has been cleaned and before deterioration of the surface occurs. Any oil, grease, soil, dust or foreign matter deposited on the surface after the surface preparation is completed shall be removed prior to painting. In the event the rusting occurs after completion of the surface preparation, the surfaces shall be again cleaned. Particular care shall be taken to prevent the contamination of cleaned surfaces with salts, acids, alkali, or other corrosive chemicals before the prime coat is applied and between applications of the remaining coats of paint. Such contaminants shall be removed from the surface. Under these circumstances, the pretreatments or, in the absence of a pretreatment, the prime coat of paint shall be applied immediately after the surface has been cleaned. 2. Storage of Paint and Thinner All paint and thinner should preferably be stored in a separate building or room that is well ventilated and free from excessive heat, sparks, flame or the direct ray of the sun. All containers of paint should remain unopened until required for use. Containers which have been opened shall be used first.

Paint which has livered, gelled, or otherwise deteriorated during storage shall not be used. Thixotropic materials which may be stirred to attain normal consistency are satisfactory. 3. Mixing and Thinning All ingredients in any container of paint shall be thoroughly mixed before use and shall be agitated often enough during application to keep the pigment in suspension. Paint mixed in the original container shall not be transferred until all settled pigment is incorporated into the vehicle. This does not imply that part of the vehicle cannot be poured off temporarily to simplify the mixing. Mixing shall be by mechanical methods, except that hard mixing will be permitted for container up to 19 litres in size. Mixing in open containers shall be done in a well ventilated area away from sparks or flames. Paint shall not be mixed or kept in suspension by means of an air stream bubbling under the paint surface. When a skin has formed in the container, the skin shall be cut loose from the sides of the container, removed, and discarded. If such skins are thick enough to have a practical effect on the composition and quality of the paint, the paint shall not be used. The paint shall be mixed in manner which will insure breaking up of all lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and a uniform composition. If mixing is done by hand, most of the vehicle shall be poured off into a clean container. The pigment in the paint shall be lifted from the bottom of the container with a broad, flat paddle, lumps shall be broken up, and the pigment thoroughly mixed with the vehicle. The poured off vehicle shall be returned to the paint with simultaneous stirring, or pouring repeatedly from one container to another until the composition is uniform. The bottom of the container shall be inspected for unmixed pigment. Tinting pastes or colors shall be wetted with a small amount of thinner, vehicle, or paint and thoroughly mixed. The thinned mixture shall be added to the large container of paint and mixed until the color is uniform. Paint which does not have a limited pot life, or does not deteriorate on standing, may be mixed at any time before using, but if settling has occurred, it must be remixed immediately before using. Paint shall not remain in spray pots, painters buckets, etc., overnight, but shall be gathered into a container and remixed before use.

No thinner shall be added to the paint unless necessary for proper application. In no case shall more than 0.5 litres of thinner be added per 3.8 litres unless the paint is intentionally formulated for greater thinning. The type of thinner shall comply with the paint specification. When the use of thinner is permissible, thinner shall be added to paint during the mixing process. Painters shall not add thinner to paint after it has been thinned to the correct consistency. All thinning shall be done under supervision of one acquainted with the correct amount and type of thinner to be added to the paint. Table 403.4 Paint System Paint System High Pollution or Coastal Mild Climate 1 x 2 x 3 x 4 x 5 X

Note: 1. Paint system shown for severe areas are satisfactorily in less severe areas. 2. Coastal - within 304.8 m of ocean or tidal water. High pollution-air pollution environment such as industrial areas. Mild-other than coastal areas not in air pollution environment. All structural steel shall be painted by one of the following systems. The required system or choice of systems will be shown in the Contract. System 4 is intended for use in mild climates or to repaint existing structures where the other systems are not compatible. Coating Thickness Specifications Min. Dry Film System 1 Vinyl Paint System Wash Prime 708.03 (b) 12.7 Intermediate Coat 708.03 (b) 38.10 50.80 3rd Coat 708.03 (b) 38.10 50.80 th 4 Coat 708.03 (b) 38.10 50.80 Finish Coat 708.03 (b) 38.10 50.80 Total thickness 165.10 203.20 System 2 Epoxy-Polymide System Prime Coat 708.03 (c) 50.80 76.20 Intermediate Coat 708.03 (c) 50.80 76.20 rd 3 Coat 708.03 (c) 50.80 76.20 Finish Coat 708.03 (c) 38.10 50.80 Total thickness 190.50 279.40 * The third coat may be eliminated in mild climates

Coating Thickness Specifications Min. Dry Film System 3 Inorganic Zinc-Rich Coating System Prime Coat 708.03(d) 88.90 127 Epoxy Intermediate Coat 708.03 (d) 40.80 76.20 Finish Coat 708.03 (d) 38.10 50.80 Total thickness 177.80 254 Alternate System Prime Coat 708.03 (d) 88.90 127 Wash Primer Tie Coat 708.03 (d) 12.70 Finish Coat 708.03 (d) 38.10 50.80 Total thickness 139.70 190.50 System 4 Alkyd-Oil-Basic Lead-Chromate System Prime Coat 708.03 (e) 38.10 50.80 Intermediate Coat 708.03 (e) 38.10 50.80 Finish Coat 708.03 (e) 38.10 50.80 Total thickness 114.30 152.40 * The paint system may be specified as four coats for new structure steel in mild climate, with a minimum thickness of 152.40 mm. System 5 Organic Zinc-Rich Paint System Prime Coat 708.03 (f) 38.10 50.80 Intermediate Coat 708.03 (f) 50.80 63.50 Wash Primer Tie Coat 708.03 (f) 12.70 Finish Coat 708.03 (f) 38.10 50.80 Total thickness 139.70 177.80 4. Application of Paint a. General

The oldest of each kind of paint shall be used first. Paint shall be applied by brushing or spraying or a combination of these methods. Daubers or sheepskins may be used when no other method is practicable for proper application in places of difficult access. Dipping, roller coating, or flow coating shall be used only when specifically authorized. All paints shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Open seams at contact surfaces of built up members which would retain moisture shall be caulked with red lead paste, or other approved material, before the second undercoat of paint is applied. Paint shall not be applied when the surrounding air temperature is below 4.40C. Paint shall not be applied when the temperature is expected to drop to 00C before the paint has dried. Paint shall not be applied to steel at a temperature over 51.70C unless the paint is specifically formulated for application at the proposed temperature, nor shall paint be applied to steel which is at a temperature that will

cause blistering or porosity or otherwise will be detrimental to the life of the paint. Paint shall not be applied in fog or mist, or when it is raining or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent. Paint shall not be applied to wet or damp surfaces. When paint must be applied in damp or cold weather, the steel shall be painted under cover, or protected, or sheltered or the surrounding air and the steel heated to a satisfactory temperature. In such cases, the above temperature and humidity conditions shall be met. Such steel shall remain under cover or be protected until dry or until weather conditions permit its exposure. Any applied paint exposed to excess humidity, rain or condensation shall first be permitted to dry. Then damaged areas of paint shall be removed, the surface again prepared and then repainted with the same number of coats of paint of the same kind as the undamaged areas. If stripe painting is stipulated in the Special Provisions or if the Contractor chooses to do so at his option, all edges, corners, crevices, rivets, bolts, weld and sharp edges shall be painted with the priming paint by brush before the steel receives first full prime coat of paint. Such striping shall extend for at least 25.4 mm from the edge. When practicable, this stripe coat shall be permitted to dry before the prime coat is applied, otherwise the stripe coat shall set to touch before the full prime coat is applied. However, the stripe coat shall not be permitted to dry for a period of long enough to allow rusting of the unprimed steel. When desired, the stripe coat may be applied after a complete prime coat. To the maximum extent practicable, each coat of paint shall be applied as continuous film of uniform thickness free of pores. Any thin spots or areas missed in the application shall be repainted and permitted to dry before the next coat of paint is applied. Film thickness is included in the description of paint systems. Each coat of paint shall be in a proper state of cure or dryness before application of the succeeding coat. b. Brush Application

Paint shall be worked into all crevices and corners where possible and surfaces not accessible to brushes shall be painted by spray, doubers, or sheepskins. All runs or rags shall be brushed out. There shall be a minimum of brush marks left in the paint.

c.

Spray Application of Paint

The equipment used for spray application of paint shall be suitable for the intended purpose, shall be capable of properly atomizing the paint to be applied and shall be equipped with suitable pressure regulators and gages. The air caps, nozzles, and needles shall be those recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment for the material being sprayed. The equipment shall be kept in satisfactory condition to permit proper paint application. In closed or recirculating paint spray system, where gas under pressure is used over the liquid, the gas shall be an inert, one such as nitrogen. Traps or separators shall be provided to remove oil and water from the compressed air. These traps or separators shall be adequate size and shall be drained periodically during operations. The air from the spray gun impinging against the surface shall show no water or oil. Paint ingredients shall be kept properly mixed in the spray pots or containers during paint applications either by continuous mechanical agitation or by intermittent agitation as frequently as necessary. The pressure on the material in the pot and of the air at the guns shall be adjusted for optimum spraying effectiveness. The pressure on the material in the pot shall be adjusted when necessary for changes in elevation of the gun above the pot. The atomizing air pressure at the gun shall be high enough to atomize the paint properly but not so high as to cause excessive fogging of paint, excessive evaporation of solvent or loss by overspray. Spray equipment shall be kept sufficiently clean so that dirt, dried paint and other foreign material are not deposited in the paint film. Any solvents left in the equipment shall be completely removed before applying paint to the surface being painted. Paint shall be applied in uniform layer, with overlapping at the edge of the spray pattern. The spray shall be adjusted so that the paint is deposited uniformly. During application, the gun shall be held perpendicular to the surface and at a distance which will insure that a wet layer of paint is deposited on the surface. The trigger of the gun should be released at the end of each stroke. All rums and sags shall be brushed out immediately or the paint shall be removed and the surface repainted. Spray application of prime coats shall in all cases be immediately followed by brushing Areas inaccessible to the spray gun shall be painted by brush, if not accessible by brush, daubers or sheepskins shall be used. Brushes shall be used to work paint into cracks, crevices and blind spots where are not adequately painted by spray.

d.

Shop Painting

Shop painting shall be done after fabrication and before any damage to the surface occurs from weather or other exposure. Shop contact surfaces shall not be painted unless specified. Surfaces not to be in contact but which will be inaccessible after assembly shall receive the full paint system specified or three shop coats of the specified before assembly. The areas of steel surfaces to be in contact with concrete shall not be painted, unless otherwise shown on the Plans, the areas of steel surfaces to be in contact with wood shall receive either the full paint coats specified or three shop coats of the specified primer. If paint would be harmful to a welding operator or would be detrimental to the welding operation or the finished welds, the steel shall not be painted within a suitable distance from the edges to be welded. Welding through inorganic zinc paint systems will not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer. Antiweld spatter coatings shall be removed before painting. Weld slag and flux shall be removed by methods at least as effective as those specified for the cleaning. Machine-finished or similar surfaces that are not to be painted, but do not require protections, shall be protected with a coating of rust inhibitive petroleum, other coating which may be more suitable, for special conditions. Erection marks and weight marks shall be copied on area that have been previously painted with the shop coat. e. Field Painting

Steel structures shall be painted as soon as practicable after erection. Metal which has been shop coated shall be touched up with the same type of paints as the shop coat. This touch-up shall include cleaning and painting of field connections, welds, rivets and all damaged or defective paint and rusted areas. The Contractor may, at his option, apply an overall coat of primer in place of touch-up spot painting. Surfaces (other than contact surfaces) which are accessible before erection but which will not be accessible after erection shall receive all field coats of paint before erection. If possible the final coat of paint shall not be applied until all concrete work is finished. If concreting or other operations damage

any paint, the surfaces shall be cleaned and repainted. All cement or concrete spatter and dripping shall be removed before any paint is applied. Wet paint shall be protected against damage from dust or other detrimental foreign matter to the extent practicable. f. Drying of Painted Metal

The maximum practicable time shall be allowed for paint to dry before recoating or exposure. No drier shall be added to paint on the job unless specifically called for in the Specifications for the paint. No painted metal shall be subjected to immersion before the paint is dried through. Paint shall be protected from rain, condensation, contamination, and freezing until dry, to the fullest extent practicable. g. Handling of Painted Steel

Painted steel shall not be handled until the paint has dried, except for necessary handling in turning for painting or stacking for drying. Paint which is damaged in handling shall be scraped off and touched-up with the same number of the coats and kinds of paint as were previously applied to the steel. Painted steel shall not be loaded for shipment or shipped until it is dry. Precautions shall be taken to minimize damage to paint films resulting from stocking members. 5. Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Paints a. Instrumentation

Dry paint film thickness shall be measured using Pull-Off (Type 1) or Fixed Probe (Type 2) Magnetic Gages. Type 1 gages include Tinsley, Elcometer, Microtest and Inspector models. Type 2 gage include Elcometric, Minitector, General Electric, Verimeter and Accuderm models. b. Calibration 1. Type 1 (Pull-Off) Magnetic Gages Measure the coating thickness on a series of reliable standards covering the expected range of paint thickness. Record the calibration correction either plus (+) or minus (-)

required at each standard thickness. To guard against gage drift during use, re-check occasionally with one or more of the standards. When the gage adjustment has drifted so far that large corrections are needed, it is advisable to re-adjust closer to the standard values and re-calibrate. For Type 1 gages, the preferred basic standards are small, chromeplated steel panels that may be available from the National Bureau of Standards in coating thickness from 12.70 mm to 203.20 mm. Plastic shims of certified thickness in the appropriate ranges may also be used to calibrate the gages. The gage is held firmly enough to press the shim tightly against the steel surface. Record the calibration correction as above. 2. Type 2 (Fixed Probe) Magnetic Gages Shims of plastic or non-magnetic metals laid on the appropriate steel base (at least 76.2 x 76.2 x 3.2 mm) are suitable working standards. These gages are held firmly enough to press the shim tightly against the steel surface. One should avoid excessive pressure that might indent the plastic or, on a blast cleaned surface, might impress the steel peaks into the undersurface of the plastic. The National Bureau of Standards standards panels shall not be used to calibrate Type 2 gages. c. Measurement Procedures

To determine the effect of the substrate surface condition on the gage readings, access is required to some unpainted areas. Repeated gage readings, even at points close together, may differ considerably due to small surface irregularities. Three gage readings should therefore be made for each spot measurement of either the substrate or the paint. Move the probe a short distance for each new gage reading. Discard any unusually high of flow gage reading that cannot be repeated consistently. Take the average of the three gage readings as the spot measurement. 1. Measurement with Type 1 (Pull-Off) Gage Measure (A), the bare substrate, at a number of spots to obtain a representative average value. Measure (B), the dry paint film, at the specified number of spots.

Correct the (A) and (B) gage readings or averages as determined by calibration of the gage. Subtract the corrected readings (A) from (B) to obtain the thickness of the paint above the peaks of the surface. 2. Measurement with Type 2 (Fixed Probe) Gage Place a standard shim of the expected paint thickness on the bare substrate that is to be painted. Adjust the gage in place on the shim so that it indicates the known thickness of the shim. Conform the gage setting by measuring the shim at several other area of the bare substrate. Re-adjust the gage as needed to obtain an average setting representative of the substrate. With the gage adjustment as above, measure the dry paint film at three points. The gage readings indicate the paint film thickness at the three points. The gage readings indicate the paint thickness above the peaks of the surface profile. Re-check the gage setting at frequent intervals during a long series of measurements. Make five separate spot measurements spaced evenly over each section of the structure 9.29 square metres in area, or of other area as may be specified. The average of five spot measurements for each such section shall not be less than the specified thickness. No single spot measurement (average of three readings) in any section shall be less than 80% of the specified thickness. Since paint thickness is usually specified (or implied) as a minimum, greater thickness that does not cause defects of appearance or functions such as mud cracking, wrinkling, etc., is permitted unless otherwise specified. d. Special Notes

All of the above magnetic, if properly adjusted and in good condition, are inherently accurate to within +15% of the true thickness of the coating. Much larger, external errors may be caused by variations in method of use of the gages or by unevenness of the surface of the substrate or of the coating. Also, any other film present on the steel (rust or mill scale or even a blast cleaned profile zone) will add to the apparent thickness of the applied paint film. The surface of the paint and the probe of the gage must be free from dust, grease and other foreign matter in order to obtain close

contact of the probe with the paint and also to avoid adhesion of the magnet. The accuracy of the measurement will be affected if the coating is tacky or excessively soft. The magnetic gages are sensitive to geometrical discontinuities of the steel, as at holes, corners or edges. The sensitivity to edge effects and discontinuities varies from gage to gage. Measurements closer than 25.4 mm from the discontinuity may not be valid unless the gage is calibrated specifically for that location. Magnetic gage readings also may be affected by proximity to another mass of steel close to the body of the gage, by surface curvature and presence of other magnetic fields. All of the magnets or probe must be held perpendicular to the painted surface to produce valid measurements. 403.3.24 Clean-up Upon completion and before final acceptance, the Contractor shall remove all falsework, falsework piling down to at least 609.6 mm below the finished ground line, excavated or unused materials, rubbish and temporary buildings. He shall replace or renew any fences damaged and restored in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which may have been damaged during the prosecution of the work and shall leave the work site and adjacent highway in a neat and presentable condition, satisfactory to the Engineer. All excavated material or falsework placed in the stream channel during construction shall be removed by the Contractor before final acceptance. 403.4 Method of Measurement 403.4.1 Unit Basis

The quantity of structural steel to be paid for shall be the number of kilos complete in place and accepted. For the purpose of measurement for payment components fabricated from metals listed in (1) below, such as casting, alloy steels, steel plates, anchor bolts and nuts, shoes, rockers, rollers, pins and nuts, expansion dams, roadway drains and souppers, welds metal, bolts embedded in concrete, cradles and brackets, posts, conduits and ducts, and structural shapes for expansion joints and pier protection will be considered as structural steel. Unless otherwise provided, the mass of metal paid for shall be computed and based upon the following mass: 1. Unit Density kg/m3 Aluminum, cast or rolled Bronze or copper alloy Copper sheet Iron, cast 2771.2 8585.9 8938.3 7128.2

Iron, malleable Lead, sheet Steel, cast or rolled, including alloy copper bearing and stainless Zinc 2. Shapes, Plates Railing and Flooring

7528.7 11229 7849 7208.3

The mass of steel shapes and plates shall be computed on the basis of their nominal mass and dimensions as shown on the approved shop drawings, deducting for copes, cuts and open holes, exclusive of rivets holes. The mass of all plates shall be computed on the basis of nominal dimensions with no additional for overrun. The mass of railing shall be included as structural steel unless the Bill of Quantities contains as pay item for bridge railing under Item 401, Railings. The mass of steel grid flooring shall be computed separately. 3. Casting The mass of casting shall be computed from the dimensions shown on the approved drawings, deducting for open holes. To this mass will be added 5 percent allowable for fillets and overruns. Scale mass may be substituted for computed mass in the case of castings of small complex parts for which accurate computations of mass would be difficult. 4. Miscellaneous The mass of erection bolts, shop and field paint, galvanizing the boxes, crates and other containers used for shipping, together with sills, struts, and rods used for supporting members during the transportation, bridge hardware as defined in Subsection 402.2.2 excluding steel plates and bearings, connectors used for joining timber members, nails, spikes and bolts, except anchor bolts will be excluded. 5. Rivets Heads The mass of all rivet heads, both files and shop, will be assumed as follows: Diameter of rivet (mm) 12.7 15.9 19.0 22.2 25.4 28.6 31.7 kg per 100 heads 1.80 3.20 5.44 8.16 11.80 16.33 21.8

6. High-Strength Bolts High-strength steel bolts shall be considered for purpose of payment, the same as rivets of the same diameter, with the mass of the bolt heads and nuts the same as the corresponding rivet heads. 7. Welds The mass of shop and field fillet welds shall be assumed as follows: Size of Weld (mm) 6.3 7.9 9.5 12.7 5.9 19.0 22.2 25.4 kg per linear metre 0.984 1.213 1.771 2.690 3.936 5.379 7.314 9.774

The mass of other welds will be computed on the basis of the theoretical volume from dimensions of the welds, with an addition of 50 mass percent as an allowance for overrun. 8. Other Items The quantities of other Contract Items which enter into the completed and accepted structure shall be measured for payment in the manner prescribed for the Items involved. 403.4.2 Lump Sum Basis

Lump sum will be the basis of payment unless noted otherwise in the bidding documents. No measurements of quantities will be made except as provided in Subsection 403.5.1 (4). 403.5 Basis of Payment 403.5.1 Structural Steel 1. Furnished, Fabricated and Erected The quantity, determined as provided above, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per kilogram for Structural Steel, furnished, fabricated and erected, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, galvanizing, fabricating, radiographing, magnetic particle inspection, delivering, erecting ready for use, and painting all steel and other metal including all labor, equipment, tools

and incidentals necessary to complete the work, except as provided in Subsections 403.5.2, 403.5.3 and 403.5.4. 2. Furnished and Fabricated When a quantity and unit price for Structural Steel, furnished and fabricated are shown in the Bill of Quantities, the quantity, determined as provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit price per kilogram which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, galvanizing, fabricating, radiographing, magnet particle inspection, shop painting and delivering the structural steel and other metal free of charges at the place designated in the Special Provisions and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work, save erection and except as provided in Subsection 403.5.2, 403.5.3 and 403.5.4. 3. Erected When a quantity and unit price for Structural Steel Erected are shown in the Bill of Quantities, the quantity, determined as provided above, will be paid for at the said contract unit price per kilogram which price and payment shall be full compensation for unloading all the structural steel and other metal, payment of any demurrage charges, transporting to the bridge site, erecting, magnetic particle inspection and radiographing, complete ready for use including furnishing and applying the field paint including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work, save furnishing and fabrication, and except as provided in Subsections 403.5.2, 403.5.3 and 403.5.4. 4. Lump Sum When the Bill of Quantities calls for lump sum price for Structural Steel, furnished, fabricated and erected, the Item will be paid for at the contract lump sum price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, fabricating and erecting material and for all work herein before prescribed in connection therewith, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work, except as provided in Subsections 403.5.2, 403.5.3 and 403.5.4. The estimate of the mass of structural steel shown on the Plans is approximate only and no guarantee is made that it is the correct mass to be furnished. No adjustment in the contract price will be made if the mass furnished is more or less than estimated mass. If changes in the work are ordered by the Engineer, which vary the mass of steel to be furnished, the lump sum payment shall be adjusted as follows: a. The value per kilogram of the increase or decrease in mass of structural steel involved in the change shall be determined by

dividing the contract lump sum amount by the estimate shown on the Plans. The adjusted contract lump sum shall be the contract lump sum plus or minus the value of involved in the change, and no additional compensation made on account of said change.

of mass payment the steel shall be

b. Full-size members which are tested in accordance with the Specifications when such tests are required by the Contract, shall be paid for at the same rate as for comparable members in the structure. Members which fail to meet the Contract requirements, and members rejected as a result of test shall not be paid for.

403.5.2

Material Considered as Structural Steel

For the purpose of Subsection 403.5.1 and unless otherwise shown on the Plans, castings, forgings, special alloy steels and steel plates, wrought iron, and structural shapes of expansion joints and pier protection shall be considered as structural steel except that when quantities and unit price for certain alloy steels, forgings, castings or other specific categories of metal are called for in the Bill of Quantities, the mass of such selected material, determined as provided above, shall be paid for at the respective contract unit price per kilogram for Structural Steel (Alloy steel, forgings, castings, and/or other category), furnished and fabricated, and erected or Structural Steel (Subsection 403.4.1), furnished and fabricated as named in the Bill of Quantities. 403.5.3 Other Items

The quantities of all other Contract Items which enter into the completed and accepted structure shall be paid for at the contract unit prices for the several Pay Items as prescribed for the Items involved. 403.5.4 Payment as Reinforcing Steel

When the Bill of Quantities does not contain a pay item for structural steel, the quantities of metal drains, scuppers, conduits, ducts and structural shapes for expansion joints and pier protection, measured as provided above will be paid for as Reinforcing Steel under Item 404. Payment will be made under: Pay Item Number 403 (1) Description Structural Steel, furnished, fabricated and erected Structural Steel, furnished, fabricated and erected Structural Steel, furnished, fabricated Unit of Measurement kilogram

403 (2)

kilogram

403 (3)

kilogram

403 (4) 403 (5) 403 (6) 403 (7)

Structural Steel, furnished, fabricated Structural Steel erected Structural Steel erected Structural Steel, furnished, fabricated and erected

kilogram kilogram kilogram kilogram

Where separate payment is to be made for certain metals or for certain particular components, other than under the general provision for structural steel, designation of those particular cases shall be inserted in the spaces provided in the pay names for Item 403 (2), 403 (4) or 403 (6), as the case may be.

ITEM 404 REINFORCING STEEL 404.1 Description This Item shall consist of furnishing, bending, fabricating and placing of steel reinforcement of the type, size, shape and grade required in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the requirements shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. 404.2 Material Requirements Reinforcing steel shall meet the requirements of item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope. 4.4.3 Construction Requirements

404.3.1 Order Lists Before materials are ordered, all order lists and bending diagrams shall be furnished by the Contractor, for approval of the Engineer. The approval of order lists and bending diagrams by the Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the correctness of such lists and diagrams. Any expense incident to the revisions of materials furnished in accordance with such lists and diagrams to make them comply with the Plans shall be borne by the Contractor. 404.3.2 Protection of Material Steel reinforcement shall be stored above the surface of the ground upon platforms, skids, or other supports and shall be protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust. When placed in the work, reinforcement shall be free from dirt, detrimental rust, loose scale, paint, grease, oil, or other foreign materials. Reinforcement shall be free from injurious defects such as cracks and laminations. Rust, surface seams, surface irregularities or mill scale will not be

cause for rejection, provided the minimum dimensions, cross sectional area and tensile properties of a hand wire brushed specimen meets the physical requirements for the size and grade of steel specified. 404.3.3 Bending All reinforcing bars requiring bending shall be cold-bent to the shapes shown on the Plans or required by the Engineer. Bars shall be bent around a circular pin having the following diameters (D) in relation to the diameter of the bar (d): Nominal diameter, d, mm 10 to 20 25 to 28 32 and greater Pin diameter (D) 6d 8d 10d

Bends and hooks in stirrups or ties may be bent to the diameter of the principal bar enclosed therein. 404.3.4 Placing and Fastening All steel reinforcement shall be accurately placed in the position shown on the Plans or required by the Engineer and firmly held there during the placing and setting of the concrete. Bars shall be tied at all intersections except where spacing is less than 300mm in each directions, in which case, alternate intersections shall be tied. Ties shall be fastened on the inside. Distance from the forms shall be maintained by means of stays, blocks, ties, hangers, or other approved supports, so that it does not vary from the position indicated on the Plans by more than 6mm. Blocks for holding reinforcement from contact with the forms shall be precast mortar blocks of approved shapes and dimensions. Layers of bars shall be separated by precast mortar blocks or by other equally suitable devices. The use of pebbles, pieces of broken stone or brick, metal pipe and wooden blocks shall not be permitted. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or required by the Engineer, the minimum distance between bars shall be 40mm. Reinforcement in any member shall be placed and then inspected and approved by the Engineer before the placing of concrete begins. Concrete placed in violation of this provision may be rejected and removal may be required. If fabric reinforcement is shipped in rolls, it shall be straightened before being placed. Bundled bars shall be tied together at not more than 1.8m intervals. 404.3.5 Splicing All reinforcement shall be furnished in the full lengths indicated on the Plans. Splicing of bars, except where shown on the Plans, will not be permitted without the written approval of the Engineer. Splices shall be staggered as far as possible and with a minimum separation of not less than 40 bar diameters. Not more than one-third of the bars may be spliced in the same cross-section, except where shown on the Plans.

Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, bars shall be lapped a minimum distance of: Splice Type Tension Compression Grade 40 min. lap 24 bar dia 20 bar dia Grade 60 min. lap 36 bar dia 24 bar dia But not less than 300 mm 300 mm

In lapped splices, the bars shall be placed in contact and wired together. Lapped splices will not be permitted at locations where the concrete section is insufficient to provide minimum clear distance of one and one-third the maximum size of coarse aggregate between the splice and the nearest adjacent bar. Welding of reinforcing steel shall be done only if detailed on the Plans or if authorized by the Engineer in writing. Spiral reinforcement shall be spliced by lapping at least one and a half turns or by butt welding unless otherwise shown on the Plans. 404.3.6 Lapping of Bar Mat Sheets of mesh or bar mat reinforcement shall overlap each other sufficiently to maintain a uniform strength and shall be securely fastened at the ends and edges. The overlap shall not be less than one mesh in width. 404.4 Method of Measurement

The quantity of reinforcing steel to be paid for will be the final quantity placed and accepted in the completed structure. No allowance will be made for tie-wires, separators, wire chairs and other material used in fastening the reinforcing steel in place. If bars are substituted upon the Contractors request and approved by the Engineer and as a result thereof more steel is used than specified, only the mass specified shall be measured for payment. No measurement or payment will be made for splices added by the Contractor unless directed or approved by the Engineer. When there is no item for reinforcing steel in the Bill of Quantities, costs will be considered as incidental to the other items in the Bill of Quantities. 404.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 404.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Reinforcing Steel which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.

Payment will be made under: Pay Item Number 404 Description Reinforcing Steel Unit of Measurement Kilogram

ITEM 405 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 405.1 Description 405.1.1 Scope This Item shall consist of furnishing, bending, placing and finishing concrete in all structures except pavements in accordance with this Specification and conforming to the lines, grades, and dimensions shown on the Plans. Concrete shall consist of a mixture of Portland Cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, admixture when specified, and water mixed in the proportions specified or approved by the Engineer. 405.1.2 Classes and Uses of Concrete Five classes of concrete are provided for in this Item, namely: A, B, C, P and Seal. Each class shall be used in that part of the structure as called for on the Plans. The classes of concrete will generally be used as follows: Class A All superstructures and heavily reinforced substructures. The important parts of the structure included are slabs, beams, girders, columns, arch ribs, box culverts, reinforced abutments, retaining walls, and reinforced footings. Class B Footings, pedestals, massive pier shafts, pipe bedding, and gravity walls, unreinforced or with only a small amount of reinforcement. Class C Thin reinforced sections, railings, precast R.C. piles and cribbing and for filler in steel grid floors. Class P Prestressed concrete structures and members. Seal Concrete deposited in water. 405.2 Material Requirements 405.2.1 Portland Cement It shall conform to all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.1.

405.2.2 Fine Aggregate It shall conform to all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.2. 405.2.3 Coarse Aggregate It shall conform all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.3 except that gradation shall conform to Table 405.1. Table 405.1 Grading Requirements for Coarse Aggregate
Sieve Designation Standard Alternate Mm US Standard 63 50 37.5 25 19.0 12.5 9.5 4.75 2-1/2 2 1-1/2 1 3/8 No.4 Class A Class B Mass Percent Passing Class Class C P Class Seal

100 95 100 35 70 10 30 0-5

100 95 100 35 70 10 30 0-5

100 90 100 40 70 0 15*

100 95 100 20 55 0 10*

100 95 100 25 60 0 10*

* The measured cement content shall be within plus (+) or minus (-) 2 mass percent of the design cement content. 405.2.4 Water It shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 311.2.4 405.2.5 Reinforcing Steel It shall conform to the requirements of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope. 405.2.6 Admixtures Admixtures shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 311.2.7 405.2.7 Curing Materials Curing materials shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 311.2.8. 405.2.8 Expansion Joint Materials Expansion joint materials shall be: 1. Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork, conforming to AASHTO M 153. 2. Hot-Poured Elastic Type, conforming to AASHTO M 173. 3. Preformed Fillers, conforming to AASHTO M 213.

405.2.9 Elastomeric Compression Joint Seals These shall conform to AASHTO M 220. 405.2.10 Elastomeric Bearing Pads These shall conform to AASHTO M 251 or Item 412 Elastomeric Bearing Pads. 405.2.11 Storage of Cement and Aggregates Storage of cement and aggregates shall conform to all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.10. 405.3 Sampling and Testing of Structural Concrete

As work progresses, at least one (1) sample consisting of three (3) concrete cylinder test specimens, 150 x 300mm (6 x 12 inches), shall be taken from each seventy five (75) cubic meters of each class of concrete or fraction thereof placed each day. Compliance with the requirements of this Section shall be determined in accordance with the following standard methods of AASHTO: Sampling of fresh concrete Weight per cubic metre and air content (graviMetric) of concrete Sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregates Slump of Portland Cement Concrete Specific gravity and absorption of fine aggregate T 141 T 121 T 27 T 119 T 84

Tests for strength shall be made in accordance with the following: Making and curing concrete compressive and flexural tests specimens in the field Compressive strength of molded concrete Cylinders 405.4 Production Requirements

T 23 T 22

405.4.1 Proportioning and Strength of Structural Concrete The concrete materials shall be proportioned in accordance with the requirements for each class of concrete as specified in Table 405.2, using the absolute volume method as outlined in the American Concrete Institute (ACI) Standard 211.1. Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal and Heavyweight Concrete. Other methods of proportioning may be employed in the mix design with prior approval of the Engineer. The mix shall either be

designed or approved by the Engineer. A change in the source of materials during the progress of work may necessitate a new mix design. The strength requirements for each class of concrete shall be as specified in Table 405.2. Table 405.2 - Composition and Strength of Concrete for Use in Structures
Class Of Concre te Minimum Cement Content Per m3 kg (bag**) Maximum Water/ Cement Ratio kg/kg Consistency Range in Slump mm (inch) Designated Size of Coarse Aggregate Square Opening Std. mm Minimum Compressive Strength of 150x300mm Concrete Cylinder Specimen at 28 days, MN/m2 (psi) 20.7 (3000) 16.5 (2400) 20.7 (3000) 37.7 (5000) 20.7 (3000)

360 (9 bags) 320 (8 bags) 380 (9.5 bags) 440 (11 bags) 380 (9.5 bags)

0.53

50 100 (2 4) 50 100 (2 4) 50 100 (2 4) 100 max. (4 max.) 100 200 (4 - 8)

37.5 4.75 (1-1/2 No. 4) 50 4.75 (2 No. 4) 12.5 4.75 (1/2 No. 4) 19.0 4.75 (3/4 No. 4) 25 4.75 (1 No. 4)

B C

0.58 0.55

0.49

Seal

0.58

* The measured cement content shall be within plus or minus 2 mass percent of the design cement content. ** Based on 40 kg/bag 405.4.2 Consistency Concrete shall have a consistency such that it will be workable in the required position. It shall be of such a consistency that it will flow around reinforcing steel but individual particles of the coarse aggregate when isolated shall show a coating of mortar containing its proportionate amount of sand. The consistency of concrete shall be gauged by the ability of the equipment to properly place it and not by the difficulty in mixing and transporting. The quantity of mixing water shall be determined by the Engineer and shall not be varied without his consent. Concrete as dry as it is practical to place with the equipment specified shall be used. 405.4.3 Batching Measuring and batching of materials shall be done at a batching plant.

1. Portland Cement Either sacked or bulk cement may be used. No fraction of a sack of cement shall be used in a batch of concrete unless the cement is weighed. All bulk cement shall be weighed on an approved weighing device. The bulk cement weighing hopper shall be properly sealed and vented to preclude dusting operation. The discharge chute shall not be suspended from the weighing hopper and shall be so arranged that cement will neither be lodged in it nor leak from it. Accuracy of batching shall be within plus (+) or minus (-) 1 mass percent. 2. Water Water may be measured either by volume or by weight. The accuracy of measuring the water shall be within a range of error of not more than 1 percent. 3. Aggregates Stockpiling of aggregates shall be in accordance with Subsection 311.2.10. All aggregates whether produced or handled by hydraulic methods or washed, shall be stockpiled or binned for draining for at least 12 hours prior to batching. Rail shipment requiring more than12 hours will be accepted as adequate binning only if the car bodies permit free drainage. If the aggregates contain high or non-uniform moisture content, storage or stockpile period in excess of 12 hours may be required by the Engineer. Batching shall be conducted as to result in a 2 mass percent maximum tolerance for the required materials. 4. Bins and Scales The batching plant shall include separate bins for bulk cement, fine aggregate and for each size of coarse aggregate, a weighing hopper, and scales capable of determining accurately the mass of each component of the batch. Scales shall be accurate to one-half (0.5) percent throughout the range used. 5. Batching When batches are hauled to the mixer, bulk cement shall be transported either in waterproof compartments or between the fine and coarse aggregate. When cement is placed in contact with moist aggregates, batches will be rejected unless mixed within 1-1/2 hours of

such contact. aggregates.

Sacked cement may be transported on top of the

Batches shall be delivered to the mixer separate and intact. Each batch shall be dumped cleanly into the mixer without loss, and, when more than one batch is carried on the truck, without spilling of material from one batch compartment into another. 6. Admixtures The Contractor shall follow an approved procedure for adding the specified amount of admixture to each batch and will be responsible for its uniform operation during the progress of the work. He shall provide separate scales for the admixtures which are to be proportioned by weight, and accurate measures for those to be proportioned by volume. Admixtures shall be measured into the mixer with an accuracy of plus or minus three (3) percent. The use of Calcium Chloride as an admixture will not be permitted. 405.4.4 Mixing and Delivery Concrete may be mixed at the site of construction, at a central point or by a combination of central point and truck mixing or by a combination of central point mixing and truck agitating. Mixing and delivery of concrete shall be in accordance with the appropriate requirements of AASHTO M 157 except as modified in the following paragraphs of this section, for truck mixing or a combination of central point and truck mixing or truck agitating. Delivery of concrete shall be regulated so that placing is at a continuous rate unless delayed by the placing operations. The intervals between delivery of batches shall not be so great as to allow the concrete inplace to harden partially, and in no case shall such an interval exceed 30 minutes. In exceptional cases and when volumetric measurements are authorized, for small project requiring less than 75 cu.m. per day of pouring, the weight proportions shall be converted to equivalent volumetric proportions. In such cases, suitable allowance shall be made for variations in the moisture condition of the aggregates, including the bulking effect in the fine aggregate. Batching and mixing shall be in accordance with ASTM C 685, Section 6 through 9. Concrete mixing, by chute is allowed provided that a weighing scales for determining the batch weight will be used. For batch mixing at the site of construction or at a central point, a batch mixer of an approved type shall be used. Mixer having a rated capacity of less than a one-bag batch shall not be used. The volume of concrete mixed per batch shall not exceed the mixers nominal capacity as shown on the manufacturers standard rating plate on the mixer except that an overload up to 10 percent above the mixers nominal capacity may be permitted, provided concrete test data for strength, segregation, and uniform consistency are satisfactory and provided no

spillage of concrete takes place. The batch shall be so charge into the drum that a portion of the water shall enter in advance of the cement and aggregates. The flow of water shall be uniform and all water shall be in the drum by the end of the first 15 seconds of the mixing period. Mixing time shall be measured from the time all materials, except water, are in the drum. Mixing time shall not be less than 60 seconds for mixers having a capacity of 1.5m3 or less. For mixers having a capacity greater than 1.5m3, the mixing time shall not be less than 90 seconds. If timing starts, the instant the skip reaches its maximum raised position, 4 seconds shall be added to the specified mixing time. Mixing time ends when the discharge chute opens. The mixer shall be operated at the drum speed as shown on the manufacturers name plate on the mixer. Any concrete mixed less than the specified time shall be discarded and disposed off by the Contractor at his own expenses. The timing device on stationary mixers shall be equipped with a bell or other suitable warning device adjusted to give a clearly audible signal each time the lock is released. In case of failure of the timing device, the Contractor will be permitted to continue operations while it is being repaired, provided he furnishes an approved timepiece equipped with minute and second hands. If the timing device is not placed in good working order within 24 hours, further use of the mixer will be prohibited until repairs are made. Retempering concrete will not be permitted. Admixtures for increasing the workability, for retarding the set, or for accelerating the set or improving the pumping characteristics of the concrete will be permitted only when specifically provided for in the Contract, or authorized in writing by the Engineer. 1. Mixing Concrete: General Concrete shall be thoroughly mixed in a mixer of an approved size and type that will insure a uniform distribution of the materials throughout the mass. All concrete shall be mixed in mechanically operated mixers. Mixing plant and equipment for transporting and placing concrete shall be arranged with an ample auxiliary installation to provide a minimum supply of concrete in case of breakdown of machinery or in case the normal supply of concrete is disrupted. The auxiliary supply of concrete shall be sufficient to complete the casting of a section up to a construction joint that will meet the approval of the Engineer. Equipment having components made of aluminum or magnesium alloys, which would have contact with plastic concrete during mixing, transporting or pumping of Portland Cement concrete, shall not be used.

Concrete mixers shall be equipped with adequate water storage and a device of accurately measuring and automatically controlling the amount of water used. Materials shall be measured by weighing. The apparatus provided for weighing the aggregates and cement shall be suitably designed and constructed for this purpose. The accuracy of all weighing devices except that for water shall be such that successive quantities can be measured to within one percent of the desired amounts. The water measuring device shall be accurate to plus or minus 0.5 mass percent. All measuring devices shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Scales and measuring devices shall be tested at the expense of the Contractor as frequently as the Engineer may deem necessary to insure their accuracy. Weighing equipment shall be insulated against vibration or movement of other operating equipment in the plant. When the entire plant is running, the scale reading at cut-off shall not vary from the weight designated by the Engineer more than one mass percent for cement, 1-1/2 mass percent for any size of aggregate, or one (1) mass percent for the total aggregate in any batch. 2. Mixing Concrete at Site Concrete mixers may be of the revolving drum or the revolving blade type and the mixing drum or blades shall be operated uniformly at the mixing speed recommended by the manufacturer. The pick-up and throw-over blades of mixers shall be restored or replaced when any part or section is worn 20mm or more below the original height of the manufacturers design. Mixers and agitators which have an accumulation of hard concrete or mortar shall not be used. When bulk cement is used and volume of the batch is 0.5m3 or more, the scale and weigh hopper for Portland Cement shall be separate and distinct from the aggregate hopper or hoppers. The discharge mechanism of the bulk cement weigh hopper shall be interlocked against opening before the full amount of cement is in the hopper. The discharging mechanism shall also be interlocked against opening when the amount of cement in the hopper is underweight by more than one (1) mass percent or overweight by more than 3 mass percent of the amount specified. When the aggregate contains more water than the quantity necessary to produce a saturated surface dry condition, representative samples shall be taken and the moisture content determined for each kind of aggregate. The batch shall be so charged into the mixer that some water will enter in advance of cement and aggregate. All water shall be in the drum by the end of the first quarter of the specified mixing time.

Cement shall be batched and charged into the mixer so that it will not result in loss of cement due to the effect of wind, or in accumulation of cement on surface of conveyors or hoppers, or in other conditions which reduce or vary the required quantity of cement in the concrete mixture. The entire content of a batch mixer shall be removed from the drum before materials for a succeeding batch are placed therein. The materials composing a batch except water shall be deposited simultaneously into the mixer. All concrete shall be mixed for a period of not less than 1-1/2 minutes after all materials, including water, are in the mixer. During the period of mixing, the mixer shall operate at the speed for which it has been designed. Mixers shall be operated with an automatic timing device that can be locked by the Engineer. The time device and discharge mechanics shall be so interlocked that during normal operation no part of the batch will be charged until the specified mixing time has elapsed. The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer shall contain a sufficient excess of cement, sand, and water to coat inside of the drum without reducing the required mortar content of the mix. When mixing is to cease for a period of one hour or more, the mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned. 3. Mixing Concrete at Central Plant Mixing at central plant shall conform to the requirements for mixing at the site. 4. Mixing Concrete in Truck Truck mixers, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, shall be of the revolving drum type, water-tight, and so constructed that the concrete can be mixed to insure a uniform distribution of materials throughout the mass. All solid materials for the concrete shall be accurately measured and charged into the drum at the proportioning plant. Except as subsequently provided, the truck mixer shall be equipped with a device by which the quantity of water added can be readily verified. The mixing water may be added directly to the batch, in which case a tank is not required. Truck mixers may be required to be provided with a means of which the mixing time can be readily verified by the Engineer. The maximum size of batch in truck mixers shall not exceed the minimum rated capacity of the mixer as stated by the manufacturer and stamped in metal on the mixer. Truck mixing, shall, unless other-wise

directed be continued for not less than 100 revolutions after all ingredients, including water, are in the drum. The mixing speed shall not be less than 4 rpm, nor more than 6 rpm. Mixing shall begin within 30 minutes after the cement has been added either to the water or aggregate, but when cement is charged into a mixer drum containing water or surface wet aggregate and when the temperature is above 32oC, this limit shall be reduced to 15 minutes. The limitation in time between the introduction of the cement to the aggregate and the beginning of the mixing may be waived when, in the judgement of the Engineer, the aggregate is sufficiently free from moisture, so that there will be no harmful effects on the cement. When a truck mixer is used for transportation, the mixing time specified in Subsection 405.4.4 (3) at a stationary mixer may be reduced to 30 seconds and the mixing completed in a truck mixer. The mixing time in the truck mixer shall be as specified for truck mixing. 5. Transporting Mixed Concrete Mixed concrete may only be transported to the delivery point in truck agitators or truck mixers operating at the speed designated by the manufacturers of the equipment as agitating speed, or in non-agitating hauling equipment, provided the consistency and workability of the mixed concrete upon discharge at the delivery point is suitable point for adequate placement and consolidation in place. Truck agitators shall be loaded not to exceed the manufacturers guaranteed capacity. They shall maintain the mixed concrete in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass during hauling. No additional mixing water shall be incorporated into the concrete during hauling or after arrival at the delivery point. The rate of discharge of mixed concrete from truck mixers or agitators shall be controlled by the speed of rotation of the drum in the discharge direction with the discharge gate fully open. When a truck mixer or agitator is used for transporting concrete to the delivery point, discharge shall be completed within one hour, or before 250 revolutions of the drum or blades, whichever comes first, after the introduction of the cement to the aggregates. Under conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete or when the temperature of the concrete is 30oC, or above, a time less than one hour will be required. 6. Delivery of Mixed Concrete The Contractor shall have sufficient plant capacity and transportation apparatus to insure continuous delivery at the rate required. The rate of

delivery of concrete during concreting operations shall be such as to provide for the proper handling, placing and finishing of the concrete. The rate shall be such that the interval between batches shall not exceed 20 minutes. The methods of delivering and handling the concrete shall be such as will facilitate placing of the minimum handling. 405.5 Method of Measurement

The quantity of structural concrete to be paid for will be the final quantity placed and accepted in the completed structure. No deduction will be made for the volume occupied by pipe less than 100mm (4 inches) in diameter or by reinforcing steel, anchors, conduits, weep holes or expansion joint materials. 405.6 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 405.5, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the Pay Item listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities. Payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, placing and finishing concrete including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in the item. Payment will be made under: Pay Number 405 405 405 405 405 Item (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Description Structural Concrete, Structural Concrete, Structural Concrete, Structural Concrete, Seal Concrete Class Class Class Class A B C P Unit of Measurement Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter

ITEM 406 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRUCTURES 406.1 Description This Item shall consist of prestressed concrete structures and the prestressed concrete portions of composite structures, constructed in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the Plans or established by the Engineer and in accordance with this Specification. It shall also include the furnishing and installing of any appurtenant items necessary for the particular prestressing system to be used, including but not limited to ducts, anchorage assemblies and grouts used for pressure grouting ducts.

406.2 Material Requirements

406.2.1 Concrete and Grout The materials for concrete and grout shall conform to Item 405, Structural Concrete. The concrete shall be Class P as shown in Table 405.2, unless otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions. The proportions of the grout will be as set out in Subsection 406.3.11, Bonding Steel. 406.2.2 Prestressing Reinforcing Steel It shall conform to Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope. 406.2.3 Prestressing Steel It shall conform to the requirements of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope. All prestressing steel shall be protected against physical damage and rust or other results of corrosion at all times from manufacture to grouting. Prestressing steel that has sustained physical damage at any time shall be rejected. 406.2.4 Packaging, Storing and Shipping Prestressing steel shall be packaged in containers or other shipping forms for the protection of the steel against physical damage and corrosion during shipping and storage. A corrosion inhibitor which prevents rust or other results of corrosion shall be placed in the package or form, or when permitted by the Engineer, may be applied directly to the steel. The corrosion inhibitor shall have no deleterious effect on the steel or concrete or bond strength of concrete to steel. Packaging or forms damaged from any cause shall be immediately replaced or restored to original condition. This shipping package or form shall be clearly marked with a statement that the package contains high-strength prestressing steel and the care to be used in handling, and the type, kind and amount of corrosion inhibitor used, including the date when placed, safety orders and instructions for use. 406.2.5 Elastomeric Bearing Pads This shall conform to Item 412, Elastomeric Bearing Pads. 406.2.6 Water It shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 311.2.4, Water.

406.2.7 Enclosures Duct enclosures for prestressing steel shall be galvanized ferrous metal or of a type approved by the Engineer, mortartight and accurately placed at the locations shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer. Transition couplings connecting said ducts to anchoring devices need not be galvanized. 406.2.8 Sampling and Testing All wire, strand, anchorage assemblies or bars to be shipped to the site shall be assigned a lot number and tagged for identification purposes. All samples submitted shall be representative of the lot to be furnished and in the case of wire or strand, shall be taken from the same master roll. All of the materials specified for testing shall be furnished free of cost and shall be delivered in time for tests to be made well in advance of anticipated time of use. The Contractor shall furnish for testing the following samples selected from each lot, if ordered by the Engineer. The selection of samples will be made at the manufacturers plant by the Engineer or his representative. 1. For pretensioning work-samples at least 2 m long shall be furnished of each size of wire or strand proposed. 2. For post-tensioning work-samples of the following lengths shall be furnished of each size of wire proposed. a. For wire requiring heading, 2 m. b. For wires not requiring heading, sufficient length to make up one parallel-lay cable of 1.50 m long consisting of the same number of wires as the cable to be furnished. c. For strand to be furnished with fittings, 1.50 m between near ends of fittings. d. For bars to be furnished with thread ends and nuts, 1.5 m between threads at ends. 3. Anchorage assemblies If anchorage assemblies are not attached to reinforcement samples, two (2) anchorage assemblies shall be furnished, completed with distribution plates of each size and type to be used. When prestressing system has been previously tested and approved for similar projects by an agency acceptable to the Engineer, complete tendon samples need not be furnished, provided there is no change whatsoever in the materials, design or details previously approved.

406.3

Construction Requirements

406.3.1 General Prestressed concrete structural members shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete and Reinforcing Steel shall be placed in accordance with the requirements of Item 404, Reinforcing Steel, subject to the modifications and amendments contained herein. 406.3.2 Prestressing Method The method of prestressing to be used shall be optional with the Contractor subject to all requirements hereinafter specified. The Contractor, prior to casting any members to be prestressed, shall submit to the Engineer for approval complete details of the methods, materials and equipment he proposes to use in the prestressing operations. Such details shall outline the method and sequence of stressing, complete specifications and details of the prestressing, steel and anchoring devices proposed for use, anchoring stresses, type of enclosures and all other data pertaining to the prestressing operations, including the proposed arrangement of the prestressing units in the members, pressure grouting materials and equipment. 406.3.3 Prestressing Equipment Hydraulic jacks used to stress tendons shall be equipped with either a pressure gauge or a load cell for determining the jacking stress. The pressure gauge, if used, shall have an accurate reading dial at least 154 mm (6 inches) in diameter and each jack and its gauge shall be calibrated as a unit with the cylinder extension in the approximate position that it will be at final jacking force, and shall be accompanied by a certified calibration chart. The load cell, if used, shall be calibrated and shall be provided with an indicator by means of which the prestressing force in the tendon may be determined. The range of the load cell shall be such that the lower ten (10) percent of the manufacturers rated capacity will not be used in determining the jacking stress. Safety measures shall be taken by the Contractor to prevent accidents due to possible breaking of the prestressing steel or the slipping of the grips during the prestressing process. 406.3.4 Casting Yard The precasting of prestressed concrete structural members may be done at a location selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Engineer. 406.3.5 Placing Enclosures Enclosures for prestressed reinforcement shall be accurately placed at locations shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer.

406.3.6 Placing Steel Steel units shall be accurately placed at the position shown on the Plans and firmly held during the placing and setting of the concrete. Ducts may be fabricated with either welded or interlocked seams. Galvanizing of the welded steel will not be required. Ducts shall have sufficient strength to maintain their correct alignment and shape during placing of concrete. Joints between sections of ducts shall be positive metallic connections which do not result in angle changes at the joints. Waterproof tape shall be used at the connections. All ducts or anchorage assemblies shall be provided with pipes or other suitable connections for the injection of grout after prestressing. Ducts for prestressing steel shall be securely fastened in place to prevent movement. After installation in the forms, the end of ducts shall at all times be covered as necessary to prevent the entry of water of debris. All ducts for continuous structures shall be vented over each intermediate support, and at additional locations as shown on the Plans. Vents shall be 12.7 mm (1/2 inch) minimum diameter standard pipe. Connections to ducts shall be made with metallic structural fasteners. The vents shall be mortar tight, taped as necessary, and shall provide means for injection of grout through the vents and for sealing the vents. Ends of vents shall be removed 25.4 mm (1 inch) below the roadway surface after grouting has been completed. Distances from the forms shall be maintained by stays, blocks, ties, hangers or other approved supports. Blocks for holding units from contact with the forms shall be precast mortar blocks of approved shape and dimensions. Layers of units shall be separated by mortar blocks or other equally suitable devices. Wooden blocks shall not be left in the concrete. When acceptable prestressing steel for post-tensioning is installed in ducts after completion of concrete curing, and if stressing and grouting are completed within ten (10) calendar days after the installation of the prestressing steel, rust which may form during said ten (10) days will not be caused for rejection of the steel. Prestressing steel, installed, tensioned and grouted in this manner, all within ten (10) calendar days, shall be subject to all the requirements in this Item pertaining to corrosion protection and rejection because of rust. No welds or grounds for welding equipment shall be made on the forms or on the steel in the manner after the prestressing steel has been installed. Wires, wire groups, parallel-lay cables and any other prestressing elements shall be straightened to insure proper positioning in the enclosures.

Suitable horizontal and vertical spacers shall be provided, if required, to hold the wires in place in true position in the enclosures. 406.3.7 Pretensioning The prestressing elements shall be accurately held in position and stressed by jacks. A record shall be kept of the jacking force and the elongations produced thereby. Several units may be cast in one continuous line and stressed at one time. Sufficient space shall be left between ends of units to permit access for cutting after the concrete has attained the required strength. No bond stress shall be transferred to the concrete, nor end anchorages released until the concrete has attained a compressive strength, as shown by cylinder tests, of at least 28 MPa unless otherwise specified. The elements shall be cut or released in such an order that lateral eccentricity or prestress will be a minimum. 406.3.8 Placing Concrete Concrete shall not be deposited in the forms until the Engineer has inspected the placing of the reinforcement, enclosures, anchorages and prestressing steel and given his approval thereof. The concrete shall be vibrated with care and in such a manner as to avoid displacement of reinforcement, conduits, or wires. Prior to placing concrete, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer that all ducts are unobstructed. 406.3.9 Curing Steam curing process may be used as an alternative to water curing. The casting bed for any unit cured with steam shall be completely enclosed by a suitable type of housing, tightly constructed so as to prevent the escape of steam and simultaneously exclude outside atmosphere. Two to four hours after placing concrete and after the concrete has undergone initial set, the first application of steam or radiant heat shall be made unless retarders are used, in which case the waiting period before application of the steam or radiant heat shall be increased to from four to six hours. During the waiting period, the temperature within the curing chamber shall not be less than 10.0oC (50oF) and live steam or radiant heat may be used to maintain the curing chamber at the proper minimum temperature. The steam shall be at 100 percent relative humidity to prevent loss of moisture and to provide moisture for proper hydration of the cement. Application of the steam shall not be directly on the concrete. During application of the steam, or of radiant heat, the ambient air temperature shall increase at a rate not to exceed 4.41oC per hour until the curing temperature is reached. The maximum curing temperature within the enclosure shall not exceed 71.1oC. The maximum temperature shall be held until the concrete has reached the desired strength. Detensioning shall be accomplished immediately after the steam curing or the heat curing has been discontinued and additional curing is not required after detensioning.

1. Curing with Low Pressure Steam Application of live steam shall not be directed on the concrete forms as to cause localized high temperatures. 2. Curing with Radiant Heat Radiant heat may be applied by means of pipes circulating steam, hot oil or hot water, or by electric heating elements. Radiant heat curing shall be done under a suitable enclosure to contain the heat and moisture loss shall be minimized by covering all exposed concrete surfaces with plastic sheeting or by applying an approved liquid membrane curing compound to all exposed concrete surfaces. Top surface of concrete members to be used in composite construction shall be clear of residue of the membrane curing compound so as not to reduce bond below design limits. If the Contractor proposes to cure by any other special method, the method and its details shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. 406.3.10 Post-tensioning Tensioning of the prestressing reinforcement shall not be commenced until tests on concrete cylinders, manufactured of the same concrete and cured under the same conditions, indicate that the concrete of the particular member to be prestressed has attained compressive strength of at least 28 MPa unless otherwise specified. After all concrete has attained the required strength, the prestressing reinforcement shall be stressed by means of jacks to the desired tension and the stress transferred to the end anchorage. Cast-in-place concrete shall not be post-tensioned until at least ten (10) days after the last concrete has been placed in the member to be the posttensioned and until the compressive strength of said placed concrete has reached the strength specified for the concrete at the time of stressing. All side forms for girders shall be removed before post-tensioning. The falsework under the bottom slab supporting the superstructure shall not be released until a minimum of 48 hours have elapsed after grouting of the posttension tendons nor until all other conditions of the Specifications have been met. The supporting falsework shall be constructed in such a manner that the superrestructure will be free to lift off the falsework and shorten during posttensioning. Formwork left inside box girders to support the roadway slab shall be detailed in such a manner so as to offer minimum resistance to girder shortening due to shrinkage and post-tensioning. The tensioning process shall be so conducted that the tension being applied and the elongation of the prestressing elements may be measured at all times. The friction loss in the element, i.e., the difference between the tension of

the jack and the minimum tension, shall be determined in accordance with Article 1.6.7 of AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. Suitable shims or other approved devices shall be used to insure that the specified anchor set loss is attained. Prestressing tendons in continuous post-tensioned members shall be tensioned by jacking at each end of the tendon. Such jacking of both ends need not be done simultaneously. A record shall be kept of gage pressure and elongation at all times and submitted to the Engineer for his approval. 406.3.11 Bonding Steel Prestressing steel shall be bonded to the concrete by filling the void space between the duct and the tendon with grout . Grout shall consist of Portland Cement, water and an expansive admixture approved by the Engineer. Water shall be potable. No admixture containing chlorides or nitrates shall be used. Water shall first be added to the mixer followed by cement and admixture. The grout shall be mixed in mechanical mixing equipment of a type that will produce uniform and thoroughly mixed grout. The water content shall be not more than 19 litres (5 gallons) per sack of cement. Retempering of grout will not be permitted. Grout shall be continuously agitated until it is pumped. Grouting equipment shall be capable of grouting at a pressure of at least 0.6894 MPa (100 psi). Grouting equipment shall be furnished with a pressure gauge having a fullscale reading of not more than 2.07 MPa (300 psi). Standby flushing equipment capable of developing a pumping pressure of 1.72 MPa (250 psi) and of sufficient capacity to flush out any partially grouted ducts shall be provided. All ducts shall be clean and free of deleterious materials that would impair bonding of the grout or interfere with grouting procedures. All grout shall pass through a screen with a 2 mm (0.0787 inch) maximum clear openings prior to being introduced into the grout pump. Grout injection pipes shall be fitted with positive mechanical shutoff valves. Vents and ejection pipes shall be fitted with valves, caps or other devices capable

of withstanding the pumping pressures. Valves and caps shall not be removed or opened until the grout has set. Post-tensioned steel shall be bonded to the concrete. All prestressing steel to be bonded to the concrete shall be free of dirt, loose rust, grease or other deleterious substances. Immediately after completion of the concrete pour, the metal conduit shall be blown out with compressed oil free air to the extent necessary to break up and remove any mortar in the conduit before it hardens. Approximately 24 hours after the concrete pour, the metal conduits shall be flushed out with water and then blown out with compressed oil free air. Prior to placing forms for roadway slabs of box girder structures, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that all ducts are unobstructed and if the prestressing reinforcement has been placed, that the steel is free and unbonded in the duct. After the tendons have been stressed to the required tension, each conduit encasing the prestressing steel shall be blown out with compressed oil free air. The conduit shall then be completely filled from the low end with grout under pressure. Grout shall be pumped through the duct and continuously wasted at the outlet until no visible slugs of water or air are ejected and the efflux time of ejected grout is not less than 11 seconds. All vents and openings shall then be closed and the grouting pressure at the injection end shall be raised to a minimum of 0.6894 MPa (100 psi) and held for a minimum of 10 seconds. If aluminum powder is used to expand the grout, it shall be added as follows: From 2 to 4 grams of the unpolished variety (about 1 to 2 teaspoons) shall be added for each sack of cement used in the grout. The exact amount of aluminum powder will be designated by the Engineer. The dosage per batch of grout shall be carefully weighed. A number of weighings may be made in the laboratory and doses placed in glass vials for convenient use in the mix. The aluminum powder shall be blended with pumicite or other inert powder in the proportion of one (1) part powder to fifty (50) parts pumicite (or other inert powder) by weight. The blend shall be thoroughly mixed with the cement. The amount of the blend used should vary from 120 g (4-1/2 ounces) per sack of cement for concrete having a temperature of 21.1oC to 190 g (7 ounces) for a temperature of 4.44oC after all ingredients are added, the batch shall be mixed for 3 minutes. Batches of grout shall be placed within 45 minutes after mixing. 406.3.12 Unbonded Steel Where the steel is not to be bonded to the concrete, it shall be carefully protected against corrosion by a coating of tar of other waterproofing material, in addition to any galvanizing which may be specified in addition to the requirements of ASTM A 416 (AASHTO M 203) and ASTM A 421 (AASHTO M 204.)

406.3.13 Handling Extreme care shall be exercised in handling and moving precast prestressed concrete mortar members. Precast girders and slabs shall be transported in an upright position and the points of support and directions of the reactions with respect to the member shall be approximately the same during transportation and storage as when the members are in their final position. If the Contractor deems it expedient to transport or store precast units in other than this position, it shall be done at his own risk after notifying the Engineer of his intention to do so. Prestressed concrete girders shall not be shipped until tests on concrete cylinders, manufactured of the same concrete and cured under the same conditions as the girders, indicate that the concrete of the particular girder has attained a compressive strength equal to the specified design compressive strength of the concrete in the girder and has attained a minimum age of 14 days. 406.3.14 Composite Slab Construction The manufacturing tolerances for pre-cast members shall not exceed those given for length, cross-section and straightness on the Plans, as specified in the Contract or as approved by the Engineer. In addition, where beams are laid side by side in a deck: 1. The difference on soffit level between adjacent units before the in-situ concrete is placed shall not exceed 5 mm for units up to 10 mm for longer units. 2. The width of the deck soffit shall be within 25 mm. 3. In adjacent span, the continuity of the outside beams shall be maintained. 4. The width of gap between individual beams shall not exceed twice the nominal gap. 5. The alignment of transverse holes shall permit the reinforcement or prestressing cables to be placed without distortion. 406.4 Method of Measurement 406.4.1 Structural Members The quantity to be measured for payment will be the actual number of precast prestressed concrete structural members, except piling, of the several types and sizes, installed in place, completed and accepted. Each member will include the concrete, reinforcement and prestressing steel, anchorages, plates, nuts, elastomeric bearing pads, and other such material contained within or attached to the unit. Piling will be measured as provided in Item 400.

406.4.2 Other Items The quantities of other Contract items which enter into the completed and accepted structure will be measured for payment in the manner prescribed for the several items involved. 406.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 406.4 shall be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the particular item listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item. Payment will be made under:

Pay Number

Item

Description

Unit of Measurement

406 (1)

Prestressed Structural Concrete Members (Identification) Prestressed Concrete

Each Lump Sum

406 (2)

ITEM 407 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 407.1 Description This Item shall consist of the general description of the materials, equipment, workmanship and construction requirements of concrete structures and the concrete portions of composite structures conforming to the alignment, grades, design, dimensions and details shown on the Plans and in accordance with the Specifications for piles, reinforcing steel, structural steel, structural concrete and other items which constitute the completed structure. The class of concrete to be used in the structure or part of the structure shall be as specified in Item 405, Structural Concrete. 407.2 Material Requirements 1. Concrete and Concrete Ingredients Concrete and concrete materials shall conform to the requirements in Item 405, Structural Concrete. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in Special Provisions, concrete shall be of Class A.

2. Reinforcing Steel Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements in Item 404, Reinforcing Steel. 3. Structural Steel Structural steel shall conform to the requirements of corresponding materials in Item 403, Metal Structures. 4. Bridge Bearing (Elastomeric Bearing Pad) Elastomeric bearing pads shall conform to Item 412, Elastomeric Bearing Pads.

5. Paints Paints shall conform to the requirements in Item 411, Paint. 6. Waterproofing and Dampproofing Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or indicated in Special Provisions, materials for waterproofing and dampproofing shall conform to the requirements of the following specifications: a. AASHTO M 115 Asphalt for dampproofing and waterproofing. b. AASHTO M 116 Primer for the use with Asphalt in dampproofing and waterproofing. c. AASHTO M 117 Woven cotton fabrics saturated with bituminous substances for use in waterproofing. d. AASHTO M 118 Coal-Tar pitch for roofing, dampproofing and waterproofing. e. AASHTO M 121 Creosote for priming coat with coal-tar pitch dampproofing and waterproofing. f. AASHTO M 159 Woven burlap fabric saturated with bituminous substances for use in waterproofing. g. AASHTO M 166 Numbered cotton duck and array duck. h. AASHTO M 239 Asphalt for use in waterproofing membrane construction. 7. Concrete Curing Compound Curing compound shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 148 Liquid membrane-forming compounds for curing concrete. 8. Joint Filler

Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or in Special Provisions, materials for expansion joint filler shall conform to the requirements of the following specifications: a. AASHTO M 33 Preformed expansion joint filler for concrete. b. AASHTO M 153 Preformed sponge rubber and cork expansion joint fillers for concrete paving and structural construction. c. AASHTO M 173 Concrete joint sealer hot poured elastic type. d. AASHTO M 213 Preformed expansion joint filler for concrete paving and structural construction-non-extruding and resilient bituminous types. e. AASHTO M 220 concrete. Preformed elastomeric compression joint seals for

407.2.1 Proportioning and Strength of Structural Concrete This shall be in accordance with Item 405, Structural Concrete. 407.2.2 Sampling and Testing This shall be in accordance with Item 405, Structural Concrete. 407.3 Construction and Requirements 407.3.1 Handling and Placing Concrete: General Concrete shall not be placed until forms and reinforcing steel have been checked and approved by the Engineer. If lean concrete is required in the Plan or as directed by the Engineer prior to placing of reinforcing steel bar, the lean concrete should have a minimum compressive strength of 13.8 MPa (2,000 psi).. In preparation for the placing of concrete all sawdust, chips and other construction debris and extraneous matter shall be removed from inside the formwork, struts, stays and braces, serving temporarily to hold the forms in correct shape and alignment, pending the placing of concrete at their locations, shall be removed when the concrete placing has reached an elevation rendering their service unnecessary. These temporary members shall be entirely removed from the forms and not buried in the concrete. No concrete shall be used which does not reach its final position in the forms within the time stipulated under Time of Hauling and Placing Mixed Concrete. Concrete shall be placed so as to avoid segregation of the materials and the displacement of the reinforcement. The use of long troughs, chutes, and

pipes for conveying concrete to the forms shall be permitted only on written authorization of the Engineer. The Engineer shall reject the use of the equipment for concrete transportation that will allow segregation, loss of fine materials, or in any other way will have a deteriorating effect on the concrete quality. Open troughs and chutes shall be of metal lined; where steep slopes are required, the chutes shall be equipped with baffles or be in short lengths that reverse the direction of movement to avoid segregation. All chutes, troughs and pipes shall be kept clean and free from coatings of hardened concrete by thoroughly flushing with water after each run. Water used for flushing shall be discharged clear of the structure. When placing operations would involve dropping the concrete more than 1.5 m, concrete shall be conveyed through sheet metal or approved pipes. As far as practicable, the pipes shall be kept full of concrete during placing and their lower end shall be kept buried in the newly placed concrete. After initial set of the concrete, the forms shall not be jarred and no strain shall be placed on the ends of projecting reinforcement bars. The concrete shall be placed as nearly as possible to its final position and the use of vibrators for moving of the mass of fresh concrete shall not be permitted. 407.3.1.1 Placing Concrete by Pneumatic Means Pneumatic placing of concrete will be permitted only if specified in the Special Provisions or authorized by the Engineer. The equipment shall be so arranged that vibration will not damage freshly placed concrete. Where concrete is conveyed and placed by pneumatic means, the equipment shall be suitable in kind and adequate in capacity for the work. The machine shall be located as close as practicable to the work. The discharge lines shall be horizontal or inclined upwards from the machine. The discharge end of the line shall not be more than 3 m from the point of deposit. At the conclusion of placing the concrete, the entire equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. 407.3.1.2 Placing of Concrete by Pumping The placing of concrete by pumping will be permitted only if specified or if authorized by the Engineer. The equipment shall be so arranged that vibration will not damage freshly placed concrete. Where concrete is conveyed and placed by mechanically applied pressure the equipment shall be suitable in kind and adequate in capacity for the work. The operation of the pump shall be such that a continuous stream of concrete without air pockets is produced. When pumping is completed, the concrete remaining in the pipeline, if it is to be used, shall be ejected in such a manner that there will be

no contamination of the concrete or separation of the ingredients. operation, the entire equipments shall be thoroughly cleaned. 407.3.1.3 Placing Concrete in Water

After this

Concrete shall not be placed in water except with approval of the Engineer and under his immediate supervision. In this case the method of placing shall be hereinafter specified. Concrete deposited in water shall be Class A concrete with a minimum cement content of 400 kg/m3 of concrete. The slump of the concrete shall be maintained between 10 and 20 cm. To prevent segregation, concrete shall be carefully placed in a compact mass, in its final position, by means of a tremie, a bottom-dump bucket, or other approved means, and shall not be disturbed after being placed. A tremie shall consist of a tube having a diameter of not less than 250 mm constructed in sections having flanged couplings fitted with gaskets with a hopper at the top. The tremie shall be supported so as to permit free movement of the discharge and over the entire top surface of the work and so as to permit rapid lowering when necessary to retard or stop the flow of concrete. The discharge end shall be closed at the start of work so as to prevent water entering the tube and shall be completely submerged in concrete at all times; the tremie tube shall be kept full to the bottom of the hopper. When a batch is dumped into the hopper, the flow of concrete shall be induced by lightly raising the discharge end, but always keeping it in the placed concrete. The flow shall be continuous until the work is completed. When the concrete is placed with a bottom-dump bucket, the top of the bucket shall be open. The bottom doors shall open freely downward and outward when tripped. The buckets shall be completely filled and slowly lowered to avoid backwash. It shall not be dumped until it rests on the surface upon which the concrete is to be deposited and when discharged shall be withdrawn slowly until well above the concrete. 407.3.2 Compaction of Concrete Concrete during and immediately after placing shall be thoroughly compacted. The concrete in walls, beams, columns and the like shall be placed in horizontal layers not more than 30 cm thick except as hereinafter provided. When less than a complete layer is placed in one operation, it shall be terminated in a vertical bulkhead. Each layer shall be placed and compacted before the preceding layer has taken initial set to prevent injury to the green concrete and avoid surfaces of separation between the layers. Each layer shall be compacted so as to avoid the formation of a construction joint with a preceding layer. The compaction shall be done by mechanical vibration. The concrete shall be vibrated internally unless special authorization of other methods is given by the Engineer or is provided herein. Vibrators shall be of a type, design, and frequency approved by the Engineer. The intensity of vibration shall be such as to visibly

affect a mass of concrete with a 3 cm slump over a radius of at least 50 cm. A sufficient number of vibrator shall be provided to properly compact each batch immediately after it is placed in the forms. Vibrators shall be manipulated so as to thoroughly work the concrete around the reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into the corners and angles of the forms and shall be applied at the point of placing and in the area of freably placed concrete. The vibrators shall be inserted into and withdrawn from the concrete slowly. The vibration shall be of sufficient duration and intensity to compact the concrete thoroughly but shall not be continued so as to cause segregation and at any one point to the extent that localized areas of grout are formed. Application of vibrators shall be at points uniformly spaced, and not farther apart than twice the radius over which the vibration is visibly effective. Vibration shall not be applied directly or thru the reinforcement to sections or layers of concrete that have hardened to the degree that the concrete ceases to be plastic under vibration. It shall not be used to make concrete flow in the forms over distances so great as to cause segregation, and vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete in the forms of troughs or chutes. 407.3.3 Casting Sections and Construction Joints The concrete in each form shall be placed continuously. Placing of concrete in any such form shall not be allowed to commence unless sufficiently inspected and approved materials for the concrete is at hand, and labor and equipment are sufficient to complete the pour without interruption. Joints in the concrete due to stopping work shall be avoided as much as possible. Such joints, when necessary, shall be constructed to meet the approval of the Engineer. When the placing of concrete is temporarily discontinued, the concrete, after becoming firm enough to retain its shape, shall be cleaned of laitance and other objectionable material to a sufficient depth to expose sound concrete. Where a faster edge might be produced at a construction joint, as in the sloped top surface of a wingwall, an inset formwork shall be used to produce an edge thickness of not less than 15 cm in the succeeding layer. Work shall not be discontinued within 50 cm of the top of any face, unless provision has been made for a coping less than 50 cm thick, in which case if permitted by the Engineer, the construction joint may be made at the underside of coping. Immediately following the discontinuance of placing concrete, all accumulations of mortar splashed upon the reinforcing steel and the surfaces of forms shall be removed. Dried mortar chips and dust shall not be puddled into the unset concrete. Care shall be exercised, during the cleaning of the reinforcing steel, not to injure or break the concrete-steel bond at and near the surface of the concrete.

407.3.4 Casting Box Culverts In general, the base slab of box culverts shall be placed and allowed to set before the remainder of the culvert is constructed. In the construction of box culverts the side walls and top slab may be constructed as a monolith. If the concrete in the walls and top slab is placed in two separate operations, special care shall be exercised in order to secure bonding in the construction joint and appropriate keys shall be left in the sidewalls for anchoring the top slab. Each wingwall shall be constructed, if possible, as a monolith. Construction joints where unavoidable, shall be horizontal and so located that no joints will be visible in the exposed face of the wingwall above the ground line. Vertical construction joints shall be at right angles to the axis of the culverts. 407.3.5 Casting Columns, Slabs and Girders Concrete in columns shall be placed in one continuous operation, unless otherwise directed. The concrete shall be allowed to set for at least 20 hours before the caps are placed. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, no concrete shall be placed in the superstructure until the column forms have been stripped sufficiently to determine the condition of the concrete in the column. The load of the superstructure shall not be allowed to come upon the bents until they have been in place at least 14 days, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Concrete in slab spans shall be placed in one continuous operation for each span unless otherwise provided. Concrete in T-Beam or deck girder spans shall be placed in one continuous operation unless otherwise directed. If it is permitted to place the concrete in two separate operations, each of the operations, shall be continuous: first, to the top of the girder stems, and second, to completion. In the latter case, the bond between stem and slab shall be secured by means of suitable shear keys which may be formed by the use of timber blocks approximately 50 mm x 100 mm in crosssection having a length of 100 mm less than the width of the girder stem. These key blocks shall be placed along the girder stems as required, but the spacing shall not be greater than 300 mm center to center. The blocks shall be beveled and oiled in such a manner as to insure their ready removal, and they shall be removed as soon as the concrete has set sufficiently to retain its shape. If the contractor wishes to place the concrete in two separate operations, he shall, with his request for permission to do so, submit plans and proposals of the required changes to the reinforcement, which plans and proposals shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. In box girders, the concrete in the bottom slab be poured first, as a separate operation.

The concrete in the webs and the top slab shall be placed in one continuous operation unless otherwise specified. If it is permitted to place the concrete in more than one operation, the requirements for T-beam shall apply. 407.3.6 Construction Joints Construction joints shall be made only where shown on the Plans or called for in the pouring schedule, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Shear keys or reinforcement shall be used, unless otherwise specified, to transmit shear or to bond the two sections together. Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete which has hardened, the forms shall be retightened. The surface of the hardened concrete shall be roughened as required by the Engineer, in a manner that will not leave loose particles of aggregate or damage concrete at the surface. It shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter and laitance. When directed by the Engineer, the surface of the hardened concrete which will be in contact with new concrete shall be washed with water to this satisfaction, and to insure an excess of mortar at the juncture of the hardened and the newly deposited concrete, the cleaned and saturated surfaces, including vertical and inclined surfaces shall first be thoroughly covered with a coating of mortar of the same proportion of sand and cement as the class of concrete used against which the new concrete shall be placed before the grout or mortar has attained its initial set. The placing of concrete shall be carried continuously from joint to joint. The face edges of all joints which are exposed to view shall be carefully finished true to line and elevation. 407.3.7 Concrete Surface Finishing Surface finishing shall be classified as follows: Class 1, Ordinary Finish Class 2, Rubbed Finish Class 3, Floated Finish All concrete shall be given Class 1, Ordinary Finish and additionally any further finish as specified. Unless otherwise specified, the following surfaces shall be given a Class 2, Rubbed Finish. 1. The exposed faces of piers, abutments, wingwalls, and retaining walls. 2. The outside faces of girders, T-beams, slabs, columns, brackets, curbs, headwalls, railings, arch rings, spandrel walls and parapets. Excluded, however, are the tops and bottoms of floor slabs and sidewalks, bottoms of beams and girders, sides of interior beams and girders, backwalls above bridge seats or the underside of copings. The surface finish on piers and abutments shall include all exposed surfaces below the bridge seats to 20 cm

below low water elevation or 50 cm below finished ground level when such ground level is above the water surface. Wingwalls shall be finished from the top to 50 cm below the finished slope lines on the outside face and shall be finished on top and for a depth of 20 cm below the top on the back sides. Unless otherwise specified, the surface of the traveled way shall be Class 3, Floated Finish. Class 1, Concrete Ordinary Finish Immediately following the removal of forms, all fins and irregular protection shall be removed from all surface except from those which are not to be exposed or are not to be waterproofed. On all surfaces the cavities produced by form ties and all other holes, honeycomb spots, broken corners or edges and other defects shall be thoroughly cleaned, and after having been kept saturated with water for a period of not less than three hours shall be carefully pointed and made true with a mortar of cement and fine aggregate mixed in the proportions used in the grade of the concrete being finished. Mortar used in pointing shall not be more than one hour old. The mortar patches shall be cured as specified under Subsection 407.3.8. All construction and expansion joints in the completed work shall be left carefully tooled and free of all mortar and concrete. The joint filler shall be left exposed for its full length with a clean and true edges. The resulting surface shall be true and uniform. All repaired surfaces, the appearance of which is not satisfactory to the Engineer, shall be rubbed as specified below. Class 2, Concrete Rubbed Finish After removal of forms, the rubbing of concrete shall be started as soon as its condition will permit. Immediately before starting this work, the concrete shall be kept thoroughly saturated with water for a minimum period of three hours. Sufficient time shall have elapsed before the wetting down to allow the mortar used in the pointing of road holes and defects to thoroughly set. Surfaces to be finished shall be rubbed with a minimum coarse carborundum stone using a small amount of mortar on each face. The mortar shall be composed of cement and fine sand mixed in the proportions used in the concrete being finished. Rubbing shall be continued until all form marks, protections and irregularities have been removed, all voids have been filled, and a uniform surface has been obtained. The face produced by this rubbing shall be left in place at this time. After all concrete above the surface being created has been cast, the final finish shall be obtained by rubbing with a fine carborundum stone and water. This rubbing shall be continued until the entire surface is of smooth texture and uniform color. After the final rubbing is completed and the surface has dried, it should be rubbed with burlap to remove loose powder and shall be left free from all unsound patches, paste, powder and objectionable marks.

Class 3, Concrete Floated Finish After the concrete is compacted as specified in Subsection 407.3.2, Compaction of Concrete, the surface shall be carefully struck off with a strike board to conform to the cross-section and grade shown on the Plans. Proper allowance shall be made for camber if required. The strike board may be operated longitudinally or transversely and shall be moved forward with a combined longitudinal and transverse motion, the manipulation being such that neither is raised from the side forms during the process. A slight excess of concrete shall be kept in front of the cutting edge at all times. After striking off and consolidating as specified above, the surface shall be made uniform by longitudinal or transverse floating or both. Longitudinal floating will be required except in places where this method is not feasible. The longitudinal float, operated from foot bridges, shall be worked with a sawing motion while held in a floating position parallel to the road centerline and passing gradually from one side of the pavement to the other. The float shall then be moved forward one-half of each length and the above operation repeated. Machine floating which produces an equivalent result may be substituted for the above manual method. The transverse float shall be operated across the pavement by starting at the edge and slowly moving to the center and back again to the edge. The float shall then be moved forward one-half of each length and the above operation repeated. Care shall be taken to preserve the crown and cross-section of the pavement. After the longitudinal floating has been completed and the excess water removed, but while the concrete is still plastic, the slab surface shall be tested for trueness with a straight-edge. For the purpose, the Contractor shall furnish and use an accurate 3 m straight-edge swing handless 1 m longer than one half the width of the slab. The straight-edge shall be held in successive positions parallel to the road centerline and in contact with the surface and the whole area gone over from one side of the slab to the other as necessary advancement along the deck shall be in successive stages of not more than one-half the length of the straight-edge. Any depression found shall be immediately filled with freshly mixed concrete, struck off, consolidated and refinished. The straight-edge testing and refloating shall continue until the entire surface is found to be free from observable departure from the straight-edge and the slabs has the required grade and contour, until there are no deviations of more than 3 mm under the 3 m straight-edge. When the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the surface shall be given a broom finish. The broom shall be an approved type. The strokes shall be square across the slabs from edge to edge, with adjacent strokes slightly overlapped, and shall be made by drawing the broom without tearing the concrete, but so as to produce regular corrugations not over 3 mm in depth. The surface as thus finished shall be free from porous spots, irregularities, depressions and small

pockets or rough spots such as may be caused by accidental disturbing, during the final brooming of particles of coarse aggregate embedded near the surface. Concrete Surface Finish for Sidewalk. After the concrete has been deposited in place, it shall be compacted and the surface shall be struck off by means of strike board and floated with a wooden or cork float. An edging tool shall be used on all edges and at all expansion joints. The surface shall not vary more than 3 mm under a 3 m straight-edge. The surface shall have a granular or matted texture which will not slick when wet. 407.3.8 Curing Concrete All newly placed concrete shall be cured in accordance with this Specification, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The curing method shall be one or more of the following: 1. Water Method The concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the application of water for a minimum period of 7 days after the concrete has been placed. The entire surface of the concrete shall be kept dump by applying water with an atomizing nozzle. Cotton mats, rugs, carpets, or earth or sand blankets may be used to retain the moisture. At the expiration of the curing period the concrete surface shall be cleared of the curing medium. 2. Curing Compound Surfaces exposed to the air may be cured by the application of an impervious membrane if approved by the Engineer. The membrane forming compound used shall be practically colorless liquid. The use of any membrane-forming compound that will alter the natural color of the concrete or impart a slippery surface to any wearing surface shall be prohibited. The compound shall be applied with a pressure spray in such a manner as to cover the entire concrete surface with a uniform film and shall be of such character that it will harden within 30 minutes after application. The amount of compound applied shall be ample to seal the surface of the concrete thoroughly. Power-operated spraying equipment shall be equipped with an operational pressure gauge and means of controlling the pressure. The curing compound shall be applied to the concrete following the surface finishing operation immediately after the moisture sheen begins to disappear from the surface, but before any drying shrinkage or craze cracks begin to appear. In the event of any delay, in the application of the curing compound, which results in any drying or cracking of the

surface, application of water with an atomizing nozzle as specified under Water Method, shall be started immediately and shall be continued until the application of the compound is resumed or started, however, the compound shall not be applied over any resulting free standing water. Should the film of compound be damaged from any cause before the expiration of 7 days after the concrete is placed in the case of structures, the damaged portion shall be repaired immediately with additional compound. Curing compound shall not be diluted or altered in any manner after manufacture. At the time of use, the compound shall be in a thoroughly mixed condition. If the compound has not been used within 120 days after the date of manufacture, the Engineer may require additional testing before the use to determine compliance to requirements. An anti-setting agent or a combination of anti-setting agents shall be incorporated in the curing compound to prevent caking. The curing compound shall be packaged in clean barrels or steel containers or shall be supplied from a suitable storage tank located on the Site. Storage tank shall have a permanent system designed to completely redisperse any settled material without introducing air or any other foreign substance. Containers shall be well-sealed with ring seals and lug type crimp lids. The linings of the containers shall be of a character that will resist the solvent of the curing compound. Each container shall be labeled with a manufacturers name, specification number, batch number, capacity and date of manufacture, and shall have label warning concerning flammability. The label shall also warn that the curing compound shall be well-stirred before use. When the curing compound is shipped in tanks or tank trunks, a shipping invoice shall accompany each load. The invoice shall contain the same information as that required herein for container labels. Curing compound may be sampled by the Engineer at the source of supply and on the Site. 3. Waterproof Membrane Method The exposed finished surfaces of concrete shall be sprayed with water, using a nozzle that so atomizes the flow that a mist and not a spray is formed until the concrete has set, after which a curing membrane of waterproof paper or plastic sheeting shall be placed. The curing membrane shall remain in place for a period of not less than 72 hours. Waterproof paper and plastic sheeting shall conform to the specification of AASHTO M 171. The waterproof paper or plastic sheeting shall be formed into sheets of such width as to cover completely the entire concrete surface.

All joints in the sheets shall be securely cemented together in such a manner as to provide a waterproof joint. The joint seams shall have a minimum lap of 100 mm. The sheets shall be securely weighed down by placing a bank of earth on the edges of the sheets or by other means satisfactory to the Engineer. Should any portion of the sheets be broken or damaged within 72 hours after being placed, the broken or damaged portions shall be immediately repaired with new sheets properly cemented into place. Sections of membrane which have lost their waterproof qualities or have been damaged to such an extent as to render them unfit for curing, the concrete shall not be used. 4. Forms-in-Place Method Formed surfaces of concrete may be cured by retaining the form-inplace. The forms shall remain in place for a minimum period of 7 days after the concrete has been placed, except that for members over 50 cm in least dimensions, the forms shall remain in place for a minimum period of 5 days. Wooden forms shall be kept wet by watering during the curing period. 5. Curing Cast-In-Situ Concrete All newly placed concrete for cast-in-situ structures, other than highway bridge deck, shall be cured by the water method, the forms-inplace method, or as permitted herein, by the curing compound method, all in accordance with the requirements of Subsection, 407.3.8 Curing Concrete. The curing compound method may be used on concrete surfaces which are to be buried under ground and surfaces where only Ordinary Surface Finish is to be applied and on which a uniform color is not required and which will not be visible from public view. The top surface of highway bridge decks shall be cured by either the curing compound method or the water method. The curing compound shall be applied progressively during the deck finishing operations. The water cure shall be applied not later than 4 hours after completion of the deck finishing. When deemed necessary by the Engineer during periods of hot weather, water shall be applied to concrete surface being cured by the curing compound method or by the forms-in-place method until the Engineer determine that a cooling effect is no longer required.

6. Curing Pre-Cast Concrete (except piles) Pre-cast concrete members shall be cured for not less than 7 days by the water method or by steam curing. Steam curing for pre-cast members shall conform to the following provisions: a. After placement of the concrete, members shall be held for a minimum 4-hour pre-steaming period. b. To prevent moisture loss on exposed surfaces during the presteaming period, members shall be covered immediately after casting or the exposed surface shall be kept wet by fog spray or wet blankets. c. Enclosures for steam curing shall allow free circulation of steam about the member and shall be constructed to contain the live steam with a minimum moisture loss. The use of tarpaulins or similar flexible covers will be permitted, provided they are kept in good condition and secured in such a manner to prevent the loss of steam and moisture. d. Steam at jets shall be low pressure and in a saturated condition. Steam jets shall not impinge directly on the concrete, test cylinders, or forms. During application of the steam, the temperature rise within the enclosure shall not exceed 20oC per hour. The curing temperature throughout the enclosure shall not exceed 65oC and shall be maintained at a constant level for a sufficient time necessary to develop the required compressive strength. Control cylinders shall be covered to prevent moisture loss and shall be placed in a location where temperature of the enclosure will be the same as that of the concrete. e. Temperature recording devices that will provide an accurate continuous permanent record of the curing temperature shall be provided. A minimum of one temperature recording device per 50 m of continuous bed length will be required for checking temperature. f. Curing of pre-cast concrete will be considered completed after the termination of the steam curing cycle.

7. Curing Pre-cast Concrete Piles All newly placed concrete for pre-cast concrete piles, conventionally reinforced or prestressed shall be cured by the Water Method as described in Subsection 407.3.8, Curing Concrete, except that the concrete shall be kept under moisture for at least 14 days. At the option of the Contractor, stream curing may be used in which case the steam curing provisions of Subsection 407.3.8 (6), Curing Pre-Cast Concrete (except piles) shall apply except that the concrete shall be kept wet for at least 7 days including the holding and steaming period.

407.3.9 Falsework Design and Drawings Detailed working drawings and supporting calculations of the false work shall be furnished by the Contractor to the Engineer. No falsework construction shall start until the Engineer has reviewed and approved the design. The Contractor shall provide sufficient time for the Engineer to complete this review. Such time shall be proportionate to the complexity of the falsework design and in no case be less than two weeks. The Contractor may review the falsework drawings at any time provided sufficient time is allowed for the Engineers review before construction is started on the revised portion. Assumptions used in design of the falsework shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. The entire superstructure cross-section, except for the railing, shall be considered to be placed at one time, except when in the opinion of the Engineer, a portion of the load is carried by members previously cast and having attained a specified strength. 2. The loading used on timber piles shall not exceed the bearing value for the pile and shall in no case exceed 20 tonne per pile. 3. Soil bearing values and soil condition (wet and dry) shall be designated by the Contractor on the falsework drawings. Falsework footings shall be designed to carry the loads imposed upon them without exceeding estimated soil bearing values or allowable settlements. 4. The maximum loadings and deflections used on jacks, brackets, columns and other manufactured devices shall not exceed the manufactures recommendations. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish catalogue or other data verifying these recommendations. 5. If the concrete is to be prestressed, the falsework shall be designed to support any increased or readjusted loads caused by the prestressing forces. 6. Joints supporting slabs and overhangs shall be considered as falsework and designed as such. For the construction of falsework over and adjacent to roadways where falsework openings are required for maintaining traffic, the Contractor shall provide any additional features for the work needed to insure that the falsework will be stable if subjected to impact by vehicles. The falsework design at the locations where said openings are required shall include but not be limited to the following minimum provisions: a. Each exterior stringer in a span shall be securely anchored to the following cap or framing.

b. Adequate bracing shall be used during all stages of falsework construction and removal over or adjacent to public traffic. c. Falsework members shall be at least 300 mm clear of temporary protective railing members. The falsework drawings shall include a superstructure placing diagram showing proposed concrete placing sequence and construction joint locations, except that where a schedule for placing concrete is shown on the Contract Plans, no deviation will be permitted there from unless approved in writing by the Engineer. The falsework drawings shall show pedestrian openings which are required through the falsework. Anticipated total settlements of falsework and forms shall be indicated by the Contractor on the falsework drawings. These should include falsework footing settlements over 20 mm will not be allowed unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Deck slab forms between girders shall be constructed with no allowance for settlement relative to the girders. Detailed calculations by the Contractor showing the stresses deflections, and camber necessary to compensate for said deflections in all load supporting members shall be supplied. After approving the Contractors falsework deflection camber, the Engineer will furnish to the Contractor the amounts of camber necessary to compensate for vertical alignment or anticipated structure deflection, if these are not shown on the drawings. The total camber used in constructing falsework shall be the sum of the aforementioned cambers. 407.3.10 Falsework Construction The falsework shall be constructed to conform to the falsework drawings. The materials used in the falsework construction shall be of the quantity and quality necessary to withstand the stresses imposed. The workmanship used in falsework shall be of such quality that the falsework will support the loads imposed on it without excessive settlement or take-up beyond that shown on the falsework drawings. When falsework is supported on piles, the piles shall be driven to a bearing value equal to the total calculated pile loading as shown on the falsework drawings. Suitable jacks or wedges shall be used in connection with falsework to set the forms to their required grade and to take up any excessive settlement in the falsework either before or during the placing of concrete.

The Contractor shall provide tell-tales attached to the soffit forms easily readable and in enough systematically-placed locations to determine the total settlement of the entire portion of the structure where concrete is being placed. Should unanticipated events occur, including settlements that deviate more than 20 mm from those indicated on the falsework drawings, which in the opinion of the Engineer would prevent obtaining a structure conforming to the requirement of the Specification, the placing of concrete shall be discontinued until corrective measures satisfactory to the Engineer are provided. In the event satisfactory measures are not provided prior to initial set of the concrete in the affected area, the placing of concrete shall be discontinued at a location determined by the Engineer. All unacceptable concrete shall be removed. 407.3.11 Removing Falsework Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, or permitted by the Engineer, falsework supporting any span of a supported bridge shall not be released before 14 days after the last concrete, excluding concrete above the bridge deck, has been placed. Falsework supporting any span of a continuous or rigid frame bridge shall not be released before 14 days after the last concrete excluding concrete above the bridge deck, has been placed in that span and in the adjacent portions of each adjoining span for a length equal to at least half the length of the span where falsework is to be released. Falsework supporting deck overhangs and deck slabs between girders shall not be released until 7 days after the deck concrete has been placed. In addition to the above requirements, no falsework for bridges shall be released until the supported concrete has attained a compressive strength of at least 80% of the required 28-day strength. Falsework for cast-in place prestressed portion of structure shall not be released until after the prestressing steel has been tensioned. All falsework materials shall be completely removed. Falsework piling shall be removed at least 50 cm below the surface of the original ground or stream bed. When falsework piling is driven within the limits of ditch or channel excavation areas, the falsework piling within such areas shall be removed to at least 50 cm below the bottom and side slopes of said excavated areas. All debris and refuse resulting from work shall be removed and the site left in a neat and presentable condition. 407.3.12 Formwork Design and Drawings The Contractor shall prepare drawings and materials data for the formwork and shutters to be submitted to the Engineer for approval unless otherwise directed. The requirements for design of formwork are the same as described under Section 407.3.9.

407.3.13 Formwork Construction Concrete forms shall be mortar-tight, true to the dimensions, lines and grades of the structure and with the sufficient strength, rigidity, shape and surface smoothness as to leave the finished works true to the dimensions shown on the Plans or required by the Engineer and with the surface finish as specified. Formwork and shutters are to be constructed in accordance with the approved Plans. The inside surfaces of forms shall be cleaned of all dirt, mortar and foreign material. Forms which will later be removed shall be thoroughly coated with form oil prior to use. The form oil shall be of commercial quality form oil or other approved coating which will permit the ready release of the forms and will not discolor the concrete. Concrete shall not be deposited in the forms until all work in connection with constructing the forms has been completed, all materials required for the unit to be poured, and the Engineer has inspected and approved said forms and materials. Such work shall include the removal of all dirt, chips, sawdust and other foreign material from the forms. The rate of depositing concrete in forms shall be such to prevent bulging of the forms or form panels in excess of the deflections permitted by the Specification. Forms for all concrete surfaces which will not be completely enclosed or hidden below the permanent ground surface shall conform to the requirements herein for forms for exposed surfaces. Interior surfaces of underground drainage structures shall be completely enclosed surfaces. Formwork for concrete place under water shall be watertight. When lumber is used, this shall be planed, tongued and grooved. Forms for exposed concrete surface shall be designed and constructed so that the formed surface of the concrete does not undulate excessively in any direction between studs, joists, form stiffeners, form fasteners, or wales. Undulations exceeding either 2 mm or 1/270 of the center to center distance between studs, joists, form stiffeners, form fasteners, or wales will be considered to be excessive. Should any form of forming system, even though previously approved for use, produce a concrete surface with excessive undulations, its use shall be discontinued until modifications satisfactory to the Engineer have been made. Portions of concrete structures with surface undulations in excess of the limits herein specified may be rejected by the Engineer. All exposed surfaces of similar portions of a concrete structure shall be formed with the same forming material or with materials which produce similar concrete surface textures, color and appearance.

Forms for exposed surfaces shall be made of form materials of even thickness and width and with uniform texture. The materials shall have sharp edges and be mortar-tight. Forms for exposed surfaces shall be constructed with triangular fillets at least 20 mm wide attached so as to prevent mortar runs and to produce smooth straight chamfers at all sharp edges of the concrete. Form fasteners consisting of form bolts, clamps or other devices shall be used as necessary to prevent spreading of the forms during concrete placement. The use of ties consisting of twisted wire loops to hold forms in position will not be permitted. Anchor devices may be cast into the concrete for later use in supporting forms or for lifting precast members. The use of driven types of anchorage for fastening forms of form supports to concrete will not be permitted. 407.3.14 Removal of Forms and Falsework Forms and falsework shall not be removed without the consent of the Engineer. The Engineers consent shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the safety of the work. Blocks and bracing shall be removed at the time the forms are removed and in no case shall any portion of the wood forms be left in the concrete. Falsework removal for continuous or cantilevered structures shall be as directed by the Engineer or shall be such that the structure is gradually subjected to its working stress. When concrete strength tests are used for removal of forms and supports, such removal should not begin until the concrete has attained the percentage of the specified design strength shown in the table below. Minimum Time Centering under girders, beams frames or arches Floor slabs Walls Columns Sides of beams and all other vertical surfaces Minimum Percentage Design Strength 80% 70% 70% 70% 70%

14 14 1 2

days days day days

1 day

In continuous structures, falsework shall not be released in any span until the first and second adjoining spans on each side have reached the strength specified herein, or in the Special Specifications. When cast-in-place post tensioned bridges are constructed, falsework shall remain in place until all post tensioning has been accomplished.

Falsework under all spans of continuous structures shall be completely released before concrete is placed in railings and parapets. In order to determine the condition of column concrete, forms shall be removed from columns before releasing supports from beneath beams and girders. Forms and falsework shall not be released from under concrete without first determining if the concrete has gained adequate strength without regard to the time element. In the absence of strength determination, the forms and falsework are to remain in place until removal is permitted by the Engineer. The forms for footings constructed within cofferdams or cribs may be left in place when, in the opinion of the Engineer, their removal would endanger the safety of the cofferdam or crib, and when the forms so left intact will not be exposed to view in the finished structure. All other forms shall be removed whether above or below the ground line or water level. All forms shall be removed from the cells of concrete box girders in which utilities are present and all formwork except that necessary to support the deck slab shall be removed from the remaining cells of the box girder. To facilitate finishing, forms used on ornamental work, railing, parapets and exposed vertical surfaces shall be removed in not less than 12 nor more than 48 hours, depending upon weather conditions. In order to determine the condition of concrete in columns, forms shall always be removed from them before the removal of shoring from beneath beams and girders. Falsework and centering for spandrel-filled arches not be struck until filling at the back of abutments has been placed up to the spring line. Falsework supporting the deck of rigid frame structure shall not be removed until fills have been placed back to the vertical legs. 407.4 Method of Measurement The quantity of structural steel, structural concrete, reinforcing steel or other Contract Pay Items shall constitute the completed and accepted structure which shall be measured for payment in the manner prescribed in the several items involved. 407.5 Basis of Payment

The quantities measured as provided in Section 407.4, Method of Measurement shall be paid for at the contract price for the several pay items which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, preparing, fabricating, placing, curing and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Such payment shall constitute full payment for the completed structure ready for use.

Payment will be made under: Pay Item Number 405 (1) 405 (2) 405 (3) 400 103 601 404 407 (1) Description Concrete Class A, C & P Concrete Post/Baluster Railings Parapet Walls Piling Structure Excavation Sidewalk Concrete Reinforcing Steel Bars Lean Concrete Unit of Measurement Cubic Meter Each Linear Meter Cubic Meter Linear Meter Cubic Meter Square Meter or Cubic Meter Kilogram Cubic Meter

When more than one item is specified, means of identification shall be inserted in parenthesis immediately after the Pay Item and letter suffixes shall be included within the parenthesis of the Pay Item Number.

ITEM 408 STEEL BRIDGES 408.1 Description This Item shall consist of the construction of steel structure conforming to the lines, grades, dimensions and designs shown on the Plans and in accordance with the Specifications for piling, concrete metal reinforcement, structural steel and other items which constitute the completed structure. 408.2 Materials All materials shall conform to the detailed requirements specified for the component parts of the completed structure. Where special materials are required, they shall be shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions. 408.3 Construction Methods 408.3.1 Organization and Equipment During the progress of the work the Contractor shall have a competent foreman or superintendent, experienced in steel erection, in personal charge of the work. Before starting work, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer as to the method of erection he proposes to follow and the amount and character of equipment he proposes to use, which shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The approval of the Engineer shall not be considered as relieving the Contractor of the responsibility for the safety of his method or equipment or from

carrying out the work in full accordance with the Plans and Specifications. Erection diagrams shall be approved by the Director, Bureau of Design. 408.3.2 Handling and Storing Materials Steel and timber shall be placed on skids above the ground and shall be kept clean. The underlying ground shall be kept free from vegetation and properly drained. Girders and beams shall be placed upright and shored. Long members, such as columns and chords, shall be supported on skids placed close enough together to prevent injury by deflection. The Contractor shall be responsible for the loss of any material, which has been paid for by the Bureau, while it is in his care, or for any damage, resulting from his work. The loading, transporting, unloading and piling of structural material shall be so conducted that the metal will be kept free from injury from rough handling. 408.3.3 Erection The Contractor shall furnish and place all falsework, erect all metal work, remove the temporary construction, and do all work required to complete the structure as covered by the Contract, including the removal of the old structure or structures if so stipulated, all in accordance with the Plans and these Specifications. If the substructure and superstructure are built under separate contracts, the Department will provide the substructure, constructed to correct lines and elevations and properly finished, and will establish the lines and elevation required for setting the steel. If the fabrication and erection of the superstructure are done under separate contract, the Department will furnish detail plans for the bridge or bridges to be erected, including shop details, camber diagrams, erection diagrams, list of field rivets and bolts, and copy of shipping statements showing a list of parts and their weights. The Contractor shall provide all tools, machinery, and appliances including drift pins and fitting up bolts, necessary for the expeditious handling of the work. The falsework shall be properly designed, substantially built and maintained for the loads which will come upon it. The Contractor, shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval plans for falsework or for changes in existing structure necessary for maintaining traffic. Approval of the Contractors plans shall not be considered as relieving him of any responsibility. The parts shall be accurately assembled as shown on the Plans and any matchmarks shall be followed. The material shall be carefully handled that no parts will be bent, broken or otherwise damaged. No hammering shall be done that will in any way injure or damage a member. Bearing surface and surfaces to be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before the members are assembled. Unless erected by the cantilever method, truss spans shall be erected on blocking so placed as to give the trusses proper camber. The blocking shall be left in

place, until the tension chord splices are fully riveted and all other truss connection pinned and bolted. Rivets in splices of butts joints of compression members and rivets in railings shall not be driven until the span is swung. Splices and filled connections shall have one-half of the holes filled with bolts and cylindrical erection pin (half bolts and half pins) before riveting. Splices and connections carrying traffic during erection shall have three-fourths of the holes so filled. Fitting up bolts shall be of the same nominal diameter as the rivets and cylindrical erection pins shall be 0.75 mm (1/32 inch) larger. 408.3.4 Welding Where so indicated on the Plans, structural members shall be joined by welding. The welds shall be of the size and type indicated and shall be made by competent operators. Shop welding shall conform in all details to the Standard Specifications for Welded Highway and Railway Bridges of the American Welding Society. Field welding shall conform to the requirement of Item 409, Welded Structural Steel. 408.3.5 Bent Material The straightening of plates, angles, and other shapes shall be done by methods not likely to produce fractures or other injury. The metal shall not be heated. Following the straightening of a bend or buckle, the surface shall be carefully inspected for evidence of fracture. Sharpkinks and bends may be cause for the rejection of the material. 408.3.6 Alignment Before beginning the field riveting, the structural steel shall be adjusted to correct grade and alignment and elevation of panel points (end of floor beams) properly regulated. For truss spans a slight excess camber will be permitted while the bottom chords are being riveted. 408.3.7 Field Riveting Pneumatic hammers shall be used for field riveting. Cup-faced dollies, fitting the head closely, shall be used to insure good bearing. Connections shall be secured and accurately fitted up before the rivets are driven. Drifting shall be only such as to draw the parts into position and not sufficient to enlarge the holes or distort the metal. Unfair holes shall be reamed or drilled. Rivets shall be heated uniformly to light cherry-red color and shall be driven while hot. They shall not be overheated or burned. Rivet heads shall be full and symmetrical, concentric with the shank, and shall have full bearing all around. They shall not be smaller than the heads of the shop rivets. Rivets shall be tight and shall grip the connected parts securely together. Caulking or recupping will not be permitted. In removing rivets, the surrounding metal shall not be injured, and if necessary they shall be drilled out.

408.3.8 Bolted Connections In bolted connections, the nut shall be drawn up tight and set by center punching the threads of the bolt at the face of the nut. 408.3.9 Pin Connections Pilot and driving nuts shall be used in driving pins. Pins shall be so driven that the members will take full bearing on them. Pin nuts shall be screwed up tight and threads burred at the face of the nut with a center punch. 408.3.10 Misfits and Shop Errors The connection of minor misfits involving non-harmful amounts of reaming, cutting and chipping will be considered a legitimate part of the erection. However, any error in the shop fabrication or deformation resulting from handling and transportation which prevents the proper assembling and fitting up of parts by the moderate use of drift pins or a moderate amount of reaming and slight chipping and cutting shall be reported immediately to the Engineer, and his approval of the method of correction obtained. If the Contract provides for completed fabrication and erection, the Contractor shall be responsible for all misfits, errors and injuries and shall make the necessary correction and replacements. If the Contract is for erection only, the inspector, with the cooperation of the Contractor shall keep a correct record of labor and materials and be used in correction of misfits, errors and injuries, not due to actions of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall render within 30 days of itemized bill for the approval of the Engineer. 408.3.11 Placing Anchor Bolts Anchor bolts shall be placed as provided under Item 407, Concrete Structures or as shown on the Plans. 408.3.12 Setting Shoes and Bearing Shoes and bearing plates shall not be placed on bridge seat bearing areas that are improperly finished or that are deformed or irregular. They shall be set level in exact position and elevation and shall have full even bearing. Unless otherwise specified, the shoes and bearing plates shall be set by the following methods: a. The bridge seat bearing area shall be heavily coated with lead paint and then covered with three layers of 340.2 to 369.8 g (12 to 14 ounces) duck, each layer being coated thoroughly on its top surface with redlead paint. The shoes and bearing plates shall be placed in position while the paint is plastic. As an alternate to canvas and red lead 3 mm (1/8 inch) sheet lead may be used if called for on the Plans or is approved by the Engineer. b. The shoes and bearing plates shall be properly supported and fixed with grout. No lead shall be placed upon them until the grout has set for at

least 96 hours, adequate provision being made to keep the grout well moistened during this period. The grout shall consist of one part Portland Cement to one part fine-grained sand. The location of the anchor bolts in relation to the slotted holes in the expansion shoes correspond to the temperature at the time of erection. The nuts on the anchor bolts at the expansion end of spans shall be adjusted to permit the free movement of span. Anchor bolt nuts shall be set by center punching the threads of the bolts at the face of the nut. 408.3.13 Painting Unless otherwise specified, metal work shall be given two shop coats of red lead paint and two field coats of paint as specified under Item 411, Paint. 408.3.14 Placing Concrete On steel spans, the concrete floor shall not be placed until the span has been swung or released from the falsework. The concrete shall be placed symmetrically on the span beginning at the center and working simultaneously towards each end or beginning at the ends and working simultaneously towards the center. In either case, the concrete shall be placed continuously between construction joints designated on the Plans or approved in writing by the Engineer. Concrete shall be cured specified under Item 407, Concrete Structures. 408.3.15 Timber Floors Timber floors of the species and grade indicated on the plans shall be built as specified under Timber Structures, Item 402. 408.3.16 Field Inspection All materials and work of erection shall be subject to the inspection of the Engineer, who shall be given all facilities required. Materials and workmanship not previously inspected will not inspected after its delivery to the site of the work. Any materials inspected and accepted prior to delivery on the work shall be subject to rejection if found defective after delivery. 408.4 Method of Measurement The quantity of structural steel and other Contract Pay Items which constitute the completed and accepted structure shall be measured for payment in the manner prescribed in the several items involved.

408.5 Basis of Payment The quantities, measured as prescribed above, shall be paid for at the contract until price for the several Pay Items which price and payments shall be full compensation for furnishing, preparing, fabricating, transporting, placing and erecting all structural steel and all other materials for the complete structure; for all shop work, painting and field work; for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the item. Such payment shall constitute full payment for the completed structure ready for use, and no allowance shall be made for cofferdam construction, falsework, or other erection expenses as provided under Subsection 408.3.10.

ITEM 409 WELDED STRUCTURAL STEEL 409.1 Description This work shall consist of the joining of structural steel members with welds of the type, dimensions, and design shown on the Plans and in accordance with the Specifications. It is the intent of this Specification to provide for work of a quality comparable to that required under the Standard Specifications for Welded Highway and Railway Bridges of the American Welding Society. In case of dispute or for situations not adequately provided for in this Specification, those designated Standard Specifications shall be considered as the final authority and shall govern except as amended by the Special Provisions. Welding of Structural Steel shall be done only when shown on the Plans or authorized in writing by the Engineer. 409.2 Materials Requirements Steel base metal to be welded shall steel conforming to AASHTO M 183. be open-hearth or electric furnace

All arc-welding electrodes shall conform to the requirements of American Welding Society Specifications. Electrodes shall be of classification numbers E7016, E7018 or E7028 as required for the positions, type of current and polarity, and other conditions of intended use, and to conform to any special requirements indicated on the Plans. Filler material to be used in the repair or strengthening of old structures or for joining new parts to existing steel members, shall be adopted to the material to be welded and may depart from the foregoing requirements only if agreed by the Engineer.

409.3 Construction Requirements 409.3.1 Equipment 409.3.1.1 General All items of equipment for welding and gas cutting shall be so designed and manufactured and in such condition as to enable qualified welders to follow the procedures and attain the results prescribed in this Specification. 409.3.1.2 Arc-Welding Equipment Welding generators and transformers shall be designed expressly for welding. They shall be capable of delivering steady currents adjustable through a range ample for the work requirements. They shall respond automatically and quickly to changes in power requirements due to variations in arc length and shall deliver full current promptly on striking an arc. Welding cable shall have sufficient conductivity to avoid overheating and inadequate current at the arc and shall be effectively insulated against welding circuit voltage. Earth or ground connections and circuits shall be secured and adequate to carry the welding currents. Electrode holders shall grip the electrode firmly and with good electrical contact. Approved automatic welding heads may be used, with suitable auxiliary handling equipment to provide automatic instead of manual control of electrode and welding arc. 409.3.1.3 Gas-Cutting Equipment Torches and tips shall be of proper size and type of the work at hand. Suitable regulators shall afford the welder complete control over the pressure and rate of flow of each gas. 409.3.1.4 Protective Equipment All personnel protective equipment shall conform to the American Standard Association Code for such equipment. The Contractor shall enforce the use of approved accessories necessary for the protection and convenience of the welders and for the proper and efficient execution of the work. Suitable protection against the light of the arc shall be maintained by the Contractor when arc-welding operation might be viewed within harmful range by persons other than the actual welders and inspectors.

409.3.2 Welding 409.3.2.1 General Welding shall be performed by the metal-arc process, using the electrodes specified with either direct or alternating current. Surfaces to be welded shall be smooth, uniform and free from fins, tears, and other defects which would adversely affect the quality of the weld. Edges of material shall be trimmed by machining, chipping, grinding, or machine gas-cutting to produce a satisfactory welding edge wherever such edge is thicker than: 13 mm for sheared edge of material; 16 mm for toes of angles or rolled shapes (other than wide flange sections); 25 mm for universal mill plate or edges of flange sections. The width of root face used, shall be not more than 1.5 mm for parts less than 10 mm in thickness nor more than 3 mm for parts 10 mm or more in thickness. Butt welds shall be proportioned so that their surface contours will lie in gradual transition curves. For butt welded joints between base metal parts of unequal thickness, a transition shall be provided on a slope or level not greater than 1 in 2.5 to join the offset surfaces. This transition may be provided by sloping the surface of the weld metal or by bevelling the thicker part or by combination of these two methods. Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust, grease or other material that will prevent proper welding. Mill scale that withstands vigorous wire brushing or a light film of drying oil or rust inhibitive coating may remain. Surfaces within 50 mm of any weld location shall be free of any paint or other material that would prevent proper welding or produce objectionable fumes while welding. No operation or actual welding or gas-cutting shall be performed on a member while it is carrying live load stress or while subject to shock and vibration and from moving loads. Welding and gas-cutting shall cease in advance of the application of such loads. 409.3.2.2 Welders All welding shall be done by approved competent and experienced and fully qualified welders. 409.3.2.3 Preparation of Materials for Welding Dimensional tolerance, straightness and flatness of the structural shapes and plates shall be within the limits prescribed in this Specification. Structural steel which is to be welded shall preferably not be painted until all welding is completed.

Preparation of edges by gas-cutting shall, wherever practicable, be done by machine gas-cutting. Machine gas-cutting edges shall be substantially as smooth and regular as those produced by edge planning and shall be left free of slag. Manual gas cutting shall be permitted only where machine gas-cutting is not practicable and with the approval of the Engineer. The edge resulting from manual gas-cutting shall be inspected and smoothed with special care. All reentrant corners shall be filleted to a radius at least 19 mm. The cut lines shall not extend beyond the fillet and all cutting shall follow closely the line prescribed. 409.3.2.4 Assembly The parts to be joined by fillet welds shall be brought into a close contact as practicable, and no event shall be separated more than 5 mm. If the separation is 1.5 mm or greater, the leg of the fillet weld shall be increased by the amount of separation. The separation between faying surfaces of lap joints and of butt joints landing on a backing structure shall not exceed 1.5 mm. The fit of joints which are not sealed by welds throughout their length shall be sufficiently close to exclude water after painting. Where irregularities in rolled shape or plates, after straightening, do not permit contact within the above limits, the procedure necessary to bring the material within these limits shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Cutting parts to be joined by butt welds shall be carefully aligned. Where the parts are effectively restrained against bending due to eccentricity or alignment, a maximum offset of 10 percent of the thickness or the thinner part joined, but in no case more than 3 mm, may be permitted as a departure from the theoretical alignment. In connecting alignment in such cases, the parts shall not be drawn into a greater slope than two degrees (1 in 30). Measurement of offset shall be between centerline of parts unless otherwise shown on the Plans. When parts abutting edge to edge differ in thickness, the joint shall be of such form that the slope of either surface through the transition zone does not exceed 1 in 2.5, the thicker part being bevelled, if necessary. Members to be welded shall be brought into correct alignment and held in position by bolts, clamps, wedges, guy lines, struts, other suitable devices or tack welds until welding has been completed. The use of jigs and fixtures is recommended where practicable. Such fastening devices as may be used shall be adequate to insure safety. Plug and slot welds may be used to transmit shear in a lap joint or to prevent the buckling or separation of lapped parts. The diameter of the hole for a plug weld shall not be less than the thickness of the part containing it plus 8 mm nor shall it be greater than 2.25 times the thickness of the weld. The minimum center spacing of plug welds shall be four times the diameter of the hole.

The length of the slot for a slot weld not exceed ten times the thickness of the weld. The width of the slot shall not be less than the thickness of the part containing it plus 8 mm nor shall it be greater than 2.25 times the thickness of the weld. The ends of the slot shall be semicircular or shall have the corners rounded to a radius not less than the thickness of the part containing it, except those ends which extend to the edge of the part. The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in a direction transverse to their length shall be 4 times the width of the slot. The minimum center to center spacing in a longitudinal direction on any line shall be 2 times the length of the slot. The thickness of plug or slot welds in material 16 mm or less in thickness shall be equal to the thickness of the material. In material over 16 mm in thickness, it shall be at least one-half the thickness of the material but not less than 16 mm. Tack welds, located where the final welds will later be made, shall be subject to the same quality requirements as the final weld. Tack welds shall be as small as practicable and where encountered in the final welding, shall be cleaned and fused thoroughly with the final weld. Defective, cracked or broken tack welds shall be removed before final welding. Members or component parts of structures shall be assembled and matchmarked prior to erection to insure accurate assembly and adjustment of position on final erection. Painted assembly marks shall be removed from any surface to be welded. 409.3.2.5 Control of Distortion and Shrinkage Stresses In assembling and joining parts of a structure or a built-up member and in welding reinforcing parts to existing members, the procedure and sequence of welding shall be such as will avoid distortion and minimize shrinkage stresses. As far as practicable, long parallel lines of welding on a part or member shall be executed concurrently, and all welds shall be deposited in a sequence that will balance the applied heat of welding on various sides as much as possible while the welding progresses. Before the commencement of welding on a structural member in which severe shrinkage stresses or distortion are likely to occur, a complete program for welding sequence and distortion control shall be submitted to the Engineer and shall be subject to his approval. The direction of the general progression in welding on a member shall be from points where parts are relatively fixed in position, with respect to each other, toward points which have a greater relative freedom of movement.

Where part or member is to be welded on both ends into a rigid structure or assembly, the connection at which the greatest shrinkage will occur in the direction of the length of the part or member, shall be made while the part or member is free to move in the direction of the shrinkage; and the connection involving the least shrinkage shall be made last. A weld designed to sustain tensile stress shall be made in such a way that their welding is being performed at any point, all parts that would offer restraint against shrinkage can shrink, deform or move enough to preclude serious shrinkage stresses. In welding of built-up members of heavy sections, particularly those T or Hshapes where the flanges are considerably heavier than the stems or webs, and in any case where the component parts are 38 mm or greater in thickness, special care shall be exercised during welding to avoid weld cracking. In the welding of members of such heavy section, the temperature of contiguous areas about a welding operation shall be equal, and not less than 55oC. If necessary, the lighter parts shall be heated while the weld is cooling, to keep the temperature of contiguous parts substantially equal. In the fabrication of cover-plated beams and built-up members, all shop splices in each component part shall be made before such component part is welded to other parts of the member. In making all butt-welded splices in rolled shapes and in making buttwelded field splices in built-up sections (such as in H or I-sections) the sequence and procedure of welding shall be such as to take into account unequal amounts of expansion or contraction in the parts being welded. The procedure and sequence shall be such that while the weld and the heated base metal are contracting at any point, any part of the member that would furnish restraint against such contraction can move or shrink enough to prevent the shrinkage of the heated metal from producing harmful internal stresses. The procedure and sequence that is used for making such splices shall be planned in advance in full detail and submitted to the Engineer and shall be subject to his approval. The ends of all butt welds in flanges of beams and girders shall be made with extension bars regardless of the thickness of such flanges. Welding shall not be done when surfaces are wet from condensation or rain which is falling on the surfaces to be welded; nor during periods of high winds unless the welding operator and the work are properly protected. 409.3.2.6 Technique of Arch-Welding The welding current shall conform with respect to voltage and current (and polarity, of direct current is used) to the recommendations of the manufacturer of the electrode being used, as indicated in the instructions that are included with each container of electrodes.

Arc lengths and electrical potential and current shall be suited to the thickness of material, type of groove and other circumstances attendant to the work. The maximum size of electrode permitted shall be 5 mm with the following exceptions: 1. The maximum size for flat position welding of all passes except the root pass shall be 8 mm. 2. The maximum size for horizontal fillet welds shall be 6 mm. The electrode for the single pass fillet weld and for the root passes of all multiple layer welds in all cases shall be of the proper size to insure thorough fusion and penetration with freedom from slag inclusions. A single layer of the weld metal, whether deposited-in one pass or made up of several parallel beads, shall not exceed 3 mm in thickness except that the bead at the root may be 6 mm in thickness if the position of welding and the viscosity of the weld metal permit control of the latter so that it does not over flow upon unfused base metal. The maximum size of fillet weld which may be made in one pass shall be 8 mm except that for vertical welds made upward the maximum size made in one pass shall be 13 mm. In vertical welding the first root pass shall be formed from the bottom upward. Succeeding passes may be formed by any technique that will fulfill the requirements of the Specification and Plans. The electrode manipulation during welding shall insure that: 1. Complete fusion between the base metal and the deposited weld metal is obtained. 2. The melted base metal is replaced by weld metal so that no undercut remains along the edges of the finished weld. 3. The molten weld metal floats all slag, oxide and gases to the surface behind the advancing arc. Each time the arc is started, either to begin a weld or to continue partly completed weld, the arch shall be manipulated to obtain complete fusion of the deposited weld metal with the base metal and with any previously deposited weld metal, before any progression of the arc along the joint. At the completion of a pass or weld, the arc shall be manipulated so as to fill the crater with sound metal.

Before welding over previously deposited metal, the slag shall be removed and the weld and adjacent base metal shall be brushed clean. This requirement shall apply not only to cratered areas but also when welding is resumed after any interruption. It shall not, however, restrict the making of plug and slot welds, in accordance with the following paragraphs. In making plug welds the following techniques shall be used: 1. For flat welds, the arc shall be carried around the root of the joint and then weaved along a spiral path to the center of the hole, fusing and depositing a layer of weld metal in the root and bottom of the joint. The arc shall then be carried to the periphery of the hole, and the procedure repeated, fusing and depositing successive layers to fill the hole to the depth required. The slag covering the weld metal shall be kept molten, or nearly so, until the weld is finished. If the arc is broken, except briefly for changing electrodes, the slag must be allowed to cool and shall be completely removed before restarting the weld. 2. For vertical welds, the arc shall be started at the root of the joint, at the lower side of the hole and carried upward on the zigzag path, depositing a layer about 5 mm thick on the exposed face at the thinner plate and fused to it and to the side of the hole. After cleaning the slag from the weld, other layers shall be similarly deposited to fill the hole to the required depth. 3. For overhead welds, the procedure shall be the same as for flat welds except that the slag shall be allowed to cool and shall be completely removed after depositing each successive layer until the hole is filled to the required depth. Slot welds shall be made with a technique similar to that specified above for plug welds, except that if the length of the slot exceeds three times the width, or if the slot extends to the edges of the part of the technique specified above for making plug welds shall be followed for the type of flat position welds. 409.3.2.7 Details of Welds The following tabulation shows that the relation between weld size and the maximum thickness of material on which various sizes of fillet welds may be used: Size of Fillet Weld 5 mm 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 13 mm 16 mm over Maximum Thickness of Part 13 mm 19 mm 32 mm 51 mm 152 mm 152 mm

The maximum size of fillet weld that may be used along the edge of material 6 mm or more in thickness shall be 1.5 mm less than the thickness of the material. The minimum effective length of fillet weld shall be four times its size and in no case less than 38 mm. Fillet welds terminating at the corners of parts or members shall, wherever practicable, be turned continuously full size around the corners for a distance not less than twice the nominal size of the weld. Intermittent fillet welds, preferably, shall not be used. permitted only where the required weld area is less than that of a weld of the minimum size. If used on main members, they intermittent welds. In all other cases, chain intermittent welding staggered intermittent welding. They shall be continuous fillet shall be chain is preferable to

Spacing of intermittent fillet welds shall be measured between the center of the weld segments. The spacing shall conform to the following requirements unless calculated stresses between the parts require closer spacing: 1. At the end of members, there shall preferably be continuous longitudinal fillet welds at least as long as the width of the element or member being connected. 2. The clear spacing in the direction of stress of stitch welds that connect plates to other plates or to shapes shall not exceed: a. For compression members .10 times the thickness of the thinner part but not more than 300 mm. b. For tension members .. 14 times the thickness of the thinner part but not more than 300 mm. The spacing transverse to the direction of stress shall not exceed 24 times the thickness of the thinner part connected. 3. For members composed of two or more rolled shapes in contact with one another, the longitudinal spacing of stitch welds shall not exceed 600 mm. Fillet welds in holes or slots may be used to transmit shear in lap joints or to prevent the buckling or separation of lapped parts. The fillet welds in a hole or slot may overlap. Seal welding shall preferably be accomplished by a continuous weld combining the function of sealing and strength, changing sections only as the required strength may necessitate. Exposed faces of welds shall be made reasonably smooth and regular, shall conform as closely as practicable to the design requirements and shall not at any place be inside the intended cross-section. Weld dimension in excess of the

design requirements shall not be a cause for rejection, but in case excess weld metal involves serious malformation, such work shall be rejected. All fillet welds shall be of acceptable types. All fillet welds that carry reversed stresses running in a direction perpendicular to their longitudinal axis shall be of the concave type or the 0-gee type when the fillet weld is flushed with the edge of a member. When one of these types is specifically indicated on the Plans for a weld, it shall be of that type. Butt welds shall preferably be made with a slight reinforcement, except as may be otherwise provided, and shall have no defects. The height of reinforcement shall be not more than 3 mm. All butt welds, except produced with aid of backing material, shall have the root of the initial layer chipped out or otherwise cleaned to sound metal and welded in accordance with the requirements of the Specification. Butt welds made with the use of a backing of the same materials as the base metal shall have the weld metal thoroughly fused with the backing materials. Ends of butt welds shall be extended past the edges of the parts joined by means of extension bars providing a similar joint preparation and having a width not less than the thickness of the thicker part jointed; or for material 19 mm or less in thickness, the ends of the welds shall be chipped or cut down to solid metal and side welds applied to fill out the ends to the same reinforcement as the face of the welds. Extension bars shall be removed upon completion and cooling of the weld and the ends of the weld made smooth and flush with the edges of the abutting parts. 409.3.2.8 Quality of Welds Weld metal shall be solid throughout except that very small gas pockets and small inclusions of oxide or slag may be accepted if well dispersed and if none exceeds 1.5 mm in greatest dimension, and if the sum of the greatest dimensions of all such defects of weld metal area does not exceed 15 mm in an area of 10 cm2. There shall be complete fusion between the weld metal and the base metal and between successive passes throughout the joint. Welds shall be free from overlap and the base metal free from undercutting. All craters shall be filled to the full cross-section of the welds. 409.3.2.9 Correction In lieu of rejection of an entire piece of member containing welding which is unsatisfactory or indicates inferior workmanship, the following corrective measures may be permitted by the Engineer whose specific approval shall be obtained for making each correction:

1. Removal of part or all of the welds shall be affected by chipping, grinding or gas-gouging. 2. Defective or unsound welds shall be corrected either by removing and replacing the welds, or as follows: a. Excessive convexity Reduce to size by removal of excess weld metal. b. Shrinkage crack in base metal, craters and excessive porosity Remove defective portion of base and weld metal down to sound metal and deposit additional weld metal. c. Undercutting, undersize and excessive concavity Clean and deposit additional weld metal. d. Overlapping and lack of fusion Remove and replace the defective length of weld. e. Slag inclusion Remove those parts of the weld containing slag and fill with weld metal. f. Removal of adjacent base metal during welding Clean and form full size by depositing additional weld metal. 3. Where corrections require the depositing of additional weld metal, the electrode used shall be smaller than the electrode used in making the original weld. 4. A cracked weld shall be removed throughout its length, unless by the use of acid etching, magnetic inspection or other equally positive means, the extent of the crack can be ascertained to be limited, in which case sound metal 50 mm or more beyond each end of the crack need not be removed. 5. In removing defective parts of a weld, the gas-gouging, chipping or grinding shall not extend into the base metal any substantial amount beyond the depth of the web penetration unless cracks or other defects exist in the base metal. 6. Where the work performed subsequent to the making of a deficient weld has rendered the weld inaccessible or has caused new conditions which would make the correction of the deficiency dangerous or ineffectual, the original condition shall be restored by renewal of welds or members, or both before making the necessary corrections, or else the deficiency shall be compensated by additional work according to a revised design approved by the Engineer. 7. Caulking of welds shall not be done. 8. Before adding weld metal or rewelding, the surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly. Where incomplete fusion is disclosed by chipping, grinding or gas gouging, to correct defects, that part of the weld shall be removed and rewelded.

409.3.2.10 Stress Relieving Peening to reduce residual stress of multi-layer welds may be used only if authorized and ordered by the Engineer. Care shall be exercised to prevent overpeening which may cause overlapping, scaling, flecking or excessive cold working of weld and base metal. 409.3.2.11 Cleaning and Protective Coatings Painting shall not be done until the work has been accepted and shall be in accordance with the Specification. The surface to be painted shall be cleaned of spatter, rust, loose scale, oil and dirt. Slag shall be cleaned from all welds. Welds that are to be galvanized shall be treated to remove every particle of slag. 409.3.2.12 Identification The operator shall place his identification mark with crayon, or paint, near the welds made by him. 409.3.2.13 Inspection On completion of the welding work, inspection shall be carried out by an Inspector appointed by the Engineer. The size and contour of welds shall be measured with suitable gauges. The inspector shall identify with a distinguishing mark all welds that he has inspected and accepted. The Contractor shall remove and replace, or correct as instructed, all welds found defective or deficient. He shall also replace all methods found to produce inferior results, with methods which will produce satisfactory work. In the event that fault welding or the removal for rewelding of faulty welding shall damage the base metal, the Contractor shall remove and replace the damaged material. 409.4 Measurement and Payment Unless otherwise provided in the Special Provisions, welded structural steel structures shall not be measured and paid for separately, but the cost thereof shall be considered as included in the contract price for other items.

ITEM 410 TREATED AND UNTREATED TIMBER 410.1 Description This Item shall consist of structural timber of the specie and size called for on the Plans, either treated or untreated as called for in the Proposal. It shall include the furnishing of the timber, the framing, erecting, furnishing of hardware and the furnishing of paint and paintings if paint is called for on the Plans or in the Special Provisions. 410.2 Material Requirements 410.2.1 Timber Timber shall be the specie specified on the Plans. Unless otherwise noted on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, only the best grade shall be used. It shall be free from loose knots, splits, worm holes decay, warp, ring separation, or any defect which will impair its strength or render it unfit for its intended use. Any specie specified on the Plans may be used for untreated timber and if that specie is not available, a specie of equivalent strength and durability may be used if authorized by the Engineer. If the timber is to be treated, only those species shall be used which are known to possess properties which make them favorable to treatment. 410.2.2 Paint When painting of timber is required, the paint shall conform to the requirements of Item 411, Paint. 410.2.3 Hardware Hardware shall conform to the requirements of Item 402, Timber Structures. 410.2.4 Preservatives The preservatives shall be creosote oil or creosote petroleum oil blend as called for on the Plans or by the Special Provisions, and shall conform to the Standard Specifications for Pressure Treatment of Timber Products, ASTM D1760. When timber is intended for marine use, the creosote petroleum oil blend shall not be used. 410.3 Construction Requirements

410.3.1 Timber Treatment Treatment shall consist of the forcing of either creosote oil or a creosote petroleum oil mixture into the outer fibers of the timber by a heat and pressure

process. The process shall be in accordance with AASHTO M 133, preservatives and pressure treatment process for timber, but with such changes in temperatures, pressures, duration of treatment and other factors affecting the final treatment that experience has shown to be necessary in the treatment of structural timbers sawn from woods native to the Philippines. The treatment shall be so regulated that the curing process will not induce excessive checking. The minimum penetration of the preservative into the surface of the timber shall be 20 mm. The minimum retention of the preservative per cubic metre of timber shall be as follows: For general use, 192 kg by empty cell process For marine use, 320 kg by full cell process The Engineer shall be notified at least 10 days in advance of the date that the treating process will be performed in order that the untreated timber, the treatment process, and the finished treatment timber may all be inspected. The Engineer shall inspect the timber prior to treatment to determine conformance with those Specifications and suitability of conditions for treatment. He shall be permitted free access to the plant in order that temperatures, pressures and quantities and type of treatment materials used may be observed. Samples of the creosote or creosote petroleum oil mixture shall be furnished as required for tests. After completion of the treatment, the timber shall be checked to determine penetration of treatment, amount of checking quantity of free preservative remaining on the timber and will check any other visual evidence that the treatment has been performed in a satisfactory manner. The penetration of treatment shall be determined by boring a sufficient number of well-distributed holes to determine the average penetration. All such holes shall be plugged with plugs approximately 1.6 mm larger in diameter that the bit used in boring the holes. If the penetration of preservative is less than the required amount, the entire charge, or such parts thereof as are determined by the Inspector to be unsatisfactory, may be retreated. If after retreatment the penetration is still insufficient, the treated pieces shall be rejected. Any excessive checking caused by the treating process shall be cause for rejection of the pieces in which the excessive checking occurs. The treating plant shall be equipped with adequate thermometers and pressure gauges so that the process can be accurately controlled and a continuous record made of all stages of the treating process. If required by the Engineer, records shall be furnished showing the duration, maximum and minimum temperatures and pressures used during all stages of the process. 410.4 Method of Measurement The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meter of timber complete in place and accepted. Measurement of timber shall be computed from

the nominal dimension of the timber even though the actual dimensions may be scant. The measurement of timber shall include only such timber as a part of the completed and accepted work and will not include any timber required for a falsework, bracing or other timber required in the erection. 410.4 Basis of Payment

The quantities, determined as provided in Section 410.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic meter for Timber or Untreated Timber as called for in the Proposal, which price and payment shall constitute full compensate for furnishing all timber, for preservative treating when required, and for the delivery, framing, erecting, painting if required, and for the furnishing of all labor, hardware, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under: Pay Item Number 410 (1) 410 (2) Description Timber Treated Timber Unit of Measurement Cubic Meter Cubic Meter

ITEM 411 PAINT 411.1 Description This Item shall consist of furnishing and applying all paint materials including vehicles, pigments, pastes, driers, thinners and mixed paints for steel and wooden structures; sampling testing and packing; preparation of the surface and application of paint to structures. 411.2 Materials Requirements 411.2.1 General Paint, except aluminum paint, shall consist of pigments of the required fineness and composition ground to the desired consistency in linseed oil in a suitable grinding machine, to which shall be added additional oil, thinner and drier as required. Aluminum paint shall consist of aluminum powder or paste of the required fineness and composition to which shall be added the specified amount of vehicle. The paint shall be furnished for use in ready mixed, paste or powder form. All paints shall meet the following general requirements:

1. The paint shall show no excessive settling and shall easily redisperse with a paddle to a smooth, homogeneous state. The paint shall show no curdling, livering, caking or color separation and shall be free from lumps and skins. 2. The paint as received shall brush easily, possess good leveling properties and shall show no running or sagging when applied to a smooth vertical surface. 3. The paint shall dry to a smooth uniform finish, free from roughness grit, unevenness and other imperfections. 4. The paint shall not skin within 48 hours in a filled tightly closed container. 411.2.2 The paint shall conform to the requirements of the Specifications indicated as follows: Ready Mixed Red Lead Paint Aluminum Paint White & Tinted Ready Mixed Paint Foliage Green Bridge Paint Black Paint for Bridges And Timber Structures Basic Lead-Silico-Chromate Ready Mixed Primer Ready Mixed Aluminum Paint 411.2.3 Drier This Specification covers both straight oil drier (material free from resins and gums), and Japan drier (material containing varnish gums). The drier shall be composed of lead manganese or cobalt or a mixture of any of these elements, combined with a suitable fatty oil, with or without resins or gums, and mineral spirits or turpentine, or a mixture of these solvents. The drier shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Appearance Free from sediment and suspended matter. 2. Flash Point (Tag Close Up) Not less than 30oC. 3. Elasticity The drier when flowed on metal and baked for 2 hours at o 100 C shall have an elastic film. AASHTO M 72 and PNS Type I, II, III & IV AASHTO M 69 and PNS Type I & II AASHTO M 70 AASHTO M 67 AASHTO M 68 AASHTO M 229 AASHTO M 260 and PNS

4. Drying It shall mix with pure raw linseed oil in the proportion of 1 volume of drier to 19 volume of oil without curdling and the resulting mixture when flowed on glass shall dry in not more than 18 hours. 5. Color When mixed with pure, raw linseed oil in the proportion of 1 volume of drier to 8 volume of oil, the resulting mixture shall be darker than a solution of 6 grams of Potassium Dichromate in 13 cc of pure Sulfuric Acid (sp.gr. 1.84). 411.3 Construction Requirements 411.3.1 Proportion of Mixing It is the intent of this Specification to provide a paint of proper brushing consistency, which will not run, steak or sag and which will have satisfactory drying qualities. 411.3.2 Aluminum Paint, Field Coats On Structural Steel The paint shall be mixed in the proportion of 240 grams of aluminum powder or paste per liter of vehicle of long oil spar varnish. This makes a paint containing 21 percent pigment and 79 percent vehicle. The weighed amount of powder or paste shall be placed in a suitable mixing container and the measured volume of vehicle poured over it. The paste or powder shall be incorporated in the paint by vigorous stirring with a paddle. The powder or paste will readily disperse in the vehicle. Before removing any paint from the container, the paint shall be thoroughly stirred to insure a uniform mixture, and the paint shall be suitably stirred during use. The paint shall be mixed on the job and only enough for one days use shall be mixed at one time. When two field coats of aluminum paint are specified, the first coat shall be tinted with lampblack paste or Prussian blue paste in the quantity of 24 grams/liter of paint. The exact quantity used shall be sufficient to give a contrast in color which can be readily distinguished. When three field coats of aluminum paint are specified, the second coat shall be tinted. 411.3.3 Aluminum Paint, Field Coats on Creosoted Timber The paint shall be mixed as specified for Aluminum Paint for Structural Steel except that the proportions shall be 270 grams of aluminum powder or paste to one litre of vehicle. Other paint composition may be used when and as stipulated in the Special Provisions. 411.3.4 Containers and Markings All paints shall be shipped to strong substantial containers plainly marked with the weight, color and volume in litres of the paint content, a true statement of the percentage composition of the pigment, the proportions of the pigment to

vehicle, the name and address of the manufacturers, and the stencil of the authorized inspecting agency. Any package or container not so marked will not be accepted for use. 411.3.5 Sampling and Testing Method of sampling shall be as follows: 1. One 20-litre can sample in original unopened container shall be obtained for 100 cans of the delivered material or 10% fraction thereof. 2. One 4-litre can sample in original unopened container shall be obtained for every 100 cans or fraction thereof of the delivered material. Methods of testing will be in accordance with the applicable AASHTO or ASTM Methods. 411.3.6 Painting 411.3.6.1 The painting of structure shall include the proper preparation of the surface; the application, protection and drying of the paint coatings, the protection of the pedestrians, vehicular or other traffic upon or underneath the structures, the protection of all parts of the structure (both superstructure and substructure) against disfigurement by spatters, splashes and smirches of paint or of paint materials; and the supplying of all tools, tackle, scaffolding labor, paint and materials necessary for the entire work. Paint shall not be applied during rain, storms or when the air is misty, or when, in the opinion of the Engineer, conditions are otherwise unsatisfactory for the work. Paint shall not be applied upon damp surfaces or upon metal which has absorbed heat sufficient to cause the paint to blister and produce a pervious paint film. No wide flat brush shall be used. All brushes preferably shall be either round or oval but if flat brushes are used, they shall not exceed 100 mm in width. The paint when applied shall be so manipulated as to produce a uniform even coating in close contact with the surface being painted, and shall be worked into all corners and crevices. On surfaces inaccessible to brushes, the paint shall be applied by spray gun or with sheepskin daubers specially constructed for the purposes. Paint shall be thoroughly stirred, preferably by means of mechanical mixers, before being removed from the containers, and, to keep the pigments in suspension, shall be kept stirred while being applied.

When a paint gun is used, the equipment used shall be of an approved type and shall have provision for agitation of paint in the spray container. In the case of aluminum paint, the pressure used shall be only that necessary to secure adequate atomization. If in the opinion of the Engineer unsatisfactory results are obtained from the use of a spray gun, its use shall be discontinued and the painting completed by the use of brushes. 411.3.6.2 Painting Structural Steel Surfaces of metals to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, loose mill, scale, dirt, oil or grease, and other foreign substances. Unless cleaning is to be done by sandblasting, all weld areas, before cleaning is begun, shall be neutralized with a proper chemical, after which they shall be thoroughly rinsed with water. Cleaning may be by any of the following three methods: 1. Hand Cleaning The removal of rust, scale and dirt shall be done by the use of metal brushes, scrapers, chisels, hammers or other effective means. Oil and grease shall be removed by the use of gasoline or benzene. Bristle or wood fiber brushes shall be used for removing loose dust. 2. Sandblasting Sandblasting shall remove all scale and other substances down to the base metal. Special attention shall be given to the cleaning of corners and re-entrant angels. Before painting, sand adhering to the steel in corners and elsewhere shall be removed. The cleaning shall be approved by the Engineer prior to any painting. The material shall be painted before the rust forms and not later than 2 hours after cleaning. 3. Flame Cleaning Oil and grease shall be removed by washing with suitable solvent. Excess solvent shall be wiped from the work before proceeding with subsequent operation. The surface to be painted shall be cleaned and dehydrated (freed of occluded moisture) by the passage of oxyacetylene flames which have an oxygen to acetylene of at least one. The inner cones of these flames shall have a ratio length to port diameter of at least 8 and shall not be more than 4 mm center to center. The oxyacetylene flames shall be traversed over the surface of the steel in such manner and at such speed that the surface is dehydrated, and dirt, rust, loose scale, scale in the form of blisters or scabs, and similar foreign matter are freed by the rapid intense heating by the flames. The flames shall not be traversed so slowly that loose scale or other foreign matter is fused to the surface of the steel. The number, arrangement and manipulation of the flames shall be such that all parts of the surface are adequately cleaned and dehydrated. Promptly after the application of the flames, the surface of the steel shall be wire-brushed, hand scraped wherever necessary and then swept and dusted to remove all

free materials and foreign particles. Compressed air shall not be used for this operation. Paint shall be applied promptly after the steel has been cleaned and while the temperature of the steel is still above that of the surrounding atmosphere, so that there will be no recondensation of moisture on the cleaned surfaces. 4. Shop Painting of Structural Steel When all fabrication work is completed and has been tentatively accepted, all surfaces not painted before assembling shall be given two coats of Red Lead Shop Paint conforming to the requirements of this Specification. (The inside of top chords for trusses and laced members or inaccessible parts, except contact surfaces, may be painted before assembling). Shipping pieces shall not be located for shipment until thoroughly dry. No painting shall be done after loading the materials on transport vehicles. Erection marks for field identifications of members shall be painted upon previously painted surfaces. With the exception of abutting joints and base plates, machinefinished surface shall be coated, as soon as practicable after acceptance with a hot mixture of white lead and tallow before removal from the shop. The composition used for coating machine-finished surface shall be mixed in the following proportions: Pure Tallow Pure White Lead Pure Linseed Oil 5. Field Painting of Structural Steel When the erection work is complete including riveting and straightening of bent metal; all adhering rust, scale, dirt, grease or other foreign material shall be removed as specified under cleaning of surfaces. As soon as the Engineer has examined and approved all field rivets, the heads of such rivets and field bolts, all welds and any surfaces from which the shop coat of paint has become worn off or has otherwise become defective, shall be cleaned and thoroughly covered with one coat of shop coat paint. When the paint applied for touching up rivet heads and abraded surfaces has become thoroughly dry, such field coats as called for shall be applied. In no case shall a succeeding coat be applied until the previous coat has dried throughout the full thickness of the film. All small cracks and cavities which were not sealed in water-tight manner by the first field coat shall be filled with a pasty mixture of red lead and linseed oil before the second field coat is applied. 1,915 grams 958 grams 1.0 liter

The following provisions shall apply to the application of all field coats. To secure a maximum coating on edges of plates or shapes, rivet heads and other parts subjected to special wear and attack, these parts shall first be stripped, followed immediately by the general painting of the whole surface, including the edges and rivet heads. The application of the final coats shall be deferred until adjoining concrete work has been placed and finished. If concreting operations have damaged that paint, the surface shall be recleaned and repainted. 411.3.6.3 Painting and Timber Structures Timber structures shown on the Plans to be painted, shall be given two coats of the specified materials, which shall be thoroughly brushed in. Additional coats shall be required when so specified on the Plans. All surfaces shall be thoroughly dry before painting, and each coat shall be allowed to stand for three or four days, or until thoroughly dry before applying the succeeding coat. Timber which required painting must be seasoned timber surfaced on 4 sides. It shall be either untreated or salt-treated timber as specified on the Plans. The entire surface of all untreated timber that is to be painted, shall be given a priming coat immediately after the material is delivered to the project. All contact surfaces shall receive the second coat paint. Special care shall be taken during construction and handling so that the pieces to be painted do not come in contact, except when required, with the creosoted materials and that no oil is brushed on the same during construction operations. The Contractor shall be required to pile such pieces separately from the creosoted materials and keep them from contact with same until ready for erection. Creosoted materials such as guardrails and guide posts which are to be painted, shall be painted with aluminum paint as specified above. 411.3.6.4 Painting Galvanized Surface For the purpose of conditioning the surface of galvanized surfaces to be painted, the painting shall be deferred as long as possible in order that the surface may weather. Before painting galvanized surfaces they shall be treated as follows: 1. In 4 litres of soft water, dissolve 60 ml of copper chloride, copper nitrate, and sal ammonia, then add 60 ml of commercial muriatic acid. This should be done in earthenware or glass vessel, never in tin or other metal receptacle. Apply the solution with a wide flat brush to the galvanized surface, when it will assume a dark almost black color which on drying becomes a grayish film.

2. The surfaces, when dry, may then be painted as described. 411.3.6.5 Repainting Existing Structures When called for on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, existing structures shall be given the number and kind of coats of field paint as stipulated. The surface to be repainted shall be cleaned as specified under Subsection 411.3.6.2, Painting Structural Steel, with the added provisions that all dead or loose paint shall be removed by scraping, chipping, or brushing as may be necessary. Timber railings, name plates, planking and other interfering parts shall be removed before cleaning is begun and shall be replaced after the painting has been completed and the last coat has thoroughly dried. The application of the coat shall be as specified under Subsection 411.3.6.2, (5), Field Painting of Structural Steel. 411.4 Measurement and Payment Painting shall not be measured and paid for separately, but the cost thereof shall be considered as included in the contract unit price of the items where called for.

ITEM 412 ELASTOMERIC BEARING PADS 412.1 Description 412.1.1 Scope

This Item shall consist of the requirement for elastomeric bearing pads whose main function is to transfer loads or accommodate relative movement between a bridge superstructure and its supporting structure, or both while avoiding damaging strain and additional tension. Elastomeric bearings shall include unreinforced pads (consisting of elastomer only) and reinforced bearings with steel laminates. 412.1.2 General Requirements All bearings shall be designed in accordance with specifications contained in the latest edition of the AASHTO Standard Specification for Highway Bridges, 15th Edition, 1992. 412.1.3 Classification and Use The following are the types of elastomeric bearings: a. Plain Elastomeric Bearing Pad b. Plain Elastomeric Sandwich Bearing

c. Steel-Laminated Elastomeric Bearing without External Load Plates d. Steel-Laminated Elastomeric Bearing with External Load Plate(s) A laminated bearing pad is required when the thickness of the plain pad is more than 31.75 mm and the compressive strain is more than 15%. 412.2 Material Requirements The elastomer for the manufacture of the bearing is furnished in two types as follows: 1. Type CR-Chloroprene Rubber 2. Type NR-Natural Rubber The elastomer compound used in the construction of a bearing shall contain only either natural rubber or a chloroprene rubber as the raw polymer. No reclaimed rubber shall be used. Steel laminates used for reinforcement shall be made from rolled mild steel conforming to ASTM A 36, A 570 or equivalent, unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. The laminates shall have a minimum nominal thickness of 20 gage. 412.2.1 Physical Requirements A. The elastomer compound shall meet the minimum requirement of Table 1. B. Dimensions and Permissible Variations All elastomeric layers, for example, plain bearing pads, laminates, and covers, shall be of uniform thickness unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase order. All internal steel laminates shall be of uniform thickness. When specified in the contract or purchase order, the thickness of the outer steel laminates may differ if not adjacent to an external load plate. The minimum thickness of internal steel laminates shall be 1.5 mm or 0.060 in (16 gage) when the greater of the length or width of a rectangular bearing or diameter of a circular bearing is less than 450 mm or 18 in. In all other cases, the minimum thickness shall be 2 mm or 0.075 inch (14 gage). Bearing dimensions and elastomer layer thicknesses shall satisfy the tolerances in Table 2, in which D is the length, width or diameter as appropriate, and T is the total elastomer thickness. Variation from a plane parallel to a design surface shall not exceed an average slope of 0.005 for the upper surface and 0.006 for a side surface.

Table 1 Quality Control Properties of Elastomer Natural Rubber (NR) Grade (Durometer) Physical Properties: A. Before Aging Tensile Strength, MPa (D412) Elongation, % (D412) Durometer Hardness, Shore (D2240) Tear Resistance, N/mm (D624) Compression Set , % (D395) Method B, Temperature, oC B. After Aging Temperature of the Test, oC Aging Time, Hours Tensile Strength, % (D573) Elongation, % Durometer Hardness, Shore Pts. Other Properties: Ozone Resistance (D1149) Partial Pressure, MPa Duration, Hours Tested at 20% strain 37.7 oC 1 oC Mounting procedure D518 Procedure A Brittleness D2137, low temp. Brittleness at -40 oC Shear Modulus Nominal Hardness Shear Modulus at 23 oC, MPa Pts. Chloroprene Rubber (CR)

15.5 (min.) 400 (min.) 605 31.5 (min.) 25 (max.) 70 70 168 -25 (max.) -25 (max.) +10 (max.)

15.5 (min.) 300 (min.) 705 31.5 (min.) 25 (max.) 70 70 168 -25 (max.) -25 (max.) +10 (max.)

15.5 (min.) 350 (min.) 605 31.5 (min.) 35 (max.) 100 100 70 -15 (max.) -40 (max.) +15 (max.)

15.5 (min.) 300 (min.) 705 31.5 (min.) 35 (max.) 100 100 70 -15 (max.) -40 (max.) +15 (max.)

25 48 -

25 48 -

100 100 No cracks

100 100 No cracks

Pass

Pass

Pass

Pass

0.851.1

1.131.84

0.851.1

1.131.84

Plain pads and laminated bearings shall be manufactured to the design dimensions and these specifications with the tolerances listed in Table 2, unless other tolerances are shown on the design drawings.

Table 2 Tolerances Mm Overall vertical dimensions Design thickness 32 mm (1 in) or less Design thickness over 32 mm (1 ) Overall horizontal dimensions 914 mm (36 in) and less Over 914 mm (36 in) Thickness of individual layers of elastomer (laminated bearing only) at any point within the bearing Variation from a plane parallel to the theoretical surface: (as determined by measurements at the edge of the bearings) Top Sides Position of exposed connection members Edge cover of embedded laminated connection members Size of holes, slots or inserts Position of holes, slots, or inserts -0, +3 -0, +6 -0, +6 -0, +12 20 percent of design value but no more than 3 mm (1/8 in)

Slope relative to the bottom of no more than 0.005 radian 6 3 -0, +3 3 3

412.3 Construction Requirements 412.3.1 Handling, Transport, Storage and Installation During handling, transport, storage, and installation, bearings shall be kept clean and protected from mechanical damage, heat, contaminants and other deleterious effects. Bearings shall be placed on surfaces that are plane to within 1.6 mm and unless the bearings are placed in opposing pairs, horizontal to within 0.01 radians. Any lack of parallelism between the top of bearing and the underside of the girder that exceeds 0.01 radians shall be corrected either grinding of the surface, grout pack bearing seats or modification of the bearing such that the intended bearing placement is as originally designed with the least amount of bearing modification, or as otherwise directed by the Engineer. Exterior plates of the bearing shall not be welded unless at least 38.1 mm of steel exists between the weld and the elastomer. Each completed bearing shall have its components clearly identified, be securely bolted, straffed or otherwise fastened to prevent any relative movement and marked on its top as to location and orientation in each structure in the projects conformity with the plans.

Dismantling at the site shall not be done unless absolutely necessary for inspecting or installation. 412.3.2 Sampling Sampling, testing and acceptance consideration will be made on a lot basis. A lot shall be further defined as the smallest number of bearings as determined by the following criteria: a. A lot shall not exceed a single contract or project quantity. b. A lot shall not exceed 50 bearings. c. A lot shall consist of those bearings of the same type regardless of load capacity. For acceptance purposes, bearing from within the lot shall be selected at random as samples for inspection and testing. A minimum of three bearings shall be taken from the lot for testing. If the number of bearings in the lot exceeds 50 then for each additional 50 or part thereof, one additional bearing shall be taken for testing. 412.3.3 Acceptance Requirements 1. If lack of elastomer to steel bond is indicated, the bearing shall be rejected. 2. If laminate placement faults are observed which results in elastomer layer thickness that exceed the tolerances in Table 2, the bearing shall be rejected. 3. If there are at least three separate surface cracks which are each at least 2 mm wide and 2 mm deep. The bearing shall be rejected. 4. Record the median compressive stiffness (K) of the bearing of median stiffness.The compressive stiffness of each bearing tested shall not differ form (K) by more than 10%. 5. For each bearing that fails to meet the requirements in (1), two additional bearings maybe sampled and shall meet the requirements in (1) or the lot shall be rejected. 6. If the lot is not rejected, the bearing of median stiffness (K) shall be subjected to the elastomeric material tests in (2). 412.4 Method of Measurement

The quantity of elastomeric bearing pad to be paid for will be the final quantity placed and accepted in the completed structure. The dimensions of elastomeric bearing pads will be the quantity placed in accordance with the Plans or as otherwise directed by the Engineer.

412.5

Basis of Payment

The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 412.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Elastomeric Bearing Pads which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item. Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number 412

Description Elastomeric Bearing Pads

Unit of Measurement Each

ITEM 413 - PREFORMED SPONGE RUBBER AND CORK EXPANSION JOINT FILLERS FOR CONCRETE PAVING AND STRUCTURAL CONSTRUCTION Preformed sponge rubber and cork expansion joint fillers for concrete paving and structural construction shall conform to the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 153.

PART G DRAINAGE AND SLOPE PROTECTION STRUCTURES ITEM 500 PIPE CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS 500.1 Description This item shall consist of the construction or reconstruction of pipe culverts and storm drains, hereinafter referred to as conduit in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Plans or as established by the Engineer. 500.2 Material Requirements Material specifications: shall meet the requirements specified in the following

Zinc coated (galvanized) corrugated iron or steel culverts and underdrains Cast iron culvert pipe Concrete sewer, storm drain and culvert pipe Reinforced concrete culvert, storm drain and sewer pipe Bituminous coated corrugated metal culvert pipe and pipe arches Reinforced concrete arch culvert, storm drain and sewer pipe Reinforced concrete elliptical culvert, storm drain and sewer pipe Asbestos cement pipe for culverts and storm drains

AASHTO M 36 AASHTO M 64 AASHTO M 86

AASHTO M 170

AASHTO M 190

AASHTO M 206

AASHTO M 207 AASHTO M 217

Joint Mortar Joint mortar for concrete pipes shall consist of 1 part, by volume of Portland Cement and two (2) parts of approved sand with water as necessary to obtain the required consistency. Portland Cement and sand shall conform to the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete. Mortar shall be used within 30 minutes after its preparation. Rubber gaskets AASHTO M 198

Oakum Oakum for joints in bell and spigot pipes shall be made from hemp (Cannavis Sativa) line or Benares Sunn fiber or from a combination of these fibers. The oakum shall be thoroughly corded and finished and practically free from lumps, dirt and extraneous matter. Hot poured joint sealing compound AASHTO M 173

Bedding material shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 500.3.2, Bedding. Backfill material shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 500.3.6, Backfilling. When the location of manufacturing plants allow, the plants will be inspected periodically for compliance with specified manufacturing methods, and material samples will be obtained for laboratory testing for compliance with materials quality requirements. This shall be the basis for acceptance of manufacturing lots as to quality. Prior to and during incorporation of materials in the work, these materials will be subjected to the latest inspection and approval of the Engineer. 500.3 Construction Requirements 500.3.1 Trenches Excavation

Trenches shall be excavated in accordance with the requirement of Item 103, Structure Excavation, to a width sufficient to allow for proper jointing of the conduit and thorough compaction of the bedding and backfill materials under and around the conduit. Where feasible, trench wall shall be vertical. The completed trench bottom shall be firm for its full length and width. Where required, in the case of crop drains, the trench shall have a longitudinal camber of the magnitude specified. When so specified on the Plans, the excavation for conduits placed in embankment fill, shall be made after the embankment has been completed to the specified or directed height above the designed grade of the conduit. 500.3.2 Bedding

The bedding shall conform to one of the classes specified. When no bedding class is specified, the requirements for Class C bedding shall apply. Class A bedding shall consist of a continuous concrete cradle conforming to the plan details.

283

Class B bedding shall consist of bedding the conduit to a depth of not less than 30 percent of the vertical outside diameter of the conduit. The minimum thickness of bedding material beneath the pipe shall be 100 mm. The bedding material shall be sand or selected sandy soil all of which passes a 9.5 mm sieve and not more than 10 percent of which passes a 0.075 mm sieve. The layer of the bedding material shall be shaped to fit the conduit for at least 15 percent of its total height. Recesses in the trench bottom shall be shaped to accommodate the bell when bell and spigot type conduit is used. Class C bedding shall consist of bedding the conduit to a depth of not less than 10 percent of its total height. The foundation surface, completed in accordance with Item 103, Structure Excavation, shall be shaped to fit the conduit and shall have recesses shaped to receive the bells, if any. For flexible pipe, the bed shall be roughly shaped and a bedding blanket of sand or fine granular material as specified above shall be provided as follows: Pipe Corrugation Depth 10 mm 25 mm 50 mm Minimum Bedding Depth 25 mm 50 mm 75 mm

For large diameter structural plate pipes the shaped bed need not exceed the width of bottom plate. 500.3.3 Laying Conduit

The conduit laying shall begin at the downstream end of the conduit line. The lower segment of the conduit shall be in contact with the shaped bedding throughout its full length. Bell or groove ends of rigid conduits and outside circumferential laps of flexible conduits shall be placed facing upstream. Flexible conduit shall be placed with longitudinal laps or seams at the sides. Paved or partially-lined conduit shall be laid such that the longitudinal center line of the paved segment coincides with the flow line. Elliptical and elliptically reinforced conduits shall be placed with the major axis within 5 degrees of a vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the conduit. 500.3.4 Jointing Conduit

Rigid conduits may either be of bell and spigot or tongue and groove design unless another type is specified. The method of joining conduit sections shall be such that the ends are fully entered and the inner surfaces are reasonably flush and even.

284

Joints shall be made with (a) Portland Cement mortar, (b) Portland Cement grout, (c) rubber gaskets, (d) oakum and mortar, (e) oakum and joint compound, (f) plastic sealing compound, or by a combination of these types, or any other type, as may be specified. Mortar joints shall be made with an excess of mortar to form a continuous bead around the outside of the conduit and finished smooth on the inside. For grouted joints, molds or runners shall be used to retain the poured grout. Rubber ring gaskets shall be installed so as to form a flexible water-tight seal. Where oakum is used, the joint shall be called with this material and then sealed with the specified material. When Portland Cement mixtures are used, the completed joints shall be protected against rapid drying by any suitable covering material. Flexible conduits shall be firmly joined by coupling bands. Conduits shall be inspected before any backfill is placed. Any pipe found to be out of alignment, unduly settled, or damaged shall be taken up and relaid or replaced. 500.3.5 Field Strutting

When required by the Plans, vertical diameter of round flexible conduit shall be increased 5 percent by shop elongation or by means of jacks applied after the entire line of conduit has been installed on the bending but before backfilling. The vertical elongation shall be maintained by means of sills and struts or by horizontal ties shall be used on paved invert pipe. Ties and struts shall be 300 mm in place until the embankment is completed and compacted, unless otherwise shown on the Plans. These construction specifications shall also apply in the case of relaid conduits. In addition, all conduits salvaged for relaying shall be cleaned of all foreign materials prior to reinstallation. 500.3.6 Backfilling

Materials for backfilling on each side of the conduit for the full trench width and to an elevation of 300 mm above the top of the conduit shall be fine, readily compactible soil or granular material selected from excavation or from a source of the Contractors choice, and shall not contain stones that would be retained on a 50 mm sieve, chunks of highly plastic clay, or other objectionable material. Granular backfill material shall have not less than 95 percent passing a 12.5 mm sieve and not less than 95 percent retained on a 4.75 mm sieve. Oversized material, if present, shall be removed at the source of the material, except as directed by the Engineer.

285

When the top of the conduit is flushed with or below the top of the trench, backfill material shall be placed at or near optimum moisture content and compacted in layers not exceeding 150 mm (compacted) on both sides to an elevation 300 mm above the top of the conduit. Care shall be exercised to thoroughly compact the backfill under the haunches of the conduit. The backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the conduit for the full required length. Except where negative projecting embankment-type installation is specified, the backfill material shall be placed and compacted for the full depth of the trench. When the top of the conduit is above the top of the trench, backfill shall be placed at or near optimum moisture content and compacted in layers not exceeding 300 mm (compacted) and shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the conduit for its full length to an elevation 300 mm above the top of the conduit. The width of the backfill on each side of the conduit for the portion above the top of the trench shall be equal to twice the diameter of the conduit or 3.5 m, whichever is less. The backfill material used in the trench section and the portion above the top of the trench for a distance on each side of the conduit equal to the horizontal inside diameter and to 300 mm above the top of the conduit shall conform to the requirements for backfill materials in this Subsection. The remainder of the backfill shall consist of materials from excavation and borrow that is suitable for embankment construction. Compaction to the density specified in Item 104, Embankment, shall be achieved by use of mechanical tampers or by rolling. All conduits after being bedded and backfill as specified in this Subsection shall be protected by one metre cover of fill before heavy equipment is permitted to cross during construction of the roadway. 500.3.7 Imperfect Trench

Under this method, for rigid conduit, the embankment shall be completed as described in Subsection 500.3.6, Backfilling, to a height above the conduit equal to the vertical outside diameter of the conduit plus 300 mm. A trench equal in width to the outside horizontal diameter of the conduit and to the length shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer shall then be excavated to within 300 mm of the top of the conduit, trench walls being as nearly vertical as possible. The trench shall be loosely filled with highly compressible soil. Construction of embankment above shall then proceed in a normal manner. 500.4 Method of Measurement Conduit of the different types and sizes, both new and relaid, will be measured by the linear metre in place. Conduit with sloped or skewed ends will be measured along the invert.

286

Each section will be measured by the number of units installed. Branch connection and elbows will be included in the length measurement for conduit, or they may be measured by the number of units installed. Class B bedding material placed and approved shall be measured by the cubic metre in place. When the Bid Schedule contains an estimated quantity for Furnishing and Placing Backfill Material, Pipe Culvert, the quantity to be paid for will be the number of cubic metre complete in place and accepted, measured in final position between limits as follows: 1. Measurement shall include backfill material in the trench up to the top of the original ground line but will not include any material placed outside of vertical planes 450 mm up outside of and parallel to the inside wall of pipe at its widest horizontal dimension. When the original ground line is less than 300 mm above the top of the pipe, the measurement will also include the placing of all backfill materials, above the original ground line adjacent to the pipe for a height of 300 mm above the top of pipe and for a distance on each side of the pipe not greater than the widest horizontal dimension of the pipe. The measurement shall include the placing of backfill material in all trenches of the imperfect trench method. Materials reexcavated for imperfect trench construction will be measured for payment under Item 103, Structure Excavation.

2.

3.

500.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities of conduit, determined as provided in Section 500.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per linear meter for the conduit of the types and sizes specified complete in place. End sections and, when so specified, branch connections and elbows, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per piece for the kind and size specified complete in place. Excavation for culverts and storm drains, including excavation below flow line grade and for imperfect trench, shall be measured and paid for as provided in Item 103, Structure Excavation. Concrete for Class A bedding will be paid for under Item 405, Structural Concrete.

287

When the Bid Schedule does not contain as estimated quantity for Furnishing and Placing Backfill Material, Pipe Culvert payment for placing backfill material around pipe culverts will be considered as included in the payment for excavation of the backfill material. Payment will be made under:

Payment Item Number 500 (1)

Description Pipe Culverts, - mm Class Storm Drain, - mm Class -

Unit of Measurement Linear Meter

500 (2)

Linear Meter

ITEM 501- UNDERDRAINS 501.1 Description This item shall consist of constructing underdrains, using pipe and granular filter materials, underdrain pipe outlets, and blind drains using granular material in accordance with this Specification and in reasonably close conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Plans or as established by the Engineer. 501.2 Material Requirements Material specifications: shall meet the requirements specified in the following

Zinc coated (galvanized) corrugated iron or steel Culverts and underdrains Extra strength and standard strength clay pipe and perforated clay pipe Perforated concrete pipe Porous concrete pipe Bituminized-fiber non-pressure sewer drain and underdrainage pipe systems Asbestos-cement perforated underdrain pipe

AASHTO M 36

AASHTO M 65 AASHTO M 175 AASHTO M 176

AASHTO M 177 AASHTO M 189

288

Granular Backfill Filter Material Granular backfill filter material shall be permeable and shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 6, except that soundness tests will not be required and minor variation in grading and content of deleterious substances may be approved by the Engineer. When the location of manufacturing plants allows, the plants will be inspected periodically by compliance with specified manufacturing methods, and material sample will be obtained for laboratory testing for compliance with material quality requirements. This shall be the basis for acceptance of manufacturing lots as to quality. All material shall be subjected to inspection for acceptance as to condition at the latest practicable time. 501.3 Construction Requirements 501.3.1 Pipe Installation

Trenches shall be excavated to the dimensions and grades required by the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. A minimum of 150 mm bedding layer of granular backfill material shall be placed and compacted at the bottom of the trench for its full width and length. Subdrainage pipe of the type and size specified shall be embedded firmly in the bedding material. Perforated pipe shall normally, be placed with the perforations down and the pipe sections shall be joined securely with the appropriate coupling fittings or bands. Non-perforated pipe shall be laid with the bell end upgrade and with open joints wrapped with suitable material to permit entry of water, or unwrapped as may be specified. Upgrade end sections of all subdrainage pipe installations shall be closed with suitable plugs to prevent entry of soil materials. After the pipe installation has been inspected and approved, granular backfill material shall be placed to a height of 300 mm above the top of pipe. Care shall be taken not to displace the pipe or the covering at open joints. The remainder of the granular backfill material shall then be placed and compacted in 150 mm maximum layers to the required height. Any remaining portion of trench above the granular backfill shall be filled with either granular or impervious material, as may be specified, and thoroughly compacted.

289

501.3.2

Underdrain Outlets

Trenches for underdrain outlets shall be excavated to the width and depth shown on the Plans or as otherwise directed. Pipes shall be laid in the trench with all ends firmly joined by the applicable methods and means. After inspection and approval of the pipe installation, the trench shall be backfilled in accordance with Item 103, Structure Excavation. 501.3.3 Blind Drain

Trenches for blind drains shall be excavated to the width and depth shown on the Plans. The trench shall be filled with granular backfill material to the depth required by the Plans. Any remaining upper portion of trench shall be filled with either granular or impervious material in accordance with Item 103, Structure Excavation. 501.4 Method of Measurement Underdrains and outlets shall be measured by the linear meter for pipe of the type and size specified. Blind drains shall be measured by the linear meter including all excavation and backfill materials required. Granular backfill filter material, when specified in the Contract as a pay item shall be measured in place by the cubic meter, completed and accepted. Cross-sectional measurements will not exceed the net dimensions shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. Excavation for underdrain pipe will be measured and paid for as provided in Item 103, Structure Excavation. 501.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities determined as provided in Section 501.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit prices. Payment will be made under:

Payment Item Number 501 (1) 501 (2) 501 (3)

Description Underdrain - mm Blind drain Granular Backfill filter material for underdrains

Unit of Measurement Linear Meter Linear Meter

Cubic Meter

290

ITEM 502 MANHOLES, INLETS AND CATCH BASINS 502.1 Description This item shall consist of the construction, reconstruction or adjustment of manholes, inlets and catch basins in accordance with this Specification and in reasonably close conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Plans or as established by the Engineer. 502.2 Material Requirements Concrete for these structures shall meet the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete. Other materials shall meet the following specifications: Corrugated Metal Units The units shall conform to Plan dimensions and the metal to AASHTO M 36. Bituminous coating, when specified, shall conform to ASTM D 1187, Asphalt-base Emulsion for use as Protective Coating for Metal. Sewer and manhole brick (Made from clay or shale) Building brick (Solid masonry units made from clay or shale)

AASHTO M 91

AASHTO M 114

Joint Mortar- Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, joints mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement and two parts fine aggregate by volume to which hydrated lime has been added in an amount equal to 10 percent of the cement by weight. All materials for mortar shall meet the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete. Frames, Gratings, Covers and Ladder Rungs Metal units shall conform to the plan dimensions and to the following specification requirements for the designated materials. Metal gratings and covers which are to rest on frames shall bear on them evenly. They shall be assembled before shipment and so marked that the same pieces may be reassembled readily in the same position when installed. Inaccuracy of bearings shall be corrected by machining, if necessary. A frame and a grating or cover to be used with it shall constitute one pair. All castings shall be uniformly coated with asphalt-based emulsion meeting the requirements of ASTM D 1187, Asphalt-base Emulsion for use as Protective Coating for Metal. Samples of the material in casting shall be taken during the casting of the

291

units and shall be separate casting poured from the same material as the casting they represent. Gray iron casting Mild to medium-strength carbon steel castings for general application Structural steel Galvanizing, where specified for these units, shall conform to the requirements of Reinforcing Steel AASHTO M 105

AASHTO M 103 AASHTO M 183

AASHTO M 111 AASHTO M 31

Pre-cast Concrete Units These units shall be cast in substantial permanent steel forms. Structural concrete used shall attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 20.682 MPa (3000 psi). The pre-cast units shall be cured in accordance with AASHTO M 171. Water absorption of individual cores taken from such units shall not exceed 7 percent. Additional reinforcement shall be provided as necessary to provide for handling of the pre-cast units. A sufficient number of cylinders shall be cast from the concrete for each unit permit compression tests at 7, 14 and 28 days, and to allow for at least 3 cylinders for each test. If the strength requirement is met at 7 or 14 days, the units shall be certified for use 14 days from the date of casting. If the strength is not met at 28 days, all units made from that batch or load will be rejected. Cracks in units, honeycombed or patched areas in excess of 2,000 square millimeters, excessive water absorption and failure to meet strength requirements shall be the causes for rejection. Pre-cast reinforced concrete manhole risers and tops shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 199. The plants will be inspected periodically for compliance with specified manufacturing methods, and material samples will be obtained for laboratory testing for compliance with material quality requirements. This may be the basis for acceptance of manufacturing lots as the quality. All materials shall be subjected to inspection for acceptance as to condition at the latest practicable time the Engineer has the opportunity to check for compliance prior to or during incorporation of materials into the work. 502.3 Construction Requirements Concrete construction shall conform to the requirements for Item 405, Structural Concrete.

292

Metal frames shall be set in full mortar bed. Pipe sections shall be flushed on the inside of the structure wall and projected outside sufficiently for proper connection with next pipe section. Masonry shall fit neatly and tightly around the pipe. When grade adjustment or existing structures is specified, the frames, covers and gratings shall be removed and the walls reconstructed as required. The cleaned frames shall be reset at the required elevation. Upon completion, each structure shall be cleaned of any accumulation of silt, debris, or foreign matter of any kind and shall be kept clear of such accumulation until final acceptance of the work. Excavation and backfill shall be done in accordance with Item 103, Structure Excavation.

502.4 Method of Measurement Standard manholes, inlets and catch basins, both new and reconstructed as applicable, will be measured by the unit. Any additional concrete, reinforcing steel, or masonry required for authorized increases in heights of structures paid of under this Item and in excess of the standard height shown on the Plans will be measured and paid for under Item 405, Structural Concrete and Item 404, Reinforcing Steel, as applicable. Structures noted on the Plans as junction boxes will be measured for payment as manholes. The number of concrete covers, pairs of metal frames and gratings, and pairs of metal frames and covers will be measured as acceptably completed. The number of existing manholes, inlets and catch basins adjusted as directed will be measured as acceptably completed.

502.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities, determined as provided in Section 502.4, Method of Measurement of the Pay Items in the Bill of Quantities will be paid for at the contract unit prices, which shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Excavation and backfill will be measured and paid for as provided in Item 103, Structure Excavation.

293

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number 502 (1) 502 (2) 502 (3) 502 (4) 502 (5) 502 (6) 502 (7) 502 (8) 502 (9) Manholes

Description

Unit of Measurement Each Each Each Each Pair Pair Each Each Each

Inlets, type Catch basins Concrete covers Metal frames and gratings, type Metal frames and covers Adjusting manholes Adjusting inlets Adjusting catch basin

ITEM 503 DRAINAGE STEEL GRATING WITH FRAME

503.1 Description This item shall consist of furnishing all materials, tools, and equipment including labor required in undertaking the proper application of steel grating with frame as shown on the plans and in accordance with this specification. 503.2 Classes and Uses of Road Grates and Frames Classes of grates that are commonly use in drainage work are sump, trench and box. Sump grates shall be used to create a trafficable ground level entry area for surface rainwater to flow into the underground stormwater drainage system. Sump grates shall be used in paved or grassed areas that are graded to direct the surface water to a single pit or to a series of pits. Sump grates shall be plain or hinged.

294

Trench grates shall be used to collect surface rainwater run off from areas that cannot be graded to direct flow into a single pit. Box grates or road drainage shall be used to transfer road surface storm water into an underground drainage system. Normally used in conjunction with kerb entry, the addition of the grate significantly increases the hydraulic capacity of the inlet, particularly on steep slopes. 503.3 Strength Classifications and the Loading Conditions for Sump, Trench and Box grates Class A Test Load 10kN For locations trafficked only by pedestrians, wheelchairs and cyclists inaccessible to motor vehicles by virtue of barriers, narrow passages or stepped or unpaved approaches. Class B Test Load 80kN For locations normally trafficked by pedestrians and slow moving passenger cars or light agricultural tractors. These locations include areas accessible to infrequent slow moving heavy trucks. Typical locations include footpaths, ground level and multistoried car parks, suburban driveways and back yards. Class C Test Load 150kN For locations trafficked by slow moving fully laden trucks such as pedestrians, malls and industrial or commercial areas. Class D Test Load 210kN For locations trafficked by fast moving fully laden trucks and forklifts with wheel loads to 5.0T. This includes all public roads from residential to freeway. Class E, F or G Test Load 400kN, 600kN or 900kN For locations subject to vehicles such as large forklifts, earthmoving or container handling equipment and aircraft. Typical locations include wharves, container storage areas, heavy industry or construction sites and domestic or international airports. All loading conditions specified above are applicable to the three classes of grates depending on their specific uses and locations.

295

503.4 Materials Requirement 503.4.1 Steel Grating The steel grating shall be made of fabricated mild steel provided with hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/AASHTO M 232 for superior corrosion protection. Steel grating shall be machine-made grating comprised of steel flat bars standing on edge equispaced from each other. To prevent them from falling over and to provide restraint in buckling, a twisted cross rod (6mm) is forge-welded1 into the top of the flat bars. 503.4.2 Steel Frame The steel frame clear openings of drainage grates shall be 15mm larger than nominal sizes of industry standard sized pits. These pits increase in size in increments of 150mm. This shall be done to allow frames to be placed over standard panel formwork and cast in while pouring the pit walls, to speeds up installation and ensure the frame is fully embedded in the concrete. 503.4.3 Drainage Grate Sizes The drainage grates shall be identified by their internal clear opening dimensions of the frame. For square and rectangular grates, the normal convention shall be the width x length. Metal units shall conform to the approved plan dimensions and specifications requirement for the designated materials. Grates shall consist of 25mm to 65mm x 3mm, 4.5mm or 5mm thick flat bars with length of not more than 6.1m spaced at 30mm o.c. with 6mm twisted rod spaced at 100mm o.c.. Angular frame (L 75mm x 75mm x 9mm thick) shall be coated with hot dipped galvanized for superior corrosion protection finish and extended life. If required, I-Beam support shall be provided in the grates in accordance with the approved plan. It shall also conform to the requirements of ASTM A 153 or its equivalents AASHTO M 232. 503.4.4 The metal unit shall conform to ASTM A 36 / AASHTO M 183. Dimension Tolerances:

Thickness Width Length Straightness

= = = =

0.20mm 0.80mm + 50mm/NIL mm 6mm in each 1.5m length

Forge-welding is a process of metal fusion using a combination of high temperature and high pressure.

296

503.4.5 Joint Mortar Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, joint mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement and two parts fine aggregate by volume to which hydrated lime has been added in an amount equal to 10 percent of the cement by weight. All materials for mortar shall meet the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete. Structural concrete used shall attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 20.682 MPa (3000 psi). 503.5 Construction Requirements Concrete construction shall conform to the requirements for Item 405, Structural Concrete. Metal gratings which are to rest on frames shall bear on them evenly. They shall be assembled before shipment and so marked that the same pieces may be reassembled readily in the same position when installed. Inaccuracy of bearings shall be corrected by machining, if necessary. The steel grating and its corresponding frame shall constitute one pair. When grade adjustment or existing drainage grates is specified, the frames and steel gratings shall be removed and the walls shall be reconstructed as required. The cleaned frames shall be reset at the required elevation. Upon completion, each drainage grates shall be cleaned of any accumulations of silt, debris, or foreign matter of any kind and shall be kept clear of such accumulation until final acceptance of the work. Excavation and backfill shall be done in accordance with Item 102, Excavation. 503.6 Acceptance Requirement A sufficient number of cylinders for concrete construction shall be cast from the concrete for each unit for compression tests at 7, 14 and 28 days, and to allow for at least 3 cylinders for each test. If the strength requirement is met at 7 or 14 days, the units shall be certified for use 14 days from the date of casting. If the strength is not met at 28 days, all units made from that batch or load will be rejected. The steel grating plants will be inspected periodically for compliance with specified manufacturing and fabricating methods and bars samples will be obtained for laboratory testing for compliance with material quality requirements. All draining grates materials shall be subjected to inspection for acceptance as to condition at the latest practicable time the Engineer has the

297

opportunity to check for compliance prior to or during incorporation of materials into the work. 503.7 Method of Measurement The quantity to be measured and paid for will be the number of pairs of metal frames and gratings completed and accepted. Concrete and reinforcing steel (AASHTO M 31) will be measured and paid for under Item 405, Structural Concrete and Item 404, Reinforcing Steel, respectively. Excavation and backfill will be measured and paid for as provided in Item 102, Excavation. 503.8 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities, determined as provided in Section 503.7, Method of Measurement of the Pay Items in the Bill of Quantities will be paid for at the contract unit prices, which shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the item. Payment will be made under:

Pay Item No.

Description

Unit Of Measurement

503

Metal frames and grating

Set

ITEM 504 - CLEANING AND RECONDITIONING EXISTING DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 504.1 Description This item shall consist of cleaning and reconditioning existing pipes and appurtenant structures in reasonably close conformity with this Specification and as shown on the Plans. 504.2 Material Requirements Materials used for repair or replacement under the various Pay Items shall conform the requirements of the applicable Items of this Specification.

298

504.3 Construction Requirements Pipe Removed and Cleaned The pipe shall be carefully removed and cleaned of foreign material both within the barrel and at the jointed ends. Pipe Cleaned in Place All foreign materials within the barrel shall be removed and disposed off by methods which will prevent damage to the pipe. If approved by the Engineer, all or part of the pipe designated to be cleaned in place may be removed, cleaned, and relaid in accordance with the applicable Items. In such cases, the Contractor shall furnish all materials required to replace damaged pipes and joints, perform all excavation and backfill, and relay the pipe, all at the contract bid price for this Item. Re-laying or Stockpiling Salvaged Pipe - Relaying of pipe selected by the Engineer to be removed and cleaned shall be done as shown on the Plans, in accordance with the appropriate Item for the kind of pipe involved. The Contractor shall furnish all jointing materials and shall replace the pipe broken by him, in sufficient lengths to complete the designated length to be relaid without added compensation. Salvaged pipe to be stockpiled shall be placed as shown on the Plans and as directed by the Engineer. No pipe which has sustained structural damage shall be placed in stockpiles. The Contractor shall dispose off such damaged pipes at an approved locations. Reconditioning Drainage Structures Structures such as manholes, inlets, and the likes, designated on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer to be reconditioned shall have all debris removed, leaks repaired, missing or broken metalwork replaced, and each structure left in operating condition. 504.4 Method of Measurement Measurement will be made by the linear meter of pipe acceptably cleaned, removed, re-laid or stockpile as designated in the Bill of Quantities, irrespective of the kind or size involved. Pipe removed, cleaned, and re-laid will be measured in their final position. Pipe removed, cleaned, and stockpiled will be measured by totaling the nominal laying lengths of all pipe units acceptably removed, cleaned, and placed in the stockpile. Pipe cleaned in place will be measured along the flow line of the pipe line acceptably cleaned a directed. Measurement of drainage structures reconditioned will be made by actual count of the total number of units of each type acceptably completed.

299

504.5 Basis of Payment The quantities as provided in Section 504.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract price bid per unit of measurement for each of the Pay Items listed below that appear in the Bid Schedule, which price and payment shall be full compensation for the work of this item except excavation and backfill which is paid for under Item 103, Structure Excavation. Excavation and backfill necessary for pipe removal operations shall be done as part of the work of this Item. The Contractor shall remove and replace without added compensation any pipe damaged by this operations and which cannot be acceptably repaired in place. Payment will be made under: Pay Item Number 504 (1) Description Removing, cleaning, stockpiling Salvaged culvert pipe Removing, cleaning, and re-laying Salvaged culvert pipe Cleaning culvert pipe in place Reconditioning drainage structures Unit of Measurement

Linear Meter

504 (2)

Linear Meter Linear Meter Each

504 (3) 504 (4)

If more than one type of drainage structure is described for an Item in the Bid Schedule, letter suffixes shall be added to the item Number differentiate between such structures. If no Pay Item from the list above appears in Bid Schedule, the pipe removed will be considered as included in the work of Item 101, Removal of Structures and Obstructions.

ITEM 505 RIPRAP AND GROUTED RIPRAP 505.1 Description This Item shall consist of the furnishing and placing of riprap with or without grout as the case may be, with or without filter backing, furnished and

300

constructed in accordance with this Specification and to the lines and grades and dimensions shown on the Plans. 505.2 Material Requirements 505.2.1 Stones

Stones for riprap shall consist of rock as nearly as rectangular in section as is practical, except that riprap of Class A may consist of round natural stones. The stones shall be sound, tough, durable, dense, resistant to the action of air and water, and suitable in all respects for the purpose intended. Stones for riprap shall be one of the following classes as shown on the Plans or determined by the Engineer. Class A Stones ranging from a minimum of 15kg to a maximum of 25kg with at least 50 percent of the stones weighing more than 20kg Stones ranging from minimum of 30kg to a maximum of 70kg with at least 50 percent of the stones weighing more than 50kg Stones ranging from minimum of 60kg to a maximum of 100kg with at least 50 percent of the stones weighing more than 80kg

Class B -

Class C -

Stones ranging from minimum of 100kg to a maximum of 200kg with at least 50 percent of the stones weighing more than 150kg Sound pieces of broken concrete obtained from the removal of bridges, culverts and other structures may be substituted for stone with the approval of the Engineer. 505.2.2 Filter Materials

Class D -

When required, the riprap shall be placed on a filter layer to prevent fine embankment materials to be washed out through the voids of the face stones. The grading of the filter material shall be as specified on the Plans, or in the Special Provisions. If not so specified, it will be required that D15 of the filter is at least 4 times the size D85 for the embankment material, where D15 percent and 85 percent, respectively, passing (by mass) in a grain size analysis. Fine aggregate passing grading requirements for Item 405, Structural Concrete, will satisfy foregoing requirements.

301

505.2.3

Mortar

Mortar for grouted riprap shall consist of sand, cement and water conforming to the requirements given under Item 405, Structural Concrete, mixed in the proportion of one part cement to three parts sand by volume, and sufficient water to obtain the required consistency. The horizontal and vertical contact surface between stones shall be embedded by cement mortar having a minimum thickness of 20 mm. Sufficient mortar shall be used to completely fill all voids leaving the face of the stones exposed.

505.3 Construction Requirements 505.3.1 Excavation

The bed for riprap shall be excavated to the required depths and properly compacted, trimmed and shaped. The riprap shall be founded in a toe trench dug below the depth of scour as shown on the Plans or as ordered by the Engineer. The toe trench shall be filled with stone of the same class as that specified for the riprap, unless otherwise specified. 505.3.2 Placing

Stones placed below the water line shall be distributed so that the minimum thickness of the riprap is not less than that specified. Stones above the water line shall be placed by hand or individually by machines. They shall be laid with close, broken joints and shall be firmly bedded into the slope and against the adjoining stones. Each stone shall be laid with its longest axis perpendicular to the slope in close contact with each adjacent stone. The riprap shall be thoroughly rammed into place as construction progresses and the finished surface shall present an even, tight surface. Interstices between stones shall be filled with small broken fragments firmly rammed into place. Unless otherwise provided, riprap shall have the following minimum thickness, measured perpendicular to the slope: Class A 300 mm Class B 500 mm Class C 600 mm Class D 800 mm

302

The surface of riprap shall not vary from the theoretical surface by more than 100 mm at any point. 505.3.3 Grouting

When grouted riprap is specified, stones shall be placed by hand, or individually by machine as specified for riprap placed above the water line. The spaces between the stones shall then be filled with cement mortar throughout the thickness of the riprap as specified in Subsection 504.2.3, mortar. Sufficient mortar shall be used to completely fill all voids, except that the face surface of the stones shall be left exposed. Grout shall be placed from bottom to top of the surface swept with a stiff broom. After grouting is completed, the surface shall be cured as specified in Item 405, Structural Concrete for a period of at least three days. The stones shall also be laid in a manner that the vertical and horizontal alignments of the exposed face shall, as possible be maintained in a straight line. 505.3.4 Weepholes

All walls and abutments shall be provided with weepholes. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or directed by the Engineer, the weepholes shall be placed horizontally at the lowest points where free outlets for water can be obtained and shall be spaced at not more than 2 m center to center in a staggered manner . The length of the weepholes shall not be less than the thickness of the walls of the abutment and shall be at least 50 mm diameter PVC or other pipe materials accepted by the Engineer. Weepholes must be provided with filter bags as specified in special provision or as directed by the Engineer, and shall be incidental to Pay Item 505.

505.4 Method of Measurement The quantities to be measured for payment shall be the number of cubic meters of riprap or grouted riprap, as the case may be, including stones placed in the toe trench laid in position and accepted. Filter layer of granular material, when required, shall be measured separately by the cubic meter in place and accepted. The computation of the quantities will be based on the volume within the limiting dimensions designated on the Plans or as determined by the Engineer.

303

505.5 Basis of Payment The quantities measured as provided under Subsection 505.4 shall be paid for at the contract unit price, respectively, for each of the Pay Items listed below and shown in the Bid Schedule, which price and payment shall be full compensation for excavation and preparation of the bed, for furnishing and placing all materials including backfill and all additional fill to bring the riprap bed up to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the plans, and all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under: Pay Item Number 505 (1) 505 (2) 505 (3) 505 (4) 505 (5) 505 (6) 505 (7) 505 (8) 505 (9) Description Riprap, Class A Riprap, Class B Riprap, Class C Riprap, Class D Grouted Riprap, Class A Grouted Riprap, Class B Grouted Riprap, Class C Grouted Riprap, Class D Filter layer of granular material Unit of Measurement Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter

ITEM 506 STONE MASONRY

506.1 Description This Item shall consist of stone masonry in minor structures, in headwalls for culverts, in retaining walls at the toes of slopes, and at other places called for on the Plans, constructed on the prepared foundation bed, in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades, sections, and dimensions shown on the Plans or as ordered in writing by the Engineer.

304

506.2 Material Requirements 506.2.1 Stone The stone shall be clean, hard, and durable and shall be subject to the Engineers approval. Adobe stone shall not be used unless otherwise specified. Sizes and Shapes Unless other sizes are shown on the Plans, stones have a thickness of not less than 150 mm, and widths of not less than one and one-half times their respective thickness, and lengths of not less than one and one half times their respective widths. Each stone shall be of good shape and be free of depressions and projections that might weaken or prevent it from being properly bedded. Dressing The stone shall be dressed to remove any thin or weak portions. Face stones shall be dressed to provide bed and joint lines that do not vary more than 20 mm from the true lines and to ensure the meeting of bed and joint lines without the rounding of corners of the stones in excess of 30 mm in radius. Bed surfaces of the face stones shall be approximately normal to the face of the stones for about 80 mm and from this point may depart from a normal plane not to exceed 50 mm in 300 mm. Finish for Exposed Faces Face stones shall be pitched to the line along the beds and joints. The maximum projection of rock faces beyond the pitch lines shall not be more than 50 mm. 506.2.2 Mortar

Cement, fine aggregate, and water shall conform to the respective requirements for those materials as specified under Item 405, Structural Concrete, except as to the grading of fine aggregate which shall all pass the 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve, not less than 15 nor more than 40 percent shall pass the 0.3 mm (No. 50 ) sieve, and not more than 10 percent shall pass the 0.15 mm (No.100) sieve. The mortar for the masonry shall be composed of one part of Portland Cement and two parts of fine aggregate by volume and sufficient water to make the mortar of such consistency that it can be handled easily and spread with a trowel. Mortar shall be mixed only in those quantities required for immediate use. Unless an approved mortar mixing machine is used, the fine aggregate and cement shall be mixed dry in a tight box until the mixture assumes a uniform color, after which, water shall be added as the mixing continues until the mortar attains the proper consistency. Mortar that is not used within 90 minutes after the water has been added shall be discarded. Retempering of mortar will not be permitted.

305

506.3 Construction Requirement 506.3.1 Selection and Placing

When the masonry is to be placed on a prepared foundation bed, the bed shall be firm and normal to, or in steps normal to, the face of the wall, and shall have been approved by the Engineer before any stone is placed. Care shall be taken to prevent the bunching of small stone or stones of the same size. Large stones shall be used in the corners. All stones shall be cleaned thoroughly and wetted immediately before being set, and the bed which is to receive them shall be cleaned and moistened before the mortar is spread. They shall be laid with their longest faces horizontal in full beds of mortar, and the joints shall be flushed with mortar. The exposed faces of individual stones shall be parallel to the faces of the walls in which the stones are set. The stones shall be so handled as not to jar displace the stones already set. Suitable equipment shall be provided for setting stones larger than those that can be handled by two men. The rolling or turning of stones on the walls will not be permitted. If a stone is loosened after the mortar has taken initial set, it shall be removed, the mortar cleaned off, and the stone relaid with fresh mortar. 506.3.2 Bed and Joints

Beds for face stones may vary from 20 mm to 50 mm in thickness. They shall not extend an unbroken line through more than 5 stones. Joints may vary from 20 mm to 50 mm in thickness. They shall not extend in an unbroken line through more than two stones. They may be at angles with the vertical from 00 to 450. Face stone shall bond at least 150 mm longitudinally and 50 mm vertically. At no place shall corners of four stones be adjacent to each other. Cross beds for vertical faced walls shall be level, and for battered walls may vary from level to normal to the batter line of the face of the wall. 506.3.3 Headers

Headers shall be distributed uniformly throughout the walls of the structures so as to form at least one-fifth of the exposed faces. They shall be of such lengths as to extend from the front face of the wall into the backing of at least 300 mm. When a wall is 450 mm or less in thickness, the headers shall extend entirely from front to back face.

306

506.3.4

Backing.

Backing shall be built mostly of large stones as shown in the approved Plans or as directed by the Engineer. The individual stones composing the backing and hearting shall be well bonded with the stones in the face wall and with each other. All openings and interstices in the backing shall be filled completely with mortar or with spalls surrounded completely by mortar. 506.3.5 Pointing

Both bed and vertical joints shall be finished as shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. The mortar in joints on top of surface of masonry shall be crowned slightly at the center of the masonry to provide drainage. 506.3.6 Coping Copings, if called for, shall be finished as shown on the Plans. Where copings are not called for, the top of the wall shall be finished with stones wide enough to cover the top of the wall from 450 mm to 1000 mm in length, and of random heights, with a minimum height of 150 mm. Stone shall be laid in such a manner that the top course is an integral part of the wall. The tops of top course of stone shall be pitched to line, in both vertical and horizontal planes. 506.3.7 Weepholes

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 504, Riprap and Grouted Riprap under Subsection 504.3.4, Weepholes. 506.3.8 Cleaning Exposed Faces

Immediately after being laid, and while the mortar is fresh, all face stones shall be thoroughly cleaned of mortar stains and shall be kept clean until the work is completed. 506.3.9 Curing

In hot or dry weather, the masonry shall be satisfactory protected from the sun and shall be kept wet for a period of at least three days after completion. 506.4 Method of Measurement The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meters of stone masonry complete in place and accepted. Projections extending beyond the faces of the walls shall not be included. In computing the quantity for payment, the dimensions used shall be those shown on the Plans or ordered in writing by

307

the Engineer. No deductions shall be made for weepholes, drain pipes or other openings of less than one square meter in area. 506.5 Basis of Payment The quantity of masonry, determined as provided in Section 506.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic meter for Stone Masonry, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including mortar for masonry, for all necessary excavations, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number

Description

Unit of Measurement

506

Stone Masonry

Cubic Meter

ITEM 507 RUBBLE CONCRETE 507.1 Description This item shall consist of the construction of rubble concrete in accordance with this specification and in conformity with the lines, grades, slopes and dimensions shown in the Plans or established by the Engineer. 507.2 Material Requirements

507.2.1 Stone The stone shall be cleaned, hard, and durable and shall be subject to the Engineers approval. Adobe stone shall not be used unless otherwise specified. Stones to be used shall be more than 0.015 cubic metre in volume and not less than 75 percent of the total volume of rock embankment and shall consist of stones 0.03 cubic metre in volume as described in Item 506.2. Stones obtained from excavation performed under this contract may be used. 507.2.2 Concrete Class B Concrete shall be Class B in accordance with Item 405, Structural Concrete.

308

507.3

Construction Requirements

507.3.1 Preparation of Foundation Bed The foundation bed shall be excavated to the lines and grades as shown in the plans as directed by the Engineer, and shall be thoroughly compacted in accordance with Item 104.3.3. 507.3.2 Falsework and Formwork Construction

Falsework/formwork shall be constructed so as to withstand the stresses imposed. Formwork used shall be constructed with sufficient strength, rigidity and shape as to leave the finished works true to the dimensions shown on the Plans and with the surface finished as specified. The inside surface of the forms shall be cleaned of all dirt, water and foreign materials. Forms shall be thoroughly coated with form oil prior to use. The form oil shall be commercial quality form oil or other approved coating which will permit the ready release of forms and will not discolor the concrete. 507.3.3 Placing

One layer of concrete Class B shall be placed at the prepared bed prior to placing of stones. Clearance between stones shall not be less than 2-1/2 inches or the maximum size of concrete aggregate for Class B. Concrete Class B shall be placed after each layer of stone and shall be thoroughly consolidated by means of a vibrator inserted in each layer of concrete. In no case shall the vibrator be operated longer than 10 seconds in any location. After removal of forms, any cavities, voids and honeycomb spots shall be filled up with mortar composed of one part cement and two parts sand. All debris and refuse resulting from work shall be removed and the site left in a neat and presentable condition. 507.3.4 Weepholes

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 504, Riprap and Grouted Riprap under Subsection 504.3.4, Weepholes.

309

507.4

Method of Measurement

The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meters of rubble concrete complete in place and accepted. In computing the quantity of payment the dimension used shall be those shown on the plans or ordered in writing by the Engineer. No reduction shall be made for weepholes.

507.5

Basis of Payment

The quantity of rubble concrete determined as provided in the preceding section 507.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic meter for rubble concrete, which price and payment shall be full compensation for the preparation of the bed, furnishing, necessary excavations, falsework, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number

Description

Unit of Measurement

507

Rubble Concrete

Cubic Meter

ITEM 508 HAND-LAID ROCK EMBANKMENT 508.1 Description This Item shall consist of hand-laid rock embankment, as designated in the Bid Schedule, constructed in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Plans or established by the Engineer.

508.2 Material Requirements Stones shall be sound and durable and furnished in a well-balanced ranged of sizes meeting the requirements herein. Unless otherwise provided by the Plans or Special provisions, all stones shall be more than 0.015 cubic meter in volume and not less than 75 percent of the total volume of rock embankment and shall consist of stones 0.03 cubic meter in

310

volume. Stones obtained from excavation performed under this contract may be used. Adobe stone shall not be used, unless otherwise specified. 508.3 Construction Requirements Sufficient excavation shall be made to expose a foundation bed that is satisfactory to the Engineer. The stones shall be founded on this bed and laid to the lines and dimensions required. Stones shall be laid flat and securely placed with broken joint lines. The larger stones shall generally be located in the lower part of the structure and voids shall be eliminated to the extent possible. Spalls smaller than the minimum stone size specified in Section 506.2, Material Requirements, shall be used to check the larger stones solidly in position and to substantially fill voids between the major stones as laid in the embankment. The exposed face of the rock mass shall be reasonably uniform, with no projections of more than 150 mm, beyond the neat lines shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. Backfill adjacent to the hand-laid rock embankment shall be filled entirely with acceptable material coming from excavation items and compacted. 508.4 Method of Measurement The quantity to be paid for will be the number of cubic meter of hand-laid rock embankment measured in place, completed and accepted. 508.5 Basis of Payment The quantity determined, as provided in Section 508.4, Method of Measurement , will be paid for at the contract price per cubic meter for HandLaid Rock Embankment, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, selecting, and transporting stones, for placing stones by hand, for backfilling, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item including foundation excavation. Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number

Description

Unit of Measurement

508

Hand-Laid Rock Embankment

Cubic Meter

311

ITEM 509 SHEET PILES 509.1 Description This shall consist of furnishing, driving and cutting off of sheet piling covered by this Specification. 509.2 Material Requirements 509.2.1 Timber Sheet Piles The timber, unless otherwise definitely noted on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, may consist of any species which will satisfactorily stand driving. It shall be sawn or hewn with square corners and shall be free from worm holes, loose knots, wing shakes, decay or unsound portions or other defects which might impair its strength or tightness. 509.2.2 Concrete Sheet Piles Concrete, reinforcement, and manufacture of concrete sheet piles shall conform to the requirements of Item 400, Piling, Subsection 400.2.3, Concrete Piles. 509.2.3 Steel Sheet Piles Steel sheet piles shall be of the type, weight and Section Modulus indicated on the Plans or Special Provisions, and shall conform to the requirement of Item 400, Piling, Subsection 400.2.7, Sheet Piles, Painting shall conform to the requirements for Item 411, Paint, Subsection 411.6.2, Painting Structural Steel. 509.3 Construction Requirements Sheet piles shall be driven to elevation shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. Where impractical to drive to plan elevation due to subsurface conditions, the driving of piles may be stopped at a higher elevation with the written permission of the Engineer. However, before granting such permission, the Engineer shall ascertain that the Contractor has adequate equipment for the required driving and that the piles can be driven to the plan elevation with the proper use of this equipment. The top of the piling shall be driven or cut-off to a straight line at the elevation indicated on the Plans. The requirements governing the installation of sheet piling shall conform in general to those governing bearing piles as set forth under Item 400, Piling.

312

509.4 Method of Measurement Sheet piling will be measured by the linear meter of sheet piling as shown on the Plans or as directed in writing by the Engineer, complete in place and accepted. However, measurement of piling which has been delivered to plan length and cannot be driven according to plan or directed elevation because of subsurface condition shall be measured as if driven to that elevations. 509.5 Basis of Payment Payment of steel piles as determined in Section 509.4, Method of Measurement, shall be made at the contract unit price per linear meter. Such payment shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools, paint, bolts, wales and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number 509 (a) 509 (b) 509 (c)

Description Sheet Piles (Timber) Sheet Piles (Steel) Sheet Piles (Concrete)

Unit of Measurement Linear Meter Linear Meter Linear Meter

ITEM 510 CONCRETE SLOPE PROTECTION 510.1 Description This Item shall consist of the furnishing and placing of concrete slope protection including all necessary excavation, a bed course and reinforced concrete to the required thickness and extent to protect slopes against erosion. Construction details shall be as shown on the Plans. 510.2 Material Requirements 510.2.1 Bed Course A bed course, where required, shall be granular material which satisfies the requirements for Item 200, Aggregate Sub-base, Grading A.

313

510.2.2 Formwork Formwork, where necessary, shall be as specified in Item 407, Concrete Structures. 510.2.3 Steel Reinforcement Steel reinforcement shall be as specified in Item 404, Reinforcing Steel. 510.2.4 Concrete Concrete shall be Class B as specified in Item 405, Structural Concrete, unless otherwise specified or required by the Engineer.

510.3 Construction Requirements 510.3.1 Excavation The ground shall be excavated where necessary in accordance with the dimensions, lines and grades shown on the Plans. 510.3.2 Bed Course Where shown on the Plans or ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide and lay a bed course, to the depth required, and as specified in Item 200, Aggregate Subbase Course, compacted at least 100 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by AASHTO T 180, Method D. 510.3.3 Concrete The Contractor shall provide and place concrete in accordance with the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete, to the required depths in the positions and to the grades and elevations shown on the Plans. Unless otherwise specified, the concrete slabs shall not be greater than 4m by 4m and shall have between slabs, plain vertical straight joints with no joint filler or sealer. The toe of the concrete slope protection shall be constructed and protected a shown on the Plans. 510.3.4 Drainage Drainage of the bed course or backfill shall be provided as shown on the Plans or as required by the Engineer.

314

510.4 Method of Measurement The quantity of granular material in the bed course to be paid for shall be measured by the cubic meter in-place and accepted as shown on the Plans. The quantity of concrete to be paid for shall be measured by the cubic meter in-place and accepted as shown on the Plans.

510.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities as provided in Section 510.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price according to the Pay Item in the Bid Schedule which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for the necessary excavation, for all labor, equipment, tools, all materials including formwork and reinforcing steel, and incidentals necessary to complete this Item. Payment will be made under: Pay Item Number 510 (1) Description Bed Course Granular Material Concrete Unit of Measurement Cubic meter in-place

510 (2)

Cubic meter in-place

ITEM 511 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 511.1 Description This Item shall consist of furnishing, forming wire mesh baskets, and placing rocks installed at the locations designated, in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades, dimensions, and arrangements shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. 511.2 Material Requirements 511.2.1 General

Gabions shall be constructed of wire mesh and shall be supplied in various lengths and heights. A double twisted wire mesh container of variable

315

sizes, uniformly partitioned into internal cells, interconnected with other similar units, and filled with stones at the project site to form flexible, permeable, monolithic structures such as retaining walls, sea walls, channel linings, revetments and weirs for erosion control. The lengths shall be multiples of 2, 3 or 4 times the width of the gabion and heights shall be 0.50 m to 1.00 m or as shown on the plans. The horizontal width shall not be less than one meter. Gabion furnished shall be of uniform width. The width, height and length of the gabion as manufactured shall not differ more than 5% from the ordered size prior to filling. Mattresses are double twisted wire mesh container uniformly partitioned into internal cells with relatively small height in relation to other dimensions, having smaller mesh openings than the mesh used for gabions. Mattresses are generally used for riverbank protection and channel linings. The length shall be 3.00 m to 6.00 m, the width shall be 2.00 m and the height shall be 0.17 m, 0.23 m or 0.30 m or as shown on the Plans. The width and length of the revet mattress as manufactured shall not differ more than 5%, and the height shall not differ more than 10% from the ordered size prior to filling. 511.2.2 Wire

The wire used in the manufactured of double-twisted mesh for use in gabions and mattresses shall conform to the specifications as shown below as appropriate for the style ordered. 511.2.2.1 Style 1 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured from zinc-coated steel wire conforming to Specification ASTM A 641, Class 3 coating, soft temper. 511.2.2.2 Style 2 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured from Zn-5A1-MMcoated steel wire conforming to Specification ASTM A 856/A 856 M, Class 3 coating, soft temper. 511.2.2.3 Style 3 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured from the same type of metallic-coated steel wire as style 1 with an additional PVC coating extruded into the metallic-coated steel wire. The PVC coating shall conform to the following requirements: Test Method 1. Specific Gravity 2. Tensile Strength, min 3. Modulus of Elasticity, min 1.30 to 1.35 20.6 MPa 18.6 MPa D 792 D 412 D 412

316

4. Hardness, shore D 5. Brittleness Temp, max 6. Resistance to Abrasion, % weight loss, max.

between 50 & 60 90C (150F) or lower temp. 12%

D 2240 D 746 D 1242

The PVC coating shall not show cracks or breaks after the wires are twisted in the fabrication of the mesh. 511.2.2.4 Style 4 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured from aluminumcoated steel wire conforming to Specification ASTM A 809, soft temper. 511.2.3 Lacing Wire and Stiffener Lacing wire and stiffeners shall be made of wire having the same coating material as the double-twisted wire mesh conforming to Specification ASTM A 641, A 856/A 856 M or A 809 with a tensile strength in accordance with subsection 509.2.7. 511.2.4 Fasteners made from zinc-coated steel wire, zinc - 5% aluminum mischmetal alloy-coated steel wire and aluminum-coated steel shall conform to specification A 764, Type A, B, or C, Table 2 or Table 3. Gabion and mattresses shall be manufactured with all components mechanically connected at the production facility with the exception of the mattresses lid which is produced separately from the base. All gabions and mattresses shall be supplied in the collapsed form, either folded and bundled or rolled, for shipping. Dimensions

511.2.5

511.2.6

The minimum size of the galvanized and PVC coated wire to be used in the fabrication of the gabion and mattresses shall be as follows: Diameter, mm Gabion Mattresses Metallic PVC Metallic PVC Coated Coated Coated Coated 3.05 2.70 2.20 2.20 3.80 3.40 2.70 2.70 2.20 2.20 2.20 2.20

Body Wire Selvedge or Perimeter Wire Tying and Connecting Wire

Diameter Tolerances for Galvanized Wire to be used in the fabrication of gabion and mattress shall be .10.

317

The nominal and the minimum thickness of PVC coating shall be 0.50 mm and 0.38 mm, respectively. 511.2.7 Mechanical Properties

Tensile Strength The tensile strength of Zinc-coated wire used in the fabrication of gabion and mattresses when tested in accordance with Test Methods ASTM A 370, shall be as follows: Strength, max, Mpa Gabion Mattresses 485 515 485 485 515 515

Body Wire Selvedge or Perimeter Wire Tying and Connecting Wire 511.2.8 Weight of Coating

The minimum weight of zinc per unit area of uncoated wire surface shall be in accordance with ASTM A 975 or as follows: Wire Diameter, mm Over 1.90 to 2.30 Over 2.30 to 2.70 Over 2.70 to 3.10 Over 3.10 to 3.50 Over 3.50 to 3.90 511.2. 9 Rock Fill Rock used in the gabions and mattresses shall consist of hard, durable rock pieces that will not deteriorate when submerged in water or exposed to severe weather conditions. Rock pieces shall be generally uniformly graded in sizes ranging from 100 mm to 200 mm. Filled gabions shall have a minimum density of 1,400 kg/m3. Voids shall be evenly distributed. No rock size shall exceed 2/3 the mattress depth and at least 85% by weight of the stone shall have a size greater than 80 mm. No stones shall be able to pass through the mesh. The rock shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 63 except that the sodium sulphate soundness loss shall not exceed 9% after 5 cycles. 511.2.10 Filter Fabric Filter cloth shall consist of 70% polypropylene and 30% polyethylene. Class 3 or A Coating, g/m2, ASTM A 641 220 230 240 260 270

318

511.3 Construction Requirements 511.3.1 Fabrication 1. Gabions and mattresses shall be in the form of rectangular baskets of the required dimensions and shall be manufactured from wire as specified in Subsection 509.2.2. Gabions shall be made of steel wire double twisted forming a uniform hexagonal mesh type 8 x 10 having a nominal mesh openings of 83 by 114 mm. Mattresses shall be made of steel wire double twisted forming a uniform hexagonal mesh type 6 x 8 having a nominal mesh openings of 64 by 83 mm. Tolerances on the hexagonal, double-twisted wire mesh opening shall not exceed 10% on the nominal dimension D values, 64 mm for mattresses and 83 mm for gabions. The edges shall be formed into a securely connected selvedge adequate to prevent raveling. Individual basket ties and connections shall be made by using a quantity of wire not less than 8% of the weight of each basket. 2. When the gabion length exceeds its width, it shall have securely tied diaphragms connected at all edges to form individual cells of equal length and width. Gabions shall be fabricated in such a manner that the sides, ends, lids and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the specified sizes. Gabions shall be of single unit construction, base, lids, ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the point of connection is at least equal to that of the mesh. The gabion shall be equally divided by diaphragms, placed at not more than 1.0 m intervals, and of the same mesh and gauge as the body of the gabions, into cells the length of which does not exceed the horizontal width. The gabion shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base in such a manner that no additional tying at this junction will be necessary. 3. Four cross-connecting wires shall be provided in each cell having a height of one half the width or less, and eight cross-connecting wires shall be provided in each cell having a height greater than one half the width. All perimeter edge of the mesh forming the gabion shall be securely selvedged so that the joints, by tying the selvedges, have at least the same strength as the body of the mesh.

319

Selvedge wire used through all the edges (perimeter wire) shall not be less than 3.80 mm diameter and shall meet the same specifications as the wire mesh. 511.3.2 Assembly and Construction: 1. Gabions shall be installed in a workmanlike manner. The gabions shall be placed on a smooth foundation. Final line and grade shall be approved by the Engineer. Each gabion unit shall be assembled by binding together all vertical edges with wire ties on approximately 152 mm (6 inches) spacing or by a continuous piece of connecting wire stitched around the vertical edges with a coil every 102 mm ( 4 inches). Empty gabion units shall be set to line and grade as shown on the Plans or as described by the Engineer. Wire ties or connecting wires shall be used to join the units together in the same manner as described above for assembling. Internal tie wires shall be uniformly spaced and securely fastened in each cell of the structure. A standard fence stretcher, chain fall, or iron rod may be used to stretch the wire baskets and hold alignment. 2. When possible the subgrade of the mattress and gabion shall be properly compacted to a depth of 150 mm. The Contractor shall consider the cost of subgrade preparation in the unit prices. Filter fabric as beds of gabions and mattresses forming the structure shall be suitably leveled and shall be securely connected along the complete length of all contact edges by means of the above specified tying and connecting wire. 3. Before the filling material is placed, the gabions and mattresses shall be carefully selected for uniformity of size, and the pieces shall be handplaced to provide a neat appearance as approved by the Engineer. The gabions shall be filled with stone carefully placed by hand or machine to assure alignment and avoid bulges with a minimum voids. Alternate placing of rock and connection wires shall be performed until the gabion is filled. After a gabion has been filled, the lid shall be bent over until it meets the sides and edges. The lid shall then be secured to the sides, ends and diaphragms with the wire ties or connecting wire in the manner described for assembling. The vertical joints of gabions and mattress baskets shall be staggered as in running bond in brickwork.

320

4. The cells in any row shall be filled in stage so that local deformation may be avoided. That is at no time shall the cell be filled to a depth exceeding 30 cm more than the adjoining cell. 5. Filter fabric shall be placed between earth surface and gabion or mattress structures. Filter fabric shall be rolled out into a flat nonrutted surface free from sharp objects, weighing down the edges. Construction equipment shall not be allowed into unprotected fabric. Jointing is normally affected by overlapping not less than 300 mm, but it is preferable to joint by sewing or industrial stapling. Joint edges should be facing downwards to avoid protruding through the surface material.

511.4 Method of Measurement The quantities to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meter of gabions and mattresses and the area of filter cloth completed and accepted.

511.5

Basis of Payment

Quantities determined as provided above shall be paid for at the appropriate contract unit price per unit of measurement for the Pay Item shown in the Bid Schedule, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for all necessary excavation, subgrade preparation, for furnishing, placing wire baskets and fill materials and for all labor, equipment accessories, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number 511 (1) 511 (2) 511 (3)

Description Gabions Mattresses Filter Cloth

Unit of Measurement Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Square Meter

321

PART H MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES ITEM 600 CURB AND GUTTER 600.1 Description This Item shall consist of the construction of curb and gutter either Precast or Cast in place, made of concrete in accordance with this Specification at the location, and in conformity with the lines, grades, dimensions and design, shown on the Plans or as required by the Engineer. 600.2 Material Requirements 600.2.1 Material for Bed Course Bed course materials as shown on the Plans shall consist of cinders, sand, slag, gravel, crushed stone, or other approved porous material of such grading that all the particles will pass through 12.5 mm (1/2 inch) sieve. 600.2.2 Concrete Concrete shall be of the class indicated on the Plans and shall conform to the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete. 600.2.3 Expansion Joint Filler Expansion joint filler shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 153/ Item 705. 600.2.4 Cement Mortar Cement mortar shall consist of one part of Portland cement and two parts of fine aggregates with water added as necessary to obtain the required consistency. The mortar shall be used within 30 minutes of preparation. 600.2.5 Bonding Compound Where bonding compound is used, it shall conform to AASHTO M 200. 600.3 Construction Requirements

600.3.1 Bedding Excavation shall be made to the required depth and the base upon which the curb and/or gutter is to be set shall be compacted to a firm and even surface. All soft and unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced with suitable material.

322

Bed course material shall be placed and compacted to form a bed of the required thickness as shown on the Plans. 600.3.2 Cast in Place Curb and Gutter 600.3.2.1 Placing Forms shall conform to the requirements of Item 407, Concrete Structures. Metal forms shall be of an approved section. Forms to hold the concrete shall be built and set-in-place as described in Item 407, Concrete Structures. Forms for at least 50 m of curb and gutter shall be inplace and checked for alignment and grade before concrete is placed. Curbs and gutters constructed on curves shall have forms of either wood or metal and they shall be accurately shaped to the curvature shown on the Plans. Mixing, placing, finishing and curing of concrete shall conform to the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete, as modified by the requirements below. The concrete shall be placed in the forms in layers of 100 or 125 mm each, and to the depth required. It shall be tamped and spaded until mortar entirely covers the top and surfaces of the forms. The top of the concrete shall be finished to a smooth and even surface and the edges rounded to the radii shown on the Plans. Before the concrete is given the final finishing, the surface of the gutter shall be tested with a 3-m straight-edge and any irregularities of more than 10 mm in 3 m shall be corrected. The curb and gutter shall be constructed in uniform sections of not more than 50 m in length except where shorter sections are required to coincide with the location of weakened planes or contraction joints of the concrete pavement, or for closures, but no section shall be less than 2 m long. The sections shall be separated by sheet templates set perpendicular to the face and top of the curb and gutter. The templates shall be approximately 5 mm in thickness and of the same width as that of the curb and/or gutter and not less than 50 mm deeper than the depth of the curb and/or gutter. Templates shall be set carefully and held firmly during the placing of the concrete and shall remain in place until the concrete has set sufficiently to hold its shape but shall be removed while the forms are still in place. A preformed joint filler approved by the Engineer may be used in lieu of the sheet template mentioned above. In this event the fiber board shall be pre-cut to the shape of the curb so that its outer edge will be flushed with the abutting curb and/or gutter. Expansion joints shall be formed at intervals shown on the Plans. Where a curb is placed next to a concrete pavement, expansion joints in the curb shall be located opposite expansion joints in the pavement.

323

The form shall be removed within 24 hours after the concrete has been placed. Minor defects shall be repaired with mortar containing one part of Portland Cement and two parts of fine aggregate. Plastering shall not be permitted and all rejected portions shall be removed and replaced at the Contractors expense. The exposed surface shall be finished while the concrete is still fresh by rubbing the surfaces with a wetted soft brick or wood until they are smooth. The surfaces shall be wetted thoroughly, either by dipping the brick or wood in water, or by throwing water on the surfaces with a brush. After the concrete has been rubbed smooth using water, it shall then be rubbed with a thin grout containing one part of Portland Cement and one part of fine aggregates. Rubbing with grout shall continue until uniform color is produced. When completed, the concrete shall be covered with suitable material and kept moist for a period of 3 days, or a membrane-forming material may be applied as provided in Item 405, Structural Concrete. The concrete shall be suitably protected from the weather until thoroughly hardened. After the concrete has set sufficiently, the spaces on the back of the curb which were excavated for placing the curb shall be refilled to the required elevation with suitable material which shall be tamped in layers of not more than 150 mm until consolidated. 600.3.3 Precast Curb and Gutter 600.3.3.1 Placing The precast concrete curb and gutter shall be set in 20mm of cement mortar as specified in Subsection 600.2.4 to the line level and grade as shown on the approved Plans. The precast curb shall not be more than 20cm in width at the top portion and not be more than 25cm at the base. The precast curb and gutter shall be 1.0 m in length and shall be put side by side consecutively with joint in between. Joints between consecutive curb and gutter shall be filled with cement mortar to the full section of the curb and gutter. Expansion joints shall be formed at intervals shown on the Plans. Where a curb and gutter is placed next to a concrete pavement, expansion joints in the curb and gutter shall be located opposite expansion joints in the pavement. Minor defects shall be repaired with mortar containing one part of Portland Cement and two parts of fine aggregates. Plastering shall not be permitted and all rejected portions shall be removed and replaced at the Contractors expense. The exposed surface shall be finished by rubbing the surfaces with a wetted soft brick or wood until they are smooth. The surfaces shall be wetted thoroughly, either by dipping the brick or wood in water, or by throwing water on the surfaces with a brush. After the concrete has been rubbed smooth using water, it shall then be

324

rubbed with a thin grout containing one part of Portland Cement and one part of fine aggregate. Rubbing with grout shall continue until uniform color is produced. 600.3.3.2 Handling Precast Curb and Gutter 1. In preparation for the handling of precast curb and gutter, all fabricated curb and gutter of one (1) meter in length shall be provided or inserted with 2-1 PVC pipes for fitting at their required locations. The PVC pipes shall be placed 25 mm from both edge during the fresh concrete is in plastic state. 2. Precast curb and gutter shall be lifted on upright position and not at the points of support and shall be the same during transporting and storage. 3. Extreme care shall be exercised in handling and moving precast curb and gutter to avoid cracking. 4. No precast curb and gutter shall be used that does not reach its final position in the forms with the required time stipulated prior to installation. 5. Precast curb and gutter shall be transferred to the construction site. Fresh curb and gutter shall not be placed against in-situ concrete which has been in a position for more than 30 minutes. 6. Precast curb and gutter may only be transported to the delivery point in truck agitators or truck mixer operating at the speed designated by the manufacturer of the equipment, provided that the consistency and workability of the mix concrete upon discharge at the delivery point is suitable for adequate placement. 600.4 Method of Measurement

The length of curb and gutter to be paid for shall be the number of linear meters of curb and gutter (cast in place) or the number of pieces of precast curb and gutter of the required dimensions shown on the Plans measured along its front face in-place, completed and accepted. No deductions shall be made for flattening of curbs at entrances and no additional allowances shall be made for curbs and gutters constructed on curves. 600.5 Basis of Payment The length of curb and gutter determined in Subsection 600.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per linear meter for Curb and Gutter which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials for concrete, reinforcing steel if required on the Plans, expansion joint materials, forms for drainage openings, excavation for curb and

325

gutter, backfilling, dumping and disposal of surplus materials, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number 600 (1) 600 (2) 600 (3) 600 (4) 600 (5) 600 (6)

Description Concrete Curb (Cast in place) Concrete Gutter (Cast in place) Curb and Gutter (Cast in place) Concrete Curb (Precast) Concrete Gutter (Precast) Curb & Gutter (Precast)

Unit of Measurement Linear Meter Linear Meter Linear Meter Piece Piece Piece

ITEM 601 SIDEWALK

601.1

Description

This Item shall consist of the construction of asphalt or Portland Cement concrete sidewalk in accordance with this Specification and to the lines, grades, levels and dimensions shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer. 601.2 Material Requirements 601.2.1 Portland Cement Concrete The cement concrete shall be Class A as specified in Item 405, Structural Concrete. 601.2.2 Asphalt Asphaltic material shall be as specified in Item 308, Bituminous Plant-Mix Surface Course, Cold-Laid, or Item 310, Bituminous Concrete Surface Course, HotLaid. 601.2.3 Expansion Joint Filler Unless otherwise ordered, the preformed joint filler shall have a thickness of 5 mm and shall conform to the requirements of Item 311, Portland Cement Concrete Pavement.

326

601.2.4

Forms

Forms shall be of wood or metal as approved by the Engineer and shall extend to the full depth of the concrete. All forms shall be straight, free from warps and of adequate strength to resist distortion. 601.2.5 Bed Course Material Bed course material consists of cinders, sand, slag, gravel, crushed stone or other approved permeable granular material of such grading that all particles shall pass a 12.5 mm (1/2 inch) sieve. 601.2.6 Asphaltic Prime Coat Prime coat shall be cut-back asphalt conforming to the requirements of Item 301, Bituminous Prime Coat. 601.3 Construction Requirements

601.3.1 Asphalt Sidewalk Excavation shall be made to the depth and width required that will permit the installation and bracing of the forms. The foundation shall be shaped and compacted to a firm and even surface conforming to the section shown on the Plans. All materials from soft areas shall be removed and replaced with suitable materials. The bed course shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 100 mm to the depths, lines and levels shown on the Plans. The prepared bed course material shall receive an application of prime coat in accordance with the requirements of Item 301, Bituminous Prime Coat. The asphalt mixture shall be placed on the previously primed and prepared bed only when, in the opinion of the Engineer, the bed is sufficiently dry and weather conditions are suitable. The mixture shall be placed in one or more layers of uniform thickness to the total depth shown on the Plans. Each layer shall be smoothed by raking or screeding and shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling with a hand operated roller of a type satisfactory to the Engineer. After compaction, the surfacing shall be of the thickness and section shown on the Plans and shall be smooth, even and of a dense uniform texture. Forms, if used, shall be removed and the shoulders shaped and compacted to the required section. 601.3.2 Cement Concrete Sidewalk Excavation shall be as specified above. The bed course material shall be placed in accordance with the Item 200, Aggregate Subbase Course.

327

All forms shall be staked securely in position at the correct line and level. Preformed joint filler shall be set in position shown on the Plans before placing of the concrete is started. The top of the joint filler shall be placed 5 mm below the top surface of the finished sidewalk. The mixing, placing, finishing and curing of concrete shall be as specified in Item 405, Structural Concrete. The Portland Cement concrete shall be placed to the total depth shown on the plans. The surface shall be cut through to a depth of 10 mm with a trowel at intervals of 1 m or, were required, in straight lines perpendicular to the edge of sidewalk. The surface shall then be brushed. The edges of the sidewalk and the transverse cuts shall be shaped with a suitable tool so formed as to round the edges to a radius of 15 mm

601.4 Method of Measurement The area to be paid for shall be the number of square meters of sidewalk measured, completed in-place and accepted.

601.5 Basis of Payment The quantity as determined in Subsection 601.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for all the contract unit price per square meter for Sidewalk which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials for asphalt sidewalk, concrete sidewalk, expansion joint material, for excavating and compacting the foundation bed, for furnishing and placing cinders, gravel or other permeable bed course material, for prime coat material, for forms, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under:

Pay Item No.

Description

Unit of Measurement

601

Sidewalk

Square Meter

328

ITEM 602 MONUMENTS, MARKERS AND GUIDE POSTS

602.1 Description This Item shall consist of right-of-way monuments, maintenance marker posts, kilometer posts and/or guide posts, furnished and installed in accordance with this Specification at the locations, and in conformity with the sizes, dimensions and design, shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.

602.2 Material Requirements Concrete shall be the class designated on the Plans and shall be composed of materials conforming to the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete. Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of Item 404, Reinforcing Steel. Timber shall be of the species and grade shown on the Plans. Treated timber, if required, shall conform to the requirements of Item 410, Treated and Untreated Timber. The metal material shall conform to the requirements shown on the Plans, or as stipulated in the Special Provisions. Paints, if required, shall conform to the requirements shown on the Plans, or as stipulated in the Special Provisions. Warning reflectors, if required, shall conform to the requirements shown on the Plans, or as stipulated in the Special Provisions.

602.3 Construction Requirements Construction or fabrication and installation of monuments and posts shall be as shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions and shall include the attaching of warning reflectors and the painting of posts, if required. Each monument and post shall be set accurately at the required location and elevation and in such manner as to insure its being held firmly in place. In constructing precast monuments, the forms shall not be removed until after the concrete has hardened. Monuments that are warped shall be rejected. The exposed surface of the finished monuments shall be uniform, of even texture, and shall be free from holes, cracks and chipped edges. The precast monuments shall not be transported to the work until the concrete has been cured.

329

602.4 Method of Measurement The quantities to be paid for shall be the actual number of right-of-way monuments, maintenance marker posts, kilometer posts and/or guide posts furnished, placed and accepted.

602.5 Basis of Payment The quantities determined as provided in Subsection 602.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract price per unit of measurement respectively, for each of the particular Pay Item listed below and as shown in the Bid Schedule, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item. Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number 602 (1) 602 (2) 600 (3) 600 (4)

Description Right-of-Way monuments Maintenance marker posts Kilometer posts Guide posts

Unit of Measurement\ Each Each Each Each

(When more than one design is specified for any of the pay items, their respective dimensions, material types or other means of identification shall be inserted in parenthesis immediately after the name of the pay item, and letter suffixes shall be included within the parenthesis of the pay item numbers)

ITEM 603 GUARDRAIL

603.1 Description This item shall consist of furnishing and constructing posts and guardrails of the types called for in the contract and in accordance with this Specification, at the locations, and in conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.

330

603.2 Material Requirements Materials for the desired type of guardrail shall meet the requirements specified in the following specifications: 1. 2. 3. 4. Wire rope or wire cable AASHTO M 30 Chain link fabric AASHTO M 181 Metal beam rail AASHTO M 180 Timber rail, unless otherwise indicated in the Plans or Special Provisions, any of the following first group Philippine Timber shall be used: Ipil, Molave, Tindalo or Yacal. Only one specie of timber shall be used in the construction of any one continuous length of guardrail.

Timber guardrail shall be well-seasoned, straight and free of injurious defects. They shall be dressed and of sufficient length so that joints shall be on the rail posts. Guardrail Hardware. Offset brackets of the resilient and non-resilient types shall be of the type specified, or as shown on the Plans, and shall meet the strength requirements specified. Splices and end connections shall be of the type and design specified or as shown on the Plans, and shall be of such strength as to develop the full design strength of the rail elements. Unless otherwise specified, all fittings, bolts, washers and other accessories shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO M 111 or ASTM A 153, whichever may apply. All galvanizing shall be done after fabrication. Guardrail Post. Posts shall be of either wood, steel, or concrete, as may be specified. Only one kind of post shall be used for any one continuous guardrail. Wood post shall be fabricated from an approved or specified timber specie and shall be of the quality, diameter or section and length as specified, or as shown on the Plans. Steel post shall be of the section and length as specified, or as shown on the Plans. They shall be of a copper bearing steel when so specified. Steel shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 183 for the grade specified. The posts shall be galvanized or shop painted as may be specified. Pre-cast reinforced concrete posts shall be of a section and length as specified or as shown on the Plans. Concrete shall conform with the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete, for class specified. Reinforcement shall conform with the requirements of AASHTO M 31 Grade 60. All bars shall be of the deformed type.

331

Concrete deadmen for end anchorages shall be as specified, or as shown on the Plans. Concrete and reinforcement shall conform to the requirements as stated above the precast reinforced concrete posts. Paints for steel and wood shall be specified and conform to the requirements specified in Item 411, Paint. 603.3 Construction Requirements 603.3.1 Posts Posts shall be set vertically in the position shown on the Plans and, where embedded in a concrete foundation block, shall remain undisturbed for a minimum of 48 hours. The space around the post shall be backfilled to the ground line with approved material in layers not exceeding 100 mm and each layer shall be moistened and thoroughly compacted. 603.3.2 Rail Elements Rail elements shall be erected in a manner resulting in a smooth continuous installation. All bolts, except adjustment bolts, shall be drawn tight. Bolts shall be of sufficient length to extend beyond the nuts at least 5 mm but not more than 10 mm. Where painting of railing components is specified, any damage to the shop coat of paint shall be corrected by an application of an approved rust-inhibitive primer prior to further painting. Any surface inaccessible to painting after erection shall be given the specified number of coats of paint uniformly applied by thorough brushing using an approved pressure spray. Galvanized surfaces which have been abraded so that the base material is exposed, threaded portions of all fittings and fasteners and cut ends of bolts shall be protected in a manner as may be specified or directed. The surfaces and sawed edges of untreated or salt-treated guardrail shall be painted with three coats of white paint to within 200 mm of the ground line. The first 200 mm of posts above the ground shall be painted with two coats of black paint. Painting shall be done only when the timber is dry and clean. Each coat of paint shall be thoroughly dry before the next coat is applied. Paint shall be applied in heavy coats, completely covering every part of the surface and shall be worked well into the joints and open spaces. It shall be thoroughly and evenly spread that no excess paint collects at any point. Guardrail and posts, after erection has been completed, shall be stained with two applications of approved creosote stain, covering the rails and the exposed portions of the posts. The wood shall be dry before being stained. The first coat

332

shall be thoroughly dry before the second is applied. Stain shall not be applied in damp weather. For beam type guardrails, metal works not galvanized shall be given one shop coat of red lead, zinc chromate paint or an approved fast-drying rust-inhibitive primer and two field coats of white or aluminum paint. Untreated wood posts shall be given three coats of paints of the color indicated on the Plans, or as specified. Painting shall conform to the requirements of Item 411, Paint.

603.4

Method of Measurement

Guardrail shall be measured by linear meter from center to center of end posts, except where end connections are made on masonry or steel structures, in which case measurement will be to the face of such structures. End anchorages and terminal sections will be measured as units of each kind shown in Bid Schedule. If no pay item for anchorages or terminal sections appear in the Bid Schedule, measurement therefore shall be included in the linear meter measurement for completed guardrail.

603.5

Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities of guardrail, determined in Subsection 603.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per linear meter for the type specified, complete in place, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. When so specified, end anchorages and terminal sections will be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the kind specified and completed in place. Payment will be made under:

Pay Item No.

Description

Unit of Measurement

603 (1) 603 (2) 603 (3a) 603 (3b) 604 (4)

Guardrail (Wire rope or Wire cable) Cable Guardrail 9Chain Link Fabric) Metal Guardrail (Metal Beam) Including Post Metal Beam End Piece Guardrail (Timber)

Linear Meter Linear Meter Linear Meter Each Linear Meter

333

ITEM 604 FENCING

604.1 Description This Item shall consist of furnishing and constructing posts and barbed wire or chain link fences in accordance with the details, and at the locations, shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.

604.2 Material Requirements 604.2.1 Barbed Wire Barbed wire shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 121, Class I. The barbed wire shall consist of 2 strands of 12.5 gauge wire, twisted with 2 points, 14 gauge barbs spaced 100 mm apart. 604.2.2 Chain Link Fence Fabric Chain link fence fabric shall be fabricated from 10 gauge galvanized wire conforming to AASHTO M 181 and shall be of the type shown on the Plans. Before ordering the chain link fence fabric, the Contractor shall submit a sample of the material to the Engineer for testing and for approval. 604.2.3 Concrete Post Concrete posts shall be made of Class A concrete in accordance with Item 405, Structural Concrete. The posts shall be cast to a tapered section 3 m long, or to the length shown on the detailed Plans, and shall have a smooth surface finish. 604.2.4 Steel Post Steel posts shall be of the sections and length as specified or as shown on the Plans. The posts shall be copper bearing steel and shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 183 for the grade specified. 604.2.5 Steel Reinforcement Steel reinforcement for concrete posts shall be deformed steel bars conforming to the provisions of Item 404, Reinforcing Steel. 604.2.6 Hardwares Nuts, bolts, washers and other associated hardware shall be galvanized after fabrication as specified as ASTM 153.

334

604.3

Construction Requirements

The Contractor shall perform such clearing and grubbing as may be necessary to construct the fence to the required grade and alignment. Fence shall generally follow the contour of the ground. Grading shall be performed where necessary to provide a neat appearance. Gates shall be constructed as shown on the Plans 604.3.1 Erection Post The post shall be erected vertically in position inside the formwork of the foundation block prior to the placing of concrete and shall be adequately supported by bracing to prevent movement of the post during the placing and setting of the concrete. The posts shall be erected to the height and location shown on the Plans, or as ordered by the Engineer. 604.3.2 Installation of Chain Link Fence fabric The chain link fence fabric shall be set to line and elevation and pulled taut between each post before spot welding, or other method of fixing, is carried out. Where splicing of the fence fabric is necessary, or at joints, the lapping of the chain link fence fabric shall be for a minimum of 100 mm and shall occur only at the post. No horizontal splicing will be permitted. The fence fabric shall be fixed to the posts as shown on the Plans. Any surface protective layer damaged during welding and/or construction shall be restored properly.

604.4 Method of Measurement The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of linear meter measured center to center of posts, of fencing erected in place and accepted.

604.5 Basis of Payment The quantity, as determined in Subsection 604.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract price per unit of measurement respectively for each of the particular items listed below and as shown in the Bid Schedule, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.

335

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item No.

Description

Unit of Measurement

604 (1) 604 (2) 604 (3) 604 (4)

Fencing (Barbed wire) Fencing (Chain Link Fence Fabric) Fencing (Posts) Fencing (Gates)

Linear Meter Linear Meter Each Each

ITEM 605 ROAD SIGN

605.1 Description This Item shall consist of furnishing and installing road signs in accordance with this Specification and to the details shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer. The road signs shall comply in all respects with the Philippine International Road Signs Manual published by the Department of Public Works and Highways, Manila. The categories of road signs are designated in the Manual, namely, danger warning signs, regulatory signs and informative signs, or guide signs. These are referred to in the Contract as warning signs and informatory signs, respectively. Road signs shall be classified as standard or non-standard. Standard signs consist of all warning signs, regulatory signs and informatory signs with the exception of direction signs, place identification signs and the line. Non-standard signs consist of all informatory signs which are not classified as standard signs. The size of warning and regulatory signs is the length of the side of triangular signs (measured from the points of intersection of the extension of the edges), the horizontal width of octagonal signs and the diameter of circular signs.

605.2 Material Requirements 605.2.1 Sign Panels Sign panels for warning, regulatory, and informatory signs shall be manufactured from aluminum sheeting at least 3 mm thick.

336

605.2.2 Reflective Sheeting The reflective sheeting used on the road signs shall consist of spherical lens elements embedded within a transparent plastic having a smooth, flat surface with a protected precoat adhesive which shall be pressure sensitive for manual application, or tack free heat activated for mechanical vacuum-heat application. The minimum reflective brightness values of the reflective sheeting as compared to a magnesium oxide (MgO) shall be as given in Table 605.1. The brightness of the reflective sheeting totally wet by rain, shall be not less than 90% of the given values. Table 605.1 Reflective Brightness of Traffic Signs Surfaces Color Angle of Incidence -40 200 500 -40 200 500 -40 200 500 -40 200 500 Angle of Divergence 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 Minimum Reflective Brightness Value Compared with MgO 15 10 3 75 70 70 35 35 10 6 4.5 0.5

Red

White

Yellow

Blue

The reflective sheeting shall be sufficiently flexible to permit application and adhesion to a moderately embossed surface. It shall show no damage when bent 900 over a 50 mm diameter mandrel. The sheeting shall be solvent-resistant so as to be capable of withstanding cleaning with petrol, diesel fuel, mineral spirits, turpentine methanol. The sheeting shall show no cracking or reduction in reflectivity after being subjected to the dropping of a 25 mm diameter steel ball from a height of 2 m into its surface. The adhesive shall permit the reflective sheeting to adhere accurately 48 hours after application of temperatures of up to 900.

337

The reflective material shall be weather-resistant and, following cleaning in accordance with manufacturers recommendations, shall show no discoloration, cracking, blistering, peeling or any dimensional change. Samples of reflective sheeting shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. 605.2.3 Posts and Frames Wide flange posts and frames shall be fabricated from structural steel conforming to ASTM A 283 Grade D. In lieu of wide flange steel posts, the Contractor may use tubular steel posts conforming to ASTM A 501. All posts shall be thoroughly cleaned, free from grease, scale and rust and shall be given one coat of rust-inhibiting priming paint and two coats of gray paint in accordance with Item 411, Paint. 605.2.4 Nuts and Bolts Nuts, bolts, washers and other metal parts shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO M 111. 605.2.5 Concrete Foundation Blocks The concrete for the foundation blocks shall be Class A in accordance with Item 405, Structural Concrete and shall be of the size shown on the Plans.

605.3 Construction Requirements 605.3.1 Excavation and Backfilling Holes shall be excavated to the required depth to the bottom of the concrete foundation as shown on the Plans. Backfilling shall be carried out by using suitable material approved by the Engineer and shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 150 mm in depth. Surplus excavated material shall be disposed of by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer. 605.3.2 Erection of Posts The posts shall be erected vertically in position inside the formwork of the foundation block prior to the placing of the concrete and shall be adequately supported by bracing to prevent movement of the post during the placing and setting of concrete. The posts shall be located at the positions shown on the Plans.

338

605.3.3 Sign Panel Installation Sign panels shall be installed in accordance with the details shown on the Plans. Any chipping or bending of the sign panels shall be considered as sufficient cause to require replacement of the panels at the Contractors expense. The exposed portion of the fastening hardware on the face of the signs shall be painted with enamels matching the background color. All newly erected traffic road signs shall be covered until ordered removed by the Engineer.

605.4

Method of Measurement

The quantities of standard reflective warning and regulatory road signs shall be the number of such signs of the size specified, including the necessary posts and supports erected and accepted. The quantities for standard reflective informatory signs and non-standard reflective informatory signs shall be the number of such, including the necessary posts and supports, erected and accepted.

605.5

Basis of Payment

The quantities measured as determined in Subsection 605.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for the Pay Items shown in the Bid Schedule which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing road signs, for excavation, backfilling and construction of foundation blocks, and all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under:

Pay Item No.

Description

Unit of Measurement

605 (1) 605 (2) 605 (3)

Warning Signs Regulatory Signs Informatory Signs

Each Each Each

339

ITEM 606 PAVEMENT MARKINGS

606.1

Description

This item shall consist of placing markings on the finished pavement. The work shall include the furnishing of premixed reflectorized traffic paint or reflectorized pavement marking paint conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 248, whichever is called for in the Contract, sampling and packing, preparing the surface, and applying the paint to the pavement surface, all in accordance with this Specification. The paint shall be applied to the size, shape and location of the markings shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer. 606.2 Premixed Reflectorized Traffic Paints Premixed reflectorized traffic paint is a paint in which the glass beads are mixed in the paint during the process of manufacture, so that upon application and drying, the paint line is capable of retroreflection of the light beams. Premixed reflectorized traffic paints which are available in both white and yellow are paints that provide reflective marking for concrete, bituminous, bricks or stone surface of highways, bridges, tunnels, streets, parking lots and airports. 606.2.1 Classification Premixed reflectorized traffic paint shall be classified according to the following types based on the vehicles used: Type I Alkyd Type II Chlorinated Rubber Alkyd

606.2.2

Material Requirements

The paint shall consist of pigments, vehicles and glass beads so combined as to produce a paint that will conform to the following requirements. a. Condition in container The packaged material shall be free from lumps and mixed readily to a smooth homogenous state. b. Skinning The packaged material shall not skin within 48 hours in a filled, tightly closed container. c. Appearance of Dried Film The paint film shall dry to a smooth uniform finish. d. Flexibility The dried paint film shall not show cracking or flaking after being bent about 180 degrees over a 12.7 mm mandrel.

340

e. Resistance to Water The dried paint film shall not show blistering, peeling, wrinkling and discoloration when immersed in water for 18 hours. f. The paint shall also conform to the physical properties specified in Table 1. Table 1 Physical Properties

Properties

Type I and Type II Minimum 1.5 65 Maximum 40 95

Specific Gravity Drying Time, No Pick Up, Minutes Consistency (Kreb Units) at 20 C

g. Premixed reflectorized traffic paint composition shall conform to the requirements given in Table 2. Table 2 Composition Requirements Requirements Paint Composition Type I Type II Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Total Dry Solids, percent By weight 60 60 Titanium Dioxide, Rutile Percent by weight 16.0 16.0 Medium Chrome Yellow, 12.0 Percent by weight 12.0 Extenders, percent by wt., 13.0 13.0 White 17.0 17.0 Yellow Non-volatile Content (based on the vehicle) 40 41 percent by weight Glass Beads, percent by Weight 31.0 35.0 35.0 31.0 h. Glass Spheres or Beads Requirements: Quantity: The amount of glass beads to be mixed with the paint shall be 500 grams per liter of paint.

341

Beads Diameter: The percentage of beads that will pass through the US Standard Sieves shall be as follows: Sieve No. (um) Mass Percent Passing 100 85-100 15-55 0-10

70 (212 um) 0.850 80 (186 um) 0.600 140 (106 um) 0.300 230 ( 63 um) 0.150

Index of Refraction: The index of refraction of the beads shall be within the range of 1.50 to 1.60 when tested by the liquid immersion method at 29oC. Appearance: The glass beads shall be transparent, colorless and the sum of particles that are fused, plane, angular and colored and contains bubble shall not exceed 20 percent 606.2.3 Construction Requirements The painting of lane markers and traffic strips shall include the cleaning of the pavement surfaces, the application, protection and drying of the paint coatings, the protection of pedestrians, vehicular or other traffic, the protection of all parts of the road structure and its appurtenances against disfigurement by spatters, splashes or smirches of paints or of paint materials, and the supplying of all tools, labor and traffic paint necessary for the entire work. The paint shall not be applied during rain or wet weather or when the air is misty, or when in the opinion of the Engineer, conditions are unfavorable for the work. Paint shall not be applied upon damp pavement surfaces, or upon pavement which has absorbed heat sufficient to cause the paint to blister and produce a porous film of paint. The application of paint shall preferably be carried out by a machine specially made for this purpose but where brushes are used, only round or oval brushes not exceeding 100 mm in width will be permitted. The paint shall be so applied as to produce a uniform, even coating in close contact with the surface being painted. Traffic paint shall be applied to the pavement at the rate of 0.33 L /m2 and shall dry sufficiently to be free from cracking in from 15 to 30 minutes. All markings shall present a clean cut, uniform and workmanlike appearance. Markings that fail to have a uniform, satisfactory appearance either by day or night, shall be corrected by the Contractor in a manner acceptable to the Engineer and at no cost to the Government.

342

606.2.4 Sampling The paint shall be sampled in accordance with PNS 484/ISO 1512 or other Philippine Standard Method of Sampling Paints and Varnishes. 606.2.5 Test Methods The paints shall be tested in accordance with the methods specified in PNS 461 or other Philippine Standard Method of Tests for Paints and Varnishes. 606.2.6 Packing, Packaging and Marking The paints shall be packed, packaged and marked in accordance with PNS 140.

606.3 Method of Measurement The quantity of pavement markings to be paid for shall either be the length as shown on the Plans of painted traffic line of the stated width or the area as shown on the plans of symbols, lettering, hatchings, and the like, completed and accepted. Separate items shall be provided for premixed reflectorized traffic paint and reflectorized thermoplastic pavement markings.

606.4 Basis of Payment The quantities measured as determined in Section 606.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the appropriate contract unit price for the Pay Items shown in the Bid Schedule which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, sampling and packing, for the preparation of the surface, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under:

Pay Item No.

Description

Unit of Measurement

606 (1)

Pavement markings (Premixed Reflectorized) Pavement markings (Reflectorized Thermoplastic)

Square Meter

606 (2)

Square Meter

343

ITEM 607 REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT STUDS 607.1 Description This Item shall consist of furnishing and installing reflective pavement studs on the surface of the pavement in accordance with this Specification and at the locations shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.

607.2 Material Requirements 607.2.1 Reflective Studs Reflective studs shall be either the Flush Surface or Raised Profile type having the following characteristics. The Flush Surface reflector shall be the short base type having a maximum base area of 180 mm x 140 mm. The base shall be formed in cast-iron with adequate webbing to insure a firm key to the road when installed. The pad shall be highly resilient and durable rubber reinforced with canvass and shall have a design life of at least 5 years. The pad shall be so designed as to produce a self-wiping action of the reflectors when depressed. The reflectors shall be made of impact and abrasion-resisting glass and shall be hermetically sealed into a copper socket. The Raised Profile reflectors shall consist of an acrylic plastic shell filled with an adherent epoxy compound molded from methyl methacyclate into the shape of a shallow frustrum of a pyramid with base dimensions approximately 100 mm x 100 mm and thickness of not more than 20 mm. The shell shall contain two prismatic reflectors each inclined at an angle of 30o to the horizontal and having an area not less than 20 cm2. The reflectors shall attain the following standards for their photometric and physical properties: a) The reflectors shall have the minimum specific intensity values expressed as candle power per foot-candle of illumination at the reflector on a plane perpendicular to the incident light shown in Table 607.1. Table 607.1 Raised Profile Pavement Studs: Photometric Properties Specific Intensity Values Crystal Yellow o 0.2 0.2o 3.00 1.20 1.80 0.72

Color Divergence Angle Incidence Angle 0o 20o

Red 2o 0.75 0.30

344

Each reflector for testing shall be located with the center of the reflecting face at a diameter of 1.5 m from a uniformly bright light source having an effective diameter of 5 mm. The width of the photocell shall be 1.2 mm and shall be shielded from stray light. The distance from the centers of the light source and photocell shall be 5 mm. Failure of more than 4% of the reflective faces shall be a cause for rejection of the complete batch. The reflectors shall support a vertical load or kgf(10kN) when tested in the following manner. A reflector shall be centered horizontally over the open end of a vertically positioned hollow metal cylinders, 75 mm internal diameter, 25 mm high and wall thickness of 6 mm. The load shall be applied to the top of the reflector through a 6 mm diameter by a 6 mm high metal plug centered on top of the reflector. Failure shall constitute either breakage or significant deformation of the marker at any load less than 1000 kgf. 607.2.2 Adhesive When Raised Profile type reflectors are specified, an approved two-part epoxy adhesive shall be used. 607.2.3 Cement Mortar Cement mortar shall consist of 1 part of Portland Cement to 2 parts of fine aggregate with water added as necessary to obtain the required consistency.

607.3 Construction Requirements 607.3.1 Flush Surface Type The stud shall be installed into the pavement in accordance with the manufacturers instructions but shall also comply with the following requirements. Cavities in the pavement shall be clearly cut to the dimensions of the pavement stud and shall allow a clearance of 10 mm around the stud base. The longitudinal centerline axis of the cavity shall be the same as that required for the pavement stud when laid to the correct line and direction. The walls of the cavity shall be splayed back at the angle of approximately 30 to the vertical to facilitate a dove-tail joint after the mortar has set.
o

The bottom of the cavity shall be levelled with asphalt concrete prior to placing the stud base which shall be pounded into position with a pounder foot attached to the pneumatic drill.

345

The depth of the activity shall be such that when the stud base and reflectors have been installed the elevation of the floor of the lens socket shall not be greater than 2.0 mm or less than 1.0 mm above the pavement surface. When the studs are installed into a cement concrete pavement, the stud shall be grouted into position with asphalt concrete containing fine aggregate only or with a cement mortar as described in Subsection 607.2.3 above. 607.3.2 Raised Profile Type The pavement studs shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

607.4 Method of Measurement The quantity of reflectorized pavement studs to be paid for shall be the number of reflectorized pavement studs of either the flush surface type or the raised profile type, whichever is called for in the Contract, installed complete and accepted.

607.5 Basis of Payment The quantities measured as described in Subsection 607.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price of the Pay Items shown in the Bid Schedule, which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, excavating cavities, preparation of surfaces, applying adhesive and mortar and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under:

Pay Item No.

Description

Unit of Measurement

607 (1)

Reflectorized Pavement Stud (Flush Type) Reflectorized Pavement Studs (Raised Profile Type)

Each

607 (2)

Each

346

ITEM 608 TOPSOIL

608.1 Description This Item shall consist of topsoil furnished, transported and spread, or topsoil removed from designated areas, hauled and spread, in accordance with this Specification at the location shown on the Plans or as required by the Engineer.

608.2 Material Requirements Topsoil furnished shall consist of fertile friable soil of loamy character without admixture of undesirable subsoil, refuse or foreign materials. It shall be obtained from well-drained arable land and shall be reasonably free from roots, hard clay, coarse gravel, stones larger than 50 mm in size, coarse sand, noxious seeds, sticks, brush, litter and other deleterious substances. Topsoil shall be capable of sustaining healthy plant life and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Topsoil shall contain not less than five (5) percent organic matter as determined by loss or ignition of samples oven-dried to constant weight.

608.3 Construction Requirements 608.3.1 Sources of Material Topsoil shall be obtained as specified in Item 102, Excavation, or from other approved sources. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least five days before he intends to start topsoil stripping operations. After inspection and approval by the Engineer and prior to stripping any topsoil, the Contractor shall remove noxious weeds and tall grass, brush roots and stones larger than 50 mm in diameter. 608.3.2 Placing The topsoil shall be evenly spread on the areas and to the line and level shown on the Plans and compacted with a light roller to a depth of not less than 100 mm. Spreading shall not be done when the ground topsoil is excessively wet, or otherwise in a condition detrimental to such work. The roadway surfaces shall be kept clean during hauling and spreading operations. After spreading has been completed, large clods, stones, roots, stumps and other loose-lying materials shall be raked up and removed. Any erosion, irregularities of grade or other incidental damage to the surface of the topsoil shall be repaired and/or restored to the Engineers satisfaction.

347

608.4 Method of Measurement The quantities to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meters of Topsoil removed, furnished and hauled complete in place and accepted.

608.5

Basis of Payment

The quantities, as determined in Subsection 608.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price respectively, for each of the particular Pay Items listed below that is shown on the Bid Schedule, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number 608(1) 608(2)

Description Furnishing and Placing Topsoil Placing Topsoil

Unit of Measurement Cubic Meter Cubic Meter

ITEM 609 - SPRIGGING

609.1

Description

This Item shall consist of planting sprigs of living grass plants in accordance with this Specification at locations shown on the Plans or as required by the Engineer.

609.2

Material Requirements

609.2.1 Sprigs Sprigs shall be healthy living stems (stolons or rhizomes) with attached roots or perennial turf-forming grasses of the kinds shown on the Plans, harvested without adhering soil and obtained from approved sources in the locality of the work where the sod is heavy and thickly matted. The presence of objectionable grasses, weeds or other detrimental material will be a cause for rejection.

348

609.2.2 Fertilizers Fertilizers shall be standard commercial fertilizers supplied separately or in mixture containing the percentages of total nitrogen, available phosphoric acid and water-soluble potash. They shall be furnished in standard containers with name, weight and guaranteed analysis of contents clearly marked. The fertilizers may be supplied in the following form: 1. A dry, free-flowing fertilizer soluble in water, suitable for application by a common fertilizer spreader. 2. A finely ground fertilizer, soluble in water suitable for application by power sprayer. 3. A granular or pellet form suitable for application by blower equipment. 609.2.3 Ground Limestone Ground limestone shall contain not less than 85 percent of calcium and magnesium carbonates and shall be of such fineness that 100 percent shall pass through a 2.00 mm sieve and not less than 35 percent through a 0.150 mm sieve. Granulated slag may be substituted in lieu of ground limestone subject to the approval of the Engineer of an adjusted application rate that will provide the equivalent total neutralizing power of the specified limestone. 609.2.4 Topsoil Topsoil shall perform to the requirements of Item 608, Topsoil. 609.2.5 Mulch Material Mulch material shall be hay, straw or other local non-toxic material.

609.3 Construction Requirements 609.3.1 Harvesting Sprigs The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 5 days before sprigs are to be harvested and the source shall be approved by the Engineer before harvesting begins. To begin harvesting, grass and woods shall be mowed to a height of 50 to 75 mm and all clippings removed. Sprigs shall then be loosened by cross-disking, shallow plowing or other acceptable methods. After loosening the sprigs from the soil, they shall be gathered in small piles or windrows, watered and kept moist until planted.

349

Not more than 24 hours shall elapse between harvesting and planting sprigs, except that when weather or other uncontrollable condition interrupts the work, a time extension may be granted, provided the sprigs are still moist and viable. Sprigs that have heated in stockpiles, permitted to dry out or otherwise seriously damaged during harvesting or delivery shall be rejected and be disposed off as directed. 609.3.2 Advance Preparation and Cleanup After grading of areas has been completed and before applying fertilizer and ground limestone, areas to be sprigged shall be raked or otherwise cleared of stone larger than 50 mm in diameter, sticks, stumps and other debris which might interfere with sprigging, growth of grasses or subsequent maintenance of grass-covered areas. If any damage by erosion or other causes has occurred after grading of areas and before beginning the application of fertilizer and ground limestone, the Contractor shall repair such damage. This may include filling gullies, smoothing irregularities and repairing other incidental damage. 609.3.3 Topsoiling If topsoiling is shown on the Plans, it shall be done in accordance with the requirements of Item 608, Topsoil. 609.3.4 Applying Fertilizer and Ground Limestone Following advance preparation and cleanup, fertilizer shall be uniformly spread at the rate indicated on the Plans. If use of ground limestone is required, it shall be spread at the rate shown on the Plans. These materials shall be incorporated into the soil to a depth of not less than 50 mm by disking, raking or other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Stones larger than 50 mm in diameter, large clods, roots and other litter brought to the surface by this operation shall be removed. On steep slopes where fertilizer and ground limestone cannot be incorporated effectively by mechanical equipment, they may be applied with power sprayers, blower equipment or other approved method and need not be incorporated into the soil. 609.3.5 Planting Sprigs Sprigging shall not be done during windy weather or when the ground is dry, excessively wet or otherwise untillable. Sprigs shall be planted in existing ground or in formed embankments or on topsoil as shown on the Plans. If the soil is not moist when the sprigs are being set, water shall be applied until the soil is moist and in a workable condition. One or more of the following methods shall be used, whichever is directed by the Engineer:

350

1. Broadcast Sprigging Sprigs shall be broadcast by hand or by suitable equipment in a uniform layer over the prepared surface with spacing between sprigs not to exceed 150 mm. The sprigs shall then be forced into the soil to a depth of 50 mm to 100 mm with a straight spade or similar tool, or with a disk harrow or other equipment set to cover the sprigs to the required depth. 2. Row Sprigging Furrows shall be opened along the approximate contour of slopes at the spacing and depth indicated on the Plans. Sprigs shall be placed without delay in continuous row in the open furrow with successive sprigs touching and shall be covered immediately. 3. Spot Sprigging Spot sprigging shall be performed as specified under row sprigging, except that, instead of planting in continuous rows, groups of four sprigs or more shall be spaced 450 mm apart in the rows. 609.3.6 Mulching and Compacting After planting or sprigs has been completed and prior to compacting, the surface shall be cleared of stones larger than 50 mm in diameter, large clods, roots and other litter brought to the surface during sprigging. If mulching of sprigged areas is shown on the Plans, the sprigged area shall be covered with mulch in accordance with the requirements of Subsection 609.2.5, Mulch Material, within 24 hours from the time sprigging has been completed, weather and soil conditions permitting. If mulching is not shown on the Plans, the sprigged area shall be compacted within 24 hours from the time sprigging has been completed, weather and soil conditions permitting, by cultipackers, rollers or other satisfactory equipment operated at right angles to the slopes. Compaction shall not be done when the soil is in such condition that it is picked up by the equipment, nor shall clay soils be compacted if so directed by the Engineer. 609.3.7 Maintenance of Sprigged Areas The Contractor shall protect sprigged areas against traffic by warning signs or barricades approved by the Engineer. Surfaces gullied or otherwise damaged following sprigging shall be repaired by regrading and resprigging as directed. The Contractor shall mow, water as directed and otherwise maintain sprigged areas in a satisfactory condition until final inspection and acceptance of the work.

351

609.4 Method of Measurement The quantity of sprigging to be paid for shall be the number of units of 100 square meters, measured on the ground surface, completed and accepted.

609.5 Basis of Payment The quantity, determined as provided in Subsection 609.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for the Pay Item listed below, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, for any required mulching of sprigged areas and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Section except topsoiling which shall be paid for as provided in Item 608, Topsoil.

Pay Item will be made under:

Pay item No.

Description

Unit of Measurement

609

Sprigging

100 Square Meter

ITEM 610 SODDING

610.1 Description This Item shall consist of furnishing and laying of live sod on the shoulders, slopes, ditches, or other locations as designated, construction of sod ditch checks or similar appurtenances, as shown on the Plans or as ordered and laid out in the field by the Engineer, all in accordance with this Specification.

610.2 Material Requirements The sod shall consist of healthy, dense, well-rooted growth of permanent and desirable grasses indigenous to the general locality where it is to be used and shall be free from weeds or undesirable grasses. At the time the sod is cut, the grass on the sod shall have a length of approximately 50 mm (if longer, the grass shall be cut to approximately this length) and the sod shall have been raked free from debris.

352

The sod shall be cut into uniform squares approximately 300 mm x 300 mm, but not larger than is convenient for handling and transporting. The thickness of the sod shall be uniform as possible approximately 40 mm or more depending on the nature of the sod, so that practically all of the dense root system of the grasses will be retained, but exposed, in the sod strip and that the sod can be handled without undue tearing or breaking. In the event the sod to be cut is in a dry condition as to cause scrumbling or breaking during cutting operations, the Contractor, at his own expense, shall apply water in sufficient quantities at least 12 hours before cutting to provide a wellmoistened condition of the sod to the depth to which it is to be cut. Sods shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

610.3 Construction Requirements 610.3.1 Preparation of the Earth Bed

The area to be sodded shall be constructed to the required cross-section and contour, and the tops and bottoms of the slopes shall be rounded as shown in the typical roadway sections. The areas to be sodded shall be free from stones, roots or other undesirable foreign materials. The soil on the area to be sodded shall be loosened and brought to a reasonably fine texture to a depth of not less than 30 mm by means of equipment on hand methods adapted for the purpose. 610.3.2 Placing the Sod The earth bed upon which the sod is to be placed shall be moistened to the loosened depth, if not naturally sufficiently moist, and the sod shall be placed thereon within 24 hours after the same has been cut. Unless otherwise required, the sod on slopes shall be laid on horizontal strips beginning at the bottom of the slope and working upwards. When placing sod in ditches, or in the construction of sod ditch checks or similar appurtenances, the length of the strips shall be laid at right angles to the direction of the flow of the water. Sod shall be laid so that the joints caused by abutting ends of sod strip are not continuous. Each sod strip shall be so laid as to abut snugly against the strip previously laid.

353

As the sod is being laid it shall be lightly tamped with suitable wooden or metal tampers sufficiently to set or press the sod into the underlying soil. At points where it is anticipated that water may flow over a sodded area, the upper edges of the sod strips shall be turned into the soil to be below the adjacent area and a layer of earth place over this juncture and thoroughly compacted. At the limits of sodded areas, the end strips shall be turned in and treated similarly. 610.3.3 Staking the Sod On all slopes steeper than one vertical to four horizontal, sod shall be pegged with stakes 200-300 mm in length, spaced as required by the nature of the soil and steepness of slope. Stakes shall be driven into the sod at right angles to the slope until flush with the bottom of the grass blades. 610.3.4 Top Dressing After staking has been completed, the surface shall be cleared of loose sod, excess soil or other foreign material, whereupon a thin layer of topsoil shall be scattered over the sod as a top dressing and the areas shall then be thoroughly moistened by sprinkling with water. 610.3.5 Watering The Contractor shall regularly water and maintain sodded areas in a satisfactory condition for the duration of the Contract and until final acceptance of the work by the Engineer.

610.4 Method of Measurement Sodding shall be measured by the square meter and the quantity to be measured for payment shall be the actual number of square meters of area on which sod has been placed in accordance with this Specification and within the limits of construction as designated on the Plans or as ordered by the Engineer.

610.5 Basis of Payment The quantity as determined in Subsection 610.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at Contract unit price per square meter for Sodding which price and payment shall be full compensation for preparing the earth bed, for furnishing, placing, staking, top dressing and watering the sod, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.

354

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item No.

Description

Unit of Measurement

610

Sodding

Square Meter

ITEM 611 TREE PLANTING

611.1

Description

This Item shall consist of furnishing and planting deciduous shade, flowering trees and evergreen trees less than 150 mm in diameter on the areas and in the arrangements indicated on the Plans or as indicated by the Engineer, including the digging and preparation of pocket holes, furnishing and placing the necessary topsoil, mulch, water, fertilizer and other incidentals necessary to complete the Item. 611.2 Material Requirements

611.2.1 Topsoil Topsoil shall conform to the requirements of Item 608, Topsoil. 611.2.2 Mulching Mulching material shall consist of approved wood chips, ground or crushed corn cobs, wood shavings, sawdust or peat moss. Wood chips shall be combination of wood slivers with ground wood or sawdust. Bracing stakes for plants shall be 50 mm x 50 mm of rough wood free from unsound loose knots, rot, cross grain and sapwood or other defects that may impair its strength. Anchor stakes shall be of the same quality as bracing stakes and of the size specified under operations calling for their use. Wrapping material for trees shall be waterproof paper or burlap. The tying material to be used in wrapping trees shall be jute twine or similar material not less than 2-ply for trees 7.5 mm or less in diameter and 3-ply for trees over 7.5 mm in diameter.

355

The wire to be used in bracing trees 7.5 mm or less in diameter shall be 3 mm (No. 11) galvanized steel wire and for trees over 75 mm in diameter, 40 mm (No. 9) galvanized steel wire shall be used. All wires shall be new and free from bends or kinks. 611.2.3 Trees All trees furnished under this Item shall be 150 mm or less in diameter and shall be true to name and type and shall follow standard names of trees in accordance with the Bureau of Forestry Standards as adopted by the Department of Public Works and Highways. When specified in the Provisions, certain varieties of plants will be furnished by the government. The Contractor shall submit complete and detailed information concerning the sources of supply for each item of plant materials before planting operations. All existing laws and regulations requiring inspection for plant diseases and infections shall be complied with and each delivery shall be accompanied by necessary certificates of clearance to be presented to the Engineer. Plants furnished by the Contractor shall be healthy, shapely and well-rooted and roots shall show no evidence of having been restricted or deformed at any time. Plants shall be well-grown and free from insect pest and disease. Root condition of plants furnished by the Contractor in containers will be determined by the removal of earth from the roots of not less than two plants nor more than two (2) percent of total number of plants of each specie or variety except when container-grown plants are from several sources, the roots of not less than two plants of each specie or variety from each source will be inspected by the Engineer. In case the sample plants inspected are found to be defective, the Government reserves the right to reject the entire lot or lots of plants represented by the defective samples. Any plant rendered unsuitable for planting because of this inspection will be considered as samples and will not be paid for.

611.3 Construction Methods 611.3.1 Balling of Plants and Trees Balling is employed in plants and trees to be transplanted or transferred. To ball out the trees, the depth to which the root system reaches is first determined. Digging around the tree is then done, being careful not to cut many roots. Watering the soil before balling is prohibited. The surface of the earth is kept as smooth as possible. After the tree is dug out, the roots and earth is wrapped immediately with the sacking material. The tree could now be tipped over and rolled to a new

356

location. These plants shall be hauled by the ball only and not by the plant itself. The slightest indication of manufactured earth balls or hauling of the plants itself will be a cause for rejection of such plants. 611.3.2 Digging Plants All plants, nursery-grown or collected, shall be dug with care and skill immediately before shipping and avoiding all possible injury to the plants, loss or damage of the roots, particular attention being given to fibrous roots in this respect. After the plants are dug, their roots shall not be permitted to dry out. They shall not be exposed to hot temperatures. All plants shall be dug in dormant state and shall be so held until planted. 611.3.3 Temporary Storage and Plant Spray After delivery and inspection, the plants shall be sprayed with an approved anti-desiccant prior to planting, heeling-in or storing, except in the case of collected stock which shall not be heeled-in or stored, but shall be sprayed with anti-desiccant immediately and planted within 36 hours after digging. The spray shall cover both upper and lower surfaces of the branches and foilage to the point of run-off. Spray nozzles shall be the type to produce a fine mist. Spraying shall be included for payment in the pertinent planting item. Following spray treatment with anti-desiccant, all plants which cannot be planted promptly shall be heeled-in in a trench, spread and the roots covered with moist soil. If plants are not to be stored for a period longer than 10 days, they may be placed in an approved well-ventilated, cool and moist storage shed and the roots completely covered with moist straw. All plants heeled-in or stored shall be properly maintained by the Contractor until planted. In the event heeled-in plant material must be held over for a longer period, such heeled-in material shall be lifted and replanted in a satisfactory manner in nursery rows. The ball of soil and roots of balled and burlapped plants, if not immediately planted after delivery and inspection, shall be adequately protected by topsoil covering until removed for planting in a manner appropriate to the conditions and satisfactory to the Engineer. Such emergency storage of plant shall be at the entire risk of the Contractor, including maintenance of same.

357

611.3.4 Layout of Planting Before digging pocket holes or beds, the Contractor shall lay out, by suitable staking, the location of all pocket holes and beds. The layout of planting shall be approved by the Engineer. 611.3.5 Roots and Top Pruning The ends of all broken and damaged roots, 6 mm diameter or larger, shall be pruned with a clean cut removing no more than the injured portion. All plants shall be pruned to balance the top with the root system keeping the natural shape of the species. All dead woods shall be removed. All cuts and wounds, 12 mm or over in diameter, shall be painted with tree wound dressing immediately after the pruning. 611.3.6 Pocket Holes Pocket holes shall be dug at the locations shown on the Plans or as directed by Engineer. The holes shall be dug to the depth and cross-section specified and should be of sufficient size to provide for not less than 150 mm of top soil backfill beneath and around the root system. The holes shall be dug with the sides vertical. Surplus excavation from the bed and pocket holes shall be disposed off as directed by the Engineer. 611.3.7 Backfill The pocket holes shall be backfilled with topsoil as each plant is set. The topsoil shall be well-tamped by the workers feet, rods or other approved tamping devices as it is shovelled into the holes. The backfill in holes on slopes shall be built-up on the lower side to catch and hold water. During planting the topsoil surrounding the plant be slightly depressed to hold water. 611.3.8 Planting The plants to be planted shall be the specie, variety and size specified. The operation of the actual planting shall not be performed at any time when the soil is not in a friable or workable condition. The Engineer shall also approve the location of each individual plant taking into consideration its size and shape, in order that the best possible arrangement will result. One plant shall be planted in the center of each pocket hole and in the arrangement shown on the Plans. The plants shall be set on tamped topsoil backfill brought to the height necessary to plant them at the same depth they grew, carefully spreading out the roots of barefoot stock in their natural position. Upright plants shall be kept in a vertical position. After placing the plant in the hole, the backfill shall be carefully made, tamping with the workers feet and with round-end rods or other approved tamping devices to insure topsoil in and about all the roots. The

358

topsoil shall be settled in and about the plant roots by application of water but at no time shall tamping or further topsoil backfill be made while this wet topsoil backfill is of a consistency that would permit its being compacted or puddled by so doing. All compaction shall be such that no plant will settle lower than the depth above specified. No air pocket shall be left around the root of any plants. After filling halfway on the earth ball, the burlap shall be loosened and the top half cut off and removed after which the balance of the pocket hole shall be backfilled and tamped. After planting and prior to mulching, fertilizers shall be applied evenly over the top of the backfilled area. Care shall be used so that the fertilizer does not get into contact with the stem, trunk, branches or leaves of the plants. 611.3.8.1 Tree Planting along National Road The trees to be used for this purpose shall be the varieties the root systems of which grow downward rather than sideward to avoid situations where the roots spread sideward and consequently destroy the road and sidewalk slabs. Trees shall be planted in a neat row, within the road right-of-way (ROW) and as close as possible to the ROW limit, with sufficient allowance so that the trees when fully grown will not encroach on the adjoining property or touch electric and other overhead utility lines. The center-to-center spacing between trees shall be 1020 metres (m). For road sections with a generally north-south alignment, the trees on one side of the road shall be staggered vis--vis the trees on the other side of the road. This arrangement will help to ensure that enough sunlight will fall on the road and thus help to keep the road dry even during the rainy season. For roads without curbs, the trees shall be planted with a minimum clear distance of 0.60 m beyond the edge of the shoulder, but in no case less than 3.0 m from the edge of the pavement. For roads with curbs, particularly in urban areas, the trees shall be planted with a minimum setback of 1.00 m beyond the face of the curb. Where there are longitudinal drainage canals, the trees shall be planted on the outer side of such canals. On the roadway curves and intersections, the pertinent design standards on sight distance shall be observed. Non-traversable hazards (ravine, waiting shed, etc.) along the line of trees shall be provided with appropriate barriers, e.g., guardrails, and clearly marked, so that these do not pose hazards to motorists. The Contractor concerned shall undertake and be responsible for the maintenance of the planted trees during the contract warranty period of the road project covered by his contract. The contractors maintenance work shall comply

359

with the provision of subsection 611.3.10 (Watching and Maintenance). The maintenance of trees shall be faithfully undertaken as an integral part of the regular road maintenance program and shall be included in the reports therefore as a regular work item under Activity No. 209 of the Highway Maintenance Activity Standards. The tree planting shall be undertaken not only along national roads programmed for construction or improvement, but also along existing national roads especially those outside developed urban areas where there are no trees or only a few trees have been planted. For such existing roads, the required tree planting shall be undertaken by the District Engineering Office concerned. The tree planting shall be undertaken in both contractual projects and projects by administration. 611.3.9 Mulching Within 24 hours after planting, mulching material shall be spread to cover the plant hole and the area 150 mm outside the periphery of the plant hole. The depth and application for wood chips shall be a minimum of 150 mm. For ground or crushed corn cobs, sawdust or peat moss the minimum depth shall be 100 mm. 611.3.10 Watering and Maintenance All plants shall be watered during the planting operations, subject to direction and approval of the Engineer. From time to time during the life of the Contract, sufficient water shall be applied so that not only will the topsoil backfill about each plant be kept moist, but also for moisture to extend into the surrounding soil. The Contractor shall, during the life of the Contract, properly care for all plants furnished, planted or stored, performing such watering, weeding, cultivating or other ordinary maintenance work as shall be necessary to keep the stock in a live and healthy condition. Plants which have died back into the crown or beyond a normal pruning line shall be replaced by the Contract at no additional expense to the Government. 611.3.11 Bracing All deciduous and evergreen trees shall be braced immediately after planting. Deciduous trees from 1.20 m to 1.80 m in height shall have one vertical support stake. Deciduous trees from 1.80 m to 2.50 m in height shall have two vertical support stakes. Balled and burlapped deciduous or evergreen trees within the above size ranges shall be supported with the number of stakes specified for the group but instead of being placed vertically, shall be driven so that the stake does not enter or contact the earth ball around the plant roots. The stake or stakes shall be so placed that after being driven in place, the upper foot of the stake is within approximately

360

100 mm of the trunk at one-half of the height of the tree. If two are required, they shall be driven on opposite sides of the tree with the stake tops on opposite sides for fastening. All trees, deciduous or evergreen over two and one-half meters shall be braced by the tripod method as directed by the Engineer. 611.3.12 Dead Trees Before completion and final acceptance of the project, all trees not healthy or that have died back into the crown or beyond the normal pruning line shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense with trees of the specified species or variety, size and quality and meeting the Specification.

611.4 Method of Measurement The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of trees of each specie or variety called for in the Plans furnished, planted and accepted with the necessary mulch, topsoil, water, fertilizer and other incidentals to complete the Item.

611.5 Basis of Payment The quantities as determined in Subsection 611.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price each of the trees of each specie or variety furnished, planted and accepted which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all labor, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under:

Pay Item No.

Description

Unit of Measurement

611 (1)

Trees (Furnishing and Transpplanting) Trees (Transplanting)

Each Each

611 (2)

361

ITEM 612 REFLECTIVE THERMOPLASTIC STRIPPING MATERIALS ( SOLID FORM)

612.1

Description

This standard specifies the requirement for reflectorized thermoplastic pavement striping material conforming to AASHTO M 249 that is applied to the road surface in a molten state by mechanical means with surface application of glass beads at a rate of not less than 350 g/L of glass beads having a size range of dropin type and will produce an adherent reflectorized stripe of specified thickness and width capable of resisting deformation by traffic.

612.2

Materials Requirements

1. Reflectorized Thermoplastic Pavement Material shall be homogeneously composed of pigment, filler, resins and glass reflectorizing spheres. The thermoplastic material shall be available to both white and yellow. 2. Glass Beads (Pre-Mix) shall be uncoated and shall comply with the following requirements: Refractive Index, min. - 1.50 Spheres, Percent, min. - 90 Gradation: Sieve mm 0.850 0.600 0.425 0.300 0.180 0.150 Mass Percent Passing 100 75-95 15-35 0-5

612.3 General Requirements 612.3.1 Composition The pigment, beads and filler shall be uniformly dispersed in the resin. The material shall be free from all skins, dirt and foreign objects and shall comply with the requirements as specified in Table 612.1.

362

Table 612.1 Composition Requirements Component Binder, min. Glass Beads: min. max. Titanium Dioxide, min. Chrome Yellow, Medium, min. Calcium Carbonate And Inert Fillers, Max. 612.3.2 Qualitative The material shall conform to the qualitative requirements as specified in Table 612.2. Table 612.2 Qualitative Requirements Property Specific Gravity, max. Drying Time, minutes, max. Bond Strength to Portland Cement Concrete after heating for four (4) hours 5 min. @ 218oC, MPa, max. Cracking Resistance @ low temp. after heating for four (4) hours 5 min. @ 218 2oC. Impact Resistance after heating for four (4) hours 5 min. @ 218 2oC and forming test specimens, mm/kg, min. Softening Point after heating for four (4) hours 5 min. @ 218 2oC. Daylight reflectant @ 45 Degrees 0 degrees, % min. Requirements White Yellow 2.15 10.0 White 18.0 30 40 10.0 10.0 Yellow 18.0 30 40

42.0

42.0

1.24

No cracks

115 102.5 9.5oC 75 45

363

612.4 Application Properties The material shall readily extrude at a temperature of 211 7oC, from approved equipment to produce a line 3.2 to 4.8 mm thick which shall be continuous and uniform in shape having clear and sharp dimensions. The material shall not exude fumes which are toxic, obnoxious or injurious to persons or property when heated during applications. The application of additional glass beads by drop-in methods shall be at a rate of not less than 350 g/L of glass beads having a size range for drop-in type. The typical size range of spheres of drop-in type paints is as follows. Passing 850 um (#20) sieve and retained on 250 um (#60) sieve, % 80 100

a) Preparation of Road Surface the materials should be applied only on the surface which is clean and dry. It shall not be laid into loose detritus, mud or similar extraneous matter, or over an old paint markings, or over an old thermoplastic marking which is faulty. In the case of smooth, polished surface stones such as smooth concrete, old asphalt surfacing with smooth polished surface stones and/or where the method of application of the manufacturer of the thermoplastic materials shall be recommended, and with the approval of the Engineer. b) Preparation of Thermoplastic Materials The materials shall be melted in accordance with the manufacturers instruction in a heater fitted with a mechanical stirrer to give a smooth consistency to the thermoplastic and such the local overheating shall be avoided. The temperature of the mass shall be within the range specified by the manufacturer and shall on no account be allowed to exceed the maximum temperature stated by the manufacturer. The molten material shall be used as expeditiously as possible and for thermoplastics which have natural resin binders or otherwise sensitive to prolong heating the materials shall not be maintained in a molden condition for more than 4 hours. c) Laying Center lines, lane lines and edges lines shall be applied by approved mechanical means and shall be laid in regular alignment. Other markings may be applied by hand screed, hand propelled machine or by self-propelled machine approved or directed by the Engineer. After transfer to the laying apparatus the materials shall be maintained within the temperature range specified by the manufacturer and stirred to maintain the right consistency for laying. In the case of screen application, the material shall be laid to a thickness of not less than 3 mm or more than 6 mm unless authorized by the Engineer when laid over an existing markings. In the case of sprayed application the material shall

364

be laid to thickness of not less than 1.5 mm unless authorized by the Engineer. In all cases the surface produced shall be uniform and appreciably free from bubbles and steaks. Where the Contractor Documents require or the Engineer direct that ballotini shall be applied to the surface of the markings, these shall be applied uniformly to the surface of hot thermoplastic immediately after laying such that the quality of ballotini firmly embedded and retained in the surface after completion complies with the requirements of Sub-section 606.2.2, Material Requirements. Road markings of a repetitive nature, other center lines, lane lines, etc., shall unless otherwise directed by the Engineer be set out with stencils which comply with the size and spacing requirements shown on the Plans. d) Re-use of Thermoplastic Materials At the end of days as much as possible the material remaining in the heater and/or laying apparatus shall be removed. This may be broken and used again provided that the maximum heating temperature has not been exceeded and that the total time during which it is a molden condition does not exceed the requirements of Sub-section 606.2.3, Construction Requirements. 612.4.1 Defective Materials or Workmanship Materials which are defective or have been applied in an unsatisfactory manner or to incorrect dimensions or in a wrong location shall be removed, the road pavement shall be made good and materials replaced, reconstructed and/or properly located, all at the Contractors expenses and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 612.4.2 Protection of the Traffic The Contractor shall protect pedestrians, vehicles and other traffic adjacent to the working area against damage or disfigurement by construction equipment, tools and materials or by spatters, splashes and smirches or paint or other construction materials and during the course of the work, provide and maintain adequate signs and signals for the warning and guidance of traffic. 612.5 Sampling A minimum weight of 10 kg. of Reflectorized Thermoplastic paint shall be taken for every 100 bags or fraction thereof. 612.6 Testing The material shall be tested in accordance with AASHTO T 250 or with the appropriate method in ASTM designation.

365

612.7 Packing and Marking The material shall be packaged in a suitable containers to which it will not adhere during shipment and storage. The blocks of cast thermoplastic material shall be approximately 300 x 915 by 51 mm and shall weigh approximately 23 kg. Each container label shall designate the color, manufacturers name, batch number and date of manufacture. Each batch manufactured shall have its own separate number. The label shall warn the user that the material shall be heated to 211 7oC during application.

612.8 Method of Measurement The quantity of pavement markings to be paid for shall be the area as shown on the Plans of painted traffic line of the stated width and the area as shown on the plans of symbols, lettering, hatching and the like, completed and accepted. The quantity shown in the Bill of Quantities represents the approximate quantity in square meter of pavement markings, with width as shown applied at the centerline of the road pavements to which may be increased or decreased depending on the Engineers decision whether to require additional markings or delete parts of it. Other markings representing symbols, lettering, hatching and others in locations where they maybe required by the Engineer shall, likewise, be implemented by the Contractor using reflectorized thermoplastic pavement markings as approved and directed.

612.9 Basis of Payment The quantities measured as determined in Subsection 612.8, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the appropriate contract unit price for the Pay Items shown in the Bid Schedule which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, sampling and packing, for the preparation of the surface, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number 612(1) 612(2)

Description Reflectorized Thermoplastic Pavement Markings (White) Reflectorized Thermoplastic Pavement Markings (Yellow)

Unit of Measurement Square Meter Square Meter

366

367

PART I MATERIALS DETAILS ITEM 700 HYDRAULIC CEMENT 700.1 Portland Cement and Masonry Cement Cement shall conform to the requirements of the following cited Specifications for the type specified or permitted. Type Portland Cement Blended Hydraulic Cements Masonry Cement Specifications AASHTO M 85 (ASTM C 150) AASHTO M 240 (ASTM C 595) AASHTO M 150-74 (ASTM C 91)

When Types IV and V (AASHTO M 85), P and PA (AASHTO M 150) cements are used, proper recognition shall be given to the effects of slower strength gain on concrete proportioning and construction practices. Types S and SA cements will be permitted only when blended with Portland Cement in proportions approved by the Engineer. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the product of only one mill of any one brand and type of Portland Cement shall be used on the project. The Contractor shall provide suitable means of storing and protecting the cement against dampness. Cement which, for any reason, has become partially set or which contains lumps of caked cement will be rejected. Cement salvaged from discarded or used bags shall not be used.

ITEM 701 CONSTRUCTION LIME (HYDRATED)

701.1 General Hydrated lime shall conform to the requirements of PHILSA I-1-68 or ASTM C 207-76 and shall be of the following type : Type N Type S Type NA Type SA Normal hydrated lime for masonry purposes. Special hydrated lime for masonry purposes. Normal air-entraining hydrated lime for masonry purposes. Special air-entraining hydrated lime for masonry purposes.

Type N and S are suitable for use in mortar, in scratch and brown coats of cement plaster, for stucco and for addition to Portland Cement concrete.

367

Type NA and SA are air-entrained hydrated limes that are suitable for use in any of the above uses where air-entrainment are desired. Type S and SA hydrated lime develop high, early plasticity and higher water retentivity and by a limitation on their unhydrated oxide content. It is the intent of this Specification to use either the Type N or S for soil stabilization and as filler requirement to bituminous plant mixtures. It is expected to provide pavements with greater resistance to the detrimental effects of water, especially flooding during the rainy season.

701.2 Chemical Requirements Hydrated lime for construction purposes shall conform to the following standard chemical requirements. Percentage Calcium and Magnesium oxides (Non-volatile basis), min. % Carbon dioxide (as received basis), max. % If sample is taken at the place of manufacture If sample is taken at any other place Unhydrated oxides (as received basis) for Type S and SA, max. %

60 5 7 8

701.3 Physical Requirements Hydrated lime for construction purposes shall conform to the following standard physical requirements: a. Percentage Residue The residue retained on a 0.600 mm (No. 30) sieve shall not be more than 0.57% and not more than 15% on a 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve. b. Plasticity The putty made from Type S, special hydrate, or type SA, special airentraining hydrate, shall have plasticity figure of not less than 200 when tested within 30 minutes after mixing with water. c. Water Retention Hydrated lime mortar made with Type N (normal hydrated lime) or Type NA (normal air-entraining lime), after suction for 60 seconds, shall have a water retention value of not less than 75 percent and not less than 85% for Type S and SA, when tested in a standard mortar made form the dry

hydrate or from putty made from the hydrate which has been soaked for a period of 16 to 24 hours.

701.4 Grading Requirement Hydrated lime for construction purposes shall conform to the following grading requirements: Sieve Designation Standard mm Alternate US Standard 0.850 (No. 20) 0.075 (No. 200) Mass Percent Passing 100 85 100

701.5 Sampling Samples of construction lime shall be taken at the place of manufacture or at the destination as agreed upon by the parties concerned. If the samples are taken elsewhere than at the place of manufacture, such samples shall be taken within 24 hours of the receipt of the material. Sampling shall be conducted as expeditiously as possible to avoid undue exposure of the material to the air. Samples shall not be taken from broken packages. At least one percent of the package shall be sampled but in no case shall less than five packages be sampled. Individual packages shall be taken from various parts of the unit being sampled. Each package so taken shall be opened and not less than 0.5 kg shall be taken by means of a sampling tube that takes a core of the material of not less than 2.5 cm in diameter and that is of sufficient length to permit the taking of the sample from the top to the bottom of the mass being sampled. The material removed shall be thoroughly mixed and quartered. Triplicate samples of not less than 2.5 kg each shall be taken and sealed in properly labelled, air-tight, moisture proof containers. 701.5.1 Sample for Chemical Analysis

The sample as received at the laboratory shall be thoroughly mixed, quartered, and a representative sample taken and crushed to pass a 0.150 mm (No. 100) sieve for analysis. The remaining uncrushed portion shall be resealed for further possible tests.

701.6 Rejection Materials failing to meet the specification requirements shall be reported to the manufacturer within one (1) week after tests have been completed and the cause for rejection shall be stated.

701.7 Packing Lime and limestone products may be shipped in bulk or in containers agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser. The most common units for hydrated lime are paper bags holding 23 kg (50 lbs.), 11.5 kg (25 lbs.), 4.5 kg (10 lbs.) or 2.3 kg (5 lbs.).

ITEM 702 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

702.1 Asphalt Cements Asphalt cement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 226.

702.2 Liquid Asphalts Liquid asphalt specifications: shall conform to the requirements of the following

Rapid Curing Liquid Asphalts Medium Curing Liquid Asphalts

AASHTO M 81 AASHTO M 82

702.3 Emulsified Asphalts Emulsified asphalts shall conform to the requirements of the following specifications: Emulsified Asphalt (Anionic) Emulsified Asphalt (Cationic) AASHTO M 140 (ASTM D 977) AASHTO M 208

702.4 Acceptance Procedures for Bituminous Materials 702.4.1 General

Bituminous materials will be accepted at the source of shipment subject to the following conditions: a. The supplier shall conduct laboratory tests of all materials intended for shipment to the Government and certify that the materials meet the Contract Specifications. b. Before loading, the producer shall examine the shipping container, remove all remnants of previous cargoes which night contaminate the material to

be loaded and certify that it was clean and free of contaminating material and loaded. c. The Contractor shall furnish with each shipment two copies of the delivery ticket. The delivery tickets shall contain the following information: Consignees Project Grade Net Liters Destination Date Loading Specific Gravity At 15.50C (600F)

Number

Temp.

Net Weight Identification No. (Truck, Car, Tank, etc.) d. The Contractor or the supplier as his agent, shall deliver to the Engineer or his representative a certification signed by an authorized representative of the supplier to cover the quality and quantity of material and the condition of container for each shipment. The certification shall be essentially in the following form and may be stamped, written or printed on the delivery tickets.

This is to certify that this shipment of (tonnes/litres) or of asphalt meets all Contract Specification requirements of the DPWH, and the shipping container was clean and free from contaminating material when loaded. Producer Signed Failure to sign the certification will be a cause to withhold use of the material until it can be sampled, tested and approved. 702.4.2 Quality Control Reviews

Quality control reviews will be conducted by the Government, or an authorized representative at the point of production, at frequencies prescribed by the DPWH, to determine the reliability of the producers certifications. If this review indicates that the certifications are not reliable, the acceptance of bituminous materials by certification will be discontinued and the contents of each shipping container will be sampled at point of delivery, tested and accepted prior to incorporation into the work. This procedure will be followed until the engineering determination is made that the suppliers quality control and testing procedures are such that material meeting Contract Specifications is being consistently produced. 702.4.3 Alternate Acceptance Procedures for Asphalt Materials

Where required by the Special Provisions, the following alternate acceptance plan for asphalt material will apply in lieu of (a) and (b) above. The Contractor shall provide deliver tickets and certifications as set out in (a), above.

Acceptance samples of bituminous materials shall be obtained in accordance with AASHTO T 40, Sampling Bituminous Materials, at the applicable point of acceptance as defined herein: a. Bituminous materials used in direct application on the road. Acceptance samples shall be obtained under the supervision of the Engineer from the conveyances containing the bituminous material at the point of delivery. Single samples shall be taken of each separate tank load of bituminous material delivered, at the time of discharge, into distributors or other conveyances on the project. b. Bituminous materials initially discharged into storage tanks on the project. Acceptance samples shall be obtained from the line between the storage tank and the distributor of the bituminous mixing plant after each delivery. A single acceptance sample shall be taken after sufficient period of circulation of such bituminous material has taken place to insure samples representative of the total materials then in the storage tank. As soon after sampling as practicable, the acceptance sample shall be delivered by the Engineer to the nearest authorized laboratory for tests to determine compliance. 702.4.4 Requirements for Bituminous Materials containing Anti-stripping Additives

a. All the foregoing requirements of Item 702 shall apply for the type of bituminous material involved. b. Additionally, the Contractor or the supplier as his agent, shall furnish the Engineer or his representative along with and the time of delivery of the initial shipment of fortified bituminous material to the project, and thereafter with the subsequent shipments when ordered by the Engineer, 1 litre (1 quart) sealed sample of the bituminous material taken at the time of loading at the refinery and prior to introduction of the additive, along with a separate 0.5 litre (1 pint) sample of the anti-stripping additive involved.

702.5 Application Temperatures Bituminous materials for the several application indicated in the Specifications shall be applied within the temperature ranges indicated in Table 702.1. Table 702.1 Application Temperatures Type and Grade Of Material RT 1-2-2 RT 4-5-6 RT 7-8-9 Application Spray (Min./Max.) 15.5 54 29 65.5 65.5 107 Temperature Range (0C) Mix (Min./Max.) 15.5 54 29 65.5 65.5 107

RT 10-11-12 RTCB 5-6 . . . . 30 MC . . . . . . . . . 30 RC-MC . . . . . . 70 RC-MC . . . . . . 250 RC-MC . . . . . . 800 RC-MC . . . . . . 3000 All Emulsions Asphalt Cement (All Grades)

79 121 15.5 48.9 21 62.8 40.5 85 60 107 79 129 106.7 143 10 71 204 Max.

79 121 15.5 48.9 15.5 40.5 32 68 51.7 93 71 107 93 126.7 10 71 As required to achieve viscosity of 75 150 seconds to achieve a Kinematic Viscosity of 2 150-300 mm /s (150300) centi-stokes

Table 702.1 shall apply unless temperatures ranges applicable to specific lots of material delivered to the job are supplied by the producer. 702.6 Material for Dampproofing and Waterproofing Concrete and Masonry Surfaces Material shall conform to the requirements of the following specifications: a. b. Primer for use with asphalt Primer for use with tar Or It may be a liquid water-gas tar conforming to the following requirements: Specific gravity, 250/250C Specific viscosity at 400C (Engler), not more than 0 Total distillate, mass percent 300 , not more than Bitumen (soluble in carbon disulphide), not less than Water not more than c. Tar for mop or seal coats: Coal tar pitch (heated to free flowing but not to exceed 1490C (3000F) 1.030 1.100 3.0 50.0 98.0 percent 2.0 percent AASHTO M 116 AASHTO M 121 (ASTM D 43)

ASSHTO M 118, Type B (ASTM D 450)

Or Tar applied at about 270C (800F) AASHTO M 52, RTCB 5 or 6

Rubberized tar (heated to free flowing but not to exceed 1210C (2500F) d. e. Asphalt for mop coat Waterproofing fabric

ASTM D 2993 AASHTO M 115 ASSHTO M 117 (ASTM D 1668)

Fabric shall be waterproofed with tar or asphalt in agreement with the material specified for prime and mop coats. f. Mortar materials shall conform to Section 705.5 except that the mortar shall be uniformly mixed to spreading consistency in the proportion of 1 part Portland Cement to 3 parts fine aggregate. Asphalt plank AASHTO M 46 (ASTM D 517)

g.

Unless otherwise shown on the plans, planks shall be 30 mm thick and may be from 150 to 300 mm in width but all pieces for one structure shall be of the same width except such closers as may be necessary. The lengths shall be such as to permit the laying of the planks to the best advantage on the surface to be covered but shall not be less than 0.9 nor more than 2.5 m. h. Asphalt roll roofing ASTM D 224, 65 pound grade

702.7 Membrane Material for Waterproofing Bridge Decks Bridge deck waterproofing membrane shall be mesh-reinforced self-sealing rubberized asphalt preformed membrane and shall have the following properties: Thickness PermeancePerms Kg/Pa.s.m2 (grains/sq.ft./hr./in.Hg) Tensile strength 1.65 mm (655 mils) 57.213 x 10-11 (0.10)

ASTM E 96 Method B ASTM D 882 modified for 25.4 mm (1 inch) opening ASTM E 154

344.5 kPa (50 lb/in)

Puncture resistance (mesh) Pliability 6.35 mm (1/4) mandrel 1800 bend at 8.30C (-150F)

90.8 kg (200 lb)

No cracks in rubberized asphalt

ASTM D 146

Primer and mastic shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be compatible with the membrane.

702.8 Tars Tars shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 52.

702.9 Dust Oils Dust oils and clarified dust oil shall conform to the following requirements: General Requirements Flash Point, 0C (Open tag.), min. Viscosity at 380C (1000F) Kinematic, CS Water, % maximum Asphaltenes % Saturates % minimum ASTM METHOD D 1310 D 2170 Dust Oil Medium 51.6 90-135 Clarified Dust Oil 93.3 20-100

Light 51.6 40-70

Heavy 51.6 145-200

D 95 *D2006 *D2006

2.0 3.0-6.0 25

2.0 4.0-7.0 25

2.0 5.0-8.0 25

2.0 0-5.0 10

Distillation **D402 35 30 30 Total Distillate to 0 288 C (550 F), Max. % Test on residue from Distillation to 2880C (5500F) D 2170 75-250 200-630 540-1500 Viscosity at 100oT, Kinematic, CS Solubility in ***2042 97.0 97.0 97.0 Trichloroethylene, % Min. *

20-150

97.0

As modified in procedure as Test Method for Determination of Asphaltene and Saturate Content of Dust Oils by Materials Testing Laboratory, Region I, USDA Forest Service, Missoula, MT dated November 1970. Copies of the procedure are available from the Regional Materials Engineer, Region I, USDA Forest Service, Missoula, MT 598011. Except that the residue remaining after a temperature of 2880C (instead of 3600C) shall be used for further testing. As modified in procedure identified as Standard Method of Test for Distillation of Forest Service Dust Oil dated July 1972. Copies of the procedure are available from the Regional Materials Engineer, Region I USDA Forest Service, Missoula, MT, 59801. Trichloroethylene shall be used as a solvent instead of carbon disulphide.

**

***

ITEM 703 AGGREGATES

703.1 Fine Aggregate for Concrete and Incidentals 703.1.1 Concrete

Fine Aggregate for concrete shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 6, with no deleterious substances in excess of the following percentages: Clay lumps 3.0 Coal and lignite 1.0 Material passing 0.075 mm sieve 4.0 Other substances as shown in the Special Provisions Lightweight aggregate, if required or permitted by the Special Provisions, shall meet the pertinent requirements of AASHTO M 195. 703.1.2 Granular backfill filter material for underdrains and filler for paved waterways shall be permeable and shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 6, except that soundness tests will not be required and minor variations in grading and content of deleterious substances may be approved by the Engineer. 703.1.3 Aggregate for minor concrete structures shall be clean, durable, uniformly graded sand and gravel, crushed slag or crushed stone, 100 percent of which will pass a 37.5 mm (1-1/2 inches) sieve and containing not more than 5 percent passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve.

703.2 Coarse Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete Coarse aggregate for concrete shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 80. Lightweight aggregate, if required or permitted by the Special Provisions, shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 195, for the grading specified.

703.3 Aggregate for Portland Cement Treated and Stabilized Base Course The crushed and uncrushed granular material shall consist of hard durable stones and rocks of accepted quality, free from an excess of flat, elongated, soft or disintegrated pieces or other objectionable matter. The method used in obtaining the aggregate shall be such that the finished product shall be as consistent as practical. All materials passing the 4.75 mm (No. 4) mesh produced in the crushing operation of either the stone or gravel shall be incorporated in the base material to the extent permitted by the gradation requirements. The plasticity index shall not be less 4 nor more than 10.

703.4 Aggregate for Untreated Subbase, Base or Surface Courses Aggregate shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of crushed stone, crushed slag or crushed or natural gravel. Materials that break up when alternately wetted and dried shall not be used. Coarse aggregate is the material retained on the 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve and shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 50 for subbase and not more than 45 for Base and Surface Courses as determine by AASHTO Method T 96. Fine aggregate is the material passing the 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve and shall consist of natural or crushed sand and fine mineral particles. The fraction passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve shall not be greater than 0.66 (two-thirds) of the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve. For base courses, the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a liquid limit not greater than 25 and a plasticity index not greater than 6, while for subbase course, the liquid limit shall not be greater than 35 plasticity index not greater than 12. For surface courses, the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a liquid limit not greater than 35 and a plasticity index not less than 4 or greater than 9. All materials shall be free from vegetable matter and lumps or balls of clay. When crushed aggregate is specified, not less than 50 mass percent of the particles retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall have at least one fractured face. Gradation of each designated size of aggregate shall be obtained by crushing, screening and blending processes as may be necessary. Materials otherwise meeting the requirements of this Section will be acceptable whenever such materials produce a compacted course meeting applicable density requirements as specified in Subsections 200.3.3, 201.3.3, 202.3.3 and 203.3.6.

703.5 Aggregate for Bituminous Concrete 703.5.1 Coarse Aggregate

Coarse aggregate retained on the 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve shall be crushed stone, crushed slag or crushed or natural gravel and unless otherwise stipulated, shall conform to the quality requirements of AASHTO M 79 74. When crushed gravel is used, it shall meet the pertinent requirements of Section 2.1 and 3.1 of AASHTO M 62 74 and not less than 50 mass percent of the particles retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall have at least one fractured face. The coarse aggregate shall be of such gradation that when combined with other required aggregate fractions in proper proportion, the resultant mixture will

meet the gradation required under the composition of mixture for the specific type under contract. Only one kind shall be used on the project except by permission of the Engineer. 703.5.2 Fine Aggregate

Fine aggregate passing the 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve shall consist of natural sand, stone, stone screenings or slag screenings or a combination thereof and unless otherwise stipulated shall conform to the quality requirements of AASHTO M 29 (ASTM D 1073). Fine aggregate shall be of such gradation that when combined with other required aggregate fractions in proper proportion, the resultant mixture will meet the gradation required under the composition of mixture for the specific type under contract. 703.5.3 Open-Graded Asphalt Concrete Friction Course

Aggregate shall conform to Subsections 703.5.1 and 703.5.2 above and the following requirements. Relatively pure carbonate aggregates or any aggregates known to polish shall not be used for the coarse aggregate fraction (material retained on the 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve. In addition, the coarse aggregate fraction shall have at least 75 mass percent of weight of particles with at least two fractured faces and 90 mass percent with one or more fractured faces, except that lightweight aggregates need not meet this requirement. The abrasion loss (AASHTO T 96) shall not exceed 40 mass percent. 703.5.4 Lightweight Aggregate (except slag)

Lightweight aggregate (except slag), if required or permitted by a Special Provisions, shall be manufactured by the rotary kiln process. The material shall consist of angular-fragments uniform in density and reasonably free from flat, elongated or other deleterious substances. The material shall show an abrasion loss of less than 45 mass percent when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 96. The dry mass per cubic metre shall not exceed 1080 kg (67 pcf). After testing through five cycles of the magnesium sulfate soundness test, the loss shall not exceed ten (10) mass percent.

703.6

Aggregate for Bituminous Plant Mix Surfacing

Aggregate shall be uniformly graded from coarse to fine. Target values for the intermediate sieve sizes shall be established within the limits shown in Table 703.1. The Contractor shall submit the proposed target values in writing to the Engineer for approval. The target gradation is subject to confirmation testing in accordance with Section 307.2 before approval by the Engineer. Any changes in the target gradation are subject to confirmation testing in accordance with Section 307.2, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer. No target gradation adjustment will be permitted during the span of a lot.

Table 703.1 Range of Gradation Target Values Sieve Designation, mm 25 (1 inch) 19 (3/4 inch) 4.75 (No. 4) 2.36 (No. 8) 0.075 (No. 200) Mass percent passing square mesh sieves, AASHTO T 11 and T 27, exclusive of mineral filler Range 100 100 50 60 38 48 37 The minimum for Sand Equivalent is 35

No intermediate sizes of aggregate shall be removed for other purposes without written consent of the Engineer. If crushed gravel is used, not less than 50 mass percent of the material retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall be particles having at least one fractured face. That portion of the composite material passing a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall have a sand equivalent of not less than 35, as determined by AASHTO T 176, Alternate Method No. 2. The aggregate shall show a durability index not less than 35 (coarse and fine) as determined by AASHTO T 210. The material shall be free of clay balls and adherent films of clay or other matter that would prevent thorough coating with the bituminous material.

703.7 Aggregate for Hot Plant-Mix Bituminous Pavement The provisions of Subsections 703.5.1, 703.5.2 and 703.5.3 shall apply. The several aggregate fraction for the mixture shall be sized, graded and combined in such proportions that the resulting composite blend meets one of the grading requirements of Table 703.2 as specified in the Schedule. The gradings to be used will be shown in the Special Provisions, adjusted to reflect variations in aggregate densities. The ranges apply to aggregates with bulk specific gravity values that are relatively constant throughout a grading band. When such values vary from sieve to sieve, such as with lightweight aggregates, the ranges for each sieve size shall be adjusted to reflect the variations. 703.8 Aggregate for Cold Plant-Mix Bituminous Pavement The provisions of Subsections 703.5.1 and 703.5.2 shall apply.

703.8.1

Aggregate for Pavement

The several aggregate fractions for the mixture shall be sized, graded and combined in such proportions that the resulting composite blends meet the respective grading requirements of Table 703.3 adjusted to reflect variation in aggregate densities. 703.8.2 Aggregate for Top Dressing

The material for the top dressing shall consist of dry sand, stone screenings or slag screenings so graded that at least 95 mass percent shall pass the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve and not more than 40 percent shall pass the 0.300 mm (No. 50) sieve. Table 703.2 Gradation Ranges Hot Plant Mix Bituminous Pavements (Mass percent passing square sieves, AASHTO T 11 and T 27)
Sieve Designation, mm 37.5 (1-1/2 inch) 25 ( 1 inch) 19 (3/4 inch) 12.5 (1/2 inch) 9.5 (3/8 inch) 4.75 (No. 4) 2.36 (No. 8) 1.18 (No. 16) 0.600 (No. 30) 0.300 (No. 50) 0.075 (No. 200) GRADING D 100 95-100 74-92 48-70 33-53 22-40 15-30 10-20 4-9

A 100 95-100 75-95 54-75 36-58 25-45 11-28 0-8

B 100 95-100 68-86 56-78 38-60 27-47 18-37 11-28 6-20 0-8

F 100 45-65 33-53 10-20 3-8

G 100 95-100 30-50 5-15 2-5

100 95-100 68-86 56-78 38-60 27-47 18-37 13-28 9-20 4-8

100 95-100 75-90 62-82 38-58 22-42 11-28 2-10

703.9 Aggregate for Road Mix Bituminous Pavement Aggregates for road mix bituminous pavement construction shall be crushed stone, crushed slag, or crushed or natural gravel which meet the quality requirements of AASHTO M 62-74 or M 63-74 for the specified gradation, except that the sodium sulfate soundness loss shall not exceed 12 mass percent. When crushed gravel is used, at least 50 mass percent of the particles retained on the 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve shall have at least one fractured face. Gradation shall conform to Grading F of Table 703.2. 703.10 Aggregate for Cover Coats, Surface Treatments and Bituminous Preservative Treatment Cover aggregate for type 2 seal coat (Item 303) shall consist of sand or fine screenings, reasonably free from dirt or organic matter. Aggregates for type 3 seal coat (Item 303) surface treatments or bituminous preservative treatment shall be crushed stone, crushed slag or crushed or natural

gravel. Only one type of aggregate shall be used on the project unless alternative types are approved. Aggregates shall meet the quality requirements of AASHTO M 78-74. When tested in accordance with AASHTO T 182, (ASTM D 1664) aggregate shall have a retained bituminous film above 95 mass percent. Aggregates which do not meet this requirement may be used for bituminous surface treatments and seal coats provided a water resistant film. Lightweight aggregate, if required or permitted by the Special Provisions, shall meet the pertinent requirements of Subsection 703.5.4. When crushed gravel is used, not less than 50 mass percent of the particles retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall have at least one fractured face. Aggregates shall meet the gradation requirements called for in the Bid Schedule. Table 703.3 Gradation Requirements Cold Plant Mix Bituminous Pavement (Mass percent passing square mesh sieves, AASHTO T 27) Sieve Designation Standard, mm 37.5 25 19 12.5 4.75 2.36 0.600 0.300 Alternate US Standard 1-1/2 1 No. 4 No. 8 No. 30 No. 50 Bottom (Binder) Course 100 85 100 40 70 10 35 4 16 05 Wearing (Surface) Course 100 95 100 15 40 10 25 4 13 0-5

Table 703.4 Gradation Requirements for Cover Coats (Mass percent passing square mesh sieves, AASHTO T 27)
Sieve Designation Std. mm Alt US Std 37.5 1-1/2 25 1 19 12.5 9.5 3/8 4.75 No. 4 No. 8 2.36 0.075 No. 200 Grading designation with corresponding size No. from AASHTO M 43 (ASTM D 448) modified A (No.5) B (No.6) C (No.7) D (No.8) E (No.9) F (No.10) 100 90-100 100 90-100 100 0-10 90-100 100 0-15 85-100 100 100 0-15 85-100 85-100 0-10 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-10

703.11 Blotter Aggregate for blotter material shall conform to the gradation requirements of AASHTO M 43 (ASTM D 448), size 2.00 mm (No. 10). The aggregate shall be free from vegetable or other deleterious materials. Table 703.5 Gradation Requirements for Bituminous Surface Treatments (Mass percent passing square mesh sieves, AASHTO T 27)
Sieve Designation Std. mm Alt US Std 37.5 1-1/2 25 1 19 12.5 9.5 3/8 4.75 No. 4 2.36 No. 8 0.150 No. 100 Grading designation with corresponding size No. from AASHTO M 43 (ASTM D 448) modified A (No.5) B (No.6) C (No.7) D (No.8) E (No.9) F (No.10) 100 90-100 100 20-25 90-100 100 0-10 20-55 90-100 100 0-5 0-15 40-70 85-100 100 100 0-5 0-15 10-30 85-100 85-100 0-5 0-10 10-40 60-100 0-10

Table 703.6 Gradation Requirements for Bituminous Preservative Treatment Sieve Designation Standard mm Alternate US Standard 19 9.5 3/8 4.75 No. 4 No. 8 2.36 0.075 No. 200 Mass percent passing square mesh Sieves, AASHTO T 27 Grading A Grading B 100 100 45 80 45 80 28 64 28 64 0 12 0 - 12

703.12 Bed Course Material Bed course material for sidewalks, paved waterways and curbing shall consist of cinders, sand, slag, gravel, crushed stone or other approved material of such gradation that all particles will pass through a sieve having 37.5 mm (1-1/2 inches) square openings. Bed course material for slope protection shall be a porous, free-draining material consisting of sand, gravel, cinders, slag, crushed stone or other approved free-draining material. This material shall be uniformly graded and of such size that 100 percent of the material will pass through a sieve having 37.5 mm (1-1/2 inches) square opening.

703.13 Sheathing Material Sheathing material shall conform to either (a) or (b) below: a. Sound, durable particles of gravel, slag or crushed stone meeting the following gradation: Sieve 75 mm (3) 4.75 mm (No. 4) 0.075 mm (No. 200) Mass percent passing 100 0 10 02

b. Clean noncementitious sand meeting the requirements of Subsection 703.1.2. 703.14 Aggregates for Subgrade Modification The material shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of slag, stone or gravel, screened or crushed to the required size and grading. The material shall be visually free from vegetable matter and lumps or balls of clay and shall meet the requirements for one of the gradings given in Table 703.7 whichever is called for in the Bid Schedule. That portion of the material passing a 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a plasticity index of not over 6, as determined by AASHTO T 90. Table 703.7 Grading Requirements Aggregates for Subgrade Modification Sieve Designation Standard mm Alternate US Standard 75 3 37.5 1-1/2 25 1 4.75 No. 4 0.075 No. 200 Mass percent passing square mesh sieves using AASHTO T 27 100 30 70 0 - 15 100 30 70 0 - 15 100 40 80 5 20

Crushed slag shall consist of clean, tough, durable pieces of blast furnace slag, reasonably uniform in density and quality and reasonably free from glassy pieces. 703.15 Aggregates for Salt Stabilization Aggregates for salt stabilized base course shall consist of hard durable particles or fragments of slag, stone or gravel, screened or crushed to the required size and grading.

That portion of the material passing a 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a plasticity index of not over 6, as determined by AASHTO T 90. The material shall be visually free from vegetable matter or lumps or balls of clay and shall meet the requirements for one of the gradings given in Table 703.8 as called for in the Bid Schedule. Table 703.8 Gradation Requirements for Aggregates for Salt Stabilized Base Course Mass percent passing square mesh Sieve Designation sieves, AASHTO T 11 and T 27 Standard, mm Alternate US Standard Grading A Grading B 75 3 50 2 100 37.5 1-1/2 70 100 25 1 100 19 70 100 50 80 9.5 3/8 50 80 40 70 4.75 No. 4 35 45 30 60 2.00 No. 10 25 50 20 50 No. 40 0.425 15 30 10 30 No. 200 0.075 7 - 15 7 15 * Gradation varies with top size of material and should be based on size of largest material used. For instance, if largest size is 50 mm (2 inches), gradation should be under heading B; if 25 mm (1 inch), under A.

703.16 Aggregates for Emulsified Asphalt Treated Base Course Aggregate shall consist of coarse aggregate of crushed gravel, crushed slag or crushed stone, composed of hard, durable particles or fragments and a filler of finely crushed stone, sand, slag or other finely divided mineral matter. The portion of the material retained on a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall be known as coarse aggregate and that portion passing a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall be known as fine aggregate. The material shall meet one of the grading requirements of Table 703.9. Table 703.9 Grading Requirements for Aggregates for Emulsified Asphalt Treated Base (Mass percent passing square mesh sieves, AASHTO T 11 & T 27) Sieve Designation Grading A Grading B Grading C Standard mm Alternate US Standard 37.5 1-1/2 100 100 25 1 95 100 95 100 19 50 85 100 12.5 1/2 95 100 No. 4 4.75 26 59 65 100 No. 10 2.00 09 17 48 No. 50 0.300 12 35 No. 200 0.075 02 2 10 3 - 12

If crushed gravel is used, not less than 65 mass percent of the coarse aggregate particles retained on a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall be particles having at least one fractured face. Coarse aggregate shall have a percent of wear of not more than 35 at 500 revolution, as determined by AASHTO T 96. The aggregate shall show a durability factor not less than 35 (coarse and fine) as determined by AASHTO T 210 (Production of Plastic Fines in Aggregates). The material shall be free of clay balls and adherent films of clay or other matter that would prevent thorough coating with bituminous material.

ITEM 703A MINERAL FILLER

703A.1 Description Mineral filler shall consist of finely divided mineral matter such as rock dust, slag dust, hydrated lime, hydraulic cement, fly ash or other suitable mineral matter. It shall be free from organic impurities and at the time of use, shall be sufficiently dry to flow freely and shall be essentially free from agglomerations.

703A.2 General Requirements 703A.2.1 Filler material for bituminous bases or pavements shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 17, Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures. 703A.2.2 Physical Requirements Mineral filler shall be graded within the following limits: Sieve 0.600 mm (No. 30) 0.300 mm (No. 50) 0.075 mm (No. 200) Maximum Perfect Passing 100 95 100 70 100

The mineral filler shall have a plasticity index not greater than 4. Plasticity index limits are not appropriate for hydraulic lime and cement.

703A.3 Methods of Sampling 703A.3.1 Materials in Bulk Sampling from bins, piles or cars A sampling tube that takes a core not less than 25 mm (1 inch) in diameter may be used to obtain sample portions from one or more location as required to obtain a field sample of at least 5 kg (10 lb). Sample portions may be taken from holes dug into the material at 5 or more locations to provide a field sample of at least 5 kg (10 lb). Sampling from conveyors Sample portions shall be taken at regular intervals during the time of movement of the materials in the unit being sampled to provide a field sample of at least 5 kg (10 lb). 703A.3.2 Materials in Packages From the unit to be sampled, select at least one percent of the packages at random for sampling, but in no case shall fewer than 5 packages be selected. Take a sample portion from a hole dug into the top of each package selected for sampling. A sampling tube may be used that takes a core not less than 25 mm (1 inch) diameter. Insert the tube into the package to substantially sample the entire length of the package. Combine the sample portions taken to obtain a field sample of at least 5 kg (10 lb).

703A.4 Shipping Samples Mineral filler shall be shipped in a clean, moisture-proof container and packaged securely to prevent the loss of material during handling. Reduce the field sample to a minimum size of 2.5 kg (5 lb) to submit for testing, using the method of quartering.

703A.5 Methods of Test The properties enumerated in this Specification shall be determined in accordance with the following AASHTO Method of Test: Gradation Plasticity Index T 37 T 90

ITEM 704 MASONRY UNITS

704.1 Clay or Shale Brick Brick shall conform to the requirements of one of the following specifications: AASHTO M 91, Grade SM ASTM C 32, Grade SM AASHTO M 114, Grade SW, or ASTM C 62, Grade SW The grade will be shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions. Sewer Brick Sewer Brick Building Brick -

704.2 Concrete Brick Concrete brick shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 55, Grade A.

704.3 Concrete Masonry Blocks Concrete masonry blocks may be rectangular or segmented and, when specified, shall have ends shaped to provide interlock at vertical joints. Solid blocks shall conform with the requirements of ASTM C 139 or ASTM C 145, grade as specified. Hollow blocks shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 90, grade as specified. Dimensions and tolerances shall be as individually specified on the Plans.

ITEM 705 JOINT MATERIALS

705.1 Joint Fillers Poured filler for joints shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 173. Preformed fillers for joints shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 33 (ASTM D 994), AASHTO M 153, AASHTO M 213, AASHTO M 220, as specified, and shall be punched to admit the dowels where called for on the Plans. The filler for each joint shall be furnished in a single piece for the depth and width required for the joint unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. When the use of more than one piece is authorized for a joint, the abutting ends shall be fastened securely and held accurately to shape, by stapling or other positive fastening satisfactory to the Engineer.

705.2 Joint Mortar Pipe joint mortar shall consist of one part Portland Cement and two parts approved sand with water as necessary to obtain the required consistency. Portland Cement and sand shall conform respectively to Section 700.1 and 703.1. If shown in the Special Provisions, air entrainment conforming to Section 708.2 shall be provided. Mortar shall be used within 30 minutes after its preparation.

705.3 Rubber Gaskets Ring gaskets for rigid pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 198. Continuous flat gaskets for flexible metal pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 1056 with grade SCE 41 used for bands with projections or flat bands and grade SCE 43 for corrugated bands. Gaskets thickness for bands with projections or flat bands shall be 12.5 mm (1/2 inch) greater than the nominal depth of the corrugation and shall be 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) for corrugated bands.

705.4 Oakum Oakum for joints in bell and spigot pipe shall be made from hemp (Cannabis Sativa) line, or Benares Sunn fiber, or from a combination of these fibers. The oakum shall be thoroughly corded and finished and practically free from lumps, dirt and extraneous matter.

705.5 Mortar for Masonry Beds and Joints 705.5.1 Composition

Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, masonry mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement or air-entraining Portland Cement and two parts fine aggregate by volume to which hydrated lime has been added in an amount equal to ten (10) mass percent of the cement. In lieu of air-entraining cement, Portland Cement may be used with an air-entraining admixture in accordance with the applicable provisions of Item 405. For masonry walls not exceeding 1.8 m (6 feet) in height, a mortar composed of one part masonry cement and two parts fine aggregate by volume maybe substituted for the above mixture of Portland Cement, lime and fine aggregate. For other construction, masonry cement may be used if and as shown on the Plans. 705.5.2 Materials

Either Type I or Type IA air-entraining Portland Cement, conforming to AASHTO M 85 may be used, except that when the contract contains an item for concrete under Item 405, the Contractor may use the same type as is used for that work.

Masonry cement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 150 74 (ASTM C 91). Fine aggregate shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 45 (ASTM C 144). Hydrated lime shall meet the requirements for Residue, Popping and Pitting, and Water retention shown for Type N lime in Section 701.3 (ASTM C 207). Water shall conform to the requirements of Item 714, Water. Air-entraining agents shall conform to the requirements of Section 708.2 AASHTO M 154 (ASTM C 260).

705.6 Copper Water Stops or Flashings Sheet copper for water stops of flashings shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 138 (ASTM B 152) for Type ETP, light cold-rolled, soft anneal, unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.

705.7 Rubber Water Stops Rubber water stops may be molded or extruded and have a uniform crosssection, free from porosity or other defects, conforming to the nominal dimensions shown on the Plans. An equivalent standard shape may be furnished, if approved by the Engineer. The water stop may be compounded from natural rubber, synthetic rubber or a blend of the two, together with other compatible materials which will produce a finished water stop meeting the requirements of Table 705.1. No reclaimed material shall be used. The Contractor shall furnish a certificate from the producer to show the general compositions of the material and values for the designated properties. The Contractors shall also furnish samples, in length adequate for making designated tests, as ordered by the Engineer.

705.8 Plastic Water Stops Plastic water stops shall be fabricated with a uniform cross-section, free from porosity or other defects, to the nominal dimensions shown on the Plans. An equivalent standard shape may be furnished, if approved by the Engineer. The material from which the water stop is fabricated shall be a homogenous,, elastomeric, plastic compound of basic polyvinyl chloride and other material which, after fabrication, will meet the requirements tabulated herein. No reclaimed material shall be used. The Contractor shall furnish a certificate from the producer, showing values for the designated properties in Table 705.2. The Contractor shall furnish

samples, in lengths adequate for making designated tests, as ordered by the Engineer. Table 705.1 Required Properties and Test Methods-Finished Rubber Water Stop

Property Hardness (by durometer) Compression set Tensile strength shore

Federal Test Method Standard No. 601 3021 3311 4111 ASTM D 412 4131 6631 7111

Requirement 60 70 Maximum 30 percent Minimum 17.23 MPa (2,500 psi) Minimum 450 percent Minimum 6.20 MPa (900 psi) Minimum 5 percent Minimum original 80 percent

Elongation at Breaking Tensile stress at 300 percent elongation Water absorption by mass Tensile strength after aging

Table 705.2 Required Properties and Test Methods-Finished Plastic Water Stop ASTM Property Tensile strength Elongation at breaking Hardness (shore) Specific gravity Resistance to alkali Method D 638 D 638 D 2240 (Federal test Method No. 406-5011) D 543 Requirements Minimum 9.646 MPa (1,400 psi) Minimum 260 percent 60 75 Maximum 0.02 from manufacturers value Maximum weight change: - 0.10 percent to + 0.25 percent No cracking Not more than manufacturers value Maximum hardness change 5 (shore), Maximum tensile strength decrease: 15%

Water absorption (48 hrs) Cold bending Volatile loss 7 days using 10% NaOH

D 570 (1) D 1203 -

The cold bend test will be made by subjecting a 25 x 150 x 3 mm (1 x 6 x 1/8 inch) strip of plastic water stop to a temperature of 28.80C (-200F) for 2 hours. The strip will immediately thereafter be bent 180 degrees around a rod of 6.35 mm (1/4 inch) diameter by applying sufficient force to hold the sample in intimate contact with the rod. The sample will then be examined for evidence of cracking. At least three individual samples from each lot will be tested and the result reported.

705.9 Hot Poured Pipe-Joint Sealing Compound It shall meet the requirements of Federal Specification SS-S-169 for the type and class specified.

705.10 Pipe-Joint Packing Compound Packaging compounds for use with sealing compounds specified in Section 705.9 shall be of appropriate sizes and shall meet the requirements of Federal Specification HH-P-117.

705.11 Preformed Plastic Sealing Compound For concrete pipe joints, it shall meet the requirements of Federal Specification SS-S-210.

ITEM 706 CONCRETE, CLAY, PLASTIC AND FIBER PIPE 706.1 Non-Reinforced Concrete Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 86 (ASTM C 14) for the specified diameters and strength classes. 706.2 Reinforced Concrete Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 170 or AASHTO M 242 (ASTM C 655) for specified diameters and strength classes. Elliptical pipe conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 207 (ASTM C 507) shall be furnished where specified. Unless otherwise specified, pipe wall design and use of elliptical reinforced concrete arch culvert pipe shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 206 (ASTM C 506). Precast reinforced concrete and sections shall conform to the requirements of the cited specifications to the extent which they apply. Reinforced concrete D-load pipe shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 242 (ASTM C 655).

706.3 Perforated Concrete Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 175 for the specified diameters and strength classes. 706.4 Drain Tile This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 178 or M 179 (ASTM C 4) for the specified material, diameters and quality classes. 706.5 Porous Concrete Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 176 (ASTM C 654) for the specified diameters. 706.6 Vitrified Clay Lined Reinforced Concrete Pipe Designs for fully lined or half lined pipes of the specified strength classes shall be submitted by the manufacturer for approval. The application requirements of AASHTO M 170 and AASHTO M 65 shall govern. Liner or liner elements, shall be clay of first quality, sound, thoroughly and perfectly burned without warps, cracks or other imperfections and fully and smoothly salt glazed. 706.7 Perforated Vitrified Clay Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 65, for pipe with full circular cross-section, for the specified diameters and strength class. When specified, the bell shall have integral spacer lugs to provide for an annular opening and self-centering feature. 706.8 Vitrified Clay Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of Section 706.7 for the specified diameters and strength classes for circular, unperforated or perforated pipe as shown on the Plans. 706.9 Cradle Invert Clay Pipe This pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 65. 706.10 Asbestos Cement Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 217 (ASTM C 428) for the specified diameters and strength classes. 706.11 Perforated Asbestos Cement Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 189 for the specified diameters. 706.12 Bituminized Fiber Pipe

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 177 ASTM D 1861 or D 1862. 706.13 Perforated Bituminized Fiber Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of Sections 706.12 for the specified diameters. Unless otherwise specified, either Type I or Type II Couplings may be furnished. 706.14 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 206 (ASTM C 506). 706.15 Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Strom Drain and Sewer Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 207 (ASTM C 507). 706.16 Reinforced Concrete D-load Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 242 (ASTM C 655). 706.17 Plastic and Polyethylene Corrugated Drainage Pipe or Tubing This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 252. 706.18 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains and Sewers These sections shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 259. 706.19 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings This pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 2751. 706.20 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Composite Sewer Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 264 (ASTM D 2680). 706.21 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Drain Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 304M (ASTM D 2729).

ITEM 707 METAL PIPE

707.1 Cast Iron Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 64 or ASTM A 716 for the specified diameters and strength classes. Unless otherwise specified, either smooth, corrugated or ribbed pipe may be furnished. Pipe of diameter in excess of 1.2 m (48 inches) shall conform to ANSI Standard for Cast Iron Pit Cast Pipe for specified diameter and strength class. 707.2 Corrugated Iron or Steel Pipe and Pipe Arches 707.2.1 Riveted Pipe and Pipe Arches

The conduit shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 218 for the specified dimensions and thicknesses. 707.2.2 Welded Pipe and Pipe Arches

Corrugated steel pipe and pipe arches fabricated by resistance spot welding shall comply with the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 218. 707.2.3 Helical Pipe

Unperforated helically corrugated pipes shall conform to sizes shown on the Plans and with the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 218. 707.2.4 Special sections, such as elbows and fabricated flared and sections, shall conform to the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 218. Coupling bands shall conform to AASHTO M 36 and M 218, except that use of bands with projections (dimple bands) will be limited to end sections and to pipe laid on grades under 10 percent. Bands of special design that engage factory reformed ends of corrugated pipe may be used. Steel sheets of the required compositions may be furnished with commercially produced corrugation dimensions other than those specified in AASHTO M 36 and M 246, if shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer. 707.3 Bituminous Coated Corrugated Iron or Steel Pipe and Pipe Arches These conduits, coupling bands and special sections, shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 190 coating Type A, B or C as specified. Coupling bands shall be fully coated with bituminous material. Special sections, such as elbows and other sections shall conform to the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 190. Coating and invert paving shall be of

the type specified. Flared end sections shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 243 for the coating specified. The Engineer may waive the imperviousness test for coated pipe if no separation of coating from metal is observed. When asbestos bonded bituminous coating is specified, these requirements shall equally apply and in addition, the special process of embedding asbestos fiber in the molten metallic bonding medium shall be used to bond the bituminous coating. Asbestos-bonded corrugated metal pipe shall be fabricated in accordance with AASHTO M 36 using asbestos-bonded sheets shall be coated with a layer of asbestos fibers pressed into the molten zinc bonding medium. Immediately after the metallic bond has solidified, the asbestos fibers shall be thoroughly impregnated with a bituminous saturant. The finished sheets shall be uniformly coated and free from blisters. After fabrication, the culvert sections shall be treated as specified for either Type A, B or C, as called for in the Bid Schedule, in accordance with AASHTO M 190. Coupling bonds shall be fully coated with bituminous material conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 190, Type A. The use of bands with projections (dimple bands) will be limited to end sections and to pipe laid on grades under 10 percent. 707.4 Corrugated Iron or Steel Pipe for Underdrains This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 218 for the specified diameters and types. Galvanized metal part-circle pipe may be used if permitted by the Special Provisions and shown in the Bid Schedule. 707.5 Bituminous Coated Iron Steel Pipe for Underdrains This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 218 and shall be coated with bituminous material to meet the requirements of AASHTO M 190, Type A coating, except that the minimum coating thickness shall be 0.75 mm (0.03 inch). Coupling bands shall be fully coated. The specified minimum diameter of perforations shall apply after coating. The Engineer may waive the imperviousness test if no separation of coating from the metal is observed. 707.6 Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Culvert Pipe This shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 196 and M 197. 707.7 Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Pipe for Underdrains This pipe shall conform to the requirements of Section 707.6. 707.8 Bituminous Coated Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Culvert Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of Section 707.6 and shall be coated with bituminous material conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 190. Coating and invert paving shall be of the type specified.

707.9 Bituminous Coated Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Pipe Underdrain This pipe shall conform to the requirements of Section 707.6 and shall be coated with bituminous material conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 190, type of coating as specified. 707.10 Structural Plate for Pipe, Pipe Arches and Arches These conduits and bolts and nuts for connecting plates shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 167. 707.11 Full Bituminous Coated Structural Plate Pipe, Pipe Arches and Arches These conduits shall conform to the requirements of Section 707.10 and shall be coated with bituminous material conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 243, type coating as specified. 707.12 Aluminum Alloy Structural Plate for Pipe, Pipe Arches and Arches These conduits and the bolts and nuts for connecting plates shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 219. 707.13 Full Bituminous Coated Aluminum Alloy Structural Plate Pipe, Pipe Arches and Arches These conduits shall conform to the requirements of Section 707.12 and shall be coated with bituminous materials conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 190, type of coating as specified. 707.14 Precoated, Galvanized Steel Culverts and Underdrains These conduits shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 245 and M 246. 707.15 Slotted Pipe Slotted pipe shall be the angle slot pipe or the grate slot type. slotted pipe to be installed shall be at the option of the Contractor. The type of

Slot angles for the angle slot drain shall conform to the requirements of ASTM S 36. Grate assemblies for the grate slot drain shall conform to ASTM A 36 or A 576. Slot angles and grate slot assemblies shall be galvanized in accordance with the provisions of Subsection 712.07, Frames, Gratings, Covers and Ladder Rungs, of the Standard Specification Federal Highway Projects FP-79. Flashing shall be commercial quality and shall be galvanized with G 165 coating designation conforming to the provisions in ASTM A 525. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the provisions of ASTM A 307. Structural tubing spacers shall

conform to the provisions in ASTM A 501. Said bolts, nuts and spacers shall be galvanized in accordance with the provisions of AASHTO M 111.

ITEM 708 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES FOR CONCRETE

708.1

Description

This Item specifies the classification, sampling, testing, packing and marking of concrete admixtures. It also specifies the physical requirements for concrete with each type of chemical admixtures. Admixtures - A material, other than water, aggregates and hydraulic cement (including blended cement) that is used as an ingredient of concrete and is added to the batch in controlled amounts immediately before or during mixing to produce some desired modification to the properties of the concrete. 708.2 Types of Chemical Admixtures for Concrete The concrete chemical admixture shall be classified as follows and shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 194. a. Type A Accelerating Admixtures An admixture that accelerates the time of setting and early strength development of concrete. b. Type B Retarding Admixtures An admixture that delays the time of setting of concrete. c. Type C Water-reducing Admixtures An admixture that reduces the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency. d. Type D Water-reducing High Range, Admixtures An admixture that decreases the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency by 12 percent or greater. e. Type E Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixtures An admixture that decreases the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency and hastens the time of setting and early strength development of concrete.

f.

Type F Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixtures An admixture that decreases the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency and delays the time of setting of concrete.

g.

Type G Water-Reducing, High Range, and Retarding Admixtures An admixture that decreases the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency of 12 percent or greater and delays the time of setting of concrete.

708.3 Air-Entraining Admixtures Air-entraining admixtures shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 154 (ASTM C 260).

708.4

Physical Requirements

The concrete in which each of the types of chemical admixtures are used shall conform to the physical requirements given in Table 1. Table 1 Physical Requirements of Chemical Admixtures for ConcreteA
PHYSICAL PROPERTY Water Content, percent of control, maximum Time of setting, allowable deviation from control, hour Initial Minimum Maximum 1.0 earlier nor 1.5 later 1.0 earlier nor 1.5 later 1.0 later 3.5 later 1.0 earlier 3.5 earlier 1.0 later 3.5 later 1.0 earlier 3.5 earlier 1.0 earlier nor 1.5 later 1.0 earlier nor 1.5 later 1.0 later 3.5 later Type A Type B Type C Type D Type E Type FB Type GB

95

95

95

88

88

Final : Minimum Maximum

3.5 later

1.0 earlier -

3.5 later

1.0 earlier -

3.5 later

Compressive Strength, percent of control minimum:C

1 day 3 days 7 days 28 days 6 months 1 year Flexural Strength, percent of control, minimum:C 3 days 7 days 28 days Length Change, maximum shrinkage (Alternative requirements)D Percent of control Increase over Control Relative durability factor minimum
A

110 110 110 100 100

90 90 90 90 90

125 100 100 90 90

110 110 110 100 100

125 110 110 100 100

140 125 115 110 100 100

125 125 115 110 100 100

100 100 100

90 90 90

110 100 90

100 100 100

110 100 100

110 100 100

110 100 100

135 0.010 80

135 0.010 80

135 0.010 80

135 0.010 80

135 0.010 80

135 0.010 80

135 0.010 80

The values in the table include allowance for normal variation in test results. The objects of the 90% compressive strength for Type B admixture is to require a level of performance comparable to that of the reference concrete. It is recommended that whenever practicable, tests may be made using cement, pozzolan, aggregates, air-entraining admixture, and the mix proportions and batching sequence when used in non-air-entraining and air-entrained concrete because the specific effects produced by chemical admixtures may vary with the properties and proportion of the other ingredients of the concrete. For instance, types F and G admixtures may exhibit such higher water reduction in concrete mixtures having higher cement factors than 307 + -3 kg/m3. Mixtures having a high range water reduction generally display a higher rate of slump loss. When high range admixtures are used to impart increased workability (15 cm to 20 cm slump), the effect may be of limited duration, reverting to the original slump in 30 to 60 min depending on factors normally affecting rate of slump loss. The compressive and flexural strength of the concrete containing the admixture under test at any test age shall be not less 90% of that attained at any previous test age. The objective of this limit is to require that the compressive or flexural strength of the concrete containing the admixture under test shall not decrease with age. The percent of control limit applies when length change of control is 0.030% or greater; increase over control limit applies when length change of control is less than 0.030%. This requirement is applicable only when the admixtures is to be used in airentrained concrete.

When the admixture is to be used in Prestressed concrete, the chloride content of the admixture shall be stated and whether or not chloride has been added during its manufacture.

708.5 708.5.1

Sampling The chemical admixtures for concrete shall be sampled either by grab or composite sampling. A grab sample is one obtained in a single operation. A composite sample is one obtained by combining three or more grab samples. Liquid Admixtures The grab samples taken for quality tests shall represent a unit shipment or a single production lot. Each grab sample shall have a volume of at least 0.5L (1 pint), a minimum of 3 grab samples shall be taken. Liquid admixtures shall be agitated thoroughly immediately prior to sampling. Grab samples shall be taken from different locations and thoroughly mixed to form the composite sample and the resultant mixture sampled to provide for at least 4 litres for complete set. Admixtures in bulk storage tanks shall be sampled equally from the upper, intermediate and lower levels by means of drain cocks in the sides of the tanks or a weighed sampling bottle fitted with a stopper that can be removed after the bottle is lowered to the proper depth. Non-liquid Admixtures The grab samples taken shall represent not more than 2 Mg (2 tons) of admixture and shall have a mass of at least 1 kg (2 lb). A minimum of four grab samples shall be taken. Composite samples shall be prepared by thoroughly mixing the grab samples selected and the resultant mixture sampled to provide at least 2.3 kg (5 lb) for complete test.

708.5.2 708.5.2.1

708.5.2.2

708.5.2.3

708.5.3 708.5.3.1

708.5.3.2

708.6

Testing

Procedures for Proportioning of Concrete Mixtures, Tests and Properties of Freshly Mixed Concrete, Preparation of Test Specimens, Test Specimens of Hardened Concrete and Tests on Hardened Concrete shall be in accordance with AASHTO M 194. The Concrete containing the admixtures shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 39, ASTM C 138, ASTM C 192, ASTM C 617.

708.7

Packing

The liquid admixtures shall be packed in 4, 20 or 200 litre containers made of steel, plastic or other suitable packing materials. These containers shall be properly sealed. The non-liquid admixtures or concrete shall be packed in 25-kilogram containers made of steel, plastic, or other suitable packing materials. These containers shall be properly sealed. 708.8 Marking Each container shall be marked with the following information: a. b. c. d. e. f. Name, form and type of the product; Net mass or volume; Name and address of manufacturer and recognized trademark, if any; Manufacturers batch number and date of manufacture Made in the Philippines and, Required handling procedures

ITEM 709 PAINTS 709.1 Description This Item covers all paint materials including Vehicles, Pigment, Pastes, Driers, Thinners and Mixed Paints for steel and wooden structures. 709.2 Material Requirements 709.2.1 General

Paint, except, aluminum paint, shall consist of pigments of the required fineness and composition ground to the desired consistency in linseed oil in a suitable grinding machine, to which shall be added additional oil, thinner and drier as required. Aluminum paint shall consist of aluminum bronze powder or paste of the required fineness and composition to which shall be added the specified amount of vehicle. The paint shall be furnished for use in ready mixed, paste or powder form. All paint shall meet the following general requirements: a. The paint shall show no excessive settling and shall easily be redispersed with a paddle to a smooth, homogenous state. The paint shall show no

b.

c. d. e.

curdling, livering, caking or color separation and shall be free from lumps and skins. The paint as received shall brush easily, possess good levelling properties and shall show no running or sagging when applied to a smooth vertical surfaces. The paint shall dry to a smooth uniform finish free from roughness grit, uneveness and other imperfections. The paint shall not skin within 48 hours in three quarters filled closed container. The paint shall show no thickening, curdling, gelling or hard caking after six (6) months storage in full, tightly covered container at a temperature of 210C (700F). The paint shall conform to the requirements of the indicated specifications as follows: Red Lead Ready-Mixed Paint AASHTO M 72 Type I, II, III and IV Aluminum Paint AASHTO M 69 Type I and II White & Tinted Ready-Mixed Paint AASHTO M 70 Foliage Green Bridge Paint AASHTO M 67 Black Paint for Bridges and Timber Structures AASHTO M 68 Basic Lead Silicon Chromate, ReadyMixed Primer AASHTO M 229 The constituents parts of the paint shall meet the following specifications: Red Lead (97% Pb3O4) Iron Oxide (85% Fe2O3) Aluminum Powder and Paste Magnesium Silicate Mica Pigment Titanium Dioxide Chrome Yellow Calcium Carbonate Basic Lead-Silicon Chromate Basic Carbonate White Lead Zinc Oxide Chrome Oxide Green Carbon Black Lampblack Prussian Blue Boiled Linseed Oil Raw Linseed Oil Pale Heat Bodied Linseed Oil Alkyd Resin Mineral Spirit Driers Turpentine ASTM D 83 ASTM D 84 ASTM D 962 ASTM D 605 ASTM D 607 ASTM D 476 ASTM D 211 ASTM D 1199 ASTM D 1638 ASTM D 81 ASTM D 79 ASTM D 263 ASTM D 561 ASTM D 209 ASTM D 261 ASTM D 260 ASTM D 234 Fed Spec. TT-0-367 Fed. Spec. TT-R-266 ASTM D 235 ASTM D 600 ASTM D 13

709.2.2

709.2.3

709.2.4

Drier

These specifications cover both straight oil drier (material free from resins and gums), and Japan drier (material containing varnish gums). The drier shall be composed of lead manganese, or cobalt, or a mixture of any of these elements, combined with a suitable fatty oil, with or without resins of gums and mineral spirits of turpentine, or a mixture of these solvents. The drier shall conform to the following requirements: a. Appearance Free from sediment and suspended matter. b. Flash Point (Tag close cup) not less than 300C (860F). c. Elasticity The drier when flowed on metal and baked for 2 hours at 0 0 100 C (212 F) shall have an elastic film. d. Drying It shall mix with pure raw linseed oil in the proportion of 1 volume of drier to 19 volumes of oil without curdling, and the resulting mixture when flowed on glass shall dry in not more than 18 hours. d. Color When mixed with pure, raw linseed oil in the proportion of 1 volume of drier to 8 volumes of oil, the resulting mixture shall be darker than a solution of 6 g of potassium dichromate in 13 cc of pure sulfuric acid (sp. gr. 1.84).

709.3 Proportion for Mixing It is the intent of these Specifications to provide a paint of proper brushing consistency, which will not run, streak or sag and which will have satisfactory drying qualities. 709.3.1 Aluminum Paint, Field Coats on Structural Steel

The paint shall be mixed in the proportion of 0.242 kg of aluminum powder of paste per litre of vehicle of long oil spar varnish (2 lb/gal) producing a paint containing 21 mass percent pigment and 79 percent vehicle. The weighed amount of powder or paste shall be placed in a suitable mixing container and the measured volume of vehicle then poured over it. The paste or powder shall be incorporated in the paint by vigorous stirring with a paddle. The powder or paste will readily disperse in the vehicle. Before removing any paint from the container, the paint shall be thoroughly stirred to insure a uniform mixture and the paint shall be suitably stirred during the use. The amount of paint enough for one days use only shall be mixed at one time. When two field coats of aluminum paint are specified, the first coat shall be tinted with lampblack paste or Prussian blue paste in the quantity of 0.024 kg/L or more (1/5 lb/gal) of paints. The exact quantity used shall be sufficient to give a contrast in color which can be readily distinguished. When three field coats of aluminum paint are specified the second coat shall be tinted.

709.3.2

Aluminum Paint, Field Coats on Creosoted Timber

This paint shall be mixed as specified for Aluminum Paint for Structural Steel except that the proportions shall be 0.272 kg of aluminum powder or paste per litre of vehicle (2-1/2 lb/gal). Other paint composition may be used when and as stipulated in the Special Provisions. 709.4 Containers and Markings All paints shall be shipped in strong, substantial containers plainly marked with mass, color and volume in litres of the paint content, a true statement of the percentage composition of the pigment, the proportions of the pigment to vehicle, the name and address of the manufacturers and the stencil of the authorized inspecting agency. Any package or container not so marked will not be accepted for use under this Specification.

ITEM 710 REINFORCING STEEL AND WIRE ROPE

710.1 Reinforcing Steel Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of the following Specifications: Deformed Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement Deformed Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement Fabricated Steel Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric of Concrete Reinforcement Plastic Coated Dowel Bars Low Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement AASHTO M 31 (ASTM A 615)

AASHTO M 225 (ASTM A 496)

AASHTO M 55 (ASTM A 185)

AASHTO M 32 (ASTM A 82)

AASHTO M 54 (ASTM A 184)

AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A 497)

AASHTO M 254 Type A ASTM A 206

Bar reinforcement for concrete structures, except No. 2 bars shall be deformed in accordance with AASHTO M 42, M 31 and M 53 for Nos. 3 through 11. Dowel and tie bars shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 31 or AASHTO M 42 except that rail steel shall not be used for tie bars that are to be bent and restraightened during construction. Tie bars shall be deformed bars. Dowel bars shall be plain round bars. They shall be free from burring or other deformation restricting slippage in the concrete. Before delivery to the site of the work, a minimum of one half (1/2) the length of each dowel bar shall be painted with one coat of approved lead or tar paint. The sleeves for dowel bars shall be metal of an approved design to cover 50 mm (2 inches), plus or minus 6.3 mm of the dowel, with a closed end, and with a suitable stop to hold the end of the sleeve at least 25 mm (1 inch) from the end of the dowel bar. Sleeves shall be of such design that they do not collapse during construction. Plastic coated dowel bar conforming to AASHTO M 254 may be used.

710.2 Wire Rope or Wire Cable The wire rope or wire cable shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 30 for the specified diameter and strength class.

710.3 Prestressing Reinforcing Steel Prestressing reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of the following Specifications: High-tensile wire High-tensile wire strand or rope High-tensile alloy bars as follows: High-tensile-strength alloy bars shall be cold stretched to a minimum of 895.7 MPa (30,000 psi). The resultant physical properties shall be as follows: Minimum ultimate tensile strength AASHTO M 204 (ASTM A 421) AASHTO M 203 (ASTM A 416)

1000 MPa (145,000 psi) followed by stress relieving

Minimum yield strength, measured by the 0.7 percent extension under load method shall not be less than

895.7 MPa (130,000 psi)

Minimum modulus of elasticity Minimum elongation in 20 bar diameters after rupture Diameters tolerance

25,000,000

4 percent +0.762 mm 0.254 mm (+0.03-0.01)

If shown on the Plans, type 270 k strand shall be used, conforming to AASHTO M 203.

ITEM 711 FENCE AND GUARDRAIL 711.1 Barbed Wire Galvanized barbed wire of the coating class specified shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 121. Aluminum coated barbed wire shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 585, with Type I (Aluminum Coated) or Type II (Aluminum Alloy) barbs at the option of the manufacturer. 711.2 Woven Wire Galvanized woven wire fence of the coating class specified shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 116. Aluminum coated woven wire fence shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 584. 711.3 Chain Link Fence Chain link fabric and the required fittings and hardware shall conform to AASHTO M 181, for the kind of metal, coating, size of wire and mesh specified. Galvanized coiled spring steel tension wire shall be 7 (0.177 inch) gauge, conforming to ASTM A 641 hard temper, with Class 3 coating unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings. Aluminized coil spring steel tension wire shall also be 7 (0.177 inch) gauge, hard temper, having a minimum coating mass of 0.12 kg/m2 (0.40 oz/ft2) of aluminum. 711.4 Metal Beam Rail Steel rail elements shall be corrugated sheet steel conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 180 of the designated class and type.

711.5 Timber Rail The timber rail shall be cut from the specified grade of dry, well seasoned and dressed timber stock of the species specified, which shall meet the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 168. Where preservative treatment is specified, this shall conform to the requirements of Section 713.3. Rustic rails shall be straight, sound and free of injurious defects and shall have been cut from live trees not less than 30 days but not more than 1 year before use. They shall have been stripped of bark before seasoning or shall have been stored under water. Immediately before the logs are used in the work, all knots and projections shall be trimmed and smooth and, if water cured, all barks shall be peeled. Slight curvature of wind to give a pleasing appearance to the structure will be permitted. Logs of only one specie shall be used in the construction of any one continuous length of guardrail. 711.6 Fence Posts Wood posts shall conform to the details and dimensions indicated on the Plans. All wood posts shall be sound, seasoned wood, peeled and with ends cut square or as indicated. The posts shall be straight and all knots trimmed flush with surface. Where treated posts are called for, the kind and type of treatment shall conform to that indicated on the Plans. When red cedar posts or bracing is furnished, the requirements for peeling may be omitted. All dimensions timber and lumber required for fences or gates shall be sound, straight and reasonably free from knots, splits and shakes. It shall be of the species and grades indicated on the Plans and shall be dressed and finished on four sides. Concrete posts shall be made of concrete conforming to the specified requirements of concrete, for the class specified, and shall contain steel reinforcement as shown on the Plans, conforming to the requirements of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope. Steel posts for line-type fencing shall conform to ASTM A 702. Steel posts shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M 111 except that tubular steel posts shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 120. Fittings, hardware and other appurtenances not specifically covered by the Plans and Specifications, shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 120 and shall be standard commercial grade, and in accordance with current standard practice. Weathering steel posts conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 558, shall be furnished when specified. Aluminum alloy posts shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 181.

711.7 Guardrail Post Guardrail post shall conform to the applicable standards contained in AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA A Guide to Standardized Highway Barrier Rail Hardware. 711.8 Guardrail Hardware Guardrail hardware shall conform to the applicable standards contained in AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA A Guide to Standardized Highway Barrier Rail Hardware. 711.9 Box Beam Rail Steel box rail elements shall conform to the applicable standards contained in AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA Guide to Standardized Highway Barrier Rail Hardware.

ITEM 712 STRUCTURAL METAL

712.1 Structural Steels 712.1.1 General Unless

Steel shall be furnished according to the following Specifications. otherwise specified, structural carbon rivet steel shall be furnished. 712.1.2 Structural Steel

a. Carbon Steel. Unless otherwise specified, structural carbon steel for riveted, bolted or welded construction shall conform to Structural Steel, AASHTO M 183. b. Eyebars. Steel for eyebars shall be of a weldable grade. This grade includes structural steel conforming to: Structural Steel, AASHTO M 183; Highway Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 344.5 MPa (50,000 psi) Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm (4 inches) thick, AASHTO M 222 (ASTM A 588 with Supplementary Requirement SI of AASHTO M 222 mandatory). 712.1.3 High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel

It shall conform to: High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality, AASHTO M 223, High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 344.5 MPa (50,000 psi) Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm (4 inches) thick, AASHTO M 222.

712.1.4

High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel for Welding

It shall conform to: a. High-Strength Low Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality, Grade 50, AASHTO M 223 (ASTM A 572 with supplementary requirements S2 of AASHTO M 223 mandatory). b. High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 344.5 MPa (50,000 psi) Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm (4 inches) thick, AASHTO M 222 (ASTM A 588 in Supplementary Requirement S1 of AASHTO M 222 mandatory). 712.1.5 High-Strength Structural Steel for Riveted or Bolted Construction It shall conform to: a. High-Strength Low Alloy Columbium Vanadium Steel of Structural Quality, and AASHTO M 223. b. High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 344.5 MPa (50,000 psi) Minimum Yield Point to 100mm (4 inches) thick, AASHTO M 222. 712.1.6 High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate

It shall conform to: a. High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, suitable for welding, ASTM A 514. b. High-Strength Alloy Steel Plates, Quenched and Tempered for pressure vessels, ASTM A 517. c. Quenched and tempered alloy steel structural shapes and seamless mechanical tubing meeting all the mechanical and chemical requirements of A 514/A 517 steel, except that the specified maximum tensile strength may be 964.6 MPa (140,000 psi) for structural shapes and 999.05 MPa (145,000 psi) for seamless mechanical tubing shall be considered as A 514/A 517 steel. 712.1.7 Structural Rivet Steel

It shall conform to Steel Structural Rivets AASHTO M 228, Grade I (ASTM A 502, Grade I). 712.1.8 High-Strength Structural Rivet Steel

It shall conform to Steel Structural Rivets AASHTO M 228, Grade 2 (ASTM A 502, Grade 2).

712.1.9

High-Strength Bolts

Bolts, nuts circular washers shall conform to High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints, including Suitable Nuts and Plain Hardened Washer, AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325). High-strength bolts for structural steel joints including suitable nuts and plain hardened washers shall conform to either AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) or AASHTO M 253. When M 164 type 3 bolts are specified, they along with suitable nuts and washers shall have an atmospheric corrosion resistance approximately two times that of carbon steel with copper. Bolts and nuts manufactured to AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) are identified by proper marking as specified on the top of the bolt heads and on one face of the nuts for three different types. Bolts manufactured to AASHTO M 253 shall be identified by marking on the top of the head with the symbol A 490 and the nuts shall be marked on one face with the legend 2H or DH. Bolt and nut dimensions shall conform to the dimensions shown in Table 712.1 and to the requirements for Heavy Hexagon Structural Bolts and for Heavy Semi-Finished Hexagon Nuts given in ANSI Standard B 18.2.1 and B 18.2.2, respectively. Circular washers shall be flat and smooth and their nominal dimensions shall conform to the dimensions given in Table 712.2 except that for lock pin and collar fasteners, flat washers need not be used, unless slotted or oversized holes are specified. Bevelled washers for American Standard Beams and Channels or other sloping faces shall be required and shall be square or rectangular, shall taper in thickness, and shall conform to the dimensions given in Table 712.2. When necessary, washer may be clipped on one side to a point not closer than 0.875 (7/8) of the bolt diameter from the center of the washer. Other fasteners or fasteners assemblies which meet the Materials, Manufacturing, and Chemical Composition requirements of AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) or AASHTO M 253 and which meet the Mechanical Property requirements of the same specification in full-size tests and which have body diameter and bearing areas under the head and nut, or other equivalent, not less than those provided by a bolt and nut of the same nominal dimensions prescribed in the previous paragraph, may be used. Such alternate fasteners may differ in other dimensions from those of the specified bolts and nuts. Their installation procedure may differ from those specified in AASHTO Bridge Specification. Article 2.10.20 (D) and their inspection may differ from that specified in Article 2.10.20 (E). When a different installation procedure or inspection is used, it shall be detailed in a supplemental specification applying to the alternate fastener and that specification must be approved by the Engineer.

Subject to the approval of the Engineer, high strength steel lock-pin and collar fasteners may be used as an alternate for high strength bolts or rivets as shown on the Plans. The shank and head of the high strength steel lock-pin and collar fasteners shall meet the requirements of the preceding paragraph. Each fasteners shall provide a solid shank body of sufficient diameter to provide tensile and shear strength equivalent to or greater than the bolt or rivet specified, shall have a cold forged head on one end, of type and dimensions as approved by the Engineer, a shank length suitable for material thickness fastened, locking grooved, break neck groove and pull grooves (all annular grooves) on the opposite end. Each fasteners shall provide a steel locking collar of proper size for shank diameter used which by means of suitable installation tools, is cold swaged into the locking grooves forming a head for the grooved end of the fastener after the pull groove section has been removed. The steel locking collar shall be a standard product of an established manufacturer of lock-pin and collar fasteners, as approved by the Engineer. 712.1.10 Copper Bearing Steels When copper bearing steel is specified, the steel shall contain not less than 0.2 percent of copper.

712.2 Forgings Steel forgings shall conform to the specifications for Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for General Industrial Use, AASHTO M 102, (ASTM A 668, Classes C, D, F & G).

712.3 Pins and Rollers Pins and rollers more than 228.6 mm (9 inches) in diameter shall be annealed carbon-steel forgings conforming to AASHTO M 102, Class C1. Pins and rollers 228.6 mm (9 inches) or less in diameter shall be either annealed carbon-steel forgings conforming to AASHTO M 102 (ASTM A 668), Class C1 or cold finished carbon-steel shafting conforming to AASHTO M 169, grade 1016 to 1030 (ASTM A 108) inclusive, with a minimum Rockwell Scale B Hardness of 85. Material not meeting the specifications for hardness maybe accepted provided it develops a tensile strength of 482.3 MPa (70,000 psi) and a yield point of 248.04 MPa (36,000 psi). Threads for pins shall conform to the ANSI B1.1 Coarse Thread Series, Class 2A. Pin ends having a diameter of 35mm (1 3/8 inches) or more shall be threaded six threads to the inch.

Table 712.1 Nominal Bolt and Nut Dimensions

Heavy Hexagon Structural Bolts Nominal Bolt Size (Diameter) mm (inch) 12 (1/2) 15 (5/8) 18 (3/4) 21 (7/8) 25 (1) 28 (1-1/8) 31 (1-1/4) 34 (1-3/8) 37 (1-1/2) Dimensions in mm (inches) Width of Height Thread Head Across of Length Flats Head 21 (7/8) 7 (5/16) 25 (1) 26 (1-1/16) 9 (25/64) 31 (1-1/4) 31 (1-1/4) 11 (15/32) 34 (1-3/8) 35 (1-7/16) 13 (35/64) 37 (1-1/2) 40 (1-5/8) 15 (39/64) 43 (1-3/4) 45 (1-13/16) 17 (11/16) 50 (2) 50 (2) 19 (25/32) 50 (2) 54 (2-3/16) 21 (27/32) 56 (2-1/4) 59 (2-3/8) 23 (15/16) 56 (2-1/4) Heavy Semi-Finished Hexagonal Nuts Dimensions in mm (inches) Width Across Flats 21 (7/8) 26 (1-1/6) 31 (1-1/4) 35 (1-7/16) 40 (1-5/8) 45 (1-13/16) 50 (2) 54 (2-3-16) 59 (2-3/8)

Height 12 (31/64) 15 (39/64) 18 (47/64) 21 (55/64) 24 (63/64) 27 (1-7/64) 30 (1-7/32) 33 (1-11/32) 36 (1-15/32)

Table 712.2 Nominal Washer Dimensionsa

Circular Bolt Size Diameter mm (inch) 12 (1/2) 15 (5/8) 19 (3/4) 22 (7/8) 25 (1) 28 (1-1/8) 31 (1-1/4) 34 (1-3/8) 37 (1-1/2) 43 (1-3/4) 50 (2) Over 50 to 100 (2 to 4) incl.
a b c d

Square or Rectangular Washers for American Standard and Thickness Minimum Maximum 2 (0.177) 3 (0.122) 3 (0.122) 3 (0.136) 3 (0.136) 3 (0.136) 3 (0.136) 3 (0.136) 3 (0.136) C 4(0.178) 4 (0.178) d 6(0.24) 4 (0.177) 4 (0.177) 4 (0.177) 4 (0.177) 4 (0.177) 4 (0.177) 4 (0.177) 4 (0.177) 4 (0.177) c 7(0.28) 7 (0.28) d 8 (0.34) 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 7 (5/16) 7 (5/16) 7 (5/16) 7 (5/16) 7 (5/16) 7 (5/16) 7 (5/16) 7 (5/16) 7 (5/16) Slope Taper 40 (1.6) 40 (1.6) 40 (1.6) 40 (1.6) 40 (1.6) 40 (1.6) 40 (1.6) 40 (1.6) 40 (1.6)

Nominal Diameter of Hole mm 26 (1-1/16) 32 (1-5/16) 36 (1-15/32) 43 (1-3/4) 50 (2) 56 (2-1/4) 62 (2-1/2) 68 (2-3/4) 75 (3) 84 (3-3/8) 93 (3-3/4) 2D-12 (1/2) 13 (17/32) 16 (21/32) 20 (13/16) 23 (15/16) 26 (1-1/16) 31 (1-1/4) 34 (1-3/8) 37 (1-1/2) 40 (1-5/8) 46 (1-7/8) 53 (2-1/8) D+3 (1/8)

Dimensions in mm (inches) May be exceeded by 6 mm (1/4 inch) 4 mm (3/16 in) nominal 6 mm (1/4 in) nominal

712.4 Castings Castings shall conform to the requirements of the following Specifications: Steel castings for Highway Bridges-AASHTO M 192, Class 70 shall be furnished unless otherwise specified. Chromium Alloy Steel Castings-AASHTO M 163 (ASTM A 296), Grade CA-15 shall be furnished unless otherwise specified.

Gray Iron Castings AASHTO M 105 Class No. 30 shall be furnished unless otherwise specified. Iron castings shall be true to pattern in form and dimensions, free from pouring faults, sponginess, cracks, blow holes, and other defects in position affecting their strength and value for the service intended. Casting shall be boldly filleted at angles and the arises shall be sharp and perfect. All castings must be sandblasted or otherwise effectively cleaned of seals and sand so as to present a smooth, clean and uniform surface. Malleable Castings ASTM A 47. Grade No. 35018 shall be furnished unless otherwise specified. The requirements for workmanship, finishing, and cleaning shall be the same as above for gray iron castings.

712.5 Steel Grid Floors All steel for grid floors shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 183 or AASHTO M 222. Steel grid floors can be weathering steel, galvanized or painted. Unless the floors are of weathering steel or galvanized, the material shall have a minimum copper content of 0.2%. Unless painting of floors is specified in the Special Provisions, open type floors shall be galvanized.

712.6 Steel Pipe It shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 53, ASTM A 120. AASHTO M 222 and ASTM A 618, as shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions. Standard weight pipe shall be furnished unless otherwise shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.

712.7 Galvanized Metal When galvanized structural steel shapes, plates, bars and their products are specified, they shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO M 111.

712.8 Sheet Lead It shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B 29 for common desilverized lead. The sheets shall be of uniform thickness and shall be free from cracks, seams, slivers, scale and other defects. Unless otherwise specified, lead sheets shall be 3.8 mm (1/8 inch) in thickness with a permissible tolerance of 0.75 mm (0.03 inch) plus or minus.

712.9 Welded Stud Shear Connectors Shear connector studs shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 169 (ASTM A 108) for cold finished carbon steel bars and shafting, cold drawn bar, Grades 1015, 1018 or 1020, either semi-skilled or fully-skilled. If flux retaining caps are used, the steel for the caps shall be of a low carbon grade suitable for welding and shall comply with ASTM A 109 for cold rolled carbon steel strip. Tensile properties as determined by tests of bar stock after drawing or of finished studs shall conform to the following requirements: Tensile strength (minimum) Yield strength* (minimum) Elongation (minimum) Reduction in area (minimum) * As determined by 0.2 percent offset 413.4 MPa (60,000 psi) 344.5 MPs (50,000 psi) 20 percent in 50 mm (2 in) 50 percent method.

Tensile properties shall be determined in accordance with applicable sections of ASTM A 370 for mechanical testing of steel products. Tensile tests of finished studs shall be made on studs welded to test plates using a test fixture with dimensions similar to those shown in Table 712.3. In fracture occurs outside the middle half of the gage length, the test shall be repeated. Finished studs shall be of uniform quality and conditions, free from injurious laps, fins, seams, cracks, twists, bends or other injurious defects. Finish shall be produced by cold drawing, cold rolling or machining. The studs shall conform to the dimensions given in Table 712.3. The Contractor shall furnish the manufacturers certification that the studs as delivered are in accordance with the material requirements of this Item. Certified copies of in-plant quality control test reports shall be furnished to the Engineer upon request. Table 712.3 Welded Stud Shear Connector Standard Dimensions and Tolerances mm (inches) Shank Diameter (c) 19.05 + 0.00 (3/4) - 0.381 (-0.015) 22.23 + 0.000 (7/8) - 0.381 (-0.015) * Length* (L) 101.6 + 1.575 (+0.062) (4) 3.175 (-0.125) 101.6 + 1.575 (+.062) (4) 3.175 (-0.25) Diameter (H) 31.75 + 0.40 (1-1/4) (1/64) 34.93 0.40 (1-3/8) (1/64) Head Thickness (T) 9.53 (3/8) min. 9.53 (3/8) min.

Length includes thickness of head. Standard lengths is 101.6 mm (4 inches) but other lengths may be obtained by special order.

ITEM 713 TREATED AND UNTREATED TIMBER

713.1 General Requirements 713.1.1 Timber It shall be of the species specified on the Plans. Unless otherwise noted on the Plans or in the Special Provisions only the best grade shall be used. It shall be free from loose knots, splits, worn holes, decay, warp, ring separation or any defects which will impair its strength or render it unfit for its intended use. Any specie specified on the Plans may be used for untreated timber and if that specie is not available, a specie of equivalent strength and durability maybe used if authorized by the Engineer. If the timber is to be treated, only those species shall be used which are known to posses properties which make them favorable to treatment. 713.1.2 Paints When painting of timber is required, the paint shall conform to the requirements of Item 709, Paints. 713.1.3 Preservatives It shall be creosote oil or creosote-petroleum oil blend as called for on the Plans or by the Special Provisions and shall conform to the Specification for timber preservative of AASHTO M 133. When timber is intended for marine use, the creosote petroleum oil blend shall not be used.

713.2 Untreated Structural Timber and Lumber Structural timber, lumber and piling shall conform to the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 168 or equivalent. No boxed heart pieces of Douglas fir or redwood shall be used in outside stringers, floor beams, caps, posts, sills or rail posts. Boxed heart pieces are defined as timber so sawed that any point in the length of a sawed piece, the pith lies entirely inside the four faces. Yard lumber shall be of the kinds and grade called for on the Plans. poles and posts shall be of the kinds indicated on the Plans. Round

713.3 Treated Structural Timber and Lumber Structural timber, lumber and piling to be treated shall conform to the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 168 and M 133 or equivalent. The type of treatment to be used will be shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions and shall conform to the applicable requirements of AWPA standard C1 and C14 or equivalent.

ITEM 714 WATER 714.1 Description This Item covers criteria for acceptance of Questionable Water either natural or wash water for use in concrete. 714.2 Requirements The mixing water shall be clear and apparently clean. If it contains quantities or substances that discolor it or make it smell or taste unusual or objectionable, or cause suspicion, it shall not be used unless service records of concrete made with it (or other information) indicated that it is not injurious to the quality, shall be subject to the acceptance criteria as shown in Table 714.1 and Table 714.2 or as designated by the purchaser. When wash water is permitted, the producer will provide satisfactory proof or data of non-detrimental effects if potentially reactive aggregates are to be used. Use of wash water will be discontinued if undesirable reactions with admixtures or aggregates occur. Table 714.1 Acceptance Criteria For Questionable Water Supplies Limits Compressive strength, min. % Control at 7 days Time of Setting deviation from control Time of Setting (Gillmore Test) Initial Final Set Appearance Color Odor Total Solids PH value 90 from 1:00 earlier to 1:30 later No marked change No marked change Clear Colorless Odorless 500 parts/million max. 4.5 to 8.5

Table 714.2 Chemical Limitation for Wash Water Limits Chemical Requirements, Minimum Concentration Chloride as C1(-1) expressed as a mass percent of cement when added to the C1(-1) in the other components of the concrete mixtures shall not exceed the following levels:

1. Prestressed Concrete 2. Conventionally reinforced concrete in a moist environment and exposed to chloride 3. Conventionally reinforced concrete in a moist environment but not exposed to chloride 4. Above ground building construction where the concrete will stay dry Sulfate as SO4, ppmA Alkalies as (Na2O + 0.658 K2O), ppm Total Solids, ppm
A

0.06 percent

0.10 percent

0.15 percent No limit for corrosion 3000 600 50000

Wash water reused as mixing water in concrete may exceed the listed concentrations of sulfate if it can be shown that the concentration calculated in the total mixing water, including mixing water on the aggregate and other sources, does not exceed that stated limits.

Water will be tested in accordance with, and shall meet the suggested requirements of AASHTO T 26. Water known to be of potable quality may be used without test.

ITEM 715 GEOTEXTILES 715.1 Description This Item covers geotextile fabrics for use in subsurface drainage, hydraulic filter, erosion control, sediment control, pavement structures as a waterproofing and stress relieving membrane, and as a permeable separator to prevent mixing of dissimilar materials such as foundations and select fill materials. 715.2 Physical and Chemical Requirements Fibers used in the manufacture of geotextiles, and the threads used in joining geotextiles by sewing, shall consist of long-chain synthetic polymers, composed of at least 85 percent by mass polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamids. They shall be formed into a network such that the filaments or yarns rertain dimensional stability relative to each other, including selvedges. These materials shall conform to the physical requirements of Table 1 for the indicated application. Guidelines for the survivability levels referred to under Separation in Table 1 are included in Table 2. 715.3 Sampling and Testing The product shall be subject to sampling and testing. Sampling shall be done in accordance with ASTM D 4354 and testing procedures shall be in accordance with the methods given in Table 1.

715.4 Certification 715.4.1 Manufacturers Certificate

The manufacturer shall file with the purchaser a certificate stating the name of the manufacturer, the chemical composition of the filaments or yarns, and other pertinent information so as to fully describe the geotextile. The manufacturer shall include in the certificate a guarantee stating that the geotextile that is furnished meets the requirements of the specification. The certificate shall be attested to by a person having legal authority to bind the company. Either mismarking or misrepresentation by the manufacturer shall be reason to discontinue acceptance under these specifications. Notice sent to the manufacturer by the purchaser regarding the discontinuance of acceptance will be considered to be notice to all wholesalers, jobbers, distributors, agents and other intermediaries handling the manufacturers product. 715.5 Quality Control The geotextile manufacturer is responsible for establishing and maintaining a quality control program so as to assure compliance with the requirements of this specification. 715.6 Shipment and Storage 715.6.1 During periods of shipment and storage, the fabric shall be protected from direct sunlight, ultra-violet rays, temperatures greater than 600C (1400F), mud, dust, and debris. To the extent possible, the fabric shall be maintained wrapped in a heavy-duty protective covering. Each shipping document shall include a notation certifying that the geotextile is in accordance with the manufacturers certificate and guarantee previously filed with the purchaser. 715.6.2 Product Marking

Label the fabric and its container with the manufacturers name fabric type or trade name, lot number and quantity. 715.7 Installation 715.7.1 Separation Geotextile The geotextile shall be unrolled as smoothly as possible on the prepared subgrade in the direction of construction traffic. Adjacent geotextile rolls shall be overlapped in the direction of subbase placement using the guidelines in Table 3. Sewing is recommended where subgrade soils have a CBR value less than 1. The geotextile maybe held in place prior to subbase placement by pins, staples, or piles of fill or rock. On curves, the geotextile maybe folded or cut to conform to the curve. The fold or overlap shall be in the direction of construction and held in place as prescribed above.

715.7.2 Drainage Geotextile In trenches, after placing the backfill material, the geotextile shall be folded over the top of the filter material to produce a minimum overlap of 12 inches for trenches greater than 12 inches wide. In trenches less than 12 inches in width, the overlap shall be equal to the width of the trench. The geotextile shall then be covered with the subsequent course. Successive sheets of geotextile shall be overlapped a minimum of 12 inches in the direction of flow. 715.7.3 Erosion Control Geotextile The geotextile shall be placed and anchored on a smooth graded surface approved by the Engineer. The geotextile shall be placed in such a manner that placement of the overlying materials will not excessively stretch or tear the fabric. Anchoring of the terminal ends of the geotextile shall be accomplished through the use of key trenches or aprons at the crest and toe of slope. In certain applications to expedite construction, 18 inches long anchoring pins placed on 2 to 6 feet centers depending on the slope of the covered area have been used successfully. 715.7.4 Paving Fabric The fabric shall be placed into the asphalt sealant with minimum wrinkling prior to the time the asphalt has cooled and lost tackiness. As directed by the Engineer, wrinklers or folds in excess of 1 inch shall be slit and laid flat. Brooming and/or pneumatic rolling will be required to maximize fabric contact with the pavement surface. Overlap of fabric joints shall be sufficient to ensure full closure of the joint, but should not exceed 6 inches. Transverse joints shall be lapped in the direction of paving to prevent edge pickup by the paver. A second application of asphalt sealant to fabric overlaps will be required if in the judgment of the Engineer additional asphalt sealant is needed to ensure proper bonding of the double fabric layer. 715.7.5 Geotextile Silt Fence Fence construction shall be adequate to handle stress from sediment loading. Geotextile at the bottom of the fence shall be buried a minimum of 6 inches in a trench so that no flow can pass under the barrier. The trench shall be backfilled and the soil compacted over the geotextile. Fence height shall be as specified by the Engineer but in no case shall exceed 36 inches above ground surface. The geotextile shall be spliced together only at a support post with a minimum 6 inches overlap. 715.7.6 Hydraulic Filter The geotextile shall be laid lengthwise down slopes and appropriately anchored along the top edge. Installation horizontally along slopes will not be accepted. Overlaps shall be sufficient to prevent parting of laps during the initial construction or fill stage. On soft soil subgrades the overlap shall not be less than 400 mm. Alternatively the geotextile shall be sawn using a double-stitch portable sewing machine and appropriate thread.

715.8 Method of Measurement 715.8.1 The geotextile shall be measured by the number of square meters from the pavement lines shown on the plans, or from the pavement lines established in writing by the Engineer. 715.8.2 Temporary silt fence will be measured in linear meter. 715.8.3 Removed sediment will be measured by the cubic meter. 715.8.4 Excavation, backfill, bedding, and cover material are separate pay items.

Table 2 Construction Survivability Levels Site Soil CBR Installation <1 1-2 >2

Equipment Ground Contract Pressure (KPa) Cover Thickness (mm)1 (Compacted) 1022,3 152 305 457 H M NR
1 2 3

>345 <345

>345 <345

>345 <345

NR NR NR H

NR NR H M

H H M M

H M M M

M M M M

M M M M

= = =

High Medium Not recommended

Maximum aggregate size not to exceed one-half the compacted cover thickness For low volume unpaved road (ADT<200 vehicles) The 102 mm minimum cover is limited to existing road bases intended for use in new construction Table 3 Soil Strength (CBR) Less than 1 1-2 2-3 3 and above Recommended Overlaps Overlap Unsewn (mm) 965 762 610 Overlap (mm) 229 203 76 -

715.9 Basis of Payment The quantities determined as provided above shall be paid for at the contract price per unit of measurement, respectively, for each pay item listed below. Payment shall be made under : Pay Item Separation Geotextile Drainage Geotextile Paving Fabric Hydraulic Filter Silt Fence Removing Sediment Pay Unit Square Meter Square Meter Square Meter Square Meter Linear Meter Cubic Meter

Table 1 Physical Rtequirement1,.1A A P P L I C A T I O N Sediment Control Erosion Control2 Wire Fence Supported 4002 SelfSupported

Subsurface Drainage2 Property Unit Test Method Class A3 Class B4

Hydraulic Filter Paving2,11

Separation

Class A9

Class B10

Unprotected

Protected

Grab Tensile Length Elongation

N Percent

ASTM D 4632 ASTM D 1682 ASTM D 4632 ASTM D 1682 ASTM D 4632 ASTM D 4833 ASTM D 751-79 ASTM D 3786 ASTM D 751-79 ASTM D 4533 ASTM D 1117 ASTM D 4491

800 -

355 -

4002 50% Max. @ 200 N -

890 15

400 15

785 353

353 108

355 50% @ Break -

High Survivability Level 1200/800 50 % 50 percent12 1067/710 445/335

Medium Survivability Level 800/510 50 % 50 percent12 710/465 310/175

Seam Strength5 Puncture Strength Burst Strength Trapezoid Tear Permeability6 (K)

N N

710 355

310 110

800 355

355 175

KPa N cm/sec

2000 220 K Fabric K Soil Notes 7 & 7A 70 @150 h -

900 110 K Fabric K Soil Notes 7 & 7A 70 @150 h -

2220 220 K Fabric K Soil Notes 7 & 7A 70 @150 h -

965 2000 130 K Fabric K Soil Notes 7 & 7A 70 @150 h 216 108 900

445/335 K Fabric K Soil Notes 7 & 7A 70 @150 h -

310/175 K Fabric K Soil Notes 7 & 7A 70 @150 h -

Apparent Opening Size (AOS) Permitivity Ultraviolet Degradation Asphalt Retention Melting Point

(US Std.) Sec.-1 (Percent Retained Strength) L/m2

o

ASTM D 4751

.848 Max .012,8 70 @150 h -

.848 Max .012,8 70 @150 h -

ASTM D 4491 ASTM D 4355

Appendix XI ASTM D 276

0.9 150

421

Legend:
1

Acceptance of geotextile material is to be based on ASTM D 4759, Standard Practice for determining the Specification Conformance Geotextiles Contracting Agency may require a letter from the supplier certifying that its geotextile meets specification requirements. Minimum Use value in weaker principal direction. All numerical values represent minimum average roll value (i.e. test results from any sampled roll in a lot shall meet or exceed the minimum values in the table). Stated values are for non-critical, non-severe conditions. Lot sampled according to ASTM D 4354. Class A Drainage applications for fabrics are where installation stresses are more severe than Class B applications, i.e. very coarse, sharp, angular aggregate is used, heavy degree of compaction (greater than 95 percent AASHTO T 99) is specified, or depth of trench is greater than 3 meters. Class B Drainage applications are those where fabric is used with smooth graded surfaces having no sharp angular projections, no sharp angular aggregate is used, compaction requirements are light (less than 95 percent AASHTO T 99) and trenches are less than 3 meters in depth. Values apply to both field and manufactured seams. See Table 3 for Recommended overlaps. A nominal coefficient of permeability maybe determined by multiplying permitivity value by nominal thickness. The K value of the fabric should be greater than the K value of the soil. Soil with 50 percent or less particles by mass passing 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve, AOS less than 0.6 mm (greater than 0.600 mm (No. 30) sieve. Soil with more than 50 percent by mass passing 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve. AOS less than 0.297 mm (greater than 0.300 mm (No. 50) sieve. Permitivity & Apparent Opening Size (AOS) do not relate directly to filtration performance of silt fence fabrics. Value presented reflect minimum criteria of products currently used. Performance tests such as VTM-51 (from Virginia Highway Research Council) maybe used to evaluate silt fence performance if deemed necessary by the Engineer. Class A Erosion Control applications are those where fabrics are used under conditions where installation stresses are more severe than Class B, i.e. stone placement height should be less than 0.9 m and stone mass should not exceed 113.5 kg. Class B Erosion Control applications are those where fabric is used in structure or under conditions where the fabric is protected by a sand cushion or by zero drop height placement of stone. This specification is applicable to fabric membranes used for full coverage of the payment, or as strips over transverse and longitudinal pavementjoints. It is not intended to describe membrane systems specifically designed for pavement joints and localized (spot) repairs. Values of geotextile elongation do not imply the allowable consolidation properties of the subgrade soil they must be determined by a separate investigation, but are intended to show that for fabrics with percent elongation less than 50 percent, a higher strength is required.

1A

7A

10

11

12

422